Specification For Park City-clubhouse-Rev 0

PROPOSED PARKCITY HANOI CLUBHOUSE AT LE TRONG TAN
STREET, HANOI, VIETNAM
Mechanical & Electrical Installation

Specification and Drawings
March 2015
THAM & WONG M&E (VIETNAM) CO., LTD

No.6, 2nd alley, Pham Tuan Tai street, Cau Giay District, Hanoi
Tel: +84 43748 0327
Fax: +84 43755 8903
PARKCITY
Clubhouse Facilities ParkCity at Le Trong Tan Ha Noi, Viet Nam

Mechanical & Electrical Specification Rev 0
CONTENTS
Page
1.0
PROJECT TEAM ......................................................................................................................... 3
2.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 4
3.0
SCOPE OF WORK ....................................................................................................................22
4.0
RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR.................................................................................27
5.0
ELECTRICAL SERVICES .........................................................................................................29
6.0
AIR-CONDITIONING & MECHANICAL VENTILATION SERVICES .....................................142
7.0
PLUMBING & SANITARY.......................................................................................................191
8.0
FIRE PROTECTION SERVICES .............................................................................................212
9.0
SWIMMING POOL SERVICES ...............................................................................................242
10.0
SCHEDULE OF UNIT RATE ...................................................................................................258
11.0
SCHEDULES OF TECHNICAL DATA....................................................................................310
12.0
SCHEDULE OF SUB-CONTRACTOR ...................................................................................331
Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)
Page 2
PARKCITY
1.0

Project Team
Owner
Vietnam International Township Development

(Parkcity)
No.8, Quang Trung Road, Ha Dong - Hanoi, Vietnam
Tel
+84 4 3355 3366
Fax
+84 4 3355 3365
Architect
Archicentre (Vietnam) Co.,Ltd.

31 Phan Boi Chau Street, Ward 14, Binh Thanh District
Ho Chi Minh City, Viet Nam
Tel:
+603 5633 2455 / +84 83841 3883
Fax:
+603 5633 8213 / +84 83841 8516
Structural & Civil engineer
Tham & Wong VN Co.,Ltd.

th
4 Floor, Packsimex Building, No.52 Dong Du, District 1
Ho Chi Minh City, Viet Nam
Tel:
+84 8 3821 7737
Fax:
+84 8 3821 7736
M&E Consulting Engineer
Tham & Wong M&E (Vietnam) Co.,Ltd.

nd
No.06, 2 Alley, Pham Tuan Tai street, Cau Giay District
Ha Noi, Viet Nam
Tel:
+84 43748 0327
Fax:
+84 43755 8903
Landscape Designer
Site Concepts International (Vietnam) Company Limited

Landscape Architecture
9th Floor WMC Tower, 102 A-B-C Cong Quynh Street,
Pham Ngu Lao Ward, District 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam.
Tel:
(84) 8 3920 9895
Jsc
Page 3
PARKCITY
2.0

General Requirements
2.1 General
This Specification describes the standards, performance, materials, manufacture, supply,
installation, testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance of all systems described in
this document and shown on the Drawings.
The intent of the Contract is to provide for the completion in every detail of the Contract
Works, and unless otherwise stated, the Contractor shall furnish all labour, superintendence,
materials, tools, equipment, storage, permits, certificates, drawings, temporary work,
inspection, testing and all accessories, auxiliaries and incidentals necessary to complete the
Contract Works in a proper, safe, thorough and skilful manner to the satisfaction of the
Employer/Engineer.
2.2
Site of the Contract Works

The site is located as shown on the Tender Drawings.
2.3
Climatic Conditions
The Contractor is deemed to be familiar with climatic conditions prevailing in Vietnam and to
0
be aware of the high temperature (up to 40 C) and the high relative humidity.
The Contractor in submitting a tender will be assumed to warrant that all materials and items
of equipment are suitable for continued use and/or operation in the various climatic conditions
encountered.
2.4
Standards
The Contract Works shall fully comply with all statutory obligations and regulations together
with any amendments made thereto as required.
The Contractor shall arrange for all submissions, liaisons and pay the cost of all statutory
inspections and certificates. The payment to the Authorities shall be paid well in advance so
as to meet with the construction programme.
Where applicable, the Installation shall comply with the statutory obligations and regulations
and consistent with good practice in Singapore to satisfy the Engineers requirements.
Singapore Code of Practices;

British Standards Institution or other approved international standards;
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers;
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute;
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers;
The Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings published by the Institution
of Electrical Engineers (London);
Environmental Protection Department;
Pollution Control and Drainage Act and Regulations;
Environmental Public Health Act and Regulations and Codes;
Building Control Act and Regulations;
Fire Safety Act and Regulations;
Factories Act and Regulations;
Public Utilities Act and Regulations;
Fire Precautions for Building;
Handbook on Energy Conservation in Building and Building Services;
Handbook on Application for Electricity Supply;
Code of Practice for Info-Communications Facilities in Buildings;
Page 4
PARKCITY

NPQS
Any other local authority having jurisdiction; and
All other requirements from Authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
Viet Nam Standard
The work shall be carried out by a registered Licensed Worker approved by the relevant
authority for each particular category of work. The Contractor shall submit for approval the
following within one month of award of Contract for approval:
Licensed Water Service Plumber
Sanitary/Sewerage Registered Licensed Plumber
Licensed Electrical Worker
Where the materials or equipment offered comply with other standards, the
Contractor shall demonstrate they meet the requirements of the Specification and details shall
be provided to the Architect for approval.
The Contractor shall provide and perform all necessary inspections and maintain quality and
workmanship in his works to ensure compliance with the Specification.
2.5
Building Provisions
Certain provisions will be made in the existing Building for the accommodation of the Contract
Works. These provisions shall include space allocation, holes / openings through structural
slabs, walls and beams, plant bases, inserts etc. The modified building layout incorporating
basic M&E Installations are shown in the tender Documents.
The Contractor shall provide comprehensive builders work requirements for approval prior to
the execution of works. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to ensure that all the
required holes/openings and inserts and their setting out dimensions are incorporated in the
structure prior to the formation of openings. Where additional holes/openings are required
after concrete has been poured, such holes shall be provided at the Contractors expense,
unless they are covered on a duly authorized basis by the Employer on an instruction issued
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also be responsible to ensure that these holes are
correctly reserved and protected during construction. The floor and wall openings shall be
provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall take the responsibility to ensure the opening
is technically sound and approved by their employed structural engineers if necessary.
Infill and repairs around openings in the building structure for the passage of building services
shall be carried out by the Contractor. Where pipes and services pass through walls, floors,
etc.(including floors in ducts), the Contractor shall provide pipe sleeves and in fill between the
sleeves and pipe/services.
Concrete bases and/or foundations required for the support or anchoring of equipment shall
be provided by the Contractor except where otherwise specified. The Contractor shall provide
the dimensions and locations for all bases to be provided or set in the structure. The
Contractor shall furnish the bolts to the Builder for setting the bolts in position. Anchor bolts in
concrete bases shall be securely fixed in position before concrete is poured. Templates shall
be furnished by the Contractor.
All structural and supporting steelwork required for the installation of the Contract Works shall
be supplied and fixed by the Contractor, except otherwise specified.
Page 5
PARKCITY
2.6

Limited Access
The Contractor shall note the limited access available in ceilings, pipe and duct shafts.
All cables busbars, duct work and pipework should be installed in the correct sequence to
ensure that all services shall be accommodated. Where works by other trades are to occupy
the same pipe and duct space, care must be taken to leave clear access for sequential or
future provision of these services within builders work shafts, plant rooms and false ceilings,
etc.
2.7
Co-ordination Between Trades

The acquisition and checking of all documents and drawings from the Engineer to be provided
under the Contract and to ensure the compatible integration of all the work. Such coordination shall include recommending to the Engineer for approval design solutions to
eliminate any conflict between elements of the work, and to provide adequate space between
elements of the work for subsequent maintenance of the various installations in accordance
with good practice.
All checking, co-ordination and where necessary proposal to overcome conflicts in
accordance with the above shall be executed well in advance of the programme for carrying
out the works.
The provision of co-ordinated working drawings incorporating all design solutions approved by
the Engineer and showing the integration of all services to be executed by the Contractor.
The establishment of a detailed sequence of work to enable the expeditious completion of the
Works. The Contractor shall closely monitor the work progress and conflicts resolved in an
expeditious manner.
Liaison and co-ordination of works upon receipt of site instruction by the Engineer throughout
the duration of the Contract.
Co-ordination of government submission, testing and inspection of various building services
works in a timely manner to comply with building construction programme and building
occupation requirements.
Liaison and co-ordination regarding training requirements to be provided to the Employer and
handing over of the building services systems. Particular emphasis shall be given to the coordination of testing of various building services systems which require interface between
different Contracts. Testing and commissioning shall be carried out within the Contract
Period and only by agreement will the Engineer allow certain tests to be carried out within the
Defects Liability Period.
Receipt of lists of defects/outstanding work and liaise with the Builder for the rectification of
defects within the Defects Liability Period. Co-ordination is deemed to include liaison for
access and the ensure that rectification work is carried out in a expeditious manner.
2.8
Metric Units
The Contractor shall provide all information, drawings, manufacturers data and materials in
metric (S.I.) units and dimensions or include a conversion table which must be printed on or
within data sheets produced by the manufacturers.
Separate locally produced, e.g. duplicated typed conversions or conversion tables within the
written offer will not be acceptable.
2.9
Notations
Page 6
PARKCITY

Notations and symbols used throughout the tender documents area as listed on the
abbreviations and symbols sheet of the Drawings.
All other notations used shall have their normally accepted meaning and where any doubt or
ambiguity is found, then the Contractor must seek clarification in writing form the Engineer at
the time of tender
2.10
Submissions
Unless otherwise stated, all submissions to the Engineer for approval must be made at the
times stated in the various Sections of this Specification. For material/ equipment submission,
detail form of submission information and statement of compliance with this specification shall
be provided for checking.
All submissions must be made early enough in the Contract to enable the Engineer to fully
check each item prior to giving approval. The Contractor shall ensure that submissions are
made at least two months before any equipment is required to be ordered to meet the
Builders contracts construction programme.
The Contractor shall supply full drawings of all equipment to a scale suitable for the fullest
understanding by the Engineer of the design details but in any event not less than a scale of
1:50, within the time required by the Engineer that they may be incorporated into other
elements of works and as instructed by the Engineer, together with the fullest particulars and
details of positions where power for any elements is required.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the works are carried out in strict
accordance with the distributed working drawings.
A schedule of submissions for individual, working drawings and equipment shall be submitted
for checking within one week after award of Contract.
Drawings showing locations of structural openings for services shall be submitted for
consideration at least one month prior to erection of formwork or reinforcement at the affected
area.
No claims for extensions of time or additional costs shall be entertained as a result of the
Contractors failure to make submissions in adequate time.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractors failure to make his submissions in adequate
time may result in a delay in the completion of the project as a whole, then the Engineer shall
have the authority to instruct the Contractor to order materials and or equipment from a
source approved and nominated by the Engineer at no increase to the Contract Sum.
If the Contractor subsequently fails to place such orders within a period of two weeks from
receipt of the Engineers instruction, then the Employer shall have the right at his sole
discretion to order the materials and/or equipment directly from the manufacturer(s). The cost
of all such orders, including freight, shipping, insurance, handling and administrative charges
shall be deducted from the Contract Sum or recovered in any other method at the discretion
of the Employer.
The Contractor shall on request, or where specified elsewhere, submit to the Engineer
samples of materials and/or workmanship. Such samples shall be approved in writing before
the appropriate equipment or installation work is carried out.
Such samples shall be retained by the Engineer as the criteria of the workmanship or material
to be supplied and any items not so complying may forthwith be rejected by the Engineer and
shall be replaced by the Contractor without increase to the Contract Sum.
Page 7
PARKCITY
2.11

Sizes of Plant and Equipment

The Contractor shall be required to demonstrate that the duties required of the equipment by
the Specification are attainable by the Contractors proposed plant or equipment.
Physical sizes of all plant and equipment are to be suitable for the spaces allocated for the
accommodation of such plant and equipment, taking into account the requirement of access
for maintenance purposes.
Before ordering equipment, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with full details of the
weights of the equipment for purposes of determining floor loadings, etc.
2.12
Makes and Types of Equipment

The Contract has been drawn up in such a manner as to allow firms tendering to submit
proposals incorporating their particular types of equipment and installation techniques while at
the same time ensuring that that building services comply fully with the basic requirements
and fit into the Building, having regard to the Engineering and planning requirements and to
the provisions which are being arranged in the structure for the accommodation of the
Contract Works.
The Employer reserves the right to reject any tender which disregards the basic requirements
or intentions of this Contract, or which seeks to vary the scope of the Contract Works, the
Contract Conditions or any other requirements of the Tender Documents.
In selecting makes and types of equipment, the Contractor shall ascertain that facilities for
proper maintenance, repair and replacement can be provided without such a delay as could
cause inconvenience or loss to the Employer.
2.13
Working Drawings
The Contractor is to note that the contract Drawings issued for the installation indicated the
general design intent. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and coordinating his working drawings with the services installations of other trades and with the
fabric and the building structure, and for co-ordinating working drawings to facilitate coordination of the installation of all services in the correct sequence and position. All working
drawings must be submitted to the Engineer and his confirmation must be obtained that such
drawings comply with design intent prior to execution of the respective building services
installation works. Co-ordination working drawings shall be submitted at the same time as the
individual services working drawings to allow the Engineer to satisfy himself that co-ordination
of the Works has been implemented.
These drawings shall be based on the Contract Drawings and shall take into account any
modification either to the Building or to the installation which may have taken place during the
course of the works and shall be correctly related to the details of the actual items of plant
and equipment installed.
The Contractor shall prepare all equipment schedules and all necessary wiring diagrams,
including internal wiring diagrams for items of electrical equipment and diagrams showing the
interconnections and interface between different equipment and services.
Five copies of all such drawings, schedules, diagrams, shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval before any work is commenced. After receiving written approval, six copies of all
stamped approved drawings, schedules, shall be supplied by the Contractor, free of charge,
for distribution.
The Contractor is to allow in his programme for amendment and/or resubmission of drawings
and schedules to the Engineer and this time shall include the periods necessary for coordinating with the Builder and other Contractors for the preparation of the aforesaid drawings
Page 8
PARKCITY

and schedules and periods required by the Engineer for checking same. The Engineer shall
endeavour to reply to the contractors Submissions within in a period of 2 weeks.
No claim will be entertained nor extension of time be granted arising out of any amendment or
resubmission required.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for updating the installation drawings based on any
changes to the general plans which may from time to time be required.
Checking of working drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the technical, dimensional and co-ordination content of these working
drawings, in accordance with the Engineers design drawings and specification and in
observation of all relevant standards, codes and ordinances whether referred to in the
specification or of a statutory nature.
2.14
Builders Work Drawings

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval and subsequent distribution showing
details for all builders work required in connection with installation of all services.
In case where preliminary builders work information has already been given on the Drawings,
such information is to be checked and verified by the Contractor for incorporation in his own
drawings.
It is the intention that all holes, inserts and chases, shall be incorporated within the structural
work as it proceeds and not cut out subsequently, except in so far as may be necessary due
to subsequent authorized variations to the Contract Works.
The Contractor shall acquaint himself throughout the period of the Builder Works with the
Builders detailed construction programme and shall prepare the builders work drawings in
such order and at such times as to enable them to be checked and approved and
subsequently issued to the Builder not less than four weeks before the actual construction is
planned to take place.
No claims will be entertained in respect to additional holes, inserts and chases, that may be
required after the structure has been erected unless these are necessary due to authorized
variations to the Contract Works.
2.15
Maintenance and Operation Manual

Prior to the issuance of the Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall submit in triplicate full
operation and service and maintenance manuals for the complete installation.
These manuals shall be typed on good quality paper and neatly bound into a manual having
rigid covers with good lettering, giving the names of the Employer, Project and M&E Contract
and approximate date of completion. A sample shall be submitted to the Architect for
approval before final submission.
Page 9
PARKCITY

The manuals shall contain and be set out as follows :

Section 1
Maintenance Personnel
List to include name, address, fax and telephone number for normal and
emergency use separately.
Section 2
System Summary & General Description & Operating Instruction

Each system, separately, shall commence with the relevant Design Criteria,
comprehensive functional description of equipment.
Instructions for operating each items of plant, including adjustment of
controls, etc
Section 3
Emergency/Re-Start Instructions
Each items of plant to be listed in the same order as for Section 2.
Instructions to procedures after a fault, and for Plant production.
Section 4
Equipment List & Schedules & Manufacturers Literatures & Spare Parts
Include manufacturers' and suppliers' contact and serial numbers.
Literature clearly designating the relevant item(s) of equipment, including
detailed specification. Order as per Section 2, each with its own sub-file
divider. Catalogue listing, including source of supply.
Section 5
Maintenance Schedules & Maintenance Instructions

Proforma copy detailed schedules of periodic checks and maintenance and
replacement procedures.
Include description of each items of equipment or component in order as per
Section 2 listing, and with a complete phases and procedures preventative
maintenance.
Section 6
Commissioning Data
Include schedule of control and cut-out settings, copies of test certificates
and progressive test data obtained during construction and installation.
Section 7
Guarantee, Liabilities, Warranties
Section 8
Drawings
List all working drawings produced for the works.
Note:
2.16
In order that each set of volumes for each of the M&E installations are uniform, where
one of these sections is not relevant to a particular Service, the Contractor shall note
against that section in the main index: "Not Applicable".
As-Built Drawings
Upon completion of the M&E Contract Works and as a condition precedent to the certification
that the work is complete, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer one set of reproducible
Page 10
PARKCITY

transparencies and two sets of prints and one set of electronic files in CD Rom and in such
detail as to enable the employer to maintain, dismantle, reassemble and adjust all parts of the
M&E Contract Works. The As-built drawings must be drawn in a format that is suitable for
submission to all relevant Authorities and FSB in particular.
a)
As-built drawings may be folded and accommodated in the Operating and

Maintenance Manual if appropriate.
b)
As-built drawings should include a diagrammatic layout of the complete installation

with major items of plant suitably referenced to the schedules and combined services
drawing.
c)
A set of the as-built drawings should be provided for each copy of the Operating &
Maintenance Manual required to be provided. In addition, one set of AutoCAD soft
copy burned in CD-ROM/DVD should be provided.
The as-built drawings shall comprise the following:A)
Electrical Installation
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B)
Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation Installation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C)
Lighting layout plan and lighting control layout plan (including surface and
concealed cable, trunking/conduit routes on floor, wall and ceiling).
Power layout plan (same as above).
Telephone layout plan (same as above).
Data outlet layout plan (same as above).
Security layout plan (same as above).
Main single line diagram.
Switchboards, sub-switchboards, distribution boards, consumer units single
line diagram, general arrangement.
Schematic diagram for various systems like Telephone System, Cable TV
System, Security System, Audio / Video Colour Intercom System, etc.
Technical data/equipment schedule and brand of all A/C equipment and MV

fans.
A/C layout plan include any concealed pipings and conduits clearly
demarketed on plan and elevation. The cooling capacity of each system/
outlet to be indicated.
MV layout showing ductwork sizes, air quantity, guide-vane control and
accessories.
Control panels location, size and circuit diagrams.
Details of all equipment, model and capacity.
Schematic diagram.
Operational procedure of selected equipment clearly indicated.
Sanitary and Drainage Installation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Inspection chamber c/w pipework connection and gradient, all invert and top
levels indicated.
Sanitary pipework layout plan, including sump pump detail (if any)
All models of sanitary fittings: wc, basin, sink, shower, tap, etc.
Soil waste pipe and vent pipe riser duct details.
Schematic diagram of sanitary installation.
Catalogues of all sanitary wares (where applicable), pipes and pipe-fittings.
Operational procedure of selected equipment clearly indicating the model and
capacity.
Page 11
PARKCITY
9.
D)
connection and gradient, all invert & top levels
Water Supply Installation

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.17
Manhole c/w pipework

indicated

Water reticulation layout plans.

Detail for Water meter kiosk layout, pump and tank
Schematic diagram.of Cold and Hot water supply systems
Operation procedure of pump, electric water storage heaters.
Valve chamber c/w pipe work connection, all invert & top levels
Detail of bulk water meter c/w valve chamber
As-new Condition
At the time of hand over of the Contract Works, the whole installation shall be in as-new
condition. The Contractor shall, during the course of the Contract, protect all plant and
equipment, and shall restore/repaint as necessary before completion of the Contract.
2.18
Guarantee
The Contractor in providing a specified piece of equipment or apparatus, whether specified
herein by name or whether of a make selected by the Contractor, shall be deemed to warrant
its satisfactory performance under all working conditions which may be encountered.
Unless otherwise stated in this Specification, the Contractors guarantee for the Contract
Works shall extend for a period of one year from the expiration of the Defects Liability Period
or the date of issue of the Certificate of Making Good Defects whichever is the later for the
Contract Works.
In the event that any manufacturers guarantees are still within their term of validity at the end
of the Guarantee Period, then all such manufacturers guarantees shall be assigned to the
Employer.
All subsequent rights under the manufacturers guarantees shall be the
Employers.
In the event of anything described in the Specification or shown in the Drawings being, in the
Contractors opinion, unsuitable or inconsistent with his guarantee or responsibilities, the
Contractor shall draw attention to such items at the time of tendering.
Neither the time limit imposed on the Contractors guarantee, nor the Certificate of Making
Good Defects issued by the Engineer, nor the acceptance of the installation by the Employer,
nor the approval by the Engineer of any material or method shall in any way absolve the
Contractor from his responsibility for any latent defects in the Contract Works which may
become apparent in the future and which are, in the opinion of the Engineer, due to the
Contractors failure to use materials and methods complying to this Specification and
Drawings.
2.19
Materials and Workmanship

All materials supplied and work carried out shall be the best of their respective kinds and to
the approval of the Engineer. All materials and work shall comply with British Standards
where available.
No substitution for approved materials will be permitted except by permission of the Engineer
in writing. Any cost savings which result from such substitution shall be credited in full to the
Employer. Any extra costs incurred shall be borne in full by the Contractor.
Page 12
PARKCITY

The phase or other Approved is deemed to be included whenever materials are specified by
proprietary name. Materials of different manufacture but of equal quality may be substituted if
prior Approval has been obtained but the rates and prices will not be changed from those
submitted at the time of tender.
The standard of equal quality, together with consideration of design suitability and
appearance, will be strictly applied and the Contractor will be required to pay for independent
testing to demonstrate equal quality prior to seeking Approval for any alternative to the
proprietary brand specified.
Where a choice of manufacturer is permitted for any material, advise the Engineer of that
choice early enough to allow deliveries to be arranged in compliance with the construction
programme. No change in the source of supply will be approved after deliveries have
commenced.
2.20
Rejection of Unsuitable Materials

The Engineer shall be at liberty to reject any plant, materials and workmanship not complying
with the requirements of this Specification or which are in any way unsuitable and to order
their removal and replacement, without increase to the Contract Sum.
The Engineers decision as to what constitutes compliance with requirements and suitability
shall be final and binding; the true intent and meaning of the Contract being that the whole of
the Contract Works shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
No rejected item shall be considered as a reason for failure to meet the completion date of the
project.
2.21
Packing and Protection

All plant, equipment, apparatus, materials and parts shall be delivered to the Site in a new
condition, properly packed and protected against damage due to handling, adverse weather
or other circumstances, and as far as practicable, they shall be kept in the packing cases or
under protective coverings until required for use.
Any items suffering damage in transit or on the Site shall be rejected and replaced without
extra cost to the Employer.
No item so rejected will be considered as a reason for failure to meet the completion date of
the project.
2.22
Vesting of Plant and Equipment

The Contractor shall take reasonable measures to avoid damage, loss, etc., of material, plant
or equipment to be incorporated in the completed Building during the progress of the Works.
2.23
Samples
The Contractor shall on request or where specified elsewhere submit to the Engineer samples
of materials and/or workmanship and such samples shall be approved in writing before the
appropriate equipment or installation work is carried out.
Such samples are subsequently to be retained by the Engineer as the criteria of the standard
of the workmanship or material to be supplied and any items not so complying may forthwith
be rejected by the Engineer and shall be replaced by the Contractor without increase to the
Contract Sum.
Page 13
PARKCITY
2.24

Silence of Operation
The Contract Works as installed shall be reasonably silent in operation having regard to the
conditions under and locations in which they will be called upon to operate.
The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure that the equipment supplied by him is
silent as specified and shall include for such sound absorbing, or anti-vibration, material or
devices as are necessary to ensure a satisfactory degree of silence and absence of vibration
in the structure of the Building.
The Engineers decision as to what constitutes satisfaction in this respect shall be final.
If on completion the system is not, in the Engineers opinion, sufficiently silent, the Contractor
shall, without additional charge, carry out such modifications or additions as may be required,
until the system is made silent to the Engineers satisfaction.
Octave band sound pressure levels in the various areas within the building and at certain
positions outside the building due to the operation of the equipment included in this Contract
shall not exceed the noise level ratings as set down from Government Authorities.
2.25
Storage and Delivery of Equipment

The Contractor shall, arrange storage and delivery of the equipment to suit the progress of
the Works.
Storage areas and siting together with routing to and from such storage areas of heavy
equipment on Site in relation to structural loading restriction shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
2.26
Contractors Programme
The Contractor shall provide a bar chart programme giving realistic schedules or working
periods to conform to the construction Programme for the Contract Works.
The bar chart programme shall indicate how the various activities will be scheduled in order to
complete the Contract Works within the Contract Period.
Activities included in the Contractors programme shall take account of, without limitation, the
following :
Submission for approval of all equipment;
Ordering of equipment;
Manufacture of equipment;
Delivery of equipment;
Installation of equipment and plants;
Submission to and inspection by Authorities;
Testing, balancing and commissioning;
Submission of As Installed Drawings, operating, Maintenance Manuals and

maintenance programme.
The above list is indicative but not exhaustive of all factors required.
Page 14
PARKCITY
2.27

Origin of Materials
The Contractor shall produce documentary evidence to verify the place of origin for the
materials delivered to site or installed. Such documentary evidence shall be in the form of
purchase orders to, and shipment/delivery orders or produce certificates from the
manufacturers or the manufacturers agents in Singapore. The materials or the works
employing such materials will not be certified for payment until the required evidence has
been produced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Tenderer shall indicate in the
Schedule of Information Supplied by the Tenderers the place of origin of the materials being
offered at the time of tendering.
2.28
Electricity Supply
Unless otherwise specified, the complete electrical installation shall be suitable for operation
under the supply system with nominal frequency of 50Hz and nominal voltage of 400V, 3
phases and 230V, single phase within the variation limits as declared by Authority.
2.29
Radio and Television Interference

All electrically operated equipment used by the Contractor for the execution of the works shall
where applicable have suppressors fitted to prevent interference with radio, television in use
in the neighbourhood.
The above applies equally to all new items of equipment supplied and fixed by the Contractor.
Means of suppression shall comply with B.S. 800. Equipment and materials used in
determining the level of interference shall be in accordance with B.S. 727.
Reference shall also be made to B.S. CP1006 for further guidance in order to meet the
specified standards.
2.30
Calculations
The Contractor shall supply all calculations as may be required by the Engineer. Calculations
shall be submitted in triplicate, and shall be based on equipment selected and offered by the
Contractor.
The checking of calculations for compliance with Design Intent, shall not relieve the
Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as
required by this Specification and/or Drawings.
2.31
Safety Precautions
The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of industrial safety helmets to B.S. 2826 for the
use of all his personnel on site, including supervision staff.
The Contractor shall ensure that helmets are worn, when necessary by all his personnel on
site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all works are carried out in a safe
manner.
2.32
Testing and Commissioning

After having satisfied himself of the performance of the installation, the Contractor shall
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the installation or part thereof as the case
may be, complies with all the requirements of the Specification.
Page 15
PARKCITY

The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities and instruments for the witnessing and
checking of such tests, but this shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for testing
and satisfying himself of the adequacy of the installation before hand.
The Contractor shall make complete records of the tests as carried out and when the tests
have been successfully completed, he shall provide the Engineer with test records in triplicate
on a form to be agreed upon.
All tests shall be carried out at the direction of the Engineer.
Should the test results indicate that the plant or equipment is not functioning in a satisfactory
manner or complying with the requirements of the Specification, the Contractor shall carry out
at his own expense any alteration, replacement or adjustment as may be required to correct
the faulty work. The Engineers decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory test shall be
final.
All the equipment and systems shall be examined and tested after completion of the
installation work.
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with copies, in triplicate, of test certificates in
respect of all plant, equipment, materials and accessories showing compliance with tests to
British or any other comparable and acceptable standards, manufacturers instruction,
applicable insurance company or Governments requirements, and with any additional tests
specifically called for herein.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all the costs in connection with any
inspection, tests and permits for the installation and shall make such tests as are called for by
any regulations or authorities. These tests shall be made in the presence of the authorized
representative of any such authority. The Employer may permit the Contractor to make use
of the permanent facilities from the utility companies to perform functional checks, and
commissioning tests on the plumbing & drainage equipment, provided that:
All plant & equipment are maintained, to as-new condition at the time of handing over of the
installation.
Should there be any damage to any part of the installation, the Contractor shall undertake to
repair and replace all damaged parts/components to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
In particular, the Contractor shall note that all equipment for the use of future tenants shall be
fully commissioned prior to hand over that is to say,
All equipment/fittings shall be made to work to demonstrate that they are fully functional after
installation.
All Protection Installation and distribution equipment shall be tested for full performance.
The Engineer shall be entitled at all reasonable times during manufacture to inspect,
examine, and test on the Contractors premises the materials and workmanship of all
equipment to be supplied under the Contract. Such inspection, examination, or testing, if
made, shall not release the Contractors from any obligation under the Contract. All costs
shall be borne by the Contractor.
At least two months prior to testing or commissioning any system, the Contractor shall furnish
the following information for each system or process to the Engineer for approval:
Type of instruments to be used;

Manufacturer of instruments;
Calibration methods for instruments;
Operating instruction for instruments;
Page 16
PARKCITY

Accuracy and tolerances of instruments;

Proposed formats for testing and commissioning reports; and
Complete schedule and programme of all testing and commissioning activities.
All plant, materials and systems shall be tested, balanced and commissioned as specified in
the Commissioning and Testing Section of this specification.
All testing, balancing and commissioning procedures and documentation shall be approved
by the Engineer prior to commencement. Four sets of all documents shall be provided for
record purposes.
All instruments shall have been recalibrated within six months of the start of commissioning or
testing.
Calibration of all instruments shall be certified by the instruments manufacturer or an
approved calibration agency.
2.33
Period of Notice
A minimum of seven days notice shall be given to the Engineer before all testing and
commissioning operations commence.
A minimum of four weeks notice shall be given in the case of factory tests on major plant.
2.34
Employers Instruction
The Contractor shall include in the Tender a minimum period of one month for giving
instructions training to the Employer regarding the operational details and maintenance
requirements of the plants and equipment to be installed in this Contract. During this period,
a full time engineer shall be assigned to co-ordinate training for the Employer. Training shall
consist of work sessions to explain in details the installation followed by site training on the
actual operation and maintenance of equipment.
The Contractor shall allow in the Tender for operating all plant and equipment on behalf of the
Employer for One (1) month following issue of the Certificate of Practical Completion.
2.35
Free Maintenance and Service

Apart from his contractual responsibilities for making good inherent defects, the Contractor
shall furnish maintenance service free of charge on the entire equipment supplied and
installed under this Contractor from the completion of the installation under this Contractor,
until twelve months after the Practical Completion of whole of the Works. Maintenance shall
include systematic and periodical examination, adjustment and lubrication of all equipment,
details of which shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
During this Free Maintenance and Service period, the Contractor shall also repair or replace
electrical and mechanical parts of the equipment wherever this is required and shall be only
genuine standard parts produced by the manufacturer of the equipment concerned. In the
case if standard parts being not readily available, a substitute may be accepted for
emergency use but must be replaced with the standard part as soon as possible all at the
Contractors expense. Renewals or repair necessitated by reason of negligence or misuse of
the equipment, or by reason of any other cause beyond the control of the Contractor, except
ordinary wear and tear, shall not be the responsibility of the Contractor.
All works under this maintenance provision shall be performed by competent personnel under
the supervision and in the direct employ of the Contractor. At the end of the free maintenance
period, a further test will carried out by the Contractor on the plant in the presence of the
Employers representatives, and any defects shall be rectified by the Contractor without
charge, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, as part of his normal contractual obligation.
Page 17
PARKCITY
2.36

Spare Items
The Contractor is required to guarantee that sufficient spare items of the specified materials
and goods are available to allow for the timely replacement of any defective ones during the
free maintenance period.
2.37
Maintenance Contract
The Contract shall submit with his tender the yearly cost and terms for the periodical
inspection, testing maintenance and repair of the whole installation and equipment to be
installed under this Contract for 3 years after the first twelve months of free maintenance.
2.38
Contractors Management and Site Organisation

The Contractor shall provide an experienced and fully qualified management team under the
overall direction and co-ordination of the Contractors Project Manager. The site organisation
shall include a competent Site Engineer, together with the necessary back-up technical staff
to supervise the work and to undertake co-ordination duties with the Engineer.
The Project Manager and site engineer shall be English and Mandarin speaking. The
management organisation and principle staff shall be provided to the satisfaction and
approval of the Employer and the Engineer.
The Project Manager shall be fully responsible for the timely completion of the entire Works to
the quality and the standards specified. He shall be a corporate member of a recognised
professional institute and must have a well demonstrated record in project management of
satisfactorily completed commercial rise projects. He shall be supported by an extensive
back up team to the satisfaction of the Engineer to ensure that the project is managed in a
comprehensive and orderly fashion.
The Contractor shall engage sufficient qualified and experienced site staff to execute the
Contractor Works. Registered and licensed trades person shall be employed and under the
direct employment of the Contractor and they shall be full time on site to supervise the works.
When requested by the Architect, sufficient draughtsmen shall be kept on site to facilitate
prompt preparation and issuance of shop drawings.
The Site Engineer shall be constantly on the Works responsible to the Project Manager for
the timely completion to the specified quality and standards. The Site Engineer is to be
exclusively employed for this Contract and is to be constantly upon the Works from
commencement of Works until the end of the Defect Liability Period.
2.39
Method Statements
Prepare and submit method statements for enabling works, installation,
commissioning, operation, demonstration, training and hand over procedures.
2.40
testing,
Certification and Approval

The Contractor shall be responsible for all technical submission, applications and liaison with
government departments and supply authorities, whether they are new submission or
following up of previous submission already made. The Contractor shall be responsible for
obtaining all the necessary approvals and certificates for his installation and payments
(excluding meter deposit, if any) for his applications.
2.41
Design Requirement and System Description

The contractor shall supply, deliver, install, test and set into perfect operating condition the
automatic fire protection and fire alarm system required for the above premises as shown in
Page 18
PARKCITY

the drawing. All equipment selected shall be of equivalent or higher standard to the existing
installation.
The Contractors particular attention is drawn to the items listed in this clause which will
involve in design, specification and/or selection of items based on such designs and
specification.
The selection of manufacturers or suppliers, equipment, plant, components or materials
against the requirement specified herein shall not be deemed to be the design or specification
by the Contractor under this clause.
The production of shop drawing by the Contractor for construction purpose shall not be
deemed to be the design or specification by the Contractor under this clause.
The items which will involve the Contractor in design or specification are as listed below:
a. Supporting systems including brackets, suspension rods, fixing methods including
builders work bases as necessary to support and secure the complete installation forming
the Works.
b. Modifications as necessary to designs indicated on the Contract Drawings to incorporate
the specific items of plant and equipment and components selected to meet the
requirements as specified herein.
c.
Adjustments to plant and equipment to allow for deviations between specified

requirements or data and details of items selected for incorporation into the Works.
d. Obtaining the Engineers prior approval on the equipment appearance, colour, finish and
method of installation for those equipment exposed in the lobbies/corridors/shop etc.
2.42
Performance Guarantee
The system schematic, layout and the equipment data in the technical schedules is meant as
guide. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the complete design, supply, and
installation of a complete operable system and shall guarantee the performance to meet the
conditional criteria.
2.43
M&E Painting, Colour Coding and Labelling

General
Except where otherwise specified the external surfaces of all conduits, apparatus, equipment,
fittings and services including supports, hangers and brackets shall be painted.
All sheet metal control cabinets, switchboards and distribution board enclosures and similar
shall be painted internally and externally.
All surfaces are to be painted and shall be cleaned, prime coated, undercoated and then
finished with two finishing coats. Each coating (including priming, undercoating and the first
finishing coat) shall be allowed to dry and shall be rubbed down before the next coat is
applied.
Surfaces Not to be Painted
(i)
Fibreglass and plastic surfaces.
(ii)
Chrome plate and stainless steel surfaces.
Page 19
PARKCITY

(iii)
Bearing surfaces slides adjusting screws and any surface that is required to be
unpainted for the correct operation for adjustment of the equipment.
(iv)
Hot dipped galvanised lamp holes.
Paint Material
All paint and other preparations shall be non-poisonous, lead-free prepared synthetic
products of approved brand, conforming to the relevant British Standard, brought onto the site
ready mixed in manufacturers sealed containers and used to the manufacturers
Specification.
Preparation of Surfaces and Prime Coating
Metal surfaces shall be wire-brushed to remove loose rust and scale. Castings shall be either
ground smooth or alternatively filled with approved filling compound and then rubbed to a
smooth finish.
Steel plate and all rolled steel sections including brackets and supports not galvanised, shall
be given an application of cold phosphate compound before being prime coated with red zinc
chromate primer.
Steel pipes and conduits delivered to the site unpainted shall be prime coated as specified for
steel plate.
All galvanised or zinc sprayed steel surfaces and all non-ferrous surfaces shall be given an
application of PVB / Zinc chromate self-etching primer before being prime coated as specified
above.
Machinery, apparatus, equipment and fittings delivered to the site already prime or finish
painted shall be thoroughly cleaned down.
Finishes
Each finishing coat shall be of a different shade. The final coat shall be left smooth, even and
free from the visible brush marks and other defects.
For surfaces, which shall operate below 93C, the finishing coat shall be high-grade alkyd
enamel.
Piping, cable enclosures and conduits shall be painted to a gloss finish in colour or colours to
conform to Schedule of Colours.
The ground colour shall extend throughout the entire length of piping, cable enclosures and
conduits installed in the following locations:
(a) Plant rooms;

(b) Piping in trenches;
(c) Piping in basements underground floors and in vertical ducts; and
(d) Wherever exposed to weather or to view.
All piping, cable enclosures and conduits installed in ceilings and similar concealed spaces
shall have the ground colour applied in 400mm wide bands spaced at 6m centres except that
ground colour bands shall be provided adjacent to branches, junctions, valves, floors and
walls (both sides).
Page 20
PARKCITY

Labelling
All instruments, gauges, indicators, control equipment contactors, circuit breakers, switches,
starters, relays and cable terminals on switchboards, etc., shall be clearly labelled and
identified with their associated function.
Labels shall be of laminated plastic with engraved upper case black letters on a white
background. Plastic labels shall be attached by screw or rivet-fixing.
Punch machine type strip lettering and stick-on markings will not be approved.
Lettering shall not be less than 12mm high. Lettering for items installed in switchboards and
on control panels shall not be less than 9mm high.
Schedule of Colours
Equipment, conduit and trunking shall be identified in accordance with relevant standard and
in accordance with the following schedule:
Equipment / Services
Finish / Colour
Labelling / Identification
Electrical Panel Labels
Engraved
Electrical Conduit and Trunking
Exterior / Grey
Interior : Grey
Orange or Match surrounding
Speaker Conduit and Trunking
White or Match surrounding
Blue Band
Telephone Conduit and Trunking
Green or Match surrounding
Orange Band
Surface Light Fitting
White
Suspension Rod and Channels
White
Potable /drinking water pipe

Town Gas
2.44
Green
Yellow
Grey Band
Black/flow direction
Black/flow direction
Construction programme
The Contractor shall provide the equipment and carry out the works based on The Practical
Completion Date in this Document. The Contractor shall include the cost of the Contract to
meet the construction programme requirement and project completion date.
Detail programme shall be submitted by the Contractor for Engineers approval.
2.45
External Noise Criteria

The mechanical systems shall be such designed that noise generated will not be greater than
45 db(A) during daytime and 40 db(A) during night time when measured at 10 metres from
boundary. Under no circumstance the noise generated shall exceed the values as stipulated
in Environmental Protection Departments requirement. Acoustic treatment shall be provided
by the Contractor when noise generated exceeds the above stated values and when the
environment is affected.
Page 21
PARKCITY
3.0

Scope Of work
The scope shall include but not limited to:
3.1
Electrical Installation
3.1.1 Scope of work for external works
a.
Lead-in H.D. UPVC Pipes for Electrical, Telecom, Cable TV System from the
Authority intake point (1000mm beyond existing open drain) to the meter
compartment as shown.
b.
Lead-in H.D. UPVC Pipes for Electrical, Telecom, Cable TV & Security System c/w
MCTs at both ends
c.
Outdoor distribution boards, and submains as shown.
d.
External/Landscape, wiring.
e.
Take delivery and installation of all light fittings.
f.
Supply labour for installation of equipments, and lay Data control cabling including all
necessary termination works.
g.
Supply & install Cable TV System including cabling works & necessary equipments,
accessories and concealed/exposed conduit.
h.
External/Landscape Lighting layout as per drawing.
i.
Testing & commissioning for all system.
j.
Attendance to Power supply application and submission, inspection by all relevant

authorities including engagement of Licensed Electrical Worker (LEW).
3.1.2 Scope of work for typical units.

k.
Lead-in H.D. UPVC Pipes for Electrical, Telecom, Cable TV System from the
Authority intake point (1000mm beyond existing open drain) to the meter
compartment as shown.
l.
Supply & install Meter Panel (MP-1) located at Gate Pillar c/w Authority metering
facilities. Incoming supply sigle phase c/w necessary protection relay
m.
Lead-in H.D. UPVC Pipes for Electrical, Telecom, Cable TV c/w MCTs at both ends
n.
Distribution boards, and submains as shown.
o.
Small Power Distribution.
p.
Lighting points, Ceiling fan points and wiring.
q.
External/Landscape lighting and wiring.
r.
Take delivery and installation of all light fittings.
Page 22
PARKCITY
3.2
s.
Supply labour for installation of equipments, and lay Data control cabling including all
necessary termination works.
t.
Supply & install Telephone System including Key phone system Panel, cabling works,
necessary accessories and UPVC concealed/exposed conduit/ metal trunking as
shown.
u.
Supply & install Cable TV System including TV splitter, cabling works & necessary
equipments, accessories and UPVC concealed/exposed conduit/ metal trunking.
v.
Lightning Protection System & Earthing System.
w.
Testing & commissioning for all system.
x.
Attendance to Power company application and submission, inspection by all relevant

authorities including engagement of Licensed Electrical Worker (LEW).
Air-conditioning & Ventilation Installation for typical units

a.
Take delivery and installation of the Air-cooled Split Air-Conditioning equipments.
b.
Supply and Installation of the Air Conditioning refrigerant pipes, drain pipes, electrical
wiring & control, etc. as shown in the tender drawings.
c.
Toilet exhaust systems c/w fans, ductworks, grilles, external weatherproof louvres,
etc. as shown in the tender drawings.
d.
Take delivery and installation of the Air-cooled Split Air-Conditioning equipments.
e.
Testing & Commissioning.
3.3
Plumbing and Sanitary Installation
3.3.1
Scope of work for external works
3.3.2

a.
Supply and install of external underground sewer drainage system.
b.
Supply and install of external plumbing & fire protection system.
c.
Supply and install of external storm water drainage system.
d.
Take delivery and fixing of all sanitary and plumbing fittings
e.
f.
Attendance to PUB/ENV application and submission of water and sanitary plans,

inspection by all relevant authorities including engagement of licensed plumber,
Licensed Water Service Plumber and Qualified Person/Professional Engineer.
Scope of work for typical units

g.
Supply and install of Internal underground sanitary drainage system.
h.
Supply and install of Internal plumbing system.
Page 23
PARKCITY
3.4

i.
Supply and install of Internal aboveground sanitary drainage system.
j.
Supply and install of Waste water pumping system
k.
Supply and install of Rain water pumping system (if any)
l.
Supply and install of Cold and Hot water supply system.
m.
Supply and install of Complete domestic water hydro-pneumatic Booster pump, &
storage tank system. The booster pump system inclusive pumps, pressure vessel,
pipe work, fittings, VSD Drive, control panel complete with wiring, pump starters,
water level sensors, controls, relays, trunking, conduit, pump automatic operation and
change-over to standby pump and accessories.
n.
Supply and install of Electric water storage Heater system.
o.
Take delivery and fixing of all sanitary and plumbing fittings
p.
Electrical equipment and installation work.
q.
r.
Attendance to Authorities application and submission of water (including booster

pump system, pressure vessels and domestic water tank) and sanitary plans,
inspection by all relevant authorities including engagement of licensed plumber,
Licensed Water Service Plumber and Qualified Person/Professional Engineer.
General Scopes
a.
Acoustic treatment and vibration control.
b.
All interfacing work with other trades.
c.
Painting and labelling of pipework and equipment.
d.
Provision of all hold down bolts, spigots struts and the like required to be built in
during construction.
e.
Testing and commissioning.
f.
Provision of twelve (12) months operational maintenance and breakdown services for
external services. The period shall commence immediately upon issuance of the
Architects Completion Certification or handing-over date of the service to the
authorities, whichever is later.
g.
Provision of operating instructions and maintenance manuals; as-fitted drawings.
h.
Application, Submission and Liaison with authorities to obtain all necessary

certificates and approvals, including the completion of all submission drawings, forms
and payment of any fees and charges. All the costs for all the tests as required by all
relevant authorities shall be included.
i.
Take, delivery from site, installation, handling, commissioning and protection of all
sanitary wares and fittings including all valves, accessories, taps, brackets, plugs,
complete as specified.
j.
Provision of spare parts.
Page 24
PARKCITY
3.5

k.
Training of the employer for proper operation of the entire systems.
l.
Provision of the necessary installation which include pipework, connection of water

supply, conduit and control wiring, etc. to form a workable system as required.
m.
Attend to all authorities inspections regardless of whether this inspection is carried

out after the defect liability period.
n.
All other works and systems as specified in the Contract document and or shown on
the drawings.
o.
All M&E installation works shall be in accordance to the construction phasing

programme which include the various completion dates, target dates etc. for the
different areas in the development.
Servicing and Maintenance.

General
The works as described hereunder are for the servicing and maintenance of all the systems and
ancillary plant, machineries and equipment supplied and installed under the works during and
after the Maintenance Period and includes the supply of all materials, tools, apparatus,
equipment and appliances, labour and necessary incidentals.
During the Maintenance Period, the replacement and/or repairs of all defective plants,
machineries and equipment and installations or any parts thereof shall be entirely free of charge
to the Employer, if such repairs or replacements are necessitated by reason of defective design,
materials or workmanship.
Workmanship and Materials
The servicing, maintenance and repair (or replacement) shall be performed by skilled and
competent workmen and shall be executed in accordance with the best commercial, technical
and engineering practice.
All materials to be supplied shall be new and unused, and shall generally be of the best quality
as regards manufacture and performance.
Supervision
The servicing, maintenance and repair (or replacement) works shall be under the charge of a
Supervisor. For works required by local laws and regulations to be performed by licensed or
registered personnel, the Supervisor shall deem to have the appropriate licence or registration.
This Supervisor shall also be fully competent in supervising the servicing, maintenance and
repair (or replacement) work and be acceptable to the Employer.
Scope of Work
All plant, machineries and equipment comprising the complete systems and ancillary equipment
supplied and installed under these Works shall be serviced and maintained strictly in
accordance with the requirements/recommendations as stipulated by all the plant and
equipment manufacturers as well as in compliance with all by-laws, rules, regulations and
requirements of the Local Authorities and shall also satisfy all appropriate Singapore Standards
including all relevant Codes of Practice.
The Works includes the preparation of a comprehensive servicing and maintenance schedule
which shall be submitted to the Architect / Engineer for review after the award of the Work. The
reviewed schedule shall then be included and shall form an integral part of the Operating and
Maintenance Instructions and Parts List including monthly servicing.
Page 25
PARKCITY

The time and day for carrying out the servicing, maintenance and repair shall have agreement
with the Employer. It is to be expected that working outside normal working hours (i.e.
overtime) will be required. Also emergency repair services if so requested by the Employer
shall be carried out at any time of the day (overtime included).
It shall be contractually bound that the Employer be immediately advised of any defects or
deterioration in any part of the equipment/materials observed during the routine inspection and
servicing.
The Works shall include the services of a Licensed Electrical Worker to take charge of the entire
Electrical Installation of the entire Building including those related to all other building services,
i.e. Air Conditioning & Ventilation, Fire Fighting & Alarm, Lifts, Sanitary and Plumbing, etc. for
licensing purpose (if applicable). All costs connected therewith including fees payable to the
Authorities are deemed to have been included during the Maintenance Period.
The Works shall include routine inspections, servicing and maintenance of all the equipment,
machinery and plant to be carried out outside the peak hours of the building of at agreeable
time with the Employer.
The routine inspections, servicing and maintenance schedule shall be so arranged that
minimum inconvenience and interruption shall be caused to the occupants and Employer.
During every regular inspection, the Works to be performed shall include but not limited to the
following:
(a)
Check the performance of the complete Installation, including cleaning and adjusting all
control devices as and when technically necessary.
(b)
Advise the Employer's operators/maintenance in respect of the emergency rescue,

correct operation procedure etc.
(c)
Report in writing to the Employer any defects discovered, coming to light or observed in
any part or parts of the Installation. Such reports shall state fully the cause(s) of such
defect(s) and shall include, where applicable, an estimate of the cost of repairs or
replacement of the defective part or parts required.
(d)
Record, in the log book for each element of the Installation, kept by the Employer,
particulars of all maintenance or repair works carried out and initial all entries in the log
book.
(e)
Tests as and when necessary, any part of the Installation.
(f)
Report in writing to the Employer all servicing & maintenance works carried out.
Page 26
PARKCITY
4.0

Responsibilities of Contractor
The Contractor is to price for the followings:
Provision of hoisting facilities.
Provision of artificial lighting and temporary electricity supplies including power for
testing and commissioning of air-conditioning and ventilation, lifts and electrical
installation which will be from the permanent installations.
Removal of rubbish from locations on each floor.
Securing the building and building works in such a manner that it will not be subjected
to damage by construction activities such as falling debris or water seepage during
the progress of the Contract works.
Protecting, casing up and accepting full responsibility for loss or damage to which
have been fully, finally and properly incorporated into the Works.
Additional costs incurred due to the working hour different from and extended hours
to those worked by the Contractor.
Provision of all setting out and survey information including giving all necessary
dimensions and taking responsibility for their accuracy.
Programming, co-ordinating and organising the contractors work to ensure the

correct timing, sequencing and completion of all operations including preparing coordinated working drawings of all services.
Ascertaining all particulars relating to the contract works in regard to sizes and
positions of chases, holes and the like which are to be formed or left in the structure.
Cutting and forming holes, recesses, etc. for ductwork, pipes, conduits and fittings
through walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, etc. and making good after the contract works
are sufficiently advance. Cutting holes through false ceilings and special partitions
shall be by the respective specialist contractors. The contractor shall be responsible
for chasing of walls for pipes, conduits and fittings and making good.
Filling, grouting and making good under lift shaft entrance sills, around lift doorways
and casings for buttons and indicators, etc.
Building-in or casting-in of inserts, bolts, sleeves for pipes, ducts, trunking, guide rails,
equipment, suspension systems etc. The contractor will provide the inserts, bolts,
sleeves, etc. and will locate the correct position for these fittings. Sealing between
the sleeve and the pipe, duct, trunking, etc. will be executed by the contractor, in
addition, sealing between the sleeve and building structure (i.e. floors, walls) will also
be by the Contractor.
Marking the locations of any pre-stressing cables on the soffit of structural floors, face
of walls etc.
The formation of concrete bases, plinths, inertia blocks, etc. for plant and equipment,
door louvres, exhaust discharge (external) grilles and fresh air intake louvres, unless
otherwise stated in the specification or drawings.
The provision, erection, maintenance and removal of all their temporary office and
storage accommodation.
Page 27
PARKCITY

Connections to temporary power supplies made available by the Contractor.

Supplying and running distribution cables, leads and electrical equipment as required.
The provision of plant, equipment and generators for welding works.
The provision, erection and removal of special scaffolding including altering and
adapting from time to time as necessary.
Removing of all existing equipment and associated equipment made redundant

during A/A works from site. Depositing all rubbish, crates, drums, etc. at positions on
each floor to be indicated by the maintenance.
Full responsibility for loss or damage to their plant, tools, equipment and other
property on the site.
Protection and casing up of the contract works until such works have been properly
completed and incorporated into the Works.
Chasing of walls for pipes, conduits and fittings. The painting of pipes, conduits and
equipment.
Sealing between sleeves built-in by the Contractor and the pipe, duct, trunking, etc.
using materials and methods of suitable fire rating and to the approval of the building
Authority, Architect and Engineer.
Page 28
PARKCITY
5.0

Electrical Services
This specification shall be read in conjunction with all other relevant drawings accompanying
this document. The Contractor shall not be absolved from his responsibility for not carrying
out the contract works in accordance with the requirements of the foregoing sections of this
document and the detailed specification of work as outlined hereunder.
a)
Check phase loading and phase balance the circuits.
b)
Provision of proper ceiling Roses, Flexible Chords and connectors to every lighting point
to comply to the requirements of S P Services Ltd.
c)
Provision of necessary cable trunking/trays for all services including Data, Telephone,
and Security cables
d)
Supply and installation of new wall boxes and concealed conduit from the nearest down
trunking in the wall/column.
e)
Ensure the accuracy of timers and reset.
f)
Record all services and replacement carried out.
g)
Contractors LEW to make all necessary application and to submit plans or drawings,
endorsed forms and certificates to Authority
h)
Contractors LEW shall be responsible for Authority meter installation, turn-on and pay
all fees including the Licensing Fee for the operation of the installation up to the expiry
of the Maintenance Period.
i)
Test for the proper functioning of existing light fittings, control and protective
circuits/devises and distribution boards.
j)
Modify existing circuiting of light fittings and distribution boards as required
k)
Testing and commissioning of all systems and equipment and hand over of those
systems and equipment to the Client.
l)
Provision of twelve (12) months operational maintenance and breakdown services after
practical completions.
m) Provision of shop drawings as-built drawings, operating instructions and maintenance

manuals.
n)
Liaise and co-ordinate with other trades for the interface requirements of the Electrical
systems.
o)
Training of employers staff for proper operation of the entire system.
p)
Provision of spare parts and equipment
Page 29
PARKCITY
5.1

General
This Section specifies the electrical equipment and installation which shall form part of the
Works as shown on the Drawings.
All electrical equipment including luminaires, switch socket outlet, switches, motors, starters,
switchgear panels, cabling, wiring, etc., associated with the various mechanical systems or
equipment shall fully comply with this Section.
Manufacture
All electrical equipment and materials of the same type shall be supplied by a single
manufacturer to ensure uniformity of standards and composition.
All equipment and accessories delivered to site shall be new and shall be clearly marked to
identify different grades, materials and manufacturers.
All switchgear, motors and starters must be the product of a manufacturer experienced in the
design and construction of similar equipment and who have made electrical equipment for
similar duties for at least five years.
Submissions
The information listed in this Clause must be provided for each electrical system at the times
stated.
At the time of tendering, the Contractor shall provide all information in accordance with the
Form of Tender.
Within two weeks of being notified of the Employer's intent to award the Contract and prior to
ordering the equipment, the Contractor shall furnish the following information for each system
to the Engineer for approval:Manufacturer of all cables, wiring and accessories;
Specifications and standards for all materials; and
Certified list of recommended spare parts.
Within two weeks of being awarded the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for approval complete working drawings of all electrical systems included in the Contract.
Working drawings shall show all conduit runs and cable routings and shall clearly indicate the
locations of all electrical installation, isolating switches and all plant and equipment to which
the electrical system connects.
Prior to ordering any motors, switchgear, control panels, instruments or any other electrical
equipment or accessory, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the
manufacturer's data for each item and in the case of control panels, a detailed layout drawing
of the panel face.
Prior to ordering any motor starters, the Contractor shall submit for approval full technical
details of the equipment including time/current characteristics for each motor/starter
arrangement.
Page 30
PARKCITY

Prior to ordering any materials, the Contractor shall submit for approval samples of all cables,
wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, switches, hangers, cable trays and any other item as
may reasonably be requested by the Engineer.
Within two weeks of being awarded the Contract, the Contractor shall submit a draft copy of
his proposed commissioning and testing procedures and report for approval.
Within one month of the Date of Practical Completion, the Contractor shall provide as-built
drawings for each system in accordance with the "General Requirements" Section of this
Specification.
Within one month of the Date of Practical Completion, the Contractor shall provide complete
commissioning and testing reports for each system in accordance with the recommendations
of the 16th Edition of the I.E.E. and in compliance with the "Commissioning and Testing"
Section of this Specification.
5.2
Equipment
5.2.1 HV SWITCHGEAR & EQUIPMENT
Scope of Work
This Specification specifies the requirements for switchgear operating at voltages above 22
kV a.c.
This Specification specifies protective relays that are not integral to a circuit breaker or
switching device and separately-mounted voltage and current transformers.
This Specification specifies integrated protective relays and voltage and current transformers
assembled as an integral part of a circuit breaker or switching device are covered in the
relevant sections.
Performance Criteria and Requirements

Provide switchgear suitable for indoor use in tropical conditions
Ensure all ratings, including the ratings of all fittings, accessories, CTs, VTs, instruments,
relays etc, are for continuous operation under full load at the specified on-site conditions/
Arc Fault Containment

Provide switchgear certified to prove the suitability of the switchgear for accessibility Type A
as specified in IEC 60298. Carry out Arc fault containment tests for:
Busbar chambers
Circuit breaker and switch chambers
Cable termination chambers
Submit certificates to the Engineer.
Page 31
PARKCITY

MATERIALS
Provide free-standing, modular, metal-enclosed indoor type switchboards to IEC 60298.
Ensure switchboards are extensible at both ends.
Provide switchboards that are able to withstand the prospective short-circuit current for 1
seconds duration for 20 kA and fully type tested by an internationally recognised testing
station such as ASTA, KEMA or any other testing station approved by the Engineer.
Provide switchboards with electrical and mechanical interlocks so that multiple incoming
feeders cannot be operated in parallel.
Ensure switchboards have a minimum Index of Protection of IP4x in accordance with IEC
60529.
Provide switchboard assemblies with a continuous copper earth bar running the whole length
sized for the prospective short-circuit current.
Provide each switchboard section with anti-condensation heaters. Ensure anti-condensation
heaters are individually fused.
Protective Relays
So far as it is practicable, ensure all CTs are of the ring type. Wound primary CTs will only be
accepted when the rated primary current is so low as to make the ring type impracticable.
Ensure all CTs for use at voltages exceeding 1000V are epoxy resin encapsulated, whether
of the ring type or the wound primary type.
DESIGN AND FABRICATION
General
Provide switchboard enclosures constructed from minimum 2mm steel sheet, with stiffening to
all doors and covers.
Internal Segregation
Ensure busbars, circuit breaker or switch and cable terminals are segregated from each other
by means of separate compartments. Provide a separate front opening compartment for all
low voltage components.
Pressure Relief
Ensure pressure relief flaps are fitted to the top of the circuit breaker, busbar and cable
chambers and discharge either from the top of the cubicle or from the rear of the cubicle via a
duct to direct the gases up over the top of the cubicle. Fit dynamic flaps to all front facing
vents.
Ensure that gases cannot be transmitted from a faulted to a non-faulted compartment or
cubicle.
Page 32
PARKCITY

Safety Shutters
Provide busbar and circuit spouts devices provided with automatic metal safety shutters.
Ensure the safety shutters are operated by the movement of the circuit breaker being racked
between the 'Test/Disconnected' and 'Service' positions.
Ensure shutters are individually driven open and positively re-closed.
Provide shutters capable of being individually propped in the 'Open' position. Provide shutters
capable of being closed manually or, on re-insertion of the circuit breaker to the 'Service'
position, normal operation is automatically restored.
Provide earthing for safety shutters when they are in the Open and Closed positions.
Ensure shutters are capable of being individually padlocked in the Closed position.
Ensure busbar and circuit shutters are clearly identified.
Circuit Breaker Interlocks

Provide full interlocking as follows:
Ensure that it is not possible to insert the circuit breaker into the cubical unless the racking
system interlocks are disengaged.
Ensure that it is not possible to rack the circuit breaker from the 'Test/Disconnected' position
to the 'Service' position unless:
The racking system interlocks are engaged
The circuit breaker is open
The front door is closed
The earth switch is open
Ensure it is not possible to rack the circuit breaker from the 'Service' position to the
'Test/Disconnected' position unless the circuit breaker is open
Ensure it is only possible to close the earth switch with the circuit breaker in the
'Test/Disconnected' or 'Withdrawn' position.
Ensure it is only possible to close the circuit breaker in the 'Service' or

'Test/Disconnected' position.
Ensure it is not possible to open the cubicle door unless the circuit breaker is in the
'Test/Disconnected' position.
Nameplates
Provide nameplates on the front of each section giving the circuit identification and the cable
size.
Provide on the front of each section a permanently fixed synoptic diagram indicating the
busbars and any circuit breaker or switch, earthing switch and voltage transformers.
Page 33
PARKCITY

Busbar Systems
Provide busbar systems housed in a totally segregated chamber within the cubicle assembly
with all components fully insulated. Ensure the busbar system is fully tested and
independently certified by internationally recognised testing station such as ASTA, KEMA or
any testing authority approved by the Engineer.
Provide horizontal busbars and droppers manufactured from silver plated hard drawn high
conductivity copper laminations and insulated with 1.5mm thick epoxy resin applied by dip
coating.
Ensure busbars and droppers are braced and supported on epoxy stand off insulators.
Provide droppers terminated at moulded epoxy resin spouts sealed with EPDM (EPDM- use
full words) or similar synthetic rubber compound. Ensure moulded insulating joint boxes are
fitted at each busbar joint for protection against ingress of dust.
Ensure busbar and isolating contacts are colour coded or clearly marked for phase rotation.
Busbar Earthing
Provide busbar earthing by a withdrawable earthing truck or fixed earthing switch only.
Where an earthing truck is specified ensure it is capable of being inserted into a purpose-built
cubicle or a circuit breaker cubicle once the circuit breaker has been removed.
Ensure the earthing truck is transportable using the circuit breaker service trolley and able to
be used to earth different sections of busbar.
Where possible, ensure the busbar earthing trucks are fully interlocked with the associated
incomer and bus-section circuit breaker. Where this is not possible provide key exchange
interlocking.
Provide automatic mechanical shuttle interlocks, internal to the switchboard to ensure the
following:
The earthing device cannot be inserted to the 'Service' position unless the associated
bus-section and incoming circuit breakers are in the 'Test/Disconnected' position.
The earthing device cannot be closed unless it is in the 'Service' position.
The earthing device cannot be withdrawn to the 'Test/Disconnected' position unless it

is open.
Associated bus-section and incoming circuit breakers can only be inserted to the
'Service' position with the earthing truck in the 'Test/Disconnected' position.
Circuit Earthing
Provide circuit earthing by means of a built-in earthing switch. Where current transformers are
installed, ensure the switch is connected on the line side of the CT bushings.
Ensure that operation of the earthing switch is interlocked with the associated circuit breaker
or fuse switch.
Page 34
PARKCITY

Voltage transformers
Provide cast resin insulated voltage transformers (VTs). Ensure that circuit and busbar VTs
are located in a dedicated section of the relevant cubicle.
Provide the VT compartment with lockable earthed metal shutters to cover the primary fixed
contact spouts.
Provide appropriately rated fuse protection on the primary side of the VTs.
Current transformers
Ensure current transformers (CTs) are installed on the circuit side of the circuit breaker or
switch.
CTs may be either high voltage resin encapsulated type or low voltage type installed in the
cable termination chamber on proprietary CT bushings supplied and installed by the
switchboard manufacturer. Where this latter type is used provide bushings of cast resin
insulated with an earth screen between the primary insulation and the CT.
Secondary wiring
Provide secondary wiring in black PVC insulated cable of minimum 2.5mm section. Ensure
all wiring and terminals are clearly identified.
Run wiring neatly in plastic trunking and securely fixed. Ensure wiring between fixed and
moving parts of the switchgear is enclosed in flexible conduit, secured at both ends. Make all
terminations using crimped lugs.
Shroud all connections and terminations on the rear of opening panels to prevent inadvertent
contact with live parts.
Wire all connections from current and voltage transformers via proprietary test blocks
mounted on the front panel of the LV compartment.
Auxiliary switches
Provide auxiliary switch contacts on circuit-breakers and switches.. Ensure the number of
auxiliary contacts indicated is in addition to any used for the internal operation of the circuit
breaker or switch mechanism.
Wire all auxiliary switches to a terminal block on the fixed portion of the switchgear, whether
the switches are in use or not.
Protective relays, control circuits and metering

Provide protection and auxiliary relays to comply with the relevant Section of the
Specification.
Ensure meters comply with the relevant Section of the Specification.
Where trip circuit supervision is specified, provide the facility for a master fault signal via
volt-free contacts wired to a terminal block in the LV compartment.
Page 35
PARKCITY

Circuit-breakers
Provide a non-resettable operations counter.
Ensure vacuum or SF6 circuit-breakers are single break with one interrupter per phase, fitted
with contact wear indicators.
Ensure it is possible quickly and easily to apply the appropriate voltage tests to vacuum
bottles to check the integrity of the vacuum. Ensure that interrupter bottles are easily
replaceable.
Provide sulphur hexafluoride (SF6)/Vacuum circuit-breakers as single break with parallel main
and arcing contacts in a gas-filled sealed insulated enclosure. Ensure that on opening, the
main contacts part first, transferring the current to the arcing contacts to minimize wear on the
main contacts.
Achieve arc extinction without the use of external gas reservoirs. Compressors shall not be
used.
Ensure that circuit-breakers that operate with gas pressure above atmospheric incorporate a
low pressure detector with alarm and/or lock-out facility and pressure gauge.
Oil circuit-breakers are not acceptable.
Locks and padlocks

Provide robust brass padlocks to cater for the maximum simultaneous permutation of lockable
items. Provide padlocks for the following items:
to lock circuit-breakers in the service or earth position,
to lock off means of mechanical tripping when the circuit-breaker is in the earthing
position,
to lock shutters closed when the circuit-breaker is racked out,
to lock any access doors which have not been fitted with mortise locks,
to lock voltage transformer shutters.
Provide two keys for each padlock, and provide each key with a permanent label giving the
item reference number.
Provide a purpose-made wall mounted key cabinet with lockable glass front door in each
switchroom. Label key hooks with the key references.
Independent manually charged spring operation

Ensure closing of circuit-breakers or switches is by independent charged spring operation.
Ensure springs are charged manually. Ensure it is possible to charge the springs while the
device is closed so as to allow immediate re-closing after a subsequent opening operation.
Provide mechanical indicator devices to show the state of charge of the operating springs and
the position of the main contacts.
Page 36
PARKCITY

Independent motor charged spring operation

Ensure closing of circuit-breakers or switches is by independent motor charged spring
operation. Provide a separate manual charging mechanism. Ensure that the motor charges
the spring immediately after the device has closed so as to allow immediate re-closing after a
subsequent opening operation. Ensure it is possible to charge the springs manually while the
device is closed.
Ensure that the operating voltage is as indicated.
Provide mechanical indicator devices to show the state of charge of the operating springs and
the position of the main contacts.
Interchangeability
Ensure that only circuit-breakers of equal rating are interchangeable. Ensure that circuitbreakers are not interchangeable with switches or disconnectors.
Switch fuse combinations, disconnectors and earthing switches
Provide switch-disconnectors capable of breaking the load currents and capable of making
onto the short-circuit fault current stated.
Provide disconnectors and earthing switches capable of breaking negligible current but
capable of carrying the short-circuit fault current for a minimum of 3 seconds.
Provide interlocks to ensure that switches cannot be closed and immediately re-opened within
a time of 3 seconds. This may be accomplished by means of a handle that has to be removed
from the closing mechanism and re-inserted into the opening mechanism.
Where fuses are used in combination with switches and disconnectors, the switch or
disconnector rated short time current and peak withstand current may be modified to take
account of the current limiting effect of the fuses. The combination must have been
successfully tested and certified.
Provide disconnectors and earthing switches of the spring assisted, independent manual
type. Manual spring charging may be part of the closing stroke or may be a separate
operation where closing is initiated by pushbutton.
Power supplies for switchgear operation
Provide dedicated batteries operation of opening and closing releases. Batteries to be of the
type and voltage indicated.
Ensure that batteries are enclosed in a purpose made steel cabinet complete with automatic
charger. The charger to incorporate a battery charge low warning and a charge fail alarm. The
warning and alarm circuits to have volt free contacts to permit remote monitoring.
Ensure that the supply to the opening and closing circuits of each circuit breaker or switch is
distributed via a bus-wire system, with fuses of appropriate rating at the tap-off points within
each functional unit.
Where spring charging motors operate at a voltage lower than normal mains voltage, provide
a dedicated transformer. The transformer to be a two-winding isolating transformer generally
in accordance with IEC 60742 and IEC 61558. Earth the secondary winding of the
Page 37
PARKCITY

transformer to the main earthing bar. Provide fuses on the primary and secondary sides of the
transformer.
Ensure that the supply to the spring charging motor circuits of each circuit breaker or switch is
distributed via a bus-wire system, with fuses of appropriate rating at the tap-off points within
each functional unit.
Loose Equipment
Provide all handling equipment and tools required for routine maintenance.
Provide lockers and wall racks for secure storage of tools and other loose equipment.
Provide a rubber mat of dimensions 900mm wide and 6 mm thick for the entire length of the
switchgear.
Provide a framed single-line diagram of the switchgear installation complete with protective
relay settings, endorsed by the Licensed Electrical Worker in-charge of the operation of the
installation.
Provide the required number of danger signs, resuscitation chart and a log book for the
recording of the switching operations.
Protective Relays
Ensure that current transformer (CT) primary ratings are shown.
Provide separate CTs for protection and metering circuits.
Install CTs in accessible places. Ensure that the secondary connections are brought out by
means of insulated leads and made off on a suitable terminal block-mounted in a readily
accessible position.
Connect one side of the secondary of each CT circuit to earth at one point via a bolted
removable link.
Unless specified, provide CTs with 5A secondary current and of the following accuracy:
Accuracy class - except restricted earth fault **
5P
Accuracy limit factor **
20
Accuracy class - restricted earth fault
**Note: These two characteristics are often combined and may be expressed as 5P20.
Ensure that the rated output of any CT is not less than 150% of the total connected burden.
Where a protective relay is indicated by model number or is from a particular manufacturer's
range, this indicates that the particular relay was used in the protection studies. Where an
alternative relay is proposed, submit details of the operating characteristics and the
coordination with other protective devices to the Engineer for approval.
Provide protective relays to have the number of elements and operating characteristics.
Provide flush mounted draw out type relays, mounted on the front panel of the switchboard or
enclosure.
Page 38
PARKCITY

Fit relays with visible indicators, to be either a mechanical flag or LED indicator. Where relays
have multiple elements, provide indicators to show the type of fault or affected phase. Ensure
that indicators that are reset by hand are able to be reset without opening the relay case.
Fit relays with a test facility to permit testing of tripping circuits without having to remove the
relay or disconnect any relay circuits. Ensure that it is not possible to test or operate any relay
without opening the case
Provide protective relay circuits incorporating proprietary test blocks for test and calibration
purposes. Ensure that the test blocks are accessible from the front of the panel.
Ensure digital relays have a wide range of protective curve settings, providing a wide choice
of curve types i.e. DT, (IDMT), SIT, VIT, EIT, UIT, RI and time delay settings from
instantaneous (50ms) to 300 s.
Ensure that overload protection is based on true RMS current value.
Ensure that setting are made either by the direct input of actual current values or percentages
of plug setting.
Fit relays with LED indicators on the front of the device and indicate the cause of the fault by
text. Ensure that the LEDs are available for alarms and status to indicate breaker position,
relay self test, phase and ground fault alarms.
Provide output relays capable of withstanding a steady state current of 5A.
Label all relays to indicate their function.
Ensure that labels have permanent lettering and are securely fixed to the panel.
INSTALLATION
General
Where indicated on the drawings install switchgear on a baseframe assembled from welded
steel channels. Bolt the switchgear bolted securely to the base-frame.
Ensure that where switchgear is installed directly onto concrete floors the surface of the floor
is level to within 5mm. Bolt the switchgear cabinets to the floor using mechanical expansion
bolts.
Ensure that the floor area in front of the switchgear is smooth and level to ensure components
can be withdrawn without difficulty.
Do not allow switchgear to be installed or operated without being securely anchored to the
floor.
Cables and connections
Ensure that cable termination boxes or chambers are suitable for the types and sizes of
cables. Ensure that where single core cables are specified the gland plate is made of
non-ferrous metal.
Install and terminate all cables in accordance with the relevant parts of this Specification.
Trenches
Where cabling for bottom entry switchgear is run in trenches, ensure that the trenches are
cleared of any debris or rubble before cables are installed.
Page 39
PARKCITY

After installation of the switchgear, ensure that all trenches are closed using suitable covers
as detailed on the drawings.
Protective Relays
Install relays in hinged panels or in hinged compartment doors. In exceptional circumstances,
they may be installed in fixed panels provided that adequate access is available from the rear
or the side of the compartment.
Do not install relays in removable panels where removal of the panel would cause it to 'hang'
on the wiring before it could be disconnected.
Where multiple devices are installed, ensure that they are arranged in horizontal and / or
vertical rows to present a neat and workmanlike appearance.
It is preferable that holes be cut during manufacture of the panel so that the cut edges receive
the full anti-corrosion treatment and painting process. Where holes are cut in bought-in
enclosures, treat all exposed metal edges such that the corrosion resistance is not impaired
and the surfaces painted or touched up in the correct colour.
Terminate all wiring with the correct size ferrule or lug as appropriate to the connection.
Permanently identify wiring with coloured marker sleeves.
Enclose wiring to devices mounted on hinged doors or panels in flexible plastic conduit.
Securely fix the conduit at both ends.
Shroud or insulate all terminations to components mounted on the hinged member to prevent
contact with live parts.
VERIFICATION AND SUBMISSIONS
Drawings
Provide single-line diagrams showing the configuration of the switchgear.
Provide templates for holding-down bolts or other items that may be difficult to locate exactly
from drawings. Provide details of any special requirements for cable entry or support.
Provide installation drawings including dimensioned outline, elevations and sections, showing
the arrangement of all switchboards, control and relay cubicles, including builders work details
showing exact foundation requirements and weights, dynamic loading and impact loads of
switchgear.
Provide detailed arrangement drawings of individual types of circuit-breakers including CTs
and VTs, showing all main circuits and secondary wiring circuit diagrams, relay and
instrument connections.
Provide any necessary drawings and instructions for handling and maintenance.
Provide all handling equipment and special tools required for routine maintenance and
adjustment. One set of tools is to be provided for each switchboard.
Provide lockers and wall racks for secure storage of tools and other loose equipment.
Page 40
PARKCITY

Test Certificates
Submit certified copies of test certificates for the following normal and special type tests as
stipulated in IEC 600298:
Normal type tests:
Dielectric tests to verify the insulation level of any part of the equipment including
tests at power-frequency test voltages on auxiliary circuits
Tests to prove the temperature rise of any part of the equipment and measurement of
the resistance of the main circuit
Tests to prove the capability of the main and earthing circuits to be subjected to the
rated peak and the rated short-time withstand currents
Test to prove the making and breaking capacity of the included switching devices
Tests to prove the satisfactory operation of the included switching devices and
removable parts
Tests to verify the protection of persons against approach to live parts and contact
with moving parts
Tests to verify the protection of persons against dangerous electrical effects
Tests to verify the strength of gas-filled compartments
Special type tests:
Tests to verify the protection of the equipment against mechanical damage
Tests to assess the effects of arcing due to an internal fault
Tests to detect certain defects in the solid insulation of the equipment by the
measurement of partial discharges
Carry out the following routine tests on the switchgear at the manufacturers works prior to
shipment:
Mechanical operation tests
Tests of auxiliary electrical, pneumatic and hydraulic devices
Verification of correct wiring
Pressure tests of gas-filled compartments (if applicable)
Gas tightness tests of gas-filled compartments (if applicable)
Site Tests
After erection on site, conduct the following tests carried out by a licensed testing engineer
and present the results duly certified by him to the Engineer.
Ensure that test equipment has been calibrated within the previous month and copies of
calibration certificates shall be provided for the Engineer.
Ensure busbars and circuit cables are earthed. Install temporary earthing clamps if
necessary.Check all busbar joints and cable terminations for tightness.
Rack in circuit breakers to the 'TEST' position. Check all circuit breakers for correct
operation of the following as applicable:
Page 41
PARKCITY

closing mechanism
opening mechanism
manual spring charging
electric spring charging
operations counter
Check all gas pressure indicators for correct operating pressures.
Measure the insulation resistance of the secondary circuits with an insulation tester.
Check correct operation of battery chargers for tripping and closing batteries.
The correct operation of the mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be tested.
With circuit breakers withdrawn, apply AC pressure tests to the busbar sections of the
erected switchgear using the test voltage appropriate to the nominal system voltage
for 1 minute in accordance with the test method specified in IEC 56, 60 and 129.
Also apply the AC pressure test to the withdrawn circuit-breakers.
Carry out primary injection tests to verify the correct ratio and polarity of the current
transformers as well as the connection and correct operation of the relays.
Carry out secondary injection tests to verify the operating characteristic of the relays.
Check final calibration and setting on site by secondary injection testing
5.2.2 OIL TRANSFORMER

Introduction
The intent of this specification is to define the technical requirements for distribution
transformers, accessories and as shown on the Tender Drawings.
The transformer shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the most up-to-date
experience, and shall incorporate the latest improvements of design and manufacture for the
type of transformers required as currently employed in the Industry.
The transformers manufacturer shall have good track record of supply, installation base and
capability to support the End User. The intended factory of which the liquid filled transformer is
manufactured or assembled should have at least 15 years of manufacturing experience and
preferably to have a same minimum 15 years of installation base record in the country of
installation mentioned in this Tender / Requisition. The factory is to have a test bay for the End
User to witness factory tests and a local team of engineers to be call upon 24/7 should any
issues arises on their transformers.
Type of Transformers
The distribution transformers shall be three-phase units using Oil Liquid complying to IEC
60296. Transformers shall be suitable for both Indoor and Outdoor Installation.
For transformers rated at and above 1MVA, it shall be hermetically sealed with N2 cushion,
radiators design.
Page 42
PARKCITY

Standards
All plant items shall be designed, manufactured and tested generally in accordance with
the latest revision of the following standards except where specifically directed otherwise.
(Please note that this Tender shall only consider manufacturer with ISO 9001 certified)
Items
Transformers
Transformer Oil / Liquid
Welding
High Voltage Test Technique
Sound Level Measuring
Standard
TCVN 6306,IEC 60076
TCVN 6306,IEC 60296
ISO 6213,3041,3088,3834
IEC 60060
IEC 60551
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Rated Frequency
The transformers shall have the rated frequency of 50 Hz unless otherwise stated in this
tender/requisition.
Rated Power
The transformer shall be suitable in all respects to work continuously at the rated power in
accordance to the stated climatic condition.
The transformer shall comply to overload conditions in accordance with IEC 60076 loading
guide.
Rating Power
Design
Cooling
Phase
Frequency
Impedance
Phase connection
HV Winding
LV Winding
Vector Group
Voltage
1000 kVA
Hermetically Sealed, N2 cushion
ONAN
3 Phase
50 Hz
TCVN
Delta
Star with neutral brought out
Dyn11
As per Tender SLD
Temperature Rise
The transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at their rated power without
exceeding the temperature rise limits as follows:
In top oil
In winding
:
:
55oC (MAX)
60oC (MAX)
Page 43
PARKCITY

The temperature rise design for this tender shall be based on 55/60 deg C. The actual
temperature rise shall take into account of the installation ambient condition and be
adjusted accordingly.
Ability to Withstand Short Circuit
The transformer shall be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal effects
associated with short circuit currents when operating on any tapping position including that
corresponding to minimum effective impedance.
It is assumed that full voltage is maintained across the terminals on one side of the
transformer and a short circuit is applied across the other side between phases or between
phase(s) and earth.
INSULATION
The class of winding insulation shall be Class A to IEC 60076 and the temperature rise
shall not exceed 65 oC (measured by resistance).
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES AND PRODUCTION PROCESS
Windings, Winding Insulation and Oil Ducts
Winding shall be disposed concentrically around the magnetic circuit limbs. The winding
assembly of a two-winding transformer consists of an inner LV winding and outer HV
winding. Winding materials shall be Copper or as specified.
Low Voltage Winding
To be made up of full sheet/foil conductor.
High Voltage Winding
To be of multi-layered wound winding.
The inter-turn insulation shall be of high-grade paper and insulation between windings and
to the core shall be cylinders of synthetic bonded paper, pressed board, fibreglass or
equivalent and shall be of high dielectric and mechanical strength. Oil ducts shall be
provided where necessary. Both HV and LV windings shall be of Uniform insulation.
The oil clamping structure and the dimensions of the oil ducts shall be such as not to
impede circulation of oil through the ducts.
The winding shall be designed to reduce to a minimum the out-of-balance forces in the
transformer especially during short circuits.
Drying, Impregnation and Clamping of Coils
Page 44
PARKCITY

Each completed core-winding assembly shall be oven dried before oil impregnation. During
the drying process, coil-clamping pressure shall be adjusted to compensate for insulation
shrinkage so that no further shrinkage will take place after assembly.
Tanking
The transformer shall be hermetically sealed with N2 cushion, radiators design.
Transformer Tanks and Lifting Lugs
Transformer tanks shall be of robust construction and shall be designed to withstand
stresses encountered under service conditions and during transportation.
A drain valve shall be provided at the bottom of the main tank.
Finishes
Before the transformer tank is painted, it is to be shot blasted to near white blasted cleaned
surface finish.
Painting shall as per manufacturer standard to RAL7033.
Cooling Equipment
The transformer shall be designed for ONAN cooling with a corrugated fin tank,
hermetically sealed with N2 cushion, radiators design.
Temperature Indicator
A dial type temperature indicator shall be provided and mounted on the tank exterior. The
indicator shall have contacts for connecting an alarm and trip circuit. Provision shall be
made to allow the indicator to be replaced without breaking the seal of the transformer
tank.
Cable Boxes or Sealing Ends
Each transformer shall be provided with Air-filled three phase cable boxes suitable for the
termination of power cables.
Provision shall be made for earthing the cable box and cable gland. Provision shall be
made to enable the earthing of the neutral terminal of LV winding.
Primary and Secondary Cable boxes must be separated, as common box with barrier are
not acceptable. The position of the tap-changer must be located outside the cable boxes
so that the changing of the tap position does not require any opening of the cable box
cover.
Compound Pressure Gauge
Page 45
PARKCITY

A pressure gauge shall be provided for each transformer to enable the detection of faults
within the transformer. Such gauge shall be of weatherproof design and two contacts with
common point, suitable for the operation of alarm and tripping circuits at 30 volts DC shall
be provided on the transformer.
Standard accessories
The following accessories shall be fitted unless otherwise stated in this tender / requisition.
Top Oil Temperature Indicator with Alarm and Trip contact
-
Thermometer Pocket
Compound (oil pressure) Gauge with Alarm and Trip contact
Pressure Relief Valve (re-sealable type)
Drain Valve on bottom of tank
Filling pipe on tank cover
Oil Level Indicator/Gauge with 1 contact
Stainless Steel Rating and Connection Plate
Off Circuit Tap Changer
Bushings
Test
Every transformer to be subjected to factory routine tests as specified in IEC 60076 before
shipped at manufacturer plant.
Routine Test are as per follows:
Insulation Resistance Measurement
-
Ratio, Vector Group and Phase Measurements
Measurement of Winding Resistance
Measurement of Load Losses
Measurement of No Load Losses and No Load Current
Measurement of Short Circuit Impedance Voltage
Induced Overvoltage Withstand Test
Separate source Voltage Withstand Test
Site Test to be conducted as following unless otherwise stated in this tender / requisition:
Insulation Test
-
Transformer Turns Ratio Test
Functional Testing of protection devices
Accessories
The transformer shall be supplied complete with, but not limited to the following accessories:-
Page 46
PARKCITY

a) Rating and diagram plate

b) Dial-type thermometer
c) Over-temperature actuating relays for alarm and trip, with at least 4 spare normally open
and normally closed contacts.
d) Rollers
e) Anti-vibration mounting
f) Terminal protection
g) Micro-switches at each transformer enclosure doors to trip respective H.V. circuit breaker.
h) Emergency trip button for each transformer
i) Transformer "On" R-Y-B indicating lights (Supply taken from each of the main incoming
side of the L.V. switchboard)
j) B.A.S. indication for Fan on and Fan trip of the transformer force fan
Installation
The works shall comprise the design, manufacturing and routine testing at manufacturers
premises, supply, delivery and site testing.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit overall dimensions and total weights of each of the
transformers to the Engineer for approval.
The Sub-Contractor shall note the size and height of the transformer room indicated on the
Sub-Contract Drawings.
5.2.3 L.V. Switchboard / Distribution Board
General
a)
The Contract covers the provision, installation, testing, commissioning and setting to
work of switchboards and distribution cables as shown on the Drawings.
b)
The switchboard shall be of factory-built assemblies (FBA) of switchgear and control

gear. It shall be of the enclosed multi-cubicle stationary type to be mounted on floor
for indoor use. The switchboard shall be built and assembled under the responsibility
of the manufacturer and conform to the latest edition of B.S. 5486 : Part I and IEC
439. The completed unit being suitable for indoor service on a 230V single phase 2
wire 50 Hz system with solidly earthed neutral and the switchboard and other items of
plant associated with the main supply shall be capable as a whole of withstanding the
electrical and mechanical stresses produced by fault conditions in accordance with
SP Services requirement.
c)
The switchboard shall be built in sections and shall be expandable.
d)
As far as possible, all items and equipment within the switchboards shall be the
products of a single manufacturer. Departure from this Clause will only be granted
after it has been shown conclusively that no single manufacturer carries the range of
equipment called for. In such a case, the number of manufacturers shall then be
limited to a minimum.
Page 47
PARKCITY

e)
All similar items of equipment shall be inter-changeable.
f)
All switchgear and accessories of the switchboard shall comply with B.S. 162, B.S.
5424 Part 1 and B.S. 5419. Enclosure to B.S. 5486 : Part 1 Form 3 shall be provided
for board section. The degree of protection of enclosure shall be in accordance with
IP31 to BS 5490 or IEC 529.
g)
The Contractor shall note that all switchboards and associated equipment
(switchgear, busbar assemblies, etc.) shall be certified for the category of duty
certified. Actual type test certificates issued by an independent and approved testing
authority shall be submitted to the Engineer. The test certificate shall indicate that the
manufacturer has successfully had the proposed design of board, made in Vietnam
and independently tested where the switchboard offered is to be constructed in
Vietnam. Switchboards and associated equipment which do not comply with the
above requirements shall not be considered.
h)
Detailed drawings and electrical control wiring diagrams shall be submitted to the
Project Manager for approval prior to manufacturing. Panel drawings shall show
details of panel construction, interlocks with switchgear, power busbar and cable top
entry and exit details, and label description.
i)
Wiring diagrams shall show details of all wiring (both internal and external) to
switchboards and control panels together with terminal numbers where appropriate
for control panel terminations and external equipment. Such wiring diagrams shall
clearly demonstrate that wiring required to be carried out by others.
j)
The Contractor's attention is specially directed to the need for each of the items to be
adequately packed and protected against damage in transit from the manufacturer's
work to the site. Similarly, on delivery to site, each cubicle shall be properly protected
from damage until all work is completed.
k)
All paint finish shall be of high quality enamel. A minimum of two undercoats shall be
applied and each built-up and flattened separately. The final coat shall be of
approved light colour gloss finish and sufficient body shall be given the paint films so
that the final appearance of the finished units is entirely free from blemishes,
undulations, foreign inclusions, scratches, patterning or any defects whatsoever. The
finish shall be hammer blue stove enamelled to B.S. 381 C. COL 112 externally and
white internally.
l)
Ventilating louvres where required shall be provided on the sides and backs of panels
and shall be of approved design. All louvres shall be secured, and provided with
vermin proof wire mesh.
m)
All panels and cubicles shall be divided internally by sheet metal webs so as to
separate low voltage equipment, as far as possible, from instruments, to prevent the
over-heating of components which are of a more temperature critical nature.
n)
The switchboards shall have protection against ingress of moisture and foreign
bodies of at least IP31 in normal services condition.
o)
The insulation level of the switchboards shall be 660V.
p)
Provision shall be made, where specified and as shown on the Drawings, for
accommodation of the supply metering equipment upon the L.V. switchboards. The
Contractor is responsible for liaising with the Supply Company for installing the
meters.
q)
All terminations shall be shrouded, and those terminals which remain live with
switchboard isolated shall be adequately labelled with cautionary signs. All circuit
Page 48
PARKCITY

shall be provided with removable links/fuses to facilitate isolation, checking and

maintenance.
r)
A general schematic is given in the Drawings, and these shall be read in conjunction
with this Specification.
Type Test
a)
The FBAs, circuit breakers, fuse combination units and contactors shall be type
tested to comply with B.S. 5486, B.S.4752, B.S. 5424 respectively. The short-circuit
tests shall be carried out by an independent testing authority.
b)
Test certificates for each type test complete with reports and drawings showing
enclosure and partitions of the FBAs to demonstrate the segregation of circuits, the
type and thickness of insulation barriers, details of insulating supports and the
clearance of equipment that passed the type tests shall be submitted.
Short Circuit Test and Earth Fault Protection

a)
The following short-circuit type test on the main circuit of FBAs shall be carried out by
independent testing authority in compliance with B.S. 5486 : Part I : 1986 at the value
of short-circuit current as specified :Circuit
Test Current
i)
On
the
outgoing
busbar
trunking/cable connection terminal of
the outgoing unit in accordance with
paragraph (a) of Clause 8.2.3.2.3 of
B.S. 5486 : Part I : 1986.
40 kA for 1 sec. for circuit

breaker. Rated fuse short-circuit
current of 40kA for fuse
combination unit.
ii)
On
the
main
busbars
and
riser/droppers in accordance with
paragraph (b) of Clause 8.2.3.2.3 of
B.S. 5486 : Part : 1986.
40 kA for 1 sec. for circuit below

1600 A and 40kA for 3 sec. For
the circuit of 1600 A and above.
iii)
On the supply terminals of the

outgoing unit in accordance with
paragraph (b) of Clause B 8.2.3.2.3
of B.S. 5486 : Part I : 1986.
40 kA for 1 sec. for the circuit

breaker and 40kA for 0.2 sec. for
fuse combination unit.
b)
During the above three tests, the neutral bars shall also be included to prove their
short-circuit strength at the above test current.
c)
The following short-circuit types test on the circuit breakers and fuse combination
units shall also be carried out by independent testing authority in compliance with
Clause 8.1 of B.S. 4752 : Part 1 : 1977 and Clause 8.2 of B.S. 5419 respectively.
Circuit
Test Current
i)
Rated short-circuit making and

breaking capacities (Circuit breaker
only)
80 kA at 0.25 p.f. (making)

40 kA (breaking)
ii)
Rated short-time withstand current

(circuit breaker)
40 kA for 3 sec.
iii)
Rated
40 kA
fused
short-circuit
current
Page 49
PARKCITY

(fuse combination unit only)

d)
Where earth fault detection is provided, sufficient adjustment shall be allowed to

maintain discrimination between outgoing and incoming circuits, and prevent spurious
tripping due to inherent leakage on long cable runs or remote equipment.
e)
Where circuit breakers are not provided with earth leakage detection, they shall be
arranged to trip to earth fault by ensuring a low earth loop impedance.
Construction
a)
The sheet metal for the build up of the various items shall be specially selected,
deadflat zinc coated mild steel not less than 2mm thick and shall be built up on
substantial framing with all necessary stiffeners, supports and return edges. The
entire panel shall be vermin proof.
b)
A separate, totally enclosed section, at the back of switchboard shall be provided for
the Termination of Measuring and Protection Instruments cable terminals necessary
for remote interface.
c)
All instruments and equipment shall be securely mounted and all internal wiring runs
shall be included and shall be so positioned as to ensure complete accessibility for
servicing purposes.
Internal and control Wiring

a)
All internal wiring shall be PVC insulated, neatly bunched, run on supporting cleats or
insulators and shall be coloured and adequately labelled or sleeves for identification.
All control wiring shall be 1.5mm copper minimum and shall terminate on terminal
boards or strips using the "Klippon" system, and shall incorporate loops to permit the
opening of doors and removal of components for inspection without disconnecting the
cables.
b)
Front access doors shall be provided, and sides of panels shall be removable.
Removable gland plates shall be provided at the top of the switch board with
knockouts or blanked off openings for incoming and outgoing circuits cables.
c)
All doors shall have concealed hinges, and where necessary, shall be interlocked
with the switch mechanism. All doors shall be provided with dust-excluding gasket of
neoprene, or other equal and approved material.
d)
Labels in general shall be made from white "TRAFFOLITE" laminated

white/black/white and suitably engraved with black lettering in English and Chinese.
Exact details of lettering and legends shall be agreed with the Project Manager prior
to manufacture. Labels shall be securely fixed with a minimum of two cadmium 6BA
screws which shall be inserted into tapped holes in the equipment and secured by
locking nuts at the rear.
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

MCCBs shall be four-pole, triple pole or double pole, independent manual closing air break
type. They shall be totally enclosed in a moulded casing formed from an insulating material.
The construction of the casing shall be capable of withstanding the appropriate rated short
circuit current and reasonably rough use without fracture or distortion. The moulded casing
shall have an index of protection not less than IP30.
MCCBs shall have thermal-magnetic tripping mechanism giving a fixed, stable, inverse timecurrent characteristic which cannot be adjusted on site. The operating characteristic shall be
such that:Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)
Page 50
PARKCITY

a)
the time delay on overload tripping shall be inversely proportional to the overcurrents
up to a threshold value of approximately 7 times the rated current.
b)
there shall be no intentional time-delay on overcurrent tripping due to short-circuit or

heavy overcurrents exceeding the threshold value.
The operating characteristics shall be calibrated at 40C.

MCCBs shall be certified, according to BS4752 : Part 1 and the rated short circuit breaking
capacity shall be not less than the prospective short-circuit current which can occur at the
point of its installation or 43 kA at power factor of not exceeding 0.25 lagging.
The MCCBs shall incorporate some positive means to indicate clearly and reliably the ON (or
CLOSE) and the OFF (or OPEN) positions of the contacts. Indications of either positions
shall only occur when the ON or OFF position on every pole have been attained. Such
indication shall be prominently visible to an operator when the device is installed in the normal
manner. When the MCCB is also used for isolation purpose, then an indication of the OFF
position shall occur only when all contacts are also in OFF position and the isolating distance
between contacts in every pole has attained a clearance not less than those specified for
isolators (disconnectors) according to BS 5419.
Residual Current Operated Circuit Breaker (RCCB)
RCCBs shall be of double-pole or four-pole, rated at 30mA, complying with B.S. 4293 : 1983
and having a short circuit breaking capacity of 5 kA or above.
RCCB shall be fitted with overload device.
The tripping operation of the RCCBs shall not involve the amplification of operating residual
current and shall be independent on the supply voltage.
Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
Single pole miniature circuit breakers shall be used for sub-circuit control and protection on all
small power circuits. Three pole breakers shall be used for 3 phase equipment.
M.C.B.'s shall be single pole or three pole only and neutral link switching is not required.
The body and base of the units shall be moulded Bakelite or similar material and the units
shall be sealed after assembly.
The load handling contacts shall be silver/tungsten and the contacts and operating
mechanism so designed as to give a wiping action both at make and break.
The breaker operating mechanism shall be of the trip-free type so designed as to prevent the
load handling contacts from closing on a fault.
Circuit protection against overload and fault conditions shall be provided by means of a
thermal magnetic device designed to give thermal operation on overload and magnetic
operation under fault conditions.
Positions of the breaker operating dolly shall be clearly indicated.
Miniature circuit breakers provided under this Contract comply to B.S. 3871 and have been
tested at an A.S.T.A. approved testing station. All MCB's shall have circuit breaking capacity
not less than the maximum prospective fault levels at the points where the circuit responsible
for selecting and providing the correct type of circuit breakers for the protection of the different
types of circuits.
Page 51
PARKCITY

Incoming MCB of the distribution boards where the feeders are fitted with the Power Grid
(PG) electricity meters shall be of Type 2 M9 to PGs approval.
In the case of miniature circuit breaker being used for the protection of the motor circuit,
others as specified, this shall be of type 3 or type 4 having suitable time delay for motor
operation. Adequate back up protection on the MCB and motor control circuit shall be offered
by the upstream main/submain circuit breaker.
All cable and busbar terminations shall be sweated and tinned prior to connection to MCB
terminals.
Switchgear and Isolator
All fuse switchgear and isolators shall conform to the requirements of B.S. 5419 and shall
have a utilization category of AC23. All contacts shall be fully shrouded and have a breaking
capacity on manual operation as required by the relevant B.S..
Isolators and fuse switchgear shall have mechanical interlocks between the panel door and
the switch operating mechanism so arranged that the panel door may not be opened with the
switch in the 'ON' position. Similarly, it shall not be possible to close the switch with the
cubicle door open; except that provision shall be made within the cubicle for authorized
persons to defeat the mechanical interlock and close the switch with the door in the open
position for test purposes.
Unless otherwise specified, all switchgear shall be flush mounting and be fitted with
mechanical ON/ OFF indicators with operating handles of the semi-flush or telescopic pattern.
Means shall be provided for locking in either the 'ON' or 'OFF' position, where specified.
In TP&N fuse switch and switchfuse units bolted neutral links shall be fitted. For single pole
and neutral switchfuse and isolating switches, the neutral conductor shall be taken through a
bolted link. Where specified on the Drawing, castell key interlock shall be supplied.
Fuses, Carriers and Bases
HRC fuses to B.S. 88 : Part 2, Class Q1 shall be supplied.
The voltage rating shall be 380V 50 Hz to 500V D.C.. The rated breaking capacity of fuses
shall be 80 kA at 415V 50 Hz or 50 kA at 500V D.C..
Fuse bases and carriers shall be of plastic moulded insulating material of an approved make.
Ceramic materials will not be accepted.
All live terminals and contacts shall be effectively shrouded and it shall be possible to change
fuses with the circuit alive, without danger of contact with live metal.
Fuse bases and carriers shall be colour coded, white for isolating link, light green for control
and black for all other fuses, with phase indication.
Fuses and links in the same circuit shall be mounted in adjacent positions in the same row.
Fuses for control and voltmeter shall be mounted on the front of the panel by back-connected
fuse holders.
Current Transformers
Current transformers shall comply with B.S. 3938 and shall be rated for Class B temperature
rise and a primary voltage of 600 Volts.
Current transformers shall be of the epoxy resin encapsulated type and shall be capable of
providing the necessary output to operate the connected protective devices or interfacing
instruments and transducers.
Page 52
PARKCITY

Current transformers for use with measuring instruments shall have rated secondary current
of 5A and rated output suitably matched with the burden of the measuring instruments. The
accuracy class shall be '1' in accordance with B.S. 3938 current transformers for protection
circuits shall be of Class 5P20.
Current transformers with adjustable primary turns will not be accepted.
For dual ratio current transformers, all ratio terminals shall be terminated at a terminal board
and be clearly marked with connections corresponding to the wiring diagrams.
The secondary circuit of each set (R-Y-B-N) of current transformers shall be earthed at one
point only. Means shall be provided for these earth connections to be disconnected by bolted
copper link at a readily accessible position for testing.
Routine test reports as detailed in B.S. 3938 shall be supplied for individual current
transformers with the actual figures provided.
Current transformers provided in plastic casings and of the split core type will not be
accepted. Protective current transformers shall be a short-time rating of 50 kA for three
seconds.
Type tests for magnetizing current and rated accuracy factor shall be supplied for each type
and ratio of current transformer.
Measuring current transformers shall be connected to test terminal blocks. The test blocks
shall be provided with easily removable links and designed to facilitate connection of testing
instruments on load without open circuiting the current transformer.
Protective Relay
Except where otherwise specified, protective relays shall comply with B.S. 142 and shall be of
British origin.
Where plug selection is specified, the design shall be such that the plug setting can be
changed on load without open-circuiting the current transformer, and the highest current
tapping point will automatically be selected when the plug is removed.
For protective, under/over-voltage, trip monitor and trip supervisory relays, draw-out cases
shall be provided for flush mounting and finished in phenolic black. A contact shall be fitted
which shall short circuit the associated current transformer on withdrawal of the relay.
For incomer I.D.M.T. protection relays, three single phase units in one horizontal plane and
accommodated in a common casing shall be provided. Earth fault relay shall be separately
accommodated.
The earth fault relay shall comprise the following features :a)
Current
Setting
10% to 40% of 5 amp

(C.T. secondary rating), adjustable in 7 equal steps.
b)
Time
Setting
1.3 sec. at 10 times

current setting.
c)
Burden
0.75 VA at current setting on lowest tap.
The overcurrent relay shall comprise the following features :a)
Current
Setting
50 to 200% of 5 amp
(C.T. secondary rating), adjustable in 7 equal steps.
Page 53
PARKCITY

b)
Time
Setting
1.3 sec. at 10 times

current setting.
c)
Burden
2 VA at current setting on lowest tap.

3.5 VA at current setting on highest tap.
Relays shall be housed in dust and vermin-proof accessible cases.

Operation indicators shall be provided for each protective element and installed within the
same relay. The relay shall have a common hand-reset device operable without opening the
relay case. A sealing device permitting the use of sealing wire shall be provided preventing
opening of the case.
Dust filters shall be provided in metal cases attached to the relays by screwed bezels and
supplied with removable filter elements.
The relay contacts shall be capable of making and breaking the maximum current which may
occur under fault conditions in the circuit in which they are connected.
Where alternative models or make of relays are offered, the VA burden shall not exceed that
of the specified relay. The Supplier shall furnish full technical data of the relays to enable the
protective setting to be selected.
Ammeters & Voltmeter
Ammeters shall be of accuracy Class 1.5 B.S. 89 and be capable of carrying their full load
current without undue heating and shall not be damaged by the passage of fault currents up
to the maximum fault levels of the switchgear.
All ammeter shall have a continuous overload capability of 120% of the upper limit of the
scale for two hours. The scale shall be 100mm in total length.
Mechanical zero adjustment shall be provided and accessible from the front without
dismantling.
Ammeters shall be of MDI type.
Voltmeters shall be of accuracy Class 1.5 and have expanded scales of 100mm in total
length. The range shall be 300V to 400V and the zero shall be marked.
Voltmeter shall be connected to the incoming side of the power supply through 6 amp HRC
fuses and links.
Power Factor Meter
Power factor indicators shall be of accuracy Class 2.5 having bezel dimension 115 x 155mm.
Ammeter Selector Switch
The ammeter selector switch shall be mounted on the front of the panel and shall be of the
rotary type with make-before-break contacts for selection to read R-Y-B-N marked clearly on
the switch.
Contacts shall be rated for a thermal current of 6 amps. 220V 50 Hz.
Voltmeter Selector Switch
Page 54
PARKCITY

The voltmeter selector switch shall be mounted on the front of the panel and shall be of the
rotary type with break-before-make contacts for selection to measure red-yellow, yellow-blue,
blue-red and red, yellow and blue phase voltages with RY, YB, BR, R-Y-B marked clearly on
the switch.
Push Button Switches
The push button switches shall be comply with and be tested and certified to B.S. 9564.
Push buttons shall be individual flush mounted units with metallic chromium plated and
polished solid brass body and ring, circular in shape and approximately 20mm diameter.
Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks for control wiring shall be rated not less than 20 amps. (as Klippon SAKD600
or similar) and shall clamp the wire securely between two plates secured by a captive screw.
Terminal blocks shall have easily removable copper links to short circuit adjacent terminals or
shall be fitted adjacent terminals or shall be fitted with suitable fuse/fuse holder where
required. Pinch screw type terminal blocks shall not be accepted.
Cables having the same number shall be terminated at adjacent terminals and connected by
means of cable links at the terminal block. The incoming cable cores shall be terminated at
the lower or outer side of the block, the outgoing cable cores at the upper or inner side of the
terminal block, and cable links on any free side.
Terminal blocks at different voltages shall be segregated into groups, distinctively labelled
and provided with permanent rigid barriers. Terminals in groups shall have separate flame
retardant transparent plastic covers. 100% spare terminals shall be provided on each
terminal block.
Indication Lamps
Except where combined push button indication lamps are being offered, all indicating lamps
shall be individual flush mounted units. The indication lamp shall be LED type. LED lamps
shall have chromium plated and polished solid brass body and ring, with metallic threaded
section and shall be circular in shape of approximately 20mm diameter. The LED lamps are
with translucent cap having illuminant of red, yellow, blue, green and white.
Indicating lamps shall be rated to withstand not less than 20% continuous over-voltage.
Alternatively, lamps with series dropping resistors or capacitors shall be provided to reduce
the lamp voltage by 25%.
Lamps shall be well ventilated and the design shall permit removal of cap from the front of the
unit without the need of any special tool.
Control and Auxiliary Relays
Control and auxiliary relays shall be plug-in type, rack mounted, provided with cable
connection sockets and anchored by quick fastening vibration-proof devices.
All contacts shall be double breaking type. Relay coils shall be rated at 220V single phase
A.C. supply and they shall operate between 85% and 110% of the coil rating. Drop out
voltage shall not occur at voltages exceeding 65% of nominal.
Contact elements and operating coils shall be replaceable and be enclosed in transparent
dust-proof plastic case or available for easy inspection.
Each relay shall have a minimum of one pair of normally open and one pair of normally closed
spare contacts.
Page 55
PARKCITY

Latch Relays
Latch relays shall be provided for essential circuits and shall be suitably rated for 220V A.C.
single phase supply. They shall be able to close when subject to a voltage reduction of 85%
of nominal.
When the operating coil of the relay is energized, a spring loaded latch shall hold the contacts
in the closed position. The contact shall remain closed even after the power is removed from
the operating coil. A manual operated relay coil shall be provided to release the contact and
allow the relay to drop out.
Battery And Charger
The Contractor shall supply and install batteries and battery charger systems for the main
switchboards. The duty, rating, operation voltage shall be selected by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer.
The batteries and battery charger system shall be able to cater for the operation of at least 2
Nos. of A.C.B. shunt trip coils and maintain all indication lights of the main switchboards at the
same time without any significant decrease in battery terminal voltage.
Batteries shall be Nickel-Cadmium rechargeable cells of life time for at least 5 years during
normal operation. The batteries under fully charged condition shall be able to maintain 20
times tripping per hour.
The Charger shall be float and boost charge selectable by selecting switch, and shall be
compatible with the battery system.
The charger and battery units in switchboard shall consist of the following :a)
Automatic overload protection.
b)
Automatic surge suppressor.
c)
D.C. ammeter and volt meter.
d)
Fused A.C. input and D.C. output circuits and earth leakage protection by ELCB.
e)
Operating relays and charging indication light.
f)
Loader for battery voltage test.
Automatic Changeover Contactor

The automatic changeover contactor shall be 4-pole and suitably rated for heavy-duty
and tested to the relevant British Standards Specification.
The automatic changeover contactors shall consist of the following basic elements:a)
Main contacts to connect and disconnect the load to and from the sources of power.
b)
Sensing/Supervisory circuits to constantly monitor the condition of normal power

sources/feeder and thus provide the signal necessary for the contacts and related
circuit operation.
c)
Transfer mechanism to affect changeover of the main contacts.
Page 56
PARKCITY

d)
Status indication to show which source of power the load is connected.
e)
Voltage free auxiliary contacts shall be provided for signal interface with lift
installation. All conduit and wiring to lift machine room shall be included.
f)
Voltage free auxiliary contacts shall be provided for starting of the emergency
generator. All necessary conduit and wiring to the Generator shall be included.
Three phase sensing circuits shall be provided. Failure of one or more phases of the incoming
supply, or a reduction in voltage to less than 60% of normal, shall initiate a timing device
adjustable in the range 0 to 15 seconds. If the failure persists at the expiry of this pre-set time
delay, the load shall be automatically disconnected from the mains supply and connected to
the power supply from essential switchboard.
After restoration of the normal supply, the automatic changeover switch shall automatically be
restored to its normal position after a preset period of ten to twenty seconds.
The automatic changeover contactors shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to
ensure that the two sources of supply will not be connected in parallel.
Switchboard Heaters
Each panel of the switchboard shall have bus wiring supplies and anti-condensation heaters.
The buswire shall be energized from a 220V 50Hz single phase supply.
Each segregated panel section and each vertical panel section in a multi-tier cubicle shall be
fitted with panel heaters, isolating switch and HRC fuses. Panels for circuit breakers shall be
fitted with suitably positioned adjustable thermostats for temperature control.
Motor Starting Equipment
All motor starting equipment shall be fully designed and manufactured to B.S. 587, B.S. 4941,
B.S. 5856 and shall be adequately rated for the conditions in which it shall operate.
All starters shall be provided with incoming isolators which shall be mechanically interlocked
with the access doors so that live connections are not exposed when the doors are open.
The isolators shall be interlocked so that before doors open, the isolator must be opened.
The isolators shall in all cases be suitably rated for the full load running current of the motor.
Isolators shall have sufficient auxiliary contacts to isolate all control circuits.
Unless otherwise stated, all starters shall have sufficient provisions and be internally wired for
local and remote "start-stop" control, indications and interlocks.
Each starter shall have two spare sets of normally open auxiliary contacts which shall be
wired to the spare terminal strip for future use.
The type of motor starters shall be of the same manufacture and rating as that of the motor or
of the type and manufacture recommended by the motor manufacturer. In addition, the
method of starting shall conform strictly to the requirements of the Power Supply Company.
Direct-on-line starters shall include the following:-
Main Isolator;
main HRC fuse, rated for the type of starting to be used;
control circuit cartridge fuses;
Page 57
PARKCITY

control circuit neutral link;
heavy duty line contactor fitted with necessary auxiliary and spare contacts for
controls;
control circuit relays;
full set of main and control circuit terminals for all outgoing cables;
single phasing protection and overload protection on all phases;
motor sequencing controller, as shown on the Drawings and all necessary auxiliary
contacts to ensure the stability of the protective switchgear;
all necessary terminals of adequate rating and all necessary internal wiring; and
provision for cable entries.
The following shall be provided on the front door of the starter panels for each starter:-
main isolating switch for motor circuit;
manual/off/auto selector switch or a two-position on/off switch as indicated on the

Drawings;
motor anti-condensation heater switch, where specified;
instrumentation, where specified;
hand reset for protective devices where specified; and
labels as specified by the Engineer.
Star/Delta starter shall be provided with contactors, overload protection, with a minimum
Type 2 Coordination etc., as described for D.O.L. starters, arranged in a manner to ensure
that the star contactor opens before the delta contactor closes. The period of running in star
shall be controlled by an adjustable automatic timing device. Star-delta starter shall be of
closed-transition type.
Contactors
Contactors shall generally comply with B.S. 5424 and B.S. 775. They shall be single or three
poles as necessary fitted with arc shields and designed for front access to all main and
auxiliary contacts. Contactors shall be also front accessible, and unless otherwise stated,
shall be rated at 230V single phase supply with voltage variation as specified in B.S. 5424.
Contacts shall be of the double break butt type, each moving contact being individually spring
loaded. Main fixed and moving contacts shall be silver/cadmium oxide.
The contactor unit shall be so designed as to withstand the motor circuit under fault
conditions. Two spare sets of NC and NO contacts shall be provided. Provisions shall also be
made in the contactors to enable additional auxiliary blocks to be added for future use.
Overload Relays
Overload relays shall be thermally operated, single pole for single phase motor and three pole
for three phase motor. They shall consist of a housing made of special high temperature
resisting materials, containing a bi-metal element and a tripping device. The tripping device
shall be equipped with a changeover contact rated at not less than 45 amps..
Page 58
PARKCITY

The relay shall be temperature compensated, and where necessary, shall incorporate
delayed feature with saturated current transformers suitable for heavy duty starting of pumps
and fans, etc.
A hand reset push button shall be supplied for each unit.
Push Button Switches
Unless specified otherwise, push buttons shall be colour coded as follows:Green
White
Red
Blue
Black
Yellow
start motor
open valve
stop motor
close valve
reset protection/alarm, lamp test
accept alarm
Where shown on the Drawings, lock-off means shall be provided; all locks shall be operated
by a master key system, and 5 Nos. of master keys shall be supplied.
Terminal Blocks
Terminal block for control wiring shall be rated not less than 20 amp. (as "Klippon" SAKD600
or similar) between two plates secured by a captive screw.
Indicating Lamps
Indicating lamps shall be colour coded as follows:Green
Amber
White
Red
Blue
Motor running, circuit breaker ON

Supply available
Valve open, trip circuit breaker
Motor tripped, circuit breaker OFF
Valve closed
Indicating lamps shall be individual flush mounted units and LED type. Lamps shall have
chromium plated and polished solid brass body and ring with metallic threaded section and
shall be circular in shape of approx. 20mm dia. Indicating lamps shall be rated to withstand
not less than 20% continuous over-voltage.
Motors
Motors for all fans pumps, refrigeration units and all item of equipment provided by this
Contract requiring a motor shall be entirely suitable for the duty. A margin of not less than
15% shall be provided between the continuous rating of the motors (without overloading) and
the maximum power absorbed by the item of equipment (as installed) under its most arduous
operating condition, taking account of the characteristics of the driving machine.
All motors up to 30 kW shall have full load efficiency of not less than 85% and pf of not less
than .85. Motors of rating greater than 30 kW shall have full load efficiency of not less than
90% and pf of not less than .85.
All motors shall be suitable for use in the temperature and atmospheric conditions that will
All motors shall be continuously rated in accordance with B.S. 5000 according to rating, and
shall be insulated with Class F materials.
Page 59
PARKCITY

Motors shall be of Totally Enclosed Fan Ventilated (TEFV) type to IP54. Motors installed
outdoor shall be to IP55.
Motors shall be manufactured suitable for allowable fluctuations of the supply voltage, and the
Contractor shall ensure that motors exhibit starting torque characteristics suitable for the load
and type of starting.
Motors up to 2 kW shall be suitable for 220V single phase 50 Hz operation; motors above 2
kW shall be 380V/220V.
Motors up to 3.5 kW shall be of the squirrel cage type suitable for D.O.L. starting. Starting
current shall not exceed six times full load current.
Motors exceeding 3.5 kW shall be started in such a way that the starting current shall not
exceed two times full load current. Notwithstanding the details shown on the Drawings,
motors exceeding 55 kW shall be of type approved in writing by the appropriate power supply
company, and shall have maximum starting current of two times the full load current.
Where a motor is required to have a thrust bearing, the effect of shaft expansion shall be
reduced to a minimum.
Motors shall be suitable for operations in the vertical or horizontal position as shown on the
Drawings.
The type of motor, motor enclosure, and cooling requirements shall be as specified on the
Drawings. Unless dictated by practical reasons, and approved by the Engineer, motor
speeds shall not exceed 1,500 r.p.m. synchronous speed.
All motors shall operate without vibration. Wherever possible, the motors shall be mounted on
a common bedplate with the machine being driven and the Contractor shall provide antivibration insulation material for the Main Contractor to incorporate into the builder's work
bases.
The Contractor shall provide holding down bolts required for the fixing of motors. Should the
bolts be required to be sunk in concrete bases, the Contractor shall be responsible for the
supply of all necessary details and fixings in adequate time.
Motors above 5 kW shall be provided with anti-condensation heater, and the control circuit
shall be arranged such that the heater is off when the starter is 'ON' and vice versa. Heaters
shall be wired from the M.C.C.
Drive types shall be generally as stated in the Specification for the relevant equipment or as
indicated on the Drawings.
All motors having 'V' belt drive shall be mounted on slide-rails with adjustable bolts of ample
length for the drive. All motors and drives shall be accurately turned and provided with
pulleys or couplings as required for the drive. All motors and drives shall be accurately
aligned with the driven machines. Type and number of belts for the motor must be approved
by the Project Manager.
Terminal boxes shall be of such dimensions as will ensure access to the terminals and allow
for the supply leads.
Each box shall be fitted for normal bottom or top cable entry. With exception of motors with
ratings less than 1 kW, all boxes shall be capable of being turned to a further three positions,
90 apart without affecting the terminal base or terminals.
Page 60
PARKCITY

Motors above 7.5 kW shall be provided with suitably sized tinned brass cable sockets.
Sockets shall be in accordance with B.S. 91. The type of cable terminations shall be as
shown on the Drawings.
Motors smaller than 3.5 kW shall be provided with three terminals and for motors above 3.5
kW there shall be six terminals. Separate earthing terminals shall be fitted.
On all motors over 25 kg in weight, lifting eyes or lugs shall be supplied.
Stator cores shall be pre-built from low loss electrical steel sheet, and accurately machined on
inner and outer diameters to ensure a correct and concentric air gap. Rotor cores shall be
assembled from stamping of similar material to that used for the stators, and the squirrel cage
winding shall be die-cast aluminium. The core shall be shrunk on to a high grade steel shaft,
and the complete rotor shall be dynamically balanced.
Stators shall be a rigid one piece grey/normalized iron casting. Stator coils shall be
preformed and wound with polyester enamelled wire. Slot insulation shall consist of a solid
polyester film or tough rag-base electrical paper bonded to a polyester film with high
dielectrical and mechanical strength. Similar insulation shall be placed between the coil sides
in the slot and inserted between phase groups in the end winding. The completely wound
stator shall be immersed in polyester insulating varnish and then baked to render it resistant
to moisture. Leads shall be insulated and shall not deteriorate in extremes of climate.
Pressed steel or aluminium deflectors shall be provided to guide the air flow over the stator
windings, and provide additional protection for the latter.
Motors up to 30 kW shall be axially ventilated having fans inside the non-drive end drawing air
through vent openings in the lower side of the drive end bracket, and exhaust through similar
openings in the non-drive bracket. Larger motors shall have radial ventilation. Fans cast
integral with the motor shall draw air in through openings in each end bracket and exhaust it
through vents in the side of the stator frame.
Plastic fans and pressed fan guards shall be provided on motors of 7 kW or smaller. Larger
motors shall have die-cast aluminium fans and guards. Fans shall be keyed to shaft and
retained end wise against a shoulder by a circlip - fans shall not work loose.
Slip rings shall be continuously rated and shall be of cupronickel with a large wearing depth.
Slip rings shall generally be externally mounted.
All motor components shall be subjected to the most rigid inspection during manufacture, and
completed motors shall be fully tested to comply with B.S. 5000: Part 99. Test certificates of
all motors shall be submitted in duplicate to the Consulting Engineer before delivery of the
motor to site. Sound pressure levels 1m from the machine surface as measured on "no load"
shall be tested to B.S. 4999 : Part 109.
Rigid Metallic Conduits
All conduits shall be heavy gauge galvanized welded steel complying with B.S. 4568 : 1970,
Class 4. No conduit shall be less than 20mm diameter and cables drawn in shall not be
greater than the appropriate number permitted in the current edition of the Singapore
Standards CP:5 Code of Practice for wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings. Runs
between draw-in boxes shall be limited to 12m.
Flexible steel conduit and solid type adaptors shall comply with B.S. 731 : Part 1 with a
separate earth wire exposed for earth continuity. In outdoor or moist areas, the pliable
conduit shall be of the metallic watertight pattern, PVC oversheathed. All pliable conduits
shall only be used for final connections to equipment unless otherwise specified.
All conduits shall be free from rust patches or mechanical damage.
Page 61
PARKCITY

The conduit in flush installations shall be chased to give at least 12 mm of plaster or cement
cover over the conduit.
Conduit routes, particularly where visible, shall be arranged in a neat and inconspicuous
manner. Due consideration shall be given to the other services and the selected routes shall
ensure the necessary clearances between the electrical services and other service lines.
Conduits shall be kept clear of gas, steam, oil, water and process pipes, by at least 150 mm.
Gas pipes shall not be in the same duct or builders work trench.
All draw boxes and junction boxes shall be of ample size to permit the cables being drawn in
and out. They shall be of malleable iron or heavy gauge sheet steel hot dip galvanised. All
circular boxes shall be provided with long spouts, internally threaded, incorporating a shoulder
for the proper butting of the conduit.
Standard circular conduit boxes shall be installed at all lighting points except where conduits
terminate at fixed lighting fittings having provision for direct conduit entry (eg bulkhead
fittings). At lighting switch points the conduit shall terminate in a suitable box provided with
internal adjustable lugs to permit backplates or switch grids being attached to them by metal
threaded screws. All lids for draw boxes, etc, shall be of heavy gauge welded steel pattern.
Overlapping lids shall be provided for flush boxes.
The ends of all conduits shall be cut square and shall butt solidly into the conduit fittings.
Where they terminate in switchgear, fuseboards, trunking, adaptable boxes or other nonspouted enclosures, etc, they shall be connected thereto by means of smooth bore male
brass bushes, serrated washers and sockets. The length of thread cut on a conduit shall be
kept to a minimum consistent with the above requirements. Running threads will not be
permitted for couplings. An approved type of conduit coupler shall be used where necessary.
In all cases castellated locknuts shall be used and the use of ring bushes and locknuts shall
not be permitted.
Where flush conduits terminate in a surface mounted distribution board this shall be by means
of a flush mounted adaptable box with direct bushed rear access to the distribution board.
The position of draw-in boxes shall be arranged so that they will always be readily accessible
and an adequate number of draw-in boxes shall be provided in a conduit run to ensure that
cables can be installed or removed without damage. The number provided shall not be less
than one every 9 metres in a straight run of conduit. Where runs include numerous bends,
sets or other restrictions, the number of cables to be appropriately reduced.
Efficient means shall be provided to seal boxes and fittings against the ingress of dirt during
the building construction.
All conduit fittings installed exterior to buildings shall be fitted with efficient permanent gaskets
in order to render these watertight. All conduits shall be satisfactorily painted.
Conduit boxes shall also be compound filled if the installed conditions are such as to require
this.
The ends of all conduits shall be carefully removed of all burrs or sharp edges on the inside
after the screw threads have been cut. All dirt, paint or oil on the screwed threads of the
conduit and conduit fittings must be carefully removed and the threads shall be coated with
metallic aluminium paint immediately prior to erection. After all the fittings and conduit have
been screwed together, the junction between the conduit and conduit fittings shall be painted
with metallic aluminium paint, bitumastic aluminium paint, or cold galvanised paint. Cold
galvanised paint can be used instead of aluminium paint where galvanised conduit is
specified. All bends and sets are to be made on site to suit conditions and not more than two
right angle bends will be permitted without the interposition of a draw box. No tees, elbows,
sleeves or manufactured bends, either of inspection or solid type, will be permitted.
Page 62
PARKCITY

Draw wires are to be installed in those conduit installations where the cabling is to be installed
later by others as, for example, telephone cabling.
Where conduits are run in false ceilings, they shall be fixed to the undersides of the structural
slab by means of spacer bar saddles. Fixing to the hangers or framework of the false ceilings
is not permitted. The spacing of fixings shall be the same as for surface installations.
In no circumstances shall any conduit be erected in such a manner as to form a 'U' shape
without a drain/outlet so that any condensation can be allowed to drain from the conduit
system.
Conduit fixed to structural steelwork shall be secured by means of purpose made
brackets/clips.
These clips/brackets shall be of the clamp type and structural steelwork shall not be drilled or
welded without Approval.
Brackets and/or clips to hold conduits shall not be fixed to pipework or ductwork.
The entire conduit system shall be electrically continuous throughout and must form a
completed bonded system with the whole being efficiently earthed.
All conduit outlet boxes and junction boxes shall be malleable iron and of standard circular
pattern with spout to B.S. 31.
Standard circular pattern boxes shall be used with conduits up to and including 25mm
diameter. Rectangular pattern adaptable boxes are to be used for conduits of 32mm diameter
and larger. For the drawing-in of cables, standard pattern through boxes shall be used. All
conduit boxes shall be galvanized finish.
All conduit boxes shall be provided with gaskets and lids. Adaptable boxes shall be of mild
steel of not less than 2.50mm with galvanized finish. Boxes shall be not less than 50mm deep
and of such dimensions as will enable the largest size cable, for which the conduit run is
suitable, to be drawn in without excessive bending of the cables. Lids of the same gauge with
brass fixing screws shall be provided. All such boxes shall be drilled for holes according to
the conduit entries required.
Socket outlet boxes shall be constructed of sheet steel, galvanized finish and shall comply
with B.S. 3676 and 1363. Surface mounting type outlet boxes shall be used.
Rigid Non-Metallic Conduits
All rigid non-metal conduit shall be manufactured and comply with BS 4607. No conduit shall
be smaller than 20 mm diameter and and cables drawn in shall not be greater than the
appropriate number permitted in the current edition of the Singapore Standards CP:5 Code of
Practice for wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings" with the additional requirement of
10% spare space capacity for future possible additional cabling.
All conduits shall be clean and free from mechanical damage.
The conduit in flush installations shall be chased to give at least 12 mm of plaster or cement
cover over the conduit.
Conduit routes, particularly where visible, shall be arranged in a neat and inconspicuous
manner. Due consideration shall be given to the other services and the selected routes shall
ensure the necessary clearances between the electrical services and other service lines.
Conduits shall be kept clear of gas, steam, oil, water and process pipes, by at least 150 mm.
Gas pipes shall not be in the same duct or builders work trench.
Page 63
PARKCITY

All draw boxes and junction boxes shall be of ample size to permit the cables being drawn in
and out. They shall be constructed of PVC to BS 4607. Standard circular conduit boxes shall
be installed at all lighting points. All standard circular conduit boxes are to be provided with
insert clips which shall provide additional support for heavy pendants and fluorescent
luminaires to take the weight of the luminaires together with the heat conduction and possible
deformation of the box due to this heating effect.
The ends of all conduit shall be cut square and shall butt into the female hole in the
junction/outlet boxes and this push fit shall be bonded with a waterproof adhesive.
Where circular, rectangular, switch and socket boxes and adaptable boxes are provided
without female extension spouts the conduits shall be made off into a female thread to plain
push in adaptor which shall be connected to the conduit boxes with male screw bushes. The
push-in adaptor shall be bonded with a waterproof adhesive into non-metallic conduit.
Where flush conduits terminate in a surface mounted distribution board this shall be by means
of a flush mounted adaptable box with direct bushed rear access to the distribution board.
The position of draw-in boxes shall be arranged so that they will always be readily accessible
and an adequate number of draw-in boxes shall be provided in a conduit run to ensure that
cables can be installed or removed without damage. The number provided shall not be less
than one every 9 metres in a straight run of conduit.
Efficient means shall be provided to seal boxes and fittings against the ingress of dirt during
the building construction.
All conduit fittings installed exterior to the buildings shall be fitted with efficient permanent
gaskets in order to render these watertight. Conduit boxes shall also be compound filled if the
installed conditions are such as to require this. No tees, elbows, sleeves or manufactured
bends, either of inspection or solid type will be permitted.
Draw-wires are to be installed in those conduit installations where the cabling is to be installed
later by others as for example telephone cabling.
Where conduits are run in false ceilings, they shall be fixed to the undersides of the structural
slab by means of spacer bar saddles. Fixing to the hangers or framework of the false ceilings
is not permitted. The spacing of fixings shall be the same as for surface installations.
In no circumstances shall any conduit be erected in such a manner as to form a "U" shape
without a drain/outlet so that any condensation can be allowed to drain from the conduit
system.
Conduit fixed to structural steelwork shall be secured by means of purpose made
brackets/clips. These clips/ brackets shall be of the clamp type and structural steelwork shall
not be drilled or welded without Approval of the Engineer.
Brackets and/or clips to hold conduits shall not be fixed to pipework or ductwork.
Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be heavy gauge with the following wall thickness (nominal) for
the following sizes:Outside diameter of conduit (mm)
Wall thickness nominal (mm)
20;
25;
32;
38;
50
1.8;
1.9;
2.5;
2.5 ;
3.2
Page 64
PARKCITY

Cable Trunking
Cable trunking shall be manufactured in minimum lengths of 1.8m from 1.60mm epoxy coated
hot dipped galvanized sheet steel. Covers shall be of the quick-fix pattern with centre captive
screw or spring-on type.
Fixing arrangement employing self-tapping screws shall not be accepted. Trunking shall be
terminated with flanges; which shall be bolted direct to distribution boards, or apparatus.
Connecting pieces shall be used and bolted with cadmium plated mushroom head steel
screws, nuts and shake-proof washers.
Each joint shall have a copper bond bolted to each adjacent trunking to ensure electrical
continuity. All frayed and sharp edges shall be removed from trunking before installation.
All cable trunking shall conform to BS 4678 Part 1. All trunking shall be of not less than 16
gauge corrosion resistant steel and the thickness of the body and cover shall be in
accordance with Table 1 of Singapore Standards CP-249. It shall have a removable lid
throughout its length. Openings for conduit connections shall be provided as required.
Suitable units shall be used for branch connections, bends, alterations in section, blank ends,
cable retaining devices. Where cables leave or enter the trunking they shall be suitably
supported by a trunking support section trimmer to prevent damage or undue stress on the
cable insulation.
Where multi-section trunking is used the individual partition along the trunking shall be
continuous throughout including intersections, tee sections, cross over sections.
Where trunking passes through walls and ceilings, the cover shall be solidly fixed up to 150
mm either side of the wall.
No trunking shall be installed with the cover in an inaccessible position.
Where trunking is installed in vertical locations all cables in the trunking shall be adequately
supported at 900 mm with pin racks or staggered insulated tie-off studs to support the weight
of the cables.
Trunking shall not be installed with the cover on the underside unless approved. Where this
is Approved suitable metal cable retainers shall be used to prevent the cables from sagging
both during and after installation.
The complete trunking systems shall be electrically continuous and this shall be ensured by
the provision of copper earth continuity links which shall be provided at each and every joint in
the trunking. These links shall conform to the minimum specification of being 40 mm long x
10 mm wide x 2 mm thick. This electrical earthing shall only be a bonding earth and is not the
main electrical circuit protective conductor.
Joints in metal trunking shall occur at the normal production length distances and cut lengths
shall only be permitted at changes of direction and junctions.
The covers of the trunking shall be secured by either a plastic button and spring device or
screws and bolts securing covers to the trunking. These cover fixings shall be arranged so
that damage of cables cannot occur from the fixing method.
When trunking is being sized in accordance with CP-249, allowance in the loss of capacity of
trunking shall be made for cable supports, dividing plates, intersection units together with an
additional future design capacity of 10% spare space.
Fire barriers shall be installed at all locations where trunking is routed between floors and
where trunking is routed in horizontal locations through established fire barriers. This barrier
Page 65
PARKCITY

shall consist of a fire resistant plate to give the fire resistant time factor required. This plate
shall be supported on a metal angle mounted within the trunking and the plate shall be cut to
suit the cross sectional area of cables within the trunking.
Where trunking is directly connected to the distribution boards this shall be carried out using a
splayed flanged adaptor to allow the cables to enter the distribution board/switchgear.
Where cables enter or exit trunking the opening shall be trimmed with a PVC bushing to the
slot or trunking end.
Non-Metal Trunking
All cable trunking shall be high impact PVC finished either white, grey or black and shall
conform to BS 4678 Part 4. All trunking shall be of extruded section and the cover shall be a
snap type closure, removal shall be achieved by the insertion of a wide blade screwdriver
between the cover and the body of the trunking. This cover shall be removable throughout its
length. Openings for conduit connectors shall be provided as required.
At trunking joints connecting sleeves shall be provided. These sleeves shall be 200 mm long
and shall be inserted within the trunking and act in the form of a friction fit within the trunking.
Should it prove necessary to retain this sleeve they shall be held in place with PVC adhesive.
Suitable units shall be used for branch connections, bends alterations in section, blank ends,
cable retaining devices. These devices shall be factory fabricated but should special sections
be required this shall be constructed using the standard trunking length and fabricated with a
PVC adhesive and solvent. The factory fabricated special sections shall be 90 bends, 45
bends, Tee sections, cross over sections, right angle bend using 45 mitres to achieve a 90
change in direction.
Where cables leave or enter the trunking they shall be suitably supported by a trunking
support section trimmer to prevent damage or undue stress on the cable insulation.
Where multi-section trunking is used the individual partition along the trunking shall be
continuous throughout including intersections, Tee sections, crossover sections.
Where trunking passes through walls and ceilings, the cover shall be solidly fixed up to 150
mm either side of the wall.
No trunking shall be installed with the cover in an inaccessible position.
Where trunking is installed in vertical locations all cables in the trunking shall be adequately
supported at 900 mm with pin racks or staggered insulated tie-off studs to support the weight
of the cables.
Trunking shall not be installed with the cover on the underside unless Approved. Where this
is Approved suitable PVC cable retainers shall be used to prevent the cables from sagging
both during and after installations.
When trunking is being sized in accordance with the IEE Regulations for Electrical
installations, 15th Edition allowance in the loss of capacity of trunking shall be made for cable
supports, dividing plates, intersection units together with an additional future design capacity
of 10% spare space.
Fire barriers shall be installed at all locations where trunking is routed between floors and
where trunking is routed in the horizontal locations through established fire barriers. At the
location of a fire barrier the PVC trunking shall convert into a steel trunking and within this
trunking a fire resistant plate to give the fire resistant time factor required. This plate shall be
Page 66
PARKCITY

supported on a metal angle mounted within the trunking and the plate shall be cut to suit the
cross-sectional area of cables within the trunking.
Where PVC trunking is directly connected to the distribution boards this shall be carried out
using a splayed flanged adaptor to allow the cables to enter the distribution board/switchgear.
Where cables enter or exit trunking, the opening shall be trimmed with a PVC bushing to the
slot or trunking end.
Underfloor Outlet Boxes
Floor outlet boxes shall be rectangular section with lids and entry sockets for either underfloor
ducts or conduits. The lids shall be arranged for carpet inserts with segregation for services
outlets.
The boxes shall be two or three section as called for on the drawings and shall conform to all
local regulations as necessary.
The boxes shall be arranged with variable height to suit the floor screeds specified and for
levelling purposes. Boxes shall be complete with all necessary segregation pieces for all
services to comply with IEE regulations.
Boxes shall be manufactured in 16 swg zinc-coated steel and be complete with power outlet
plates and sockets, telephone outlet plates and/or data outlet plates as required.
Skirting Trunking
Skirting trunking shall be manufactured from zinc coated sheet steel and fitted with steel
partitions to provide two/three compartments, ie, telecommunications/data and power, from
top to bottom respectively.
The centre or power compartment shall be sized to accept standard 13 ampere socket
outlets.
The overall dimensions of the trunking shall be 150 mm high by 38 mm deep, manufactured
in nominal 2 metre lengths. The trunking body and cover shall be manufactured from 1.2 mm
and 1.6 mm respectively nominal thickness sheet steel, finished in metallic silver.
Each trunking length shall incorporate a cover retaining strap, fixing bridge, back connecting
plate and plated mushroom head steel fixing screws with shakeproof washers.
Factory manufactured trunking components shall be used wherever possible and where
appropriate, as follows:
-
Internal and external bends, rear and front entry tees, back entry units, square end
and chamfered end caps either left or right handed, base entry units, trunking and
conduit box adaptors, screening saddles and accessory mounting covers, etc.
Site manufactured components will not be permitted unless Approved.
Electrical accessories shall be fitted where required, by cutting the trunking cover and
inserting a 250 mm long accessory cut out cover. These covers shall be supplied
pre-punched by the manufacturer with suitable accessory mounting cut out(s).
Where telephone outlets are required, these shall be mounted in the same manner as the
power outlets, although to maintain the integrity of the wiring compartments, the partition shall
be cut away and fitted with a suitable screening saddle.
Page 67
PARKCITY

The complete trunking system shall be electrically continuous and this shall be ensured by the
provision of copper earth continuity links which shall be provided at each and every joint in the
trunking. These earthing links shall only be a bonding connection and shall not constitute the
main electrical circuit protective conductor.
Joints in the trunking shall occur at the normal production length distances and cut lengths
shall only be permitted at changes of direction and junctions.
Where trunking passes through walls and partitions, the cover shall be cut on either side at
150 mm from the wall or partition.
Where trunking passes through a fire wall, the wiring compartments shall be sealed with
suitable fire resisting barriers to maintain the integrity of the fire rating.
Cable Trays
Armoured cables running horizontally at high level shall be supported by perforated cable
trays. Trays shall be not less than 1.60mm mild steel, galvanized finish.
Trays shall be supported from the rib of structural slab, beams, etc., by mild steel rods,
galvanized, and not less than 15mm in diameter, with underslung steel angle supports.
PVC Insulated Cables

PVC insulated cables shall consist of copper conductors, flame retardant and termite repellant
PVC insulated to C.M.A. Standards and to B.S. 6004. Cables for three phase and single
phase circuits shall be 450V/750V grade.
The current carrying capacity shall be in accordance with 16th Edition of the I.E.E.
Regulations and shall be limited to the specified voltage drop. Minimum size of cables shall
be as follows unless otherwise specified.
Control wiring
Lighting wiring
Socket outlet wiring
:
:
:
1.5mm
1.5mm
2.5mm
Flexible Cords
Flexible cords shall be flame retardant and termite repellant PVC sheathed with copper
conductors 300V/500V grade to B.S. 6500. Minimum size of cord is 1.50mm.
PVC and XLPE Insulated Steel Wire Armoured Cables
PVC Insulated Steel Wire Armoured cables (PVC, SWA & PVC) and XLPE insulated steel
wire armoured cables (XLPE, SWA & PVC) shall be 600V/1000V grade complying to B.S.
6346 : 1987 and B.S. 5467 respectively. Multi-core with each conductor of the same cross
sectional area. The cores of these cables shall be high annealed copper conductors
complying with B.S. 6360 : 1981.
The insulated cores shall be colour coded and shall be sheathed with PVC which shall serve
as a bedding for galvanized single steel wire armouring. The armouring shall be served with
an outer PVC sheath.
PVC shall be flame retardant where installed directly in the ground or underground ducts or
as otherwise specified.
Page 68
PARKCITY

Cables shall be terminated in a gland fitted with an armour clamp. The gland body shall be
provided with an internal conical sealing to receive the armour clamping cone and a clamping
nut which shall secure the armoured clamping wires tightly between the armour cone and
conical armour seating. The spigot on the gland body shall be threaded to suit standard
conduit accessories. A PVC shroud shall be fitted to cover the entire gland body. All cable
gland shall be complete with a copper earth connection tag which shall be bolted to the metal
surface where it terminated.
The minimum internal bending radius shall not be less than eight times the overall cable
diameter.
Where cables are run horizontally, they shall be properly supported on perforated cable trays
and cleated at intervals of not exceeding 2m directly to the tray. Where cables are installed in
vertically, they shall be cleated at distances not exceeding 1m. when cables are run in
protected areas, they shall be protected with metal trunking. The cable tray and metal
trunking shall be supported with rigid metal brackets.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the off loading and handling of the cables on site and
shall ensure that cables are new and delivered to site on new drums and properly protected
against mechanical damage and loss with the manufacturers seals still intact. Partly used
drums of cable or cable which has already been used elsewhere shall not be acceptable
unless special approvals is given by the Architect in writing.
Fire resistant cables (Low smoke zero Hexogen over sheathed cable) shall comply with B.S.
6387 and IEC 331 and shall be tested in accordance with IEC 332-1 and 754-1. MICA tape
fire barrier, insulation of XLPE, EPR or other special fire resistant compound with continuous
temperature rating of min. 85C and an extruded oversheath of fire retardant low smoke PVC
or polyethylene in orange or black colour. The minimum size of each conductor shall be
2
1.5mm .
Current rating shall be calculated in accordance with IEC 287. All fire resistant cables shall be
accepted by the Fire Services Department.
PVC Insulated Copper Cored PVC Sheathed Cables
PVC Insulated Copper Cored PVC Sheathed Cables (PVC & PVC) shall be 600V/1000V
grade complying to B.S. 6346 : 1987 multi-core with each conductor of the same cross
sectional area. The cores of these cables shall be high annealed copper conductors
complying with B.S. 6360 : 1981. The PVC insulated cores shall be color coded and shall be
sheathed with PVC complying with the requirements for type T11 compound as specified in
B.S. 6746.
All PVC shall be flame retardant where installed directly in the ground or underground ducts
or as otherwise specified.
Cables shall be terminated in a gland fitted with a PVC clamp. The gland body shall be
provided with an internal conical seal to receive the PVC sheath and a clamping nut which
shall secure the clamping cone firmly to the PVC sheath. The spigot on the gland body shall
be threaded to suit standard conduit accessories. A PVC shroud shall be fitted to cover the
entire gland body.
The minimum bending radius shall be not less than eight times the overall cable diameter.
Where cables are run horizontally, they shall be properly supported on perforated cable trays
and cleated at intervals of not exceeding 2m directly to the tray. Where cables are run in
protected areas, they shall be protected with metal trunking. The cable tray and metal
trunking shall be supported with rigid metal brackets.
Page 69
PARKCITY

The Contractor shall be responsible for the off loading and handling of the cables on site and
shall ensure that cables are new and delivered to site on new drums and properly protected
against mechanical damage and loss with the manufacturers seals still intact. Partly used
drums of cable of cable which has already been used elsewhere shall not be acceptable
unless special approvals is given by the Architect in writing.
Spare Parts
Each unit shall be provided with a full set of spare parts which shall be handed over to the
Employer intact at the end of the Defects Liability Period.
The list of spare parts shall be as recommended by the equipment supplier and shall be
provided over and above all other spares required for maintenance and repairs during the
Defects Liability Period.
The list of spare parts shall form part of the equipment acceptance process and no item of
equipment will be accepted unless the certified list of spares is submitted in accordance with
the Submissions Clause of this Section.
All spares shall be handed over to the Employer in purpose made lockable galvanized steel
cabinets with the words "Spare Parts for ......" and the equipment name and reference number
stencilled on the lid. Inside each cabinet in a clear plastic waterproof folder shall be a
complete spares catalogue for the respective equipment with re-order numbers clearly
defined.
Except the spare parts recommended by the supplier, the following spare parts shall be
provided by contractor handover.
a)
20% of MCB of switchboard
b)
10% of control relay of switchboard
c)
two sets of LED indicating lamp
L.V. Transformer
If extra low voltage supply is required for the control panel, step down transformer shall be
provided as per this specification.
All transformers shall be totally enclosed, designed, manufactured and tested in accordance
with B.S. 171 and suitable for use in tropical countries having ambient temperature up to
40C, and relative humidity up to 100%.
Two (2) 1 Taps below and above normal shall be provided and the following phase
connection shall apply for the 3 phase transformer:
a)
b)
c)
H.V. Winding
L.V. Winding
Vector Group Symbol
:
:
:
Star
Star
Y/Yn
Termination shall be suitable for connection by PVC cables in conduit or PVC/SWA/PVC

cables.
The transformer shall be supplied and completed with, but not limited to, the following
accessories.
a)
Rating and diagram plate to B.S. 171
b)
Lifting lugs and covers.
Page 70
PARKCITY
c)
Earthing terminals.
d)
Cable terminal box.

The Contractor shall submit at the time of tender values for Cu and Fe losses, impedance at
75C on principal tapping and efficiency etc.
Cable Bushings
In certain places, where cable pass through floors, walls or other partitions, bushings of an
approved type shall be supplied and set in position by the Contractor; where necessary, split
bushings may be used for convenience in running out cables.
After running and cleating the cables, the bushings must be thoroughly grouted in or
otherwise securely fixed in position and the space between the cables and the bushings
completely filled in with a fire-resisting material, approved by the Fire Services Department of
Hong Kong, and which has no deterious effect on the cable sheathing or serving.
Emergency Push-Button
Push button shall be provided near each motor positions for emergency and lock off use.
These shall be normally-closed, latch-in"stop" units, watertight and suitable for surface
mounted on wall or metal surface, as appropriate. The enclosure shall be cast iron with a
gasket between plate and box; the push button apertures shall be sealed by flexible PVC
gaskets.
The button shall be red in colour and engraved with the words "STOP". The latching device
shall restrict the push button return movement until it is released by counter clockwise
rotation.
Lock-off buttons shall be installed at 1350mm above ground level, and labelled.
Volt-Free Contactors (Dry Contacts)
"Volt-Free" contact shall be provided as shown in the point schedule and on the Drawings.
They shall comprise a pair of contacts operated directly by the equipment but electrically
separated such that no potential derived from the equipment appears at the contacts. Voltfree contacts shall also be used to complete external control, alarm or indication circuits.
Kilowatt Hour Meter
3 phase 4 wire kilowatt hour meters shall be provided to the Motor Control Panel as shown on
the Drawings. It shall be of a type that is acceptable by Power Supply Company.
Hour Run Meter
Hour run meters shall be provided for the MVAC equipment / MCC panel as shown on the
Drawings.
Hour run meters shall be flush mounted and of the five digit type. It shall be suitable for
380V/220V 50Hz supply. A mechanical reset push button shall be provided.
Locally Fabricated Control Equipment
The following paragraphs governs the constructional aspect of all equipment having to be
fabricated locally.
The sheet metal for the build up of the various items shall be specially selected, dead flat mild
steel not less than 1.50mm thick for length less than 2m and 2.00mm thick for length greater
Page 71
PARKCITY

than 2m. The panel shall be built up on substantial framing with all necessary stiffeners and
supports. The entire panel shall be vermin proof.
All instruments and equipment shall be securely mounted and all internal wiring runs shall be
included and shall be so positioned as to ensure complete accessibility for servicing
purposes.
All internal wiring shall be PVC insulated, neatly bunched, run on supporting cleats or
insulators and shall be coloured and adequately labelled or sleeved for identification. All
control wiring shall terminate on terminal boards or strips using the Klippon or equivalent
system, and shall incorporate loops to permit the opening of doors and removal of
components for inspection without disconnecting the cables.
The front of panel shall be open able. Removable gland plates shall be provided at the top
and at the bottom of the panel with knockouts or blanked off openings for incoming and
outgoing circuits cables.
All doors shall have concealed hinges, and where necessary, shall be interlocked with the
switch mechanism. All doors shall be provided with dust-excluding gasket of neoprene, or
other equal and approved material.
Labels in general shall be made from white TRAFFOLITE laminated white/black/white and
suitably engraved with black lettering in English and Chinese. Exact details of lettering and
legends shall be agreed with the Engineers prior to manufacture. Labels shall be securely
fixed with a minimum of two cadmium 6BA screws which shall be inserted into tapped holes in
the equipment and secured by locking nuts at the rear.
All paint finishes shall be of high quality enamel. A minimum of two undercoats shall be
applied and each built-up and flattened separately. The final coat shall be approved light
colour gloss finish and sufficient body shall be given to the paint films so that the final
appearance of the finished units is entirely free from blemished, undulations, foreign
inclusions, scratches, patterning or any defects whatsoever.
Ventilating louvers where required shall be provided on the sides and backs of panels and
shall be of approved design. All louvers shall be screened.
All terminals shall be shrouded and those terminals which remain live with the panel isolated
shall be adequately labelled with cautionary signs. All circuits shall be facilitate isolation,
checking and maintenance.
5.2.4
Lighting & Power & Telephone outlets Installation

The Specification Drawings for the lighting, power and telephone service installation indicate
approximate positions of all luminaires, switches, switch socket outlets and outlets for
telephone points, etc. but the actual positions of all fittings including the wiring layout and
cable routes shall be agreed finally on site with the Architect having due regard to the
selection of the most accessible routes for wiring and the convenience of switching.
The types of luminaires to be provided are shown on the Specification Drawings and
described in the accompanied Schedule of Luminaries. All luminaires shall be manufactured
to the strictest tolerances where practicable. Ventilation slots shall be provided on the casing
of luminaries, where required.
All luminaires shall be designed for operating on 230V +/- 6%, single phase, 50 Hz a.c.
supply. All luminaires used as emergency luminaires s including exit signs shall be
constructed and installed in accordance with the current edition of Singapore Standard CP19:
Code of Practice for the Installation and Maintenance of Emergency Evacuation Lighting and
Power Supply Systems in Buildings.
Page 72
PARKCITY

Fittings and accessories for external use shall be of weatherproof construction specially
treated against corrosion for use in salt laden atmosphere. Totally enclosed luminaires shall
have sealing gaskets and shall be insect-proof.
Cables used for internet wiring of the luminaires shall be of appropriate type and size and
shall not be less than 0.5 sq mm in cross-sectional area. The insulation of the cables shall be
able to withstand throughout the life of the luminaires the maximum temperature of not less
than 105 degree Celsius to which it will be subjected in normal use without deterioration
which could affect the safety of the luminaires.
Cables with the luminaires shall be neatly bundled by nylon self-locking cable ties. Wiring
shall be properly routed and secured away from heat-generating accessories like control gear
etc. wherever possible. All cable terminations within the luminaires shall be suitably shrouded.
At every luminaire, an earthing terminal shall be provided for connection to the circuit
protective conductor.
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, ferrous metalwork of all luminaires shall be made of
mild steel sheet of minimum thickness 0.8mm. The metalwork shall be derusted by treating
with Deoxidise 125 or Deoxidise M and degreased by Trichloroethylene or wiping with clean
cloth dipped in thinner. The metalwork shall then be dipped in Kephas before phosphatising.
After drying, the metalwork shall be sprayed with two coats of alkyd based enamel paints and
then stove in a baking oven to the specified temperature of the paint manufacturer and for the
recommended time. The total thickness of the two coats of paints shall not be less than 50
microns. When the basic sheet steel is electro-zinc plated (zincron), the total thickness of the
two coats of paints can be 25 microns. The thickness of the paint will be measured in random
samples during supply to check conformity when required by the Architect.
Plastic diffusers where used, shall be of non-deteriorating, and ultra-violet stabilised material,
and shall not change in shape with time or due to handling. Plastic diffusers shall be washed
with a detergent solution and dripped-dry immediately prior to installation to restrict
electrostatic dust adhesion. Louvered mirror reflectors of the fluorescent luminaires where
called for shall be die-formed semi-secular anodised aluminium in parabolic form to give good
light distribution and efficacy. Metal louvers where called for shall be of a design to give a
bat-wing light distribution with a downward light output ratio of at least 70%. The lamps will
be screened from view along both directions of the lamp axis by metal louvers. The entire
metal louver should be able to hinge down from one side of the luminaires for maintenance
purposes and snap fit back into position.
Each lighting point in areas having false ceilings shall be terminated with a B.S. ceiling rose in
the soffit of the slab. Each lighting point in areas without false ceilings shall be terminated at a
concealed B.S. circular conduit box having entries appropriate to the run of conduit. At each
lighting point the wiring shall have an excess length of about 150mm before terminating to a
connector. The circuit protective conductor shall also be wired to the connector.
Each surface mounted luminaire shall be terminated at a B.S. junction box having entries
appropriate to the run of conduit and shall be complete with connectors and suitable for the
size and number of connections to be made at the point and the wiring required to connect
the specified luminaire. Wiring to luminaires within the false ceiling space shall be carried out
by means of heat resistant (butyl or silicon rubber insulated to B.S. 6500) flexible cables with
copper conductor of cross sectional area not less than 1.5 sq mm to be connected from a
B.S. ceiling rose to the lighting fitting.
Recessed luminaires shall be suitable for housing in concealed or exposed (T bar) ceiling
modules where appropriate. All recessed luminaires shall be supported from the r.c. ceiling
slabs using appropriate fixing accessories such as steel rod, spring clips, ceiling brackets,
suspension hooks, profile brackets, etc. to ensure proper installation of the luminaires on
different types of ceiling panels. In areas where luminaires are installed directly below large
ductworks etc., the Sub-Contractor shall install suitable brackets, channels, etc. to facilitate
suspension/support of the luminaires from the ceiling slabs all costs connected therewith shall
Page 73
PARKCITY

be deemed to have been included in the Sub-Contract. An adjustable resilient spring-clip

shall be provided to enable the suspension length to be adjusted to fine tolerances.
Suspension sets shall be proprietary make of adjustable type designed to carry the weight of
the luminaires; the suspension sets shall be of adequate lengths for installation on the false
ceiling panels concerned. Suspension rods shall be of at least 5mm diameter and shall be
fixed at positions recommended by the luminaires manufacturers. At least 4 suspension rods
shall be provided for each luminaire shall be supported in a manner that will ensure that the
weight of each luminaire is equally distributed to all supporting rods with the luminaire
remaining in level position. Suspension sets where exposed to sight shall be of adjustable
rod type of minimum diameter 20mm with all necessary accessories.
For luminaires associated with the essential/emergency supply circuits, wiring shall be
terminated as follows:
(i)
Surface mounted luminaires shall be terminated at a B.S. junction box having entries
appropriate to the run of conduit and shall be complete with connectors and suitable
for the size and number of connections to be made at the point and the wiring
required to connect the specified luminaires.
(ii)
For recessed luminaires (i.e. luminaires mounted on suspended ceilings), the wiring
form the ceiling rose to the luminaires shall be carried out by means of FR cables.
For luminaires with emergency power packs, an unswitched live wire shall be connected to
each and every luminaire with emergency power pack so that the luminaire concerned can be
switched off from the associated lighting switches, timers, contactors, etc.
High pressure sodium lamps where used shall avoid fluorescent coated outer bulb.
Metal halide and mercury fluorescent lamps MBF/U where called for shall be manufactured to
B.S. 3677 as appropriate.
Appropriate inductive ballasts for limiting the current shall be used in conjunction with the HID
lamps and the Sub-Contractor shall ensure that the control gears installed are suitable for the
lamps used. The control gears (ballasts, igniters, capacitor etc.,) for each lamp shall be
suitable for enclosing in a weatherproof compartment where used for external areas or
integrated with the luminaries. Ballasts shall be the low loss type manufactured to B.S. 4782
and rated for operation at 240V 50Hz single phase a.c. supply.
Ballasts shall be vacuum impregnated or polyester filled to ensure good heat dissipation and
maximum protection from moisture & corrosion. The ballasts shall be of low noise type and
shall be mounted tightly on a rigid part of the lighting fitting. No one component of the lighting
fitting shall be loose and badly fastened which might become resonant. Power factor of each
lamp circuit shall be maintained at better than 0.85 lagging. Power factor correction
capacitors shall be of the dry metallised polypropylene type with internal discharge resistor
rated 250 volts, 50 Hz with operating temperature up to +85 degree Celsius. Electronic
igniters where applicable (i.e. high pressure sodium lamps) shall be the encapsulated and
quick start-up type. As soon as the lamp has started, the igniters shall disconnect itself until a
new starting impulse is needed. Control gears of all the HID lamps for indoor use shall be
silent in operation. The Architect deserves the right to reject any unit which is not, in his
opinion, silent in operation.
All fluorescent tubes shall be the energy efficient type of 18W (600 mm) or 36W (1200 mm)
and shall be whitenominal colour temperature 4000 degree K or warm white nominal colour
temperature 3000 degree K as specified with bi-pin lamp caps suitable for use in switchstart
circuits and manufactured to B.S. 1853. The light output of 18W and 36W fluorescent tubes,
after 100 hour burning, shall be at least 1400 lumens and 3400 lumens respectively and the
colour rendering index more than 80.
Page 74
PARKCITY

Control gears where required shall be of low loss type, silent in operation and of the
switchstart patterns suitable for incorporation within the luminaires they serve. The leakage
current of each 18 watt or 36 watt ballast shall not exceed 0.5 mAmp as stipulated in IEC 598.
The ballasts shall be of low noise type and shall be mounted tightly on a rigid part of the
luminaires. No one component of the luminaires shall be loose and badly fastened which
might become resonant. The Architect reserves the right to reject any unit which is not, in his
opinion, silent in operation.
Control gears comprising ballasts/chokes etc. shall be
impregnated and filled solid with polyester or other special high melting point compound all
contained in a robust case to Singapore Standard SS 24. All ballasts/chokes shall be rated at
240 volt single phase a.c. and shall be of the type approved by the PUB. The loss of each 18
watt or 36 watt ballast/chokes shall not be greater than 6 watt at the rated voltage.
Starter switches for switch start luminaires shall be the proprietary made glow type with bi-pin
to Singapore Standard SS 124.
High frequency (HF) electronic ballasts where specified shall be the starter less, non-flickering
and rapid start type operating at a frequency range of between 20kHz and 30kHz and shall
comply with IEC 928 and IEC 929. The ballast shall be suitable for use with conventional of
HF fluorescent tubes filled with krpton or argon gas.
The lamp power of a 36 watts tube when operating on a HF ballast shall remain stable at 32
watts and the ballast loss shall not be greater than 4 watts per lamp, when operating at a
mains supply of 230 volts, 50Hz (for 58 watts tubes, the corresponding figures shall be 50
watts lamp power and 4 watts ballast loss per lamp). Output stabilization circuit shall be
incorporated to stabilize the lamp power at the specified wattage. The power factor of the
lamp circuit shall be greater than 0.95.
The operating requirement of the ballast shall be to provide an optimum value of pre-heat
current for a warm-start system. The minimum and maximum values of the pre-heat current
shall comply with IEC 901 for the type of lamps concerned. The entire lamp ignition process
shall not take more than 1.0 second.
The ballast shall be able to detect inter-alia, the following different operation conditions and
lamp responses and switch reliably, if necessary:
-
Overvoltage (when the remain voltage exceeds 280 volts)
No-lead operation, i.e. operation without lamp
Lamp removal during operation
One-side contact when the lamp is being replaced
Defective lamp due to filament breakage
Deactivated lamp
Air draughts/lamp breakage
The ballast shall meet the requirements of VDE 0107 Section 7 regarding magnetic field
radiation and shall incorporate radio interference suppressor to limit the voltage to the levels
defined by CISPR 15 (EN 53013 or VDE 0875, Part 2A1 10.90). Circuits shall also be
incorporated in order to obtain a sinusoidal current consumption and reduce the generation of
harmonics in the ballast and limit the mains current harmonics to IEC 555-2 or EN 60555-2.
In addition, the ballast shall be resistant to transient over voltages, such as those produced by
switching inductive loads, unbalanced loads in three-phase mains, etc. Thermal overrides
shall also be incorporated to power down the ballast in the event of short circuit or
overheating.
Page 75
PARKCITY

High quality components shall be used for the ballast to assure long service life. In addition,
the operating temperature shall be controlled to prolong service life. The Mean Time
Between Failures (MTBF) of the HF ballast shall be at least 100,000 hours.
Dimmable ballasts where called for shall be able to dim 32 watts or 50 watts argon filled tubes
when connected to a potentiometer.
All ballasts offered shall carry test certificates from SISIR and other recognised testing
laboratories to substantiate compliance with all the various standards such as IEC 928,
CISPR 15, IEC 555-2, etc.
Lampholders shall be proprietary make of bi-pin, spring loaded, designed to retain positively
the lamp caps independently of the contact springs and of robust construction to B.S. 1875.
Contact spring shall be of phosphor bronze material.
Power factor correction capacitor shall be of the metal polypropylene (MPP) type enclosed in
a metal case with two insulated connections, internal safety discharge resistors and
impregnated with a suitable medium. Power factor for each luminaire shall be corrected to
better than 0.85 lagging and each fitting shall be complete with appropriate rating fused
terminal block and bi-pin lamp holders. Purpose made fixing clips shall be employed for
supporting the capacitors and capacitors with built-in (internal) fuses will not be accepted.
Each luminaire shall be fitted with audio interference filter suitable for suppressing mains
borne interference generated from the limits specified in B.S. 5394 Specification For Radio
Interference, Limits and Measurements For Lighting Equipment Part 1 (Luminaires for
Tubular Fluorescent Lamp).
Control units and capacitors shall be manufactured to B.S. 2818 & 4017 bi-pin lamp caps and
lampholders to B.S. 1875 and method of construction with regard to the safety aspect shall
generally comply with the requirements of B.S. 4533.
PL lamps shall be of single-ended miniature fluorescent lamps each consisting of two narrow
glass tubes welded together with a bi-pin cap and housing for starter and capacitor at one
end. The correlated temperature of PL lamps shall be 2700 degree K and the colour
rendering index shall be 81 or more. The lumen output of a PL 7 watts, PL 9 watts and PL 11
watts lamp shall be at least 410 lumens, 570 lumens and 890 lumens respectively. Each PL
lamp shall be fitted with a radio interference suppression capacitor to suppress mains borne
interference generated from the luminaires.
Lampholders for PL lamps shall be of type G23 suitable to receive the bi-pin cap of the PL
lamps. PL lampholders shall be designed to operate any of the PL 18 watts, or PL 13 watts
lamp. The ballasts shall be rated for operation at 240V 50Hz single phase a.c. supply.
Power factor correction capacitors shall be provided for each PL lamp luminaire to correct the
power factor to better.
Lighting poles for external lighting where called for shall be of tubular hot dipped galvanised
steel column, the base compartment of which shall house the lamp fuse gear consisting of a
single fully shrouded single pole and neutral single entry type cut-out with 5 amps HRC fuse
complete with cable sealing box, armour clamps and compression gland, where required
suitable for reception of looping PVC SWA/PVC cables or PVC cables of the sizes as
required. The tubular columns shall be protected internally and externally against corrosion.
For internal protection, a coating of black bituminous paint shall be applied. A priming coat of
suitable paint shall be applied to the surface after it has been thoroughly cleaned and followed
by at least two finishing coats to provide adequate protection against corrosion. The colour
shall be to the Architects review.
Wiring between lantern and cut-out shall be twin core 2.5 sq mm tinned annealed circular
copper conductor PVC insulated black PVC sheathed incorporating within the sheath a bare
circuit protective conductor of the same cross sectional area.
Page 76
PARKCITY

An appropriate concrete base shall be provided for each outdoor luminaire for mounting onto
the ground.
Each outdoor/external lighting point shall be terminated in a weatherproof polyester junction
box of IP 65 similar to Legrand 95950 or equivalent.
Switches
Sub-circuit switches unless otherwise shown on the Specification Drawings shall be single
pole, quick make and slow-break, silent switch action type with solid silver alloy contacts and
totally enclosed switch action for flush wall mounting or ceiling mounting as required and shall
be suitable for indoor or outdoor service according to location, housed in standard purpose
manufactured galvanised steel boxes complete with conduit knockouts made up into single or
multi-gang units employing a grid switch system of fully interchangeable components as
standard fixing centres of matching switches of different types and ratings but of identical
dimensions, push buttons, neon indicator lamps, blanking units, grid, steel boxes and plates
all capable of integration into standard composite assemblies in any combinations as
required.
Grids shall be adjustable for variation in depth of plaster and for squaring errors and of the
same type for surface or flush mounting.
Switches in mechanical plantrooms and electrical sub-station and switchrooms shall be of the
metaclad type subject to review by the Architect, mounted in flush or surface conduit boxes as
specified.
Switches for wall mounting in other locations shall be of White finish type similar to Jung
make switch. Switches located on brick or concrete walls shall be mounted in horizontal
arrangement in galvanised steel boxes using box suspension straps. Counter-sunk screws
shall be provided for fixing to the conduit box. Ceiling switches where used shall be complete
with mounting bases and pull cords.
Switches for external use shall be of weatherproof construction and of standard similar to
Clipsal/MK make or equivalent.
Samples of all switches, conduit boxes etc. and a schedule showing the type of switches to
be installed at all locations shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior to placing
orders.
Switches associated with essential supplies shall be provided with red toggles.
Switches shall be rated 10 amps or 15 amps as determined by circuit load suitable for use in
a.c. inductive circuits or fluorescent lamp circuits complying with Singapore Standard SS 227,
of the one way or two way type as indicated on the Specification Drawings and fixed generally
at a height of 1200 mm from the floor level where possible be located on the inside of the
room on the handled side to the door as practicable.
An earthing terminal shall be provided and connected to circuit protective conductor at every
lighting switch position.
Single pole switches shall be connected to break the phase wire of the supply. The neutral
wire shall not be routed through switch boxes.
Switches which are mounted in the same position adjacent to each other shall be of multigang type of the maximum number of gangs available.
Switch Socket Outlets
Page 77
PARKCITY

Switch socket outlets shall be to Singapore Standard SS 145 single pole 13 amp. 3
rectangular pin switch shuttered outlets, one or two gang for indoor service except as
otherwise shown on the Specification Drawings and either surface or flush mounting
according to location.
Switches shall be of the quick make, slow break type with silent, totally enclosed switch action
and solid silver alloy contacts. Switches socket outlets for indoor use shall be housed in
suitable galvanised steel boxes to B.S. 4662 with conduit knockouts. Types and finishes of
switch socket outlet plates for various areas shall be as specified for the lighting switches.
Switch socket outlets located in exposed situation shall be non shuttered, single-pole 3 round
pin to B.S. 546, galvanised iron weatherproof type with 20 mm E.T. screwed conduit entry,
rated at 13 amp or 15 amp switched or unswitched as shown on the Specification Drawings
complete with protective captive scew-on cap to cover the socket orifice when not in use.
15 amp switch socket outlets shall be 3 pin round type to B.S. 546 shuttered, of a finish
similar to 13 amp switch socket outlets and mounted in flush steel conduit boxes. 30 amps
switch socket outlets where used shall be 3 pin round type to B.S. 546 similar to Walsall List
No. A 3643B complete with brass cover and rubber plug.
Generally switch socket outlets shall be positioned 300 mm above floor level except in
mechanical plantrooms, electrical switchrooms, etc. where they shall be positioned 1200 mm
above floor level or 150 mm above counters or benches whichever is suitable. Switch socket
outlets intended for mounting at high level shall be at such positions to suit the equipment
served.
Switch socket outlets associated with essential supplies shall be provided with red toggles.
Samples of all switch socket outlets and a schedule showing the type of switch socket outlets
to be installed at all locations shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior to placing
orders.
Fused Connection Units
Fused connection units shall be of unswitched type each comprising a fuse carrier fitted with
a 5 amps cartridge fuse-link to B.S. 1362, an outlet connection of flexible cord up to 2.5mm,
3 core, terminal block, etc. Each connection unit shall have a built-in safety shutter which
closes over the live contacts immediately the fuse carrier is withdrawn. The carrier shall be
secured firmly in position by a screw but automatically withdraws from the live socket as the
screw is released. The connection units shall be of flush wall mounting type and housed in
suitable galvanised steel boxes to B.S. 4662 with conduit knockouts. The finishes of fused
connection units used at the various areas shall be as specified for the light switches.
Isolating Switches
Isolating switches shall be manufactured to B.S. 5419 (Category AC 22) of the number of
poles and current ratings as shown on the Specification Drawings and shall be of the totally
enclosed pattern, metal-clad or polycarbonate with positive quick-make and quick-break
action.
Isolating switches shall generally be mounted at a height of 1400 mm.
Switches shall be capable of withstanding and also interrupting their full rated current safely
and without damage. Ferrous materials shall be galvanised, switch handles shall be
interlocked to prevent opening the cover with the switch ON. The covers/doors for metal
clad types shall be provided with gaskets.
Isolating switches for use in distribution boards shall be of the MCCB styled similar to Carbtre
82 series, MK 5500 series or equivalent.
Page 78
PARKCITY

5.2.5 STANDBY GENERATOR INSTALLATION

General
Description
The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install and commission the generator set, generator
control panel, fuel tanks, fuel pumps and fuel pipes which shall form part of the Works as
shown on the Sub-Contract Drawings.
The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for moving the generator set into position,
installing the exhaust pipes, silencers, making all necessary connection to the generator
control panel, fuel tank pipework, batteries, etc. and all necessary equipment for putting
the set into operation.
Each generator shall have a total continuous output rating as shown on the Sub-Contract
Drawings.
The system shall automatically be started upon the receipt of a mains failure indication
and shall be in a position to deliver its total output in 15 seconds or less directly to the
emergency switchboard.
Upon the restoration of the mains and the consequent loss of electrical demand on the
generation system the diesel generator set shall remain running for a period of not less
than ten minutes to allow stabilising of the thermal characteristics of the engine and then
automatically shut down.
Standard
All equipment, materials and workmanship shall comply with the appropriate Singapore
or British Standards or an acceptable equivalent international standard as well as all
local statutory obligations and regulations.
All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
Singapore Standard Code of Practice CP 31: 1985 - The installation, operation,
maintenance, performance and constructional requirements of mains failure standby
generating systems.
Manufacture
All equipment and materials shall be supplied by a single manufacturer to ensure
uniformity of standards and composition.
All equipment and accessories shall be new and shall be clearly marked to identify
different components, materials and manufacturers.
Page 79
PARKCITY

Submissions
The Sub-Contractor shall submit the following information to the Engineer at the time
stated:
During tender, all information in accordance with the Form of Tender.
Before assembly of the generator set,
An outline drawing of the generating set with dimensions, weights and all
foundation details
Requirements for fuel pipe connections, exhaust pipe connections, and oil and
water drains
Requirements for installation of valves, pumps, etc.
Complete schematic and wiring diagram of the electrical system
Before delivery of the equipment to site, a draft copy of his proposed commissioning and
testing procedures for approval.
After commissioning, operation and maintenance instructions complete commissioning
and testing reports to the Engineer.
Equipment
This section covers the rules concerning design, manufacturing, testing, transportation,
installation, on-site commissioning and goods inspection of Diesel engine generating
sets
Scope of Work
Diesel engine generator set and control panel

Silencers (Mufflers) and exhaust system
Engine Cooling and ventilation
Daily fuel tank and fuel system
Data Submittals
Manufacturers Information
Equipment Catalogues, documentation of technical specification of the
equipment.
Comparison table of equipments technical specification sheets and the relevant
specification requirements, and highlighting of relevant specification on the
equipment catalogues which matches the requirements.
General
Page 80
PARKCITY

The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install and put into operation an automatic standby
diesel generating set complete with a combined generator and mains failure control panel.
The generator shall be fully equipped for radio interference suppression to BS EN 800:
1988 - Specification for limits and methods of measurement of radio interference
characteristic of household electrical appliances, portable tools and similar electrical
apparatus.
Generator set
The complete set of generating sets and GCP panel to be brand new goods during importation
(the assembler has to comply with ISO-9001 standards and has to be the authorised & qualified
by the engine manufacturer)
Function
Rated speed: equal or less than 1500 rpm
Capacity: Generating sets to be able to provide AC supply of 3 phase, 400Volts, 50Hz.
Power factor to be 0.8, Standby rating output to be 1000kVA
The engine itself should have low lubrication oil pressure, high coolant level, engine overspeed, overload and the ability to perform automatic shutdown when engine fail to start.
Lubrication oil system
Safety valve is required in the Lubrication oil pump. Oil pan, pump inlet filter, lubrication oil
cooler, oil pressure gauge and oil gauge is also required in the pressure lubrication system.
Cooling system Radiator Cooling
The cooling system should comprise of radiator cooling and circulating pump, transport of
liquid cooling agent to the mounted radiator, forming a sealed and circulated cooling system
which includes coolant sensor to ensure temperature stability.
Intake and Exhaust system
Air intake system should be equipped with a dry type air cleaner, the exhaust system
should be completed with a muffler and exhaust piping that leads to exterior of room.
Piping which are present within the room should be installed with insulation, the outlet
end should be able to prevent rain/water/wind from entering the pipes.
The mufflers installed should be suitable for residential use. The mufflers used must be
able to reduce noise output by at least 30dBA.
Starting Equipment
There should be automatic control that allows adjustable cranking timing on the
generating set, stop cranking (including alarm warning) should be present if engine fail to
start.
The generating set shall be battery started, the battery used should be able to allow the
generating set to perform crank start continuously for at least 6 attempts.
The capacity of the batteries (4 units) should not be lesser than 200AH.
The starting system must be able to perform automatic start, and must be able to accept
loads within 10 seconds from receiving the start signal.
Page 81
PARKCITY

The generating set shall be suitable for cold or hot starting and for the acceptance of an
instantaneous load of 60% full rated load immediately after attaining normal voltage and
frequency. All equipment shall be suitable for tropical climatic operation.
The generating set shall comprise a diesel engine directly coupled to an alternator
through a flexible coupling and mounted in line on a common skid type bedplate complete
with anti-vibration mountings so that the complete unit can be located on a solid concrete
floor without transmitting vibration to adjacent apparatus or any part of the Building.
All exposed ferrous metal surfaces of the machines, underframe, enclosures and auxiliary
equipment shall, where applicable, be treated with rust-inhibiting primer paint, undercoat
and finishing coat of the manufacturer's colour or as selected by the Engineer.
Where all-weather enclosure self-contained generator sets are specified, the enclosure
shall be fabricated from 2.0 mm sheet steel and sound insulated to meet the noise level
requirement as specified herein. Intake and discharge sound attenuators and acoustic
doors shall be provided to meet this requirement.
The noise level of the complete generator set measured at 1 metre from the generator
room or enclosure shall not exceed 65 dBA.
Diesel engine
Country of Origin of the Diesel Engines: Europe, United State.
Engine design to be V type cylinder, 4 stroke, Turbocharged, Intercooled, fixed type fan heat
sinks, displacement shall not be larger than 60.5 litres, gen-set to be battery started. At 1500
rpm, the 1000 kVA engine maximum output (standby rating)
The diesel engine shall be a high speed, water-cooled, mechanical injection, four stroke
single acting compression ignition type complying with BS 5514 - Reciprocating internal
combustion engines: performance, de-rated to suit local conditions. The engine shall have an
overload capacity of 110% for an intermittent duty or 10% continuous load for one hour and
shall be supplied complete with the appropriate accessories.
Only enclosed forced feed lubricating system by gear type oil pump suction strainer and large
capacity oil pump will be accepted.
Dust-proof, multi-cylinder fuel injection pump, fuel lift pump and mechanical governor shall be
provided in accordance with BS 5514.
Starting shall be achieved by a 24V electric starter motor and dynamo complete with cutout
and control box.
Instrument panel shall be fitted with a tachometer and hour-run meter, oil pressure and
temperature gauge and water temperature gauge, battery charger, ammeter and push button
start switch.
The engine shall be fitted with high water temperature, over speed, low oil pressure switch
and a fuel shut down solenoid.
Alternator
Page 82
PARKCITY

Country of Origin of the Alternator: Europe, or United State

Should be horizontal axis, brushless self-excitation, rotating magnetic field, alternating current
in 3 phase, 6600Volts, 50 Hertz, power factor of 0.8, Class F Insulation, Standby rating of
1000kVA, 1500 RPM, semi-sealed natural ventilated synchronous AC generator.
The AC alternator and diesel engine should be directly coupled to each other by a flexible
coupling.
The exciter should be brushless and P.M.G excitation. Insulation to be class F insulation, the
frame should be IP23.
The electronic AVR should be solid crystal state type, silicon controlled rectifiers (with phase
sensing circuit) and diode temperature compensation device. Allowable range of voltage
change must be within 5%.
Signal Interference should be in accordance to NEMA MG122.43, standard TIF should be
more than 50, total THF should be less than 2% in accordance with BS 4999.
The alternator shall have a continuous rated output as shown on the Sub-Contract Drawings and
shall be capable of operating without damage when the engine is operating at the full load as
specified above.
The alternator shall be de-rated to suit local conditions and specially impregnated for tropical duty.
The alternator shall be of the brushless, revolving field, screen protected, salient pole, horizontal
foot mounting type provided with a direct coupled overhung exciter armature, shaft mounted
rotating fused diode rectifier assembly, flange mounted exciter magnet shaft with bare shaft
extension suitable for receiving a flexible coupling. Two-end frame mounted grease lubricated bole
and/ or roller bearing shall be provided.
The alternator shall be suitable for parallel operation and shall be equipped with inter-connected
damper windings and quad droop circuit.
The alternator shall comply with BS 4999 - General requirements for rotating electrical machines
having Class H insulation or better.
The alternator shall be complete with termination box mounted on the side of the stator designed to
accept flexible cables from below and with the neutral brought out.
Terminal identification shall comply with the requirements of BS 822: Part 6: 1988 - Terminal
markings for rotating electrical machinery. Terminals shall be fitted with compression type cable
sockets and shall be housed in a suitably earthed metal enclosure having provision for external
flexible cable connections. Locking washers shall be provided on all terminals to ensure that
connections will not loosen under normal working conditions.
Adjustment shall be provided on the control panel for pre-setting the alternator voltage between
360V to 420V. An automatic electronic voltage regulator shall be provided to control the voltage
between + 1 1/2% from no-load to full load steady state with a power factor at 0.8 lagging to unity.
Page 83
PARKCITY

Adjustment shall be provided at the control panel for pre-setting the speed frequency of the unit
which thereafter shall maintain a frequency of 50 Hz from no load to full load under steady state
conditions.
Third harmonics shall be effectively suppressed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Exhaust system
A complete exhaust system comprising the following shall be provided:a) EXHAUST PIPEWORK
Exhaust pipe shall be constructed from medium weight black steel piping of welded
construction. The entire exhaust pipe shall be adequately supported and a cowl shall be
provided at the end of the exhaust pipe to prevent ingress of rain water.
Exhaust pipe shall be terminated with an insect screen in the form of a cylinder constructed
from corrosion resistant metal wire netting. A flexible coupling between the manifold and the
exhaust pipe shall be provided inside the generator room.
All exhaust piping, flexible couplings, flange joints, etc. shall be externally lagged with minimum
75mm thick high temperature rockwool and cladded with minimum 18g sheet steel to prevent
seepage of exhaust fumes and reducing heat in the generator room or enclosure and the rest of
the building.
All penetrations through the exterior walls for exhaust pipework shall also be isolated with high
temperature rockwool rope insulation or equivalent and sealed airtight with a resilient nonsetting compound. All other penetrations through building walls must be similarly sealed.
Special treatment of the exhaust discharge shall be provided in areas where residential
accommodation is in close proximity to the generator room in order to ensure that statutory
noise levels are achieved at site boundaries.
b) EXHAUST SILENCERS
Two series exhaust silencers incorporating moisture traps shall be provided.
A primary reactive type exhaust silencer shall be installed within the room as close as practicable to
the exhaust outlets of the diesel engine. The silencer shall be of the multiple chamber reactive type
designed for low frequency noise and exhausted pulsation control.
Page 84
PARKCITY

A secondary absorptive type exhaust silencers shall be installed in series with the primary exhaust
silencer and shall be mounted after the primary silencer immediately before the exhaust pipework
exit penetration. The secondary exhaust silencer shall be a straight-through absorption type for mid
to high frequency sound attenuation.
All silencers shall be of welded sheet steel construction. All components shall be stiffened and
braced to minimise vibration and shall be finished with high quality heat resistant paint for surface
o
temperature of up to 540 C. All silencers are to be thermally insulated to minimise heat losses.
The total system back pressure of both the primary and secondary exhaust silencers together with
all exhaust pipework shall be determined by the exhaust silencer supplier and shall not exceed the
maximum back pressure allowable for the diesel engine offered.
Sound attenuators
Sound attenuators shall be of the dissipative type consisting of an outer casing, sound absorbing
material and internal baffles, splitters and supports. Casings shall be of galvanized steel of not less
than 1.2mm thickness.
Sound absorbing material shall be high density fibreglass or mineral wool, faced with perforated
galvanized sheet metal of minimum 20% open area.
The attenuators cross sectional dimensions (width x height) shall be sized such that the total
pressure drop shall not be greater than 60 Pascal.
The noise level measured at 1 m from the generator room shall not exceed 65 dBA.
Batteries and chargers
Starter batteries of the heavy duty Nickel-Cadmium type or maintenance-free lead-acid type
complying in all respects with the requirements of BS 6290 - Lead-acid stationary cells and
batteries shall be provided.
The battery shall be capable of providing a minimum of six starts of 10 sec. duration with 3
consecutive starts per cycle (without recharging). The battery shall be sized so that during periods
of locked rotor current, the voltage does not fall below 0.65V per cell and 0.85V during periods of
cranking current per cell.
The batteries supplied for use with the generator sets shall not be used for manufacturers own
checks and testing but shall be used for witness tests and commissioning. Batteries shall be
housed in a steel rack of approved type and shall be mounted adjacent to the underbase of the
diesel generator set.
Page 85
PARKCITY

The battery charger shall be of the current limiting constant potential type, complete with controls,
float and boost charging selection, protection and indication, charger failure alarm, ammeter and
voltmeter.
Fuel day tank
Daily Fuel tank capacity is to be 2000 litres, fabricated by SUS304 material. The fuel tank
requires fuel level gauge, inlet valve, return valve, air vent, high/low fuel level float switch and
ETC. Fuel injector system used to control the fuel injection has to be Cummins MCRS, when
the engine reaches maximum rated load, fuel consumption cannot be more than 523 litres per
hour (100% of Standby Power). Diesel Fuel used must be super graded diesel or must
comply with ASTM grade 2 diesel fuel or equivalent.
A fuel day tank and bulk fuel storage tank, where specified, complete with oil level indicator
and high and low level controllers shall be provided for the generator set with capacities as
specified in the Sub-Contract Drawings. Control valves, vents and all necessary accessories
shall be provided for the tank(s) as shown on the Sub-Contract Drawings.
The tank(s) shall be suitably earthed to discharge static electricity.
Before each tank is installed, all rust and scale shall be removed from the external surface
immediately before applying the protective finish, which shall consist of one coat of red leadbased paint to BS 2523: 1983 - Specification for lead-based priming paints Type 'B', followed
by two coats of bituminous paint. Where damage is sustained to the protective coating due to
handling, etc., such coating shall be made good on site.
Each fuel tank shall be provided with a means of measuring the quantity of the contents.
Every measuring device shall be accurately calibrated and should be clearly marked so as to
be readily identifiable with its respective tank.
There shall be no openings to the tank(s) other than those necessary for filling and ventilating
pipe connections, main access (sealed) and allowance for remote indication of stored
quantity. The tank(s) shall be filled by means of off-set filling pipes terminating in liquid and
vapour proof screwed caps fitted with locks.
The tank(s) shall comply to Fire Services Bureau's requirements in every respect and be
constructed of mild steel not less than 2mm thick to BS 2654: 1989 - Specification for
maintenance of vertical steel welded non-refrigerated storage tanks with butt-welded shells
for the petroleum industry. All necessary fixing bolts and brackets for supporting the tank(s)
shall be included in this Sub-Contract.
A fill point with fill cabinet, automatic electric duty and standby fuel pumps and all related
control panels shall be provided and located where shown on the sub-contract drawings. An
alarm shall sound on high level being reached in the fuel tank(s).
In addition, for emergency use, a semi-rotary hand operated fuel transfer pump shall be
supplied and installed by the Sub-Contractor, complete with an adequate length of input
flexible hose at the inlet position.
Fuel leakage sensors shall be provided for the fuel tank(s). Warning siren for leakage sensors
shall be installed in the generator room or enclosure and remote monitored.
Bulk fuel storage tanks chambers shall be completely sand-filled after installation.
All fuel pipework between pumps, tanks and generators shall be black mild steel seamless
tube with minimum wall thickness of 6.3mm.
Page 86
PARKCITY

Control panel & operation of the diesel generating set

a) AUTOMATIC MAINS FAILURE CONTROL PANEL
The generator control equipment shall be designed to provide a back up power supply in the event
of partial or complete failure of the mains supply, signaled by the mains failure relay in the main
supply switch board.
The generator control equipment shall operate in the following sequence:i)
On mains failure, the diesel engine shall start and within 10 seconds transfer the load by the
changeover switch to the generator.
ii)
On mains supply available, a suitable time delay (adjustable 0 - 5 minutes) shall transfer the
load back to the mains.
iii) The generator set shall continue to run off load for a further time period (adjustable 0 - 15
minutes) and automatically shut down if the mains supply is maintained. During this time, a
further mains supply failure shall effect an immediate transfer of load back to the generator
and sequences (2) and (3) are repeated.
The diesel generator control panel shall be of the cubicle, floor mounting type, installed within the
generator room or enclosure.
The control panel shall be complete with all labels, fuses, indicating lamps, fire-resistant type
internal wiring and shall include the following (in addition to the items of equipment and controls
specified elsewhere) for each generator:-
Four pole air circuit breaker.
Instrument and control fuses.
- "Engine Fault" automatic shut down control, indicating lamps and reset devices.
-
Audible alarm and reset device.
Automatic 2-rate battery charging equipment, wired to terminals for external 230V A.C.
supply. Charging unit shall be provided within the panel.
- Automatic voltage regulation unit and excitation control

-
Suitably mounted and insulated cable terminal blocks for cables entering from the bottom of
the control board
Overload and single phase prevention shall be provided
Page 87
PARKCITY

One manual/ auto rotary pattern control switch.
One engine start push button
One engine stop push button
One re-set push button
One lamps test push button
One alarm mute push button
INDICATOR LAMPS:
Failed to start
Red
Low oil pressure trip
Red
High water temperature trip Red

Overspeed trip
Red
Low fuel level
Red
Protection healthy
Green
Engine running
Green
Fault shutdown
Red
Intake air fan runningGreen

(if applicable)
Mains supply available
Green
Failure to start
Red
- Power Factor Meter

- Frequency Meter
- One ammeter with selector switch for reading generator current output.
- One voltmeter with selector switch to read generator voltage.
Page 88
PARKCITY

- One ammeter for reading charging current to starting batteries.

- One set of 3 phase indication lights for both generator and emergency busbar indicator.
- One voltage adjusting device.
All control circuit fuses shall be of the H.R.C. cartridge fuse pattern.
Measuring instruments
All ammeters and voltmeters for use in conjunction with switchgear are to comply with BS 89 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories for
industrial accuracy.
o
Unless otherwise specified, all meters are to be 100mm, 240 scale dials with external zero
adjustment.
Current transformers shall be of the epoxy resin encapsulated type and shall be capable of
providing the necessary output to operate the connected protective devices or instruments.
Current transformers with adjustable primary turns will not be accepted.
For dual ratio current transformers, all ratio terminals shall be terminated at a terminal board and be
clearly marked with connections corresponding to the wiring diagrams.
The secondary circuit of each set (R-Y-B and N) of current transformers shall be earthed at one
point only. Means shall be provided for these earth connections to be disconnected by bolted
copper link at a readily accessible position for testing.
Current transformers provided in plastic casings and of the split core type will not be accepted.
Installation
General
The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for installing the generator set, exhaust pipes, silencers
and making all necessary connection to the generator control panel, fuel tank, pipework, batteries,
etc. and all necessary equipment for putting the set into operation.
The Sub-Contractor shall provide enough fuel and lubricating oil to carry out all the tests as
specified in this Section.
On the date of hand-over of the generator set, the Sub-Contractor shall fill up the fuel tank in full
with diesel fuel at no extra cost to the Employer.
Page 89
PARKCITY

Fuel pipework
Pipelines shall only be joined where necessary and shall have a fall back towards the tank.
All pipework under floors and any other pipework likely to be in direct contact with concrete shall be
coated with a bitumen compound and wrapped in Polythene before being concealed.
All pipework shall be free from burrs, rust and scale and shall be thoroughly cleaned before
installation. Open ends during the progress of the Works shall be blanked-off with purpose-made
metal or plastic caps. The use of wooden plugs, paper, cotton waste, etc. is forbidden.
Suspended pipework must be positioned as close to slab soffits as possible whilst maintaining the
required falls.
Vertical stacks must be positioned as close as possible against walls, columns and fins.
All pipes shall be rigidly fixed with suitable brackets at 1.5m interval.
All pipes shall be properly painted with two coats of lead primer paint and two coats of final finish
paint with colours to be approved.
A quick closing valve, labeled and painted red, shall be installed in the fuel supply pipe of the
generator set. The valve shall be located in an easily accessible location.
Testing
All fuel pipework and connections to the fuel tank shall be tested under the supervision of the
Engineer by subjecting them to an internal pressure of 200 kPa for a sufficient time to test all joints
for leakage.
Tests shall be carried out on the major components of the plant during manufacture. Certified
records in quadruplicate of all such tests shall be submitted. The completed and fully assembled
set shall be tested at the manufacturers or Supplier's factory before delivery to site and witnessed
by the Engineer. Tests shall include running for the following load and periods:a)
No load
15 minutes
b)
25% load
15 minutes
c)
50% load
15 minutes
d)
75% load
15 minutes
d)
100% load :
1 hour
e)
110% load :
1 hour
Page 90
PARKCITY

Superimposed load test from 0% to 100% (up to 60% for turbo-charged engines) and drop-off
test to 0% from 100% (60% for turbo-charged engines) shall also be conducted after the
running load test.
Governor trials and fuel consumption tests, in accordance with BS 5514 and BS 5000: Part 99:
1986 - Machines for miscellaneous applications, shall also be carried out and certified records of
the tests shall be submitted in quadruplicate upon completion of the tests.
On completion of the installation of the completed plant on site and with all cabling and piping
connected, site tests shall be carried out and shall include the following:- Series of test starts and checks on ability to take up the load within the specified time.
- Check that speed variation is within specified limits
- Full load run and fuel consumption check
- One hour overload test
- Temperature rise
- Voltage regulation
The Sub-Contractor shall provide dummy load and any necessary generator for auxiliary power to
carry out the above-mentioned tests at site.
Single-line diagram, rubber mat etc.
The Sub-Contractor shall supply the following in the generator room or enclosure:a) A frame electrical single-line diagram.
b) A framed brief instruction diagram on the operating and maintenance of the generator set(s).
c) A First Aid diagram and fire extinguisher.
d) Danger sign in the four official languages mounted on the door entrance.
e) Rubber mat of 2mm thick x 600mm wide extending the full length of the control panels.
Accessories
Each diesel generator set shall be provided with:-
Tool kit adequate for all normal maintenance operation
Page 91
PARKCITY

Operating and maintenance manuals including:-
Test results
Instruction books for the generator set(s) (diesel engine, alternator, control panels etc.)
Electrical schematic diagrams
Outline drawings of all equipment
Illustrated spare parts list
The Operating and Maintenance manual and the illustrated spare parts lists shall be clearly marked
with the scheme title and site identification and shall be forwarded to the Engineer.
Spares parts
In addition to any spares referred to elsewhere in the Specification, the Sub-Contractor shall
provide a complete set of manufacturer's recommended spare parts for 1-year operation. The
spare parts inventory shall be complete at the end of the defects liability period.
The Sub-Contractor shall also propose a list of spare parts (and their unit prices) for all other major
equipment as recommended by the manufacturer sufficient for two years operation.
Spare parts shall be individually packed and protected against dust and damage. They shall be
clearly labeled with function and part number.
Testing
The generating sets should be subjected to various tests that are required in the standard
regulation. The generating set should be run in 25%/50%/75%/100% loads at 15 minutes
each level, test report must be recorded.
The above test should be within the contractors scope of supply. Upon completion of the test,
it should be attached with the manufacturers original test report and send to the authorities
and engineering department for checking.
Before delivery of the gen-sets, the authorities and engineering department should be
informed of the load test one month in advance so that they can send the relevant personal to
witness the testing, or allow a third party company to witness the test.
The contractor shall provide the appointed personal the required assistance and support
which are necessary. The personal shall participate in the joint testing, the contractor will still
have to comply with the responsibility required in the regulations.
All importation related documents should be photocopied once and send to the authorities
and engineer department for checking, including the original factory test report from the
manufacturers.
Assembly works
Diesel engine should be direct coupled to the alternator by a flexible coupling, both units will
be mounted on a fixed position on a common base skid. The base skid will then be tighten by
bolts onto the generating sets foundation. Vibration mounting with good vibration reduction
properties will be mounted in between the generating sets base skid and the foundation.
Page 92
PARKCITY

The contractor shall proceed to the actual site to survey the transportation routes and all required
lifting equipment, and arranging transportation of the goods accordingly to the location advised by the
authorities and engineering department.
Installation
The contractor shall be responsible for the installation works of the generating sets, including the
piping, cables, cables tray and drilling of floors and walls.
On-site Commissioning
Upon completion of installation works at site, the contractor should accompany the authorities and
engineers to complete the on-site commissioning. The continuous operation of the generating set
should not be less than an hour. The diesel fuel and engine lubrication oil consumed and used during
the commissioning should be within the contractors scope of supply, which is included within the total
price of the contract.
During operation of the diesel generating set, its noise level and emission must comply with both
labour safety and health regulation and environmental standards.
The contractor shall ensure that the generating sets are brand new goods that are manufactured
within 12 months until the delivery of the goods, if differs, the good cannot be accepted.
Upon completion of the installation and on site commissioning, the contractor should provide a copy
of design drawings, date sheet, operating manual, maintenance manual relevant to the generating
sets supplied. The tools, accessories and part list shall be pass to the authorities and engineer for
checking.
5.2.6 Luminaires
All luminaires shall comply with the appropriate reference documents listed in Part I and shall
be constructed in a form fully suitable for their application.
Particular attention is called to the following:
Lampholders
To comply with the following standards:
BS 5101 Parts 2 and 4
Bayonet lampholders - BS 5042
Lampholders for tubular fluorescent lamps and starterholders - BS 6702.
Lampholders in luminaires of similar type and rating to be identical.
Metal lampholders to incorporate an earthing terminal.
For Tungsten luminaires use the following lampholders.
up to 150W
200W
300W & above
Bayonet B22d
Edison Screw E27
Edison Screw E40
Ensure the phase conductor is connected to the centre contact of Edison Screw lampholders.
Securely mount lampholder in luminaire when it is the sole support for the lamp.
Control Gear and Components
Page 93
PARKCITY

Must be suitable for the lamp type, wattage and starting characteristics. The manufacturers
written confirmation of compatibility shall be provided with special reference to heating effect
in operation.
Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
Comply with BS 2818. Use low distortion type.
Discharge Lamp Ballasts
Comply with BS 4782.
Capacitors
Use capacitors in accordance with BS 4017 in tubular fluorescent, high pressure mercury and
low pressure sodium vapour discharge lamp circuits.
Supply Terminals
Use screw terminals for supply cables and circuit protective conductors, sized to terminate up
2
to three 2.5mm conductors. Provide separate terminal blocks for each incoming circuit, with
marking to identify each circuit.
Fuse
Include a fuse holder and BS 1362 fuse in each incoming circuit phase connection.
Interference
Comply with BS 5394.
Remote Gear
Locate control gear in separate lockable cabinet of sheet steel with same degree of protection
and finish specified for luminaires. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for
maximum cable length between gear and lamp.
All luminaires shall be installed complete with the correct lamps in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations. Lamps of each type to be from the same manufacturer to
avoid differing light output or colour appearance.
Luminaires of a similar type shall have the same photometric performance as published data
within the tolerances defined by BS 5225.
Luminaires to be complete with secondary supports for translucent covers, diffusers, and gear
trays, so these are prevented from falling when the primary fixing is released.
Suspensions
Luminaires shall be fixed to a structure through the purpose incorporated fixing positions and
by means of conduit box attachments, suspension rods and expansion fixings or beam
clamps and clips, trunking attachments, side framing channels as specified.
If a suspended ceiling is used then luminaires can be integrated into the ceiling by use of the
associated proprietary fixing system always providing that the weight of the luminaires can be
accepted by the ceiling system.
Page 94
PARKCITY

Each luminaire shall be accurately aligned and shall fit flush against adjacent/abutting
structural surfaces. All luminaires installed shall present a neat straight and true appearance
both of themselves and in relation to the adjacent and overall building structure.
The luminaires to be suspended at the height indicated and hang vertically unless otherwise
indicated.
Conduit Suspensions
Shall not be less than 20mm diameter steel conduit of the same type as the main conduit
system. Ball and socket earthed plates shall be used as the top support on a circular conduit
box with the cable through the ball and socket. Vertical adjustment to be incorporated for
each conduit support.
Rod Suspensions
Shall not be less than 6mm diameter threaded, cadmium plated, steel rod complete with
matching washers and nuts.
Use washers, nut and lock nut at top and bottom of rod. Paint cut ends with zinc rich paint.
Chain Suspension
Shall be by cadmium plated steel chain with a load carrying capacity of not less than twice the
weight of the complete luminaire.
Use hook cover for suspension from circular conduit box. For connection to luminaires use
luminaire manufacturer's own chain hook but if not available use hook with standard screw
threaded body to be secured to luminaire body with nuts and washers. Where indicated use
captive hooks.
Flexible Cords
To be adequate for the mass to be supported. The cord to be suspended from a ceiling
Supports for Luminaires
To be adequate for the weight of the luminaire.
Provide not less than following number of supports for each luminaire longer than 600mm:Luminaire Width
mm
Up to & including 300
Over 300
Minimum number
of supports
2
4
Special and/or additional supports may be required for especially large or heavy luminaires or
those exposed to high winds.
Where a luminaire is not supported from conduit provide a conduit box forming an integral
part of conduit system at each point of suspension. Ensure suspensions are vertical.
Where conduit enters luminaire use back-nuts and washers to secure luminaire body to
conduit support. Provide tube with corrosion resistance equal to conduit system.
Page 95
PARKCITY

Do not support luminaires directly from conduit boxes made from non-metal or heat sensitive
materials, where the temperature of the material may exceed 60C or the mass suspended
exceeds 3 kg.
When a lampholder is mounted directly to a conduit system a backplate lamholder shall be
used.
Where luminaire is supported from trunking use proprietary clamps or brackets appropriate to
the luminaire and trunking.
Do not support luminaires directly from trunking made from non-metal or heat sensitive
materials, where the temperature of the material may exceed 60C or the mass suspended
exceeds 3 kg.
Provide a shade carrier ring for separately mounted lampholders for GLS Tungsten filament
lamps.
Connections to Luminaires
Use appropriate size of grommet where cables enter through hole in luminaire body.
Ensure that the earthing terminal of Class 1 luminaires is connected to the conduit protective
conductor of the supply circuit.
Clip or tie back with suitable proprietary devices loose wiring within luminaire, at 300mm
intervals.
When direct to conduit terminate circuit wiring in a terminal block within the supporting conduit
box. Use a flexible cord from the terminal block direct into the luminaire.
When direct to trunking terminate circuit wiring in terminal block in a adaptable box located on
side of trunking. Use flexible cord from terminal block to luminaire.
Where luminaires are suspended from trunking, secure plug and socket to BS546, adjacent
to, or on side of, trunking. Terminate circuit wiring at socket. Take flexible cord from plug of
ceiling rose to supply terminals of luminaire.
Where luminaires are fixed by rod or chain suspension terminate circuit wiring in terminal
block within supporting conduit box. Use flexible cord from terminal block to luminaire and
clip cable to one of the rods or chains, do not weave cable through links of the chain.
When there is no special Local Authority requirement and luminaires are recessed into a
suspended ceiling, terminate circuit wiring at plug and socket to BS546, located not more than
500mm from the access through the ceiling. Use flexible cord from plug of ceiling rose to
supply terminals of luminaire and include 1000mm of additional cable as a flexibility of
location allowance over the nominal length.
When there is special local authority requirements and luminaires are recessed into a
suspended ceiling, terminate circuit wiring in terminal block within conduit box. Install wiring
to luminaire by means of "low smoke" cabling within flexible galvanised metal conduit.
For connections in M.I.C.S. cable fix the cable gland to the luminaire and continue conductors
to the supply terminals of the luminaire.
Lamps
To be as follows:Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)
Page 96
PARKCITY

Tungsten Filament Lamps:

Comply with BS 161, BS5971 and BS6179.
Fluorescent Lamps:
Comply with BS1853.
High Pressure Mercury Vapour Lamps:
Comply with BS3677.
High Pressure Sodium Vapour Lamps:
Comply with IEC662.
Low Pressure Sodium Vapour Lamps:
Comply with BS3767.
Columns and Bollards
Confirm location before excavation. Install bases as indicated.
Mount column or bollard on base as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise shown.
Ensure columns and bollards are vertical unless otherwise indicated.
Install isolator in service compartment.
Install circuit protective conductor to connect luminaire to earthing terminal in service
compartment; size of circuit protective conductor to be same as the live conductors.
Bond accessible metal parts of column or bollard to earthing terminals.
Brackets to match the column.
5.3
Earthing
General
All non-current carrying metalwork associated with the electrical power distribution network
equipment and ancillaries, and all extraneous metalwork of and in the building structure shall
be effectively bonded and connected to earth at a common potential earth continuity system
in compliance with SS CP 16, CP 1013, CP 326, the IEE Regulations, the Electricity Supply
Regulations and the requirements of this specification. Earth continuity conductors, bonds
and terminations shall comply with the requirements of these Regulations and
recommendations and this specification and shall provide a minimal impedance full capacity
path for the prospective earth fault currents of all parts of the system.
All circuit protective conductors, bonding and supplementary bonding conductors and
terminations shall be of non-deteriorating high conductivity cuprious materials, copper and
bronze. The effects of galvanic action shall be particularly guarded against and shall be
minimised at joints between dissimilar metals. At copper or bronze to aluminium of zinc
interconnections the cuprious metal shall be cadmium plated or tinned and the joint wrapped
with tape, as shall be all underground joints.
Sub-circuit associated circuit protective cables only shall be terminated on purpose made
clamps and terminals.
Page 97
PARKCITY

The circuit protective and bonding systems shall distribute radially and separately from the
main sub-station earthing systems, main LV switchboards, and sub-distribution switchboards.
Metalwork associated with several systems shall be bonded at the common point and the
system protective conductor at its extremity, it being made electrically continuous between.
Bonding of incoming services shall be effected to the main earthing terminal within the
electrical switchroom general extraneous local metalwork of the building fabric, basins, pipes,
ductwork, domestic services, local heaters, etc., to the general power, lighting, ancillary
protective system, (supplementary bonding), and all roof plantroom equipment shall be
bonded to the roof metalwork.
All metalwork of the building shall be made electrically continuous throughout and connected
to the main protective systems, this requirement applying to all building services armoured
cables, cable trays, trunkings, conduits, air ducts, pipes equipment building fabric metalwork.
This shall be affected with bonding links as necessary and the complete metal paths shall be
individually tested and proven in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations for the
minimum earth continuity and earth loop impedances stated. Armoured cable terminations
shall be individually and separately tested for zero impedance between the armour and the
gland plate and each cable armouring separately tested and proven for the minimum earth
continuity and earth loop impedance specified in the Regulations. All conductors which shall
be individually tested and proven for zero impedance at the joints and earth loop impedance
tests shall be made and proven on the combined circuit protective systems in accordance
with the minimum requirements of the Regulations.
Low Voltage Distribution Earthing
The main switchboard shall incorporate an integral earthing bar which shall be continuous
throughout the entire length of the switchboard.
This earthing bar shall be either externally mounted at the top of the switchboard or internally
at the top or bottom dependent upon the application and detail requirements.
All circuit protective conductors and main bonding conductors together with functional
earthing conductors shall be individually connected to this earth bar.
Where the earth bar is internally mounted the circuit protective conductors and main bonding
conductors together with functional earthing conductors shall pass through an insulated plate
in the external framework of the switchgear and be connected directly without interruption to
the main earth bar. All circuit protective conductors shall be routed with their individually
designated circuit cable.
The earth bar shall be bonded to the entire switchboard chassis and ancillary metalwork and
the cable termination plate of each individual switchboard module section through separate
copper bonding links.
The circuit distribution cables shall be terminated on metal gland plates and bonding leads
from their gland earth tags shall be individually terminated on the main earthing bar. An
effective earth continuity connection through the cable armouring and gland shall be made.
The sub-main distribution circuit cables shall be similarly terminated on insulated gland plates
on the sub-distribution switchboards, which shall also incorporate separate insulated earthing
bars on which all sub-main and sub-circuit bonding conductors and circuit protective
conductors shall be terminated and be bonded to the switchboard chassis through separate
copper links. A bonding conductor from each cable gland earth tag shall be terminated on the
earthing bar.
Page 98
PARKCITY

Plant feeder circuits, mechanical services, lifts, etc., shall be similarly terminated on their
respective control starter panels and equipment, where the glanding and earthing bars are
mounted and bonded directly on chassis metalwork.
All cable trays shall be made electrically continuous throughout their distribution with suitable
12 mm x 3 mm section copper bonding links as a minimum being installed at any breaks in
their mechanical continuity and shall be bonded at both ends to the equipment metalwork and
earthing bar.
Earthing at Distribution Boards, Consumer Units and Switch Panels
All circuit protective conductors shall terminate within distribution boards with an earthing
terminal block. This earthing terminal block shall have an earthing terminal for each circuit
protective conductor.
A separate green, green/yellow PVC insulated stranded copper circuit protective conductor
with a minimum cross sectional area in accordance with 543-3 table 54F of the Regulations
for electrical installations shall be run with every circuit emanating from the main LV
switchboard and shall be terminated on the main earthing bar and penetrate the insulated
gland plate previously indicated.
Sub Circuit Distribution Earthing
All sub-circuit armoured and single core supply cables emanating from the sub-distribution
switchboards, starter panels, and control panels shall be terminated on the gland plates and
bonded at both ends to the earthing bars with individual circuit protective conductors from
their gland tags.
In addition to this armouring bonding a separate green, green/yellow PVC insulated stranded
copper circuit protective conductor in accordance with regulation 543-3 Table 54F as the
Regulations for Electrical Installations shall be provided.
Each circuit protective conductor shall be run within every circuit and shall be terminated on
the main earth bar of each sub-distribution switchboard, starter panel or control panel.
The separate green/green yellow PVC insulated stranded copper circuit protective conductor
shall be connected to the earthing terminal of each of the terminal switchgear/equipment
earth.
Earthing for Final Circuits in Trunking and Conduit
Although metal trunking and conduit systems shall form part of the protective conductor
metalwork and all connections in these systems shall be connected together to provide an
effective earth path in accordance with regulation 543-9. A completely separate circuit
protective conductor shall be provided for each circuit in accordance with the regulations 5433 table 54F of the Regulations for Electrical Installations.
A separate circuit protective conductor shall be provided for each individual circuit.
The circuit protective conductors shall distribute radially from the earthing bars of the subdistribution switchboards from which the trunking and conduit systems emanate.
Each circuit protective conductor shall have its own termination point within the distribution
switchgear and where these are multiple in number they shall be arranged and labelled in the
circuit orientation so that identification can be readily understood.
Under no circumstances shall copper tape be used in conjunction with galvanised screws,
nuts or washers, all such screws, nuts or washers shall be brass or electro tinned.
Page 99
PARKCITY

Earthing Conductors which are Buried

Where circuit protective conductors are routed with underground mains and sub-mains
cabling these shall have a minimum cross sectional area of 25 mm and be stranded copper
with a PVC covering of green/green yellow.
The above cross sectional area shall apply as a minimum even where the design requirement
may only require a smaller size.
All other circuit protective conductors shall be in accordance with table 54F regulation 543-3.
All circuit protective conductors shall be clipped with their related power cable mains or submains cabling. This cable clip shall be an adjustable self locking strap made of a non
corrosive material. These straps shall be positioned at 900 mm centres along the cable.
Earth Bonding Requirements
The following items shall be earth bonded.
Metal Basin and Sink Units
Metal Pipework
Ductwork
Suspended Ceilings
Raised Floors
Plantroom Equipment
Structural Steel Frame
Incoming Services at the point of entry to building
Extraneous steelwork/metalwork within easy reach
All mechanical equipment, production/process equipment that can fortuitously come into
contact with electrical servcies.
As well as that needed to comply with British Standards CP 1013, Code of Practice CP 326
and the IEE Regulations the following particular methods are required.
Metal Basin and Sink Units
The hot, cold and waste pipework and basin (when formed from a conductive material) shall
be cross bonded. The bonds shall be connected to the nearest earth point by an earth lead
2
with a minimum c.s.a. of 6 mm .
Where sink units incorporate metal drainers, the unit shall be treated as a wash basin, with
the incorporation of an equipotential bond onto the drainer unit.
Metal Pipework
All metal pipework shall incorporate bonding leads across flexible joints. The bonding lead
2
shall have a minimum c.s.a. of 6mm .
Page 100
PARKCITY

Ductwork
All metal ductwork shall incorporate bonding leads across flexible joints. The bonding leads
2
shall have a minimum c.s.a. of 6 mm .
Suspended Ceilings
All metalwork associated with ceilings must be bonded.
This requirement must not be achieved by using the Luminaires as a means of bonding.
Where the ceilings have a continuous metal frame a separate bond from the Earth Bar or
Distribution Board must be installed to be a minimum of one per every 50 square metres or
part thereof.
For areas of over 750 square metres, additional bonds should be crimped to the main bond
and connected to each corner of the ceiling.
Raised Floors
All areas containing raised floors utilising a metal floor pedestal and/or metal floor tiles shall
be bonded to earth.
2
The earth bonding lead shall have a minimum c.s.a. of 6mm and shall connect the flooring
system to the local sub-mains distribution panel/distribution board earthing facility.
The floor shall be tested such to show that a low impedance earth path exists between any
point on the floor and the earth terminal position. Should the test readings prove the
impedance is not acceptable additional earth bonding conductors shall be installed.
Electrical outlets and/or Floor Outlet Boxes installed as an integral part of the floor tile or
within the below raised floor area shall be connected with a local supplementary bonding
conductor to the nearest adjacent metal floor pedestal.
5.4
Lightning Protection
Lightning Protection Standards
All equipment, components and installation shall be in accordance and comply with the
appropriate sections of the British Standards and Codes of Practice reference SS CP 33, CP
1013, BS 2914 and BS 6651:1985.
Air Terminals
All air terminals shall be plain copper with a rod length of 500 mm or 1000 mm and diameter
of 16 mm. The top of the rod shall be tapered at its extremity to a point.
These air terminals shall be supported and fixed into a flat saddle or ridge saddle dependant
upon the application.
Both saddles shall accept the screwed thread and locknut on the air terminal.
The saddles shall be manufactured from either gunmetal or aluminium.
Both types of saddle shall have a four way support fixing system.
Page 101
PARKCITY

Where plain copper or aluminium tape forms the alternative air termination this tape shall
consist of a 25mm x 3mm section forming a continuous electrical cage. All air terminals shall
be positioned at the highest level of the structure protected and shall give a cone of protection
where possible to the levels below but air terminals shall be provided where a cone of
protection from the highest level is not possible.
Down Conductors
Down conductors shall consist of 25mm x 3mm section forming a continuous length of tape
between roof tape/terminal and test clamp.
This tape shall be copper and covered with PVC finished in one of the following colours:stone, cream, grey, black, white.
Where down conductors are formed by the metal structure of the building steelwork/
reinforcement shall be bonded using plain copper or aluminium tape of 25mm x 3mm section.
Between the reinforcement bars straps shall be installed to bond the reinforcement together.
Under these circumstances the concrete structure shall be monitored to check the earth
continuity throughout the erection period.
In both situations down conductors shall follow the most direct path possible between the air
termination and the earth termination. Right angle bends where necessary shall be allowed
but deep re-entrant loops are to be avoided.
Joints and Bonds
All joints in copper tape or cable shall be thermowelded for straight, right angle, or tee
connections.
Where aluminium tape is used for straight through tape joints an oblong junction connector
made of aluminium shall be used. This connector shall have two bolt head screw clamps and
the clamp shall have a slot of sufficient size to enable the joining conductors/tapes to totally
overlap in the connector making a positive connection between both tapes.
All bonds shall be carried out using purpose made clamps for steelwork, wire, and pipes.
However, wherever possible thermoweld connections shall be used for bonding copper,
stainless steel, plain steel, brass, bronze, chromax, and galvanised steel.
All joints and bonds shall have a cross-sectional area greater than that employed for the
conductors.
All roof metalwork, internal and external metal on the structure, including metallic pipes and
ducts, underground service pipes and cables shall be directly bonded to and form part of the
lightning protection system.
The lightning protective system shall have as few joints as possible and these joints shall be
formed either by mechanical clamps via screwed bolts or thermowelded. The clamped type
of joint shall have an overlap of conductors of at least 20 mm.
Test Joints
Each down conductor shall have a testing joint at a convenient height to enable easy testing.
These test joints shall be either the oblong test connector or screwdown test clamp.
The test clamp shall be either copper or aluminium.
Page 102
PARKCITY

Dissimilar Metal
Where the joining of aluminium to copper tape is required for connection of an aluminium
lightning protection system to a copper earthing system a bimetallic connector shall be used
to join the two dissimilar metals together.
At all interconnection of dissimilar materials an oxide inhibitor grease shall be used.
Earth Terminations
An earth termination shall be connected to each down conductor and each of these earth
terminations shall have a resistance to earth not exceeding 10 ohms as a combined
resistance to earth for the whole system.
Earth Electrodes
All earth electrodes shall generally be earth rods of solid copper which shall be either
15
mm or 20 mm diameter with a modular length of 1200 mm. The initial rod shall be complete
with spike. Coupling two or more rods together shall be via a threaded dowel. The top of
each rod driven into the ground shall be protected using a driving head stud.
The larger diameter of rod shall only be used when ground conditions necessitate.
The earthing tape from the test clamp on the building shall be connected to the earth rod
using a rod to tape purpose manufactured clamp.
This earth rod, clamp and tape shall be contained within an earthing pit of concrete or rigid
PVC construction measuring approximately 300 x 300 x 200.
This earthing pit shall be accessible for testing the earth electrode.
If it is necessary to have more than one earth rod location to satisfy the technical
requirements the distance between each earth rod location shall be greater than the depth of
each rod to ensure that the earthing is effective.
If earth rods are not practical due to the soil conditions earth mats, solid or lattice tape are to
be used based upon a 900 x 900 module.
Where earthing conditions are extremely poor a corona tape shall be installed around the
perimeter of the building. This tape shall be plain copper 25 x 6 buried in a trench spaced at
least 900 from the building line.
The trenching specification shall conform to the following:i)
Backfilled with 150 soft soil.
ii)
Copper tape installed.
iii)
Further backfilled with 150 of soft soil.
iv)
Remainder filled with the finished material as required.
External/Internal Bonding
Where roof conductors are required to pass through roof asphalting or other waterproof
membranes, a special seal shall be used comprising a 38 diameter plastic, copper or
Page 103
PARKCITY

aluminium tube with a 100 diameter flange with a 50 flange from the top of the tube shall be
installed. The tube length shall suit the thickness of the roof through which the conductor
passes, thus allowing for the tube to protrude 50 above the membrane. The seal shall be
asphalted in position and the conductor shall be sealed in the tube by a setting waterproof
compound.
Clamps and Fixings
Conductors shall be fixed using purpose made fixings which shall allow the tape to freely
expand and contract.
These fixings shall be a two screw saddle arrangement and the backplate/saddle shall be
constructed of polypropylene finished to suit the PVC sheathing colour where applicable.
Similar tape fixings shall be used with modification to suit corrugated surfaces, glazing bars,
slat roof, stand-offs and masonary fixing.
On asphalt surfaces the conductors shall be fixed with asphalt or felt pads bonded to the roof
asphalt formed over the conductor.
The conductors shall be supported at the following intervals with fixing/clamps:
Vertically
Horizontally
1200 centres
900 centres
All fixings shall be held in place using zinc plated or brass screws with the appropriate
expanding plug insert.
5.5
Testing
General
The electrical installation and its associated equipment shall upon completion and prior to
energisation be inspected and tested in accordance with Part 6 'Inspection and Testing' of the
current IEE Wiring Regulations for Electrical Installations including all amendments and in
respect to current Electricity at Work Regulations.
Where testing of specialist equipment not covered by the IEE Wiring Regulations is required,
these tests shall be carried out in accordance with the stated British Standards or Codes of
Practice.
Prior to the commencement of any tests all information, charts, schedules, diagrams, tables
and calculations describing the installation shall be provided to the person or persons carrying
out such tests. This information shall include details of devices used for isolation, switching,
protection and the characteristics of the protection devices for automatic disconnection.
The Contractor shall adopt a systematic approach to the testing of the electrical services
which shall be carried out in such a manner as not to cause danger to persons and/or
property.
Visual Inspection
A visual inspection of the installation shall be carried out to comply with Regulation 612-1
prior to any electrical testing.
The inspection shall confirm that the installation complies with the Electrical Services
Technical Specification, and that no visible damage to the installed equipment has occurred.
Page 104
PARKCITY

The following elements shall be visually checked:-
connection of all conductors are complete, both electrically and mechanically.
the correct identification of all conductors has been completed.
the specified conductors of current-carrying capacity and voltage drop have been
installed.
the connection of single-pole devices for the protection and/or switching are in the
phase conductor only.
all socket outlets and lampholders are connected correctly.
all fire barriers and protection against thermal effects are in place.
all protective measures are in place to avoid direct contact related to:
insulation of live parts

barriers or enclosures in place
obstacles are in place
equipment/fixtures out of reach
non-conducting location
all devices for isolation and switching are in place.
all settings of protective and monitoring devices have been chosen and set.
all labelling of circuits, fuses, switches and terminals are complete.
check to ensure the equipment and protective measures are compatible with any
external influences.
the erection of the appropriate danger and other warning notices together with health
and safety notices have been displayed in the correct locations.
all diagrams, instructions for operation that have to be permanently fixed adjacent to
equipment shall be provided.
shock treatment card to each main panel and sub-distribution riser.
Testing
Prior to the installation being energised the following sequence of tests shall be carried out in
accordance with Regulation 613-1 which are as follows:1.
Continuity of ring final circuits conductors.
2.
Continuity of protective conductors, including main and supplementary equipotential

bonding.
3.
Earth electrode resistance.
4.
Insulation resistance.
5.
Insulation of site built assemblies.
Page 105
PARKCITY

6.
Protection by electrical separation.
7.
Protection by barriers or enclosures provided during installation.
8.
Insulation of non-conducting floors and walls.
9.
Polarity.
10.
Earth fault loop impedance.
11.
Operation of residual current devices and fault-voltage operated protective devices.
In the event at any of the above tests indicating a fault condition, the Contractor shall rectify
the fault and all tests repeated to ensure the installation complies with the Regulations.
Testing Factory Built Assemblies
Where factory built assemblies of switchgear, starter control centres, are delivered to site in a
sub-assembled form, modular sections the final assembled unit shall be subjected to the
routine tests/inspections as required by BS 5486 Part 1 sub clauses 8.1.2 and 8.3.1 to 8.3.3
together with the tests that are applicable in relation to the Regulations for Electrical
Installations.
All factory built assemblies shall be subjected to the applicable electrical tests in relation to
the Regulations for Electrical Installations together with a visual inspection of all components
and connected after installation.
When the Engineer is satisfied that the Contractor has demonstrated and documented that
the installation complies with the Standards and Regulations the Contractor shall be
requested to issue a test certificate for each assembly. A copy of the "type" tests certificate
shall be issued with the individual routine test certificates. Each certificate shall have a
declaration made by the Contractor and/or Specialist.
Certification
All tests shall be tabulated on test sheets as approved by the engineers, and signed by the
responsible person who carried out the test and the Clients Representative who witnessed
the tests.
All defects, re-tests, omissions revealed during the visual inspection and testing shall be
made good before a Completion Certificate is issued with the qualification where applicable of
regulation 622-1 in respect of an existing installation which does not wholly form part of the
new scope of work but is unavoidably connected to the new work.
When the Engineer is satisfied that the Contractor has demonstrated and documented that
the installation complies with the Regulations, the Contractor shall be requested to issue a
Completion Certificate in accordance with Appendix 16 and this Completion Certificate
together with the testing data shall be submitted to the Engineer before a Practical
Completion certificate is issued.
General Information on Testing and Commissioning (The following may be subject to change
depending on the duties to be carried out)
Works Tests
The Engineer shall have the option to inspect at the manufacturer's works, during
manufacture and after completion, all or any manufactured material, apparatus or equipment
ordered by the Contractor for incorporation in the works.
Page 106
PARKCITY

Any tests necessary to demonstrate that the manufactured material, apparatus or equipment
is in compliance with the specification shall be carried out in the presence of the Client's
representative.
All costs incurred in carrying out such tests and inspections, except the Engineer's costs and
expenses, shall be a charge on the contract and shall be borne in full by the Contractor.
Upon completion of manufacture, or before despatch, all material, apparatus and equipment
intended for incorporation in the Works shall be offered for inspection by the Engineer and
shall be subjected, in the presence of the Engineer or his authorised representative, to the
tests specified in the relevant British Standard or elsewhere in this Specification together with
such additional tests as may be required by the Engineer in order to prove compliance with
this Specification. When no relevant British Standard exists, or the appropriate Standard fails
to specify tests, tests shall be carried out to the requirements of the Engineer.
The results of each and every tests carried out in accordance with the provisions of this
Specification, whether or not witnessed by the Engineer, shall be accurately recorded on
approved form of test certificate signed by the person in charge of the testing procedure and
countersigned by the Engineer's representative witnessing the test(s), and four copies of
every such test certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor within 14 days
of the completion of the tests.
Every test certificate submitted in accordance with the preceding clause shall bear the project
name and number and the Sub-Contract reference, all as designated by the Engineer, the
name and address of the Main Contractor, the Contractor, and the manufacturer or supplier,
all relevant contract, order, and production numbers, the date and time of the test, and the
ambient conditions, in addition to a fully detailed description of the test(s) carried out and the
results obtained, including any relevant performance curves.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Engineer is advised in writing
whenever material, apparatus or equipment is ready for inspection and/or test at his own or
his suppliers' premises. At least seven days notice shall be given, and due allowance shall
be made for this period of notice in drawing up the programme of work.
All labour, material, fuel, power, apparatus and instruments needed for the efficient and safe
execution of the tests required by the Engineer in accordance with this Specification shall be
provided by the Contractor at his own expense, and the costs thereof shall be deemed to be
included in the Sub-Contract price.
The Engineer and his authorised representative shall have the right of access, at all
reasonable times during normal working hours, to the premises of the Contractor for the
purpose of inspecting and/or testing material, apparatus or equipment intended for
incorporation in the Works. The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure that the
right of access extends to the premises of his suppliers and of the manufacturers of bought-in
material, apparatus and equipment.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Engineer is provided with adequate
facilities for carrying out such inspections as he may consider necessary, and that all tests are
carried out in safe and workmanlike manner and a properly organised testing facility meeting
all relevant statutory safety requirements, whether the said tests and/or inspections be carried
out on his own premises or those of his suppliers or equipment manufacturer.
The Engineer shall have the right to reject any material, apparatus or equipment which, as the
result of inspections and/or tests may be found to be defective or unsatisfactory in any
respect, or not in accordance with the requirements of this Specification, and to require the
Contractor to repair, adjust, modify, or replace the defective item before despatch to site. If
Page 107
PARKCITY

the defective item be adjudged by the Engineer to be unsuitable for repair, adjustment or
modification, then it shall be replaced by a completely new item at the expense of the
Contractor.
All expenses incurred by the Engineer or his authorised representative in connection with
inspections or tests resulting in the rejection of the item(s) offered for inspection or test will be
charged to the Contractor or deducted from sums due to him.
In cases where the manufacturer or supplier of material, apparatus or equipment complies
upon type tests to prove, either wholly or in part, the suitability of his product(s), then the
Contractor shall arrange for triplicate copies of certificates giving the results of such type tests
to be submitted to the Engineer at the same time the order is placed.
No material, apparatus or equipment, from whatever source, shall be despatched to site until
the Engineer has had the opportunity to inspect it and either has formally waived his right to
inspect or has given written authorisation for despatch following satisfactory test and/or
inspection.
No inspection or testing by the Engineer or his authorised representative nor the witnessing of
satisfactory tests nor the authorising of despatch to site shall in any way relieve the
Contractor of any of his obligations under this Sub-Contract, nor shall it in any way limit the
right of the Engineer to reject such items after delivery to site if they subsequently prove to be
defective or unsatisfactory or unsuitable for their intended purpose.
When the Contractor has ordered equipment from a manufacturer who, in turn, had bought-in
major components from a secondary supplier, the Engineer shall have the right to elect to
inspect such components at the works of the said secondary supplier, and the Contractor
shall ensure, when placing his orders, that such rights are secured. For the purpose of this
clause, interdepartmental orders within the same organisation shall be treated in the same
manner as orders involving separate organisations. The Engineer shall have the right to
require that any or all of the instruments and other testing apparatus intended to be used in
the execution of the required tests shall first be demonstrated to be accurate.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all materials, apparatus and equipment
required for the execution of the Sub-Contract Works are ordered sufficiently early to ensure
delivery to site at the correct time as required by the approved construction programme. It
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that adequate time is available for
inspection and/or testing by the Architect, including the giving of due notice as required by this
Specification. No materials apparatus or equipment subject to inspection and/or test will be
recognised as complete and ready for despatch until after such inspections and tests have
been satisfactorily carried out, and no claim for delay will be entertained unless the Engineer
has failed to carry out inspection or to waive inspection after being given the specified period
of notice.
The Engineer shall have the right to waive, at his sole discretion, the requirements relating to
inspection of materials, apparatus, and equipment at the maker's works, and to instruct that
the said materials, apparatus, or equipment to be despatched to site immediately after
completion of manufacture. The exercise by the Engineer of this right shall not in any way
relieve the Contractor of his obligation to carry out the prescribed tests and to submit test
certificates.
No work shall be painted or otherwise prepared for despatch until it had been inspected by
the Engineer and despatch has been authorised. The Engineer shall have option to delegate
his powers of inspection and test to an independent person or organisation who shall be
empowered to carry out the Engineer's functions on his behalf and whose name and standing
shall have been communicated to the Contractor in writing by the Engineer.
Page 108
PARKCITY

The Engineer shall have the right to direct the Contractor to submit samples of material or
specimen components to an independent testing organisation for analysis, test, or evaluation.
The costs of any such examination shall be met by the Contractor, who shall be entitled to be
reimbursed under the Sub-Contract.
When one or more of the Contractor's purchase orders covers the supply of a number of like
components or items of equipment, the Engineer shall have the right to require one item or
component of each type and rating be subjected to type tests as described in the relevant
British Standard. Other similar items may be then subjected only to routine tests.
Site Tests
The Engineer shall have right to inspect all the work in progress and upon completion, and to
require the Contractor to carry out tests in his presence or in the presence of his authorised
representative in order to prove that all work carried out and all material, apparatus and
equipment installed are wholly satisfactory and fully meet the requirements of this
Specification. All costs and charges associated with or arising from such inspections and
tests, including costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out the prescribed tests and in
attending upon the Engineer whilst tests and inspections are in progress, but excluding the
Engineer's costs and expenses, shall be deemed to have been included in the Sub-Contract
price and shall be borne in full by the Contractor.
Upon completion of the electrical installation, or any substantial section thereof, the
installation of that section and all of the associated electrical equipment shall be subjected to
the tests specified in the relevant British Standards and in the IEE Regulations, together with
such other tests as may be required by the Engineer in order to prove compliance with this
Specification. When no relevant British Standard exists, the tests shall be carried out to the
requirements of the Engineer.
All of the required tests shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer
or his authorised representative.
Tests carried out in the presence of the Engineer shall not be regarded as valid for the
purpose of the Sub-Contract, unless the Engineer shall have previously signified his inability
to attend, and shall have authorised the Contractor to proceed with the testing process in his
absence.
The results of each and every test carried out in accordance with the provisions of this
Specification, whether or not witnessed by the Engineer, shall be accurately recorded on an
approved form of test certificate signed by the person in charge of the testing procedure and
countersigned by the Engineer's representative witnessing the test(s), and four copies to the
Engineer by the Contractor within 14 days of the completion of the tests.
Every test certificate submitted in accordance with the preceding clause shall bear the project
name and number and the Sub-Contract reference, all as designated by the Engineer, the
name and address of the Main Contractor and the manufacturer or supplier, all relevant
contract, order, and production numbers, the date and time of the test, and the ambient
conditions, in addition to a fully detailed description of the test(s) carried out and the results
obtained, including any relevant performance curves.
An additional copy of every test certificate relating to site tests of the completed installation or
of parts thereof, shall be bound into the operation and maintenance manual specified
elsewhere.
The Contractor shall give at least seven days notice to the Engineer when the works, or
substantial sections thereof, will be completed and ready for inspection and test.
Page 109
PARKCITY

All labour and material, fuel, power, apparatus and instruments required for the efficient and
safe excursion of the tests required by the Architect in accordance with this Specification shall
be provided by the Contractor at his own expense, and the cost thereof shall be deemed to be
included in the Sub-Contract price.
The Engineer and his authorised representative shall have unrestricted access on or about
the site of the Works at all times during the site working hours, and at other times by
agreement, for the purpose of carrying out inspections or witnessing tests upon installations.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Engineer is provided with adequate facilities for carrying
out such inspections as he may consider necessary, and that all tests are carried out in a safe
and workmanlike manner complying with all relevant statutory safety requirements. The
Engineer shall have the right to reject any material, apparatus or equipment which, as the
result of inspections and/or tests may be found to be defective or unsatisfactory in any
respect, or not in accordance with the requirements of the Specification, and to require the
Contractor to repair, adjust, modify, or replace the defective item. If the defective item be
adjudged by the Engineer to be unsuitable for repair, adjustment or modification, then it shall
be replaced by a completely new item at the expense of the Contractor.
All expenses incurred by the Engineer or his authorised representative in connection with
inspections or tests resulting in the rejection of the item(s) offered for inspection or test will be
charged to the Contractor or deducted from sums due to him.
No material, apparatus, equipment, or installation shall be covered or otherwise permanently
concealed from view until the Engineer has had the opportunity to inspect it, and either has
formally waived his right to inspect it or had given written authorisation for covering to proceed
following satisfactory tests and/or inspection.
No work shall be painted until it has been inspected by the Engineer and/or painting has been
authorised.
No inspection or testing by the Engineer or his authorised representative nor the witnessing of
satisfactory tests shall in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under this
Sub-Contract, nor shall it in any way limit the right of the Engineer to reject such items if they
subsequently prove to be defective or unsatisfactory or unsuitable for their intended purpose.
The Engineer shall have the power to require that any or all of the instruments and other
testing apparatus intended to be used in the execution of the required tests shall first be
demonstrated to be accurate.
The Contractor shall be wholly reasonable for time-scheduling his work so that inspection and
tests can be carried out as specified and the prescribed notice given to the Engineer without
delaying the completion of the Works beyond the day set out in the approved construction
programme. No apparatus, equipment, plant, or installations will be recognised as complete
and ready for taking over until all of the specified inspections and tests have been
satisfactorily carried out, and no claim for delay will be entertained unless it can be shown that
the Engineer has failed to carry out or to waive inspection after having been given the
specified period of notice.
The Engineer shall have the right to waive, at his sole direction, the requirements relation to
inspection of materials, apparatus equipment and installations and the witnessing of tests
thereon. The exercise by the Engineer of this right shall not in any way relieve the Contractor
of his obligations to carry out the prescribed tests and to submit test certificates.
The Engineer shall have the power to delegate his powers of inspection and test to an
independent person or organisation who shall be empowered to carry out the Engineer's
functions on his behalf and whose name and standing shall have been communicated to the
Contractor in writing by the Engineer.
Page 110
PARKCITY

The Engineer shall have power to direct the Contractor to submit samples of material or
specimen components to an independent testing organisation for analysis, test, or evaluation.
The cost of any such examination shall be met by the Contractor, who may be entitled to be
reimbursed under the Contract.
If any fault or defect should come to light during the maintenance period in any of the
apparatus, plant, equipment, or installations, the Engineer shall have power to require the
Contractor to carry out further tests to isolate the fault or defect and subsequently to prove
that the fault or defect has been remedied.
Commissioning
Following the satisfactory conclusion of final inspections and tests on completed sections of
the Works, the Contractor shall duly commission each section of the electrical installation and
leave it in full working order. For the purpose of this Specification, the term 'Commissioning'
shall be deemed to include:(a)
The energizing of electrical distribution circuits and equipments which have previously
been inspected and tested and found to be satisfactory and capable of being
energised with complete safety.
(b)
The setting of electrical protective devices and systems, where relevant, in

accordance with the directions of the Engineer, or failing such directions, in
accordance with sound engineering practice.
(c)
The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment, including that supplied
and installed under other Contracts, as detailed in the Specification.
(d)
The verification of the performance of all such plant and equipment by the carrying
out, where required, of further tests and the making of all necessary adjustments so
as to obtain optimum performance.
Mere compliance with the requirements of this section of the Specification shall not, by itself,
in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.
No approval given by the Engineer in connection with the commissioning process, whether by
way of approval of procedures carried out or proposed, or approval of results obtained shall in
any way relieve the Contractor of the contractual and statutory obligations to ensure that all
connections and adjustments are made correctly and that the installations and equipment are
handed over in a completely safe and satisfactory condition.
All activities carried out by the Contractor in pursuance of the requirements of this section of
the Specification shall be carried out, or continuously supervised, by a competent and
experienced commissioning engineer, details of whose experience and qualifications shall
have been submitted to and approved by, the Architect before commissioning commences.
In cases where the volume of commissioning work justifies it, the Engineer shall have right to
set up a Commissioning Panel to oversee all activities, relating to the commissioning of the
electrical installations and plant. The Panel shall consist of nominated representatives of the
Engineer, the Main Contractor, the Contractor, and the Employer, and shall be responsible, in
an advisory capacity, for assisting the Engineer in all matters relating to the commissioning
process.
The Client shall have right to appoint an independent Commissioning Engineer to act on his
behalf in the control of all activities relating to the commissioning process, and in such matters
Page 111
PARKCITY

the said Commissioning Engineer shall be deemed to be an authorised representative of the

Client.
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for ensuring that all switching operations and all
work on electrical circuits and/or equipment which have once been energised are carried out
in a thoroughly safe manner and shall operate, and rigidly adhere to, an approved 'permit-towork' system. For this purpose, the Contractor shall appoint an 'authorised person' as
defined in the Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations, and shall communicate the
name of such person in writing to the Engineer.
In appropriate cases, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to nominate a particular
employee as 'Switchgear Operator', and the Contractor shall ensure that all switchgear
operations are carried out by the nominated person and that such person is always available
for this duty when required.
The Engineer shall require the Contractor to prepare a commissioning schedule detailing the
plant to be commissioned, the operations to be carried out, the time scale, with exact dates
for specific operations, and details of requirements for water and power services and/or
attendance by other Contractors. This commissioning schedule, in draft form, shall be
submitted to the Engineer not less than four weeks in advance of the date on which
commissioning is to commence.
The Contractor shall present the information from the commissioning schedule in the form of
a flow diagram and/or 'Critical Path' chart.
The procedures to be followed by the Contractor for commissioning the electrical equipment
and installations shall be proposed by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
No connections or adjustments shall be made to plant or equipment which has already been
commissioned and set to work, except with the prior consent to the Engineer.
No plant or equipment shall be charged, energised or operated without the prior approval of
the Engineer. All applicable test certificates shall have been submitted to the Engineer before
such approval will be given.
All commissioning procedures shall be carried out in a safe and satisfactory manner and in
accordance with the provisions of the Factory Acts, the Health and Safety at Work Act, and
the Electricity Regulations and to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
Following completion of commissioning, each item of equipment or, where several items of
equipment are interdependent, the complete plant shall operate continuously and
satisfactorily under normal operating conditions for a minimum period of 72 hours without
defect of any kind. In the event of any defect or mal-operation becoming apparent during this
period the Contractor shall forthwith determine the cause and rectify it by means of repair,
replacement, adjustment or modification and the reliability run shall be re-commenced. All
materials, equipment and labour required to locate and rectify any such defect shall be
provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
No plant, equipment or installation will be considered as complete until the prescribed
commissioning procedures have been satisfactorily carried out and the reliability run has been
completed without untoward incident.
The Engineer shall have power to require that the whole of the plant, equipment and
installations, or selected parts thereof be re-inspected and, if necessary, re-tested
immediately before the end of the contractual maintenance period, and the Contractor shall
be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with the Client.
Page 112
PARKCITY

Interface Tests
Where any interface exists between two or more systems such as generators and UPS
systems, fire alarms, halon and mechanical plant, all system shall be operated together and
acceptance tested to ensure that all interface connections operately correctly, that no adverse
reaction, between systems is apparent and to confirm that all design requirements have been
met.
5.6
Labelling
All equipment, materials components and installation of the electrical services shall have
signs/labels displayed in accordance with BS 5378 Parts 1, 2 and 3 and Regulation 514
conforming to the IEE Regulations.
The following principle colour co- ordination of signs/labels shall apply:Warning
Yellow background with black lettering.
Mandatory
Blue background with white lettering.
General Information
White background with black lettering.
Emergency
Green background with white lettering.
Prohibition
White background with red lettering.
Fire Fighting
Red background with white lettering (except extinguishers

which have particular colours).
Equipment/Services
routed in common
locations with others
Orange bands of tape or

where required orange colour.
Warning Notices
All items of equipment or enclosure within which voltages excees 250 volts or separate
enclosures or items of equipment that allow simultaneous human contact with live parts
exceeding 250 volts shall be so arranged that before access may be gained a warning of the
maximum voltage present shall be clearly visible i.e. "DANGER 500 VOLTS".
Where switchgear is concerned which forms a unit construction the label shall be centrally
placed and preferable on the busbar section. The number of labels shall be determined by
the size of the switchboard but at least one label every two metres length of switchboard shall
be provided.
Each switchboard shall have the primary warning triangle sign denoting "Caution, risk of
electric shock".
Where an isolator leaves any part of equipment or enclosure "live" when in the off position a
warning notice shall be used indicating that the equipment is not totally isolated and giving
instructions for achieving further isolation.
Warning labels shall be fixed to high voltage cables or their protective covering at 1.5 metres
(max) intervals with lettering 10 mm high in red on a white background.
Page 113
PARKCITY

A safety sign shall be fixed to every enclosure associated with a high voltage discharge lamp
installation e.g. inductors, resistors, capacitors and transformers. In addition a supplementary
sign shall be located below the warning sign which shall be 10 mm x 50 mm yellow
background with 5 mm black lettering stating DANGER plus the highest open circuit voltage
to earth (e.g. 5000 Volts A.C.).
All L.V. main switchrooms together with H.V. switchrooms shall have a warning sign together
with warning notices on all doorways into the sub-station/switchroom.
The warning sign shall be the yellow triangle with black edging and the electrical symbol
within the triangle.
The warning notices shall be a yellow background with black lettering stating "NOTICE
AUTHORISED PERSONS ONLY" with "KEEP LOCKED AT ALL TIMES" with a minimum
letter size of 25 mm high.
If a sub-station has automatic CO (or other gas) protection a mandatory notice informing the
2
possible discharge of CO (or other gas) shall be displayed on or adjacent all entrances.
2
General Information/Identification Labels
All electrical equipment shall be labelled to ensure correct identification and give essential
operating functions which relate to each other.
All these labels shall conform to a white background with black lettering.
The main incoming switch shall state:Main Isolator
Rating
Phase
Voltage
2
Incoming Cable Size in mm and cable type system earthing
Individual switch fuse, MCCB, isolator shall state:-
The circuit which it controls with a general description of type of load

Rating
Phase
2
Outgoing cable size in mm and cable type
The main busbar/main panel construction shall in addition to the warning/safety notices state:-
The BSS to which it complies

Fault rating
Classification reference
IP Rating
All distribution boards shall have external labels which state:-
Voltage
Maximum Rating of Protective devices uses
Type of load connected
All distribution boards shall have internal labels which state:2
Main cable size in mm
Phase colour indication
Circuit number*
Page 114
PARKCITY

Description of circuit*
Circuit protective device rating*
Actual circuit current*
Circuit cable*
*This applies to all sub-circuits and these labels/ circuit charts shall be completed in clear
printing in black ink on a white background.
The individual phases shall be identified with its phase colour of red, yellow, blue respectively.
Where a distribution arrangement incorporates contactors, timeswitches, relays, indicator
lights and push buttons each of these shall be labelled and indicate its function i.e.
ON/OFF/AUTO together with what it controls i.e. "LIGHTING", "OVERRIDE SWITCH",
"TIMESWITCH FOR EXTERNAL LIGHTING".
These labels shall conform to a white background with black lettering.
Local switchgear/isolators and control gear shall have individual labels which shall be black
lettering on a white background. These labels shall indicate:-
Equipment title
Current Rating, Phase, Voltage
Circuit Reference
The ON/OFF functions shall be clearly indicated using an appropriate label where the
operating positions are not clearly indicated on the equipment itself.
All junction boxes which form a marshalling point and junction point for fire alarm system,
security systems and communication systems shall have a label with black lettering and white
background. These labels shall indicate:-
The Wiring System enclosed

Voltage
Circuit(s) Reference
Additional Information/Identification Labels

Consideration to be given to the following.
-
Particular identification of socket outlets.

Particular identification of switch/fused spur outlets.
Particular identification of lighting switches.
Particular identification of communication systems, special circuits.
All these shall be individually labelled which shall be black lettering on a white background.
Emergency Labels
Where an item of equipment and or switchgear is designated for emergency operation the
labelling shall be white lettering on a green background.
This labelling shall clearly indicate the item of equipment/function it performs together with the
emergency action required to be undertaken.
Prohibition Labels
Where an item of equipment and/or switchgear is designated for prohibited use i.e.
Page 115
PARKCITY

"Danger switch off when not in use"

"Do not switch off"
"Emergency Stop"
This labelling shall be red lettering on a white background.

Fire Fighting Labels
Where a particular item of equipment and/or switchgear is designated for fire fighting use i.e.
"a fire alarm switch on a main switchgear panel" then this shall be clearly and differently
indicated with a label which shall have white lettering on a red background.
Labelling Material
The material shall be a composite plastic component with three layers of rigid plastic (040"
ABS) materials. The letter colour being the centre element of the composite and when
engraved the composite shall then expose the colour. The method shall be as commonly
referred to as "TRAFFOLYTE".
All lettering shall be upper case in capitals and generally the height of lettering that shall be
used shall be as follows:-
6 mm for identification labels

12 mm for warning notices
12 mm for the principle wording of an emergency sign
6 mm for the secondary wording of an emergency sign
The fixing used for all labels shall be either bolted with gripping washer or rivetted with space
washers behind each rivet.
Two fixings shall be provided for labels with a height up to 25 mm and where labels have a
greater height than this four fixings - one in each corner of the label shall be provided.
5.7 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

General
Description
This section specifies the Closed Circuit Television system which shall form part of this
Contract.
The Contractor shall provide, install, test, commission and set to work the Closed Circuit
Television System as indicated in the Contract Drawings and specified in this Section.
The location of the Contract Works shall be as shown in the Contract drawings.
Manufacturer
Page 116
PARKCITY

All equipment and materials shall be supplied preferably by a single manufacturer to

ensure uniformity of standards and composition.
All equipment and accessories delivered to the Site shall be new and shall be clearly
marked to identify different components, and materials.
Selection
All equipment, materials, fittings and accessories used shall be suitable for use in the
temperature and ambient conditions that will exist in the car parks. It is assumed that the
air temperatures will rise to 45oC and relative humidity will rise to 100%. The dust content
will be extremely high and equipment may be exposed to direct sunshine with surface
temperature of 70oC.
Standard
All equipment, materials and workmanship shall comply with the appropriate B.S.
standards.
All aspects of the installation shall comply with the statutory obligations and local
requirements.
Cctv system
The system shall be provided to maintain surveillance of selected areas.
The system shall operate round the clock and be mounted at the FCC Room. A Digital
Video Recorder (DVR) shall be provided at the FCC Room for recording images from all
cameras that are sequentially controlled.
The tenderer shall provide a well ventilated aluminium console to house all equipment.
There shall be sufficient table top space for paper work, a telephone and refreshments.
240GB Hard Disk shall be provided for each VCR at the FCC room.
All power cables to the cameras, with isolators at both ends shall be provided by the
successful tenderer. Note: CCTV cables shall be of RG59 type.
The camera shall be equipped with motion sensors so that when motion is sensed at the
appropriate camera, the system shall interrupt the sequential recording and images
recorded at the affected location. This facility shall be time programmable/ switchable.
Schedule of equipment
The proposed CCTV System shall consist but not limited to the following:-
Page 117
PARKCITY

Cameras
All indoor and outdoor cameras shall comply with the following minimum requirements:1) Camera Image :
1/3 Color CCD
512 x 582 active elements
2) Scanning System: CCIR
3) Synchronisation:
a) Line locked phase adjustable or
b) Gen. locked
4) Output Signal Level:
1.0V (P-P) Composite level at 75 ohms
5) Auto Black:
Provide to maintain constant pedestal set up throughout entire light range.
6) Automatic Gain:
20dB continuous internal adjustment.
7) Infrared Filter: Built-in
8) Automatic Light Range: 1,000,000 : 1
9) Sensitivity F1/7 Lens 75%
High Light Reflectance
Imager Illumination : 0.12 lux full video
Scene Illumination : 1.2 lux full video
10) Resolution:
580 lines horizontal minimum
11) Signal To Noise Ratio: 50dB min.
Page 118
PARKCITY

12) Geometric Distortion: None

13) Transfer Smear:
Tolerate 1000 x light overloads without objectional transfer smears with IR filter
installed.
14) Gamma Correction:
0.5 to 5.10 (continuous internal adjustment)
15) Shutter speeds: 1/50 to 1/500000 sec
16) Mechanical Focus Adjustment: External
17) Ambient Temperature: -20C to 55C
18) Lens Mount: C & CS - Mount
19) Vibration: 3g swept sine wave,
15 to 2000Hz
20) Lens
a : Zoom: {20 x motorized 102mm lens
{8.0mm - 120mm, f/1.2
b : Fixed:{Auto iris 3.7mm f/1.6 (wide angle)
Note:
i) Outdoor camera shall be housed in an environment housing and be mounted on wall at
3m heigh level.
ii) All indoor pan & tilt camera shall be housed in a 130mm diameter dome whereas all
indoor fixed camera shall be housed in a dome of less than 100mm diameter.
32 multiscreen video monitor (colour)
Video monitors shall be connected to the Digital Video Matrix Switcher.
The video monitors shall be of colour type with Automatic degaussing and produce high
resolution (625 lines, 50 fields/ sec) and high control pictures. They should include video
loop-through connectors with switchgear high-Z/75 ohm termination and factacting
Page 119
PARKCITY

horizontal holds, and AC power On/ Off shall be located at the front of the units. They
must be also capable to operate of 12 VDC power source.
The switching and control system and video monitors shall be located at the FCC Room
to be operated by the authorised personnel.
Technical requirements are as follows:1) Picture Tube: 32" implosion protected
2) Video Input Level:
0.5 to 2V (p-p) Composite Video Negative Sync.
3) Video Input Impedance:
75 ohms High impedance looping
4) Synchronisation:
Full time based correcting
Camera lenses
All lenses shall be multi coated and be selected accordingly to suit the range indicated.
The lenses are generally fixed focal lengths and have adjustable iris with f-stop of 1.3.
Tenderers are to indicate their choice of lenses with substantiation in the submission.
Lenses shall be provided with auto iris in areas where the images will be affected by the
varying intensity of sunlight.
Multiplexer (not in use)

The video multiplexer shall allow for simultaneous recording of 16 video signals. It shall
have 16 video inputs. The multiplexer shall select the video signals and place identification
codes during the vertical blanking to enable retrieval, decoding and display of selective
video signals on a monitor.
Time lapse recorder (not in use)
The time lapse video recorder shall record output signals from the multiplexer unit that
compress each camera signal without compromise in the resolution.
Recording will be done at full speed upon activation of the panic alarm system.
Page 120
PARKCITY

Playback functions shall include fast (forward/ reverse) search, frame-by-frame search
(both directions), still frame viewing and slow motion - 1/10 to 1/100 of normal speed.
Technical requirements are as follows:1) Tape Drive System -Direct motor drive
2) Clock/ Timer - Quartz clock control with rechargeable battery back up 10 days.
3) Automatic tape stop and run out audio visual indicator.
4) Heater for anti condensation of recording heads.
5) Fast Forward/ Rewind Time cassettes -4.5 to 5.5 minutes with 240 min.
6) Television System - Min. 2 rotary heads
7) Television System - CCIR standard 625 lines 50 fields and PAL.

8) Erase head - 1 full track head
9) Audio Recording -1 track
10)Video Input - 21.0V p-p 75ohms unbalanced
composite video signal
11) Horizontal - 500 lines

12) Signal to noise ratio
- Video: better than 43 dB
- Audio: better than 40 dB
13) Recording Lock:
- Protects unit against external tampering once a recording has started.
14) Still Frame:
- Provide clear still frame free of noise and distortion.
15) Dropout/ Noise:
- Automatically "frills-in tape dropouts to reduce picture noise.
16) Recording Time Per Tape 960 hours
Digital video recorder (DVR)
Page 121
PARKCITY

Sixteen channel digital video recorder and Digital Video Matrix Switcher shall be
installed for the CCTV surveillance system. The Digital Security Monitoring and
Storage System shall be a complete surveillance monitoring and security data storage
solution that is not only reliable, but also affordable and user-friendly. It integrates
Digital Video Recorder and Matrix Switcher into a single unit. It also eases the usage of
the system by recording on a high compression ratio onto a hard disk and save the
hassle of changing tapes in a conventional CCTV system. The system allows easy
navigation and high speed search mode to retrieve images quickly.
There shall also a password protection that to prevent unauthorised users to access
and retrieve the images recorded. For authorised users, there shall be three levels of
access; supervisor, local user and remote user so that the administrator can actually
assign different levels of access to different users.
Schedulable recording can also be done at selected cameras. This is useful especially
duration long holidays where only certain time and zones are needed to be under
surveillance.
Authorised users can retrieve stored images remotely. This will not only saves time to
travel to the actual site, but also bring convenient to the users.
All the cameras units installed shall be linked to a 240 GB, 16 channels digital recorder.
The digital recorder unit shall support continuous 24 hours recording of up to 30 days.
The Digital Video Recorder allows the user to record all camera images to the hard
disk drive, while simultaneously monitoring all of those same camera scenes live on
the video monitor.
Digital video matrix switcher
Digital video matrix switcher shall be combined both switching and computer technology
to provice powerful performance and unique system features for the security user. This
system can be programmed to display the video from any camera on any monitor, either
manually or via independent automatic switching sequences.
Digital video matrix switcher provide versatile modular construction, accommodating up
to 256 camera inputs, 64 monitor outputs, 32 keyboards, 1024 alarm points, a computer
interface port, and a logging printer port.
This system can be programmed with up to 60 squences which can be run
independently of each other in either a forward or reverse direction. Any of the
Page 122
PARKCITY

sequences can utilize the SalvoSwitching capability, where any number of system
monitors may be selected to switch as a group. Using the optional master control
software package, sequences can be made to activate and deactive automatically based
upon the time of day and the day of the week.
On-site receiver/drivers permit operator control of pan, tilt, zoom, multiple pre-positions,
four auxiliaries, autopan and random scan. An integral local test function is also a
standard feature. This system also supports variable speed operation and full
programming functions of AutoDome Series dome cameras.
With the addition of the alarm interface accessory unit, an external contact closure or logic
level can be used to automatically active any camera to be displayed. Any monitor or
group of monitors can be set to display cameras under alarm conditions. The base
system contains three built-in alarm response modes: basic, auto-build and sequence &
display.
System operation and programming is accomplished using a full-function, ergonomically
designed keyboard. Up to 32 keyboards may be used in the system. Built-in operator
priority levels and the ability to restrict certain operators from controlling designated
functions provide maximum flexibility.
Digital video matrix switcher included a black outline 48 character on-screen display for
time/ dte, camera number, camera ID (16 characters), an icon to identify controllable
cameras and monitor (12 characters) or status information. Over 1000 characters are
available when programming camera ID and monitor titles.
Digital video matrix switcher contains a logging printer output port which accepts a
standard RS-232 serial printer. This provides a permanent record of system status
showing the time and date of changes such as incoming alarms, acknowledgment of
alarms, loading of sequences, user log-on to keyboard, transfer of system table and
sequences, video loss message and a power up reset message. In addition, the printer
can be used to obtain a hard copy of the systems configuration tables and sequences.
Technical requirements are as follows:i)
Video inputs: 256 cameras
ii) Video output: 64 monitors max.

iii) Keyboard: 32 keyboards max.
iv) Input Voltage Level: 0.5Vp_p to 2Vp_p
v) Gain: Unity 4% (75ohm terminated)
Page 123
PARKCITY

vi) Signal-to-noise: 70dB at 3.58MHz

vii) Operating Temperature : 4oC 50oC
viii) Humidity: 0% - 95% relative.
Indoor pan/ tilt head

Mechanical
i) Pan Movement (horizontal plan):
180 (wall mounted)
360 (ceiling mounted)
ii) Speed (no load condition):
12/second +1
iii) Tilt Movement : +/- 90
iv) Speed (no load condition):
3/second +/-5
v) Maximum Load: 15 Ibs
vi) Gearing: chain and sprocket final drive
vii)Construction:
Alluminium plate all internal parts corrosion protected.
Outdoor Pan & Tilt Head
i) Weatherproof Certification to: IP66
ii) Load Capacity: 35 Kg
iii) Motors:
AC permanent magnet synchronous
iv) Pan Speed
6/second
v) Tilt Speed
2.25/second
vi) Pan Torque (braking)
: 127 kg/cms
Page 124
PARKCITY

vii) Tilt Torque (braking) : 340 kg/cms

viii) Backlash
ix) Movement Angle
0.2or less
: 360 both axis
x) Operating Temperature : +10 to +50

xi) Construction:
Die-cast aluminum body, platform and base
The system shall be provided with manual by-pass switches so that pan/ tilt/zoom
operation may be operated manually. Each monitor shall be provided with its own control
switch to operate the pan/ tilt/zoom operation.
Security console
The control console shall be custom made to suit the Client's operations. The panels shall be matt
finish and shall house the following equipment shown in the schematic such as:-
i) Colour multiscreen monitors at FCC Room.

ii)
Digital Video Matrix Switcher
iii) Camera controllers

iv) Digital Video Recorder
The console shall be ergonomically designed and layout of all equipment shall not cause physical
strain and restrict the operator's movement. It shall be adaptable to suit various physical sizes of
operators. All CCTV monitors shall be located at a distance that is equivalent to 6 times the diagonal
measurement.
Mechanical Ventilation for CCTV monitoring console shall be provided.

If possible, all equipment shall be mounted flush against the finished surface and control knobs,
switches, keys, etc., with the exception of CCTV monitors shall be non obtrusive and yet within
reach from a sitting position. All monitors need not necessarily be installed in the console if the line
of sight of monitors affect effective monitoring and operation.
All monitors shall be mounted in a manner which does not cause reflection from ambient lighting.
Page 125
PARKCITY

All paint finishes shall be of high quality enamel. A minimum of two undercoats shall be applied and
each built-up and flattened separately. The final coat shall be agreed light colour gloss finish and
sufficient body shall be given to the paint films so that the final appearance of the finish units is
entirely free from blemishes, undulations, foreign inclusions scratches, patterning or any defects
whatsoever.
The sheet metal for the build up of the various items shall be specially selected, deadflat mild steel
not less than 2mm thick. The panel shall be built up on substantial framing with all necessary
stiffeners and supports. The entire panel shall be vermin proof.
A tinned copper earthing strip of dimension not less than 25 x 3mm shall be provided for the full
length of the switchboards and sufficient provisions made for earthing connections of all electrical
circuits. It shall be effectively connected to all metal parts other than current carrying conductors.
Fuse bases and carriers shall be of plastic moulded insulating material of an approved make.
Ceramic materials will not be accepted.
All LIVE terminals and contacts shall be effectively shrouded and it shall be possible to change
fuses with the circuit alive, without danger of contacts with live metal.
Fuse bases and carrier shall be coloured coded, white for isolating link, light green for control and
black for all other fuses, with phase indication.
Fuse and links in the same circuit shall be mounted in the adjacent positions in the same row. Fuses
for control and voltmeter shall be mounted on the front of the panel by back-connected fuse holders.
Control and auxilliary relays shall be plug-in type, rack-mounted, provided with cable connection
sockets and anchored by quick fastening vibration-proof devices.
All contacts shall be double breaking type. Relay coils shall be rated at 230V single phase A.C.
supply, and they shall operate when the voltage is reduced to 85% of nominal. Drop out voltage
shall not occur at voltages exceeding 65% of nominal.
Contacts elements and operating coils shall be replaceable and be enclosed in transparent
dust-proof plastic case of available for easy inspection.
Each relay shall have a minimum of one pair of normally open and one pair of normally closed spare
contacts.
10% spare control auxiliary relays shall be provided.
Different types of wirings i.e. signal, a.c. or d.c. (power & control) cables shall be wired separately in
fire retardant trunkings. The trunkings shall be well supported both horizontally and vertically such
Page 126
PARKCITY

that tail ends of cables do not exceed 150mm in length. Cable ties and wraps shall be used for
multiple runs of cables beyond the trunkings.
All cable openings shall be glanded or sealed with proprietary made materials that effectively
prevent the ingress of dust and grit.
Single phase power source shall be terminated at 13 amp. switch socket outlets to be mounted on a
non-metallic base. Temporary extension socket outlets are not permitted for use.
All equipment shall be mounted in a manner that segregate operators' and servicemen's functions.
Panel covers shall be hinged, removable and lockable. All panel covers shall be monitored by the
security system computer.
Ventilation openings shall be screened against insects, dust and grit. Should forced ventilation be
used on individual equipment, the fans or ventilations must be rigidly mounted to the frame and be
free of vibrations.
All cable terminations series connections between different types & sizes of cable, parallel
connections, etc., if not directly terminated at instruments and equipment shall be terminated on
rigidly mounted connectors similar to Klippon Rose SAK 4 or equal. All such connectors shall be
mounted on proprietary made rails.
The successful tenderer shall submit a detailed drawing (isometric and all projections) for the
approval of the Engineer prior to fabrication of the console.
All power points and cabling for this installation shall be provided for in the Contract unless other
specified.
All main equipment of CCTV system at FFC Room shall be backed by the emergency power supply
for 15 mins by UPS.
Environmental enclosure
All cameras shall be protected by suitable housings. Indoor cameras shall be installed in dustproof
housings and outdoor cameras shall be installed in IP 65 housings. All cable entries are to be
completed according to the required level of protection.
5.8 SOUND & PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) INSTALLATION

General
This Section specifies the various equipment for the Sound and Public Address Installation
which shall form part of the Sub-Contract Works. All equipment and materials used for
system shall be of the same make and type to ensure uniformity of standards and
composition.
Page 127
PARKCITY

The system shall comprise the supply of all-sound equipment, installation and
commissioning of the Sound and Public Address System serving the entire project as
shown on the Sub-Contract Drawings.
The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install the system for broadcasting the
following channels:a) "All Zone" calls.
b) Emergency or paging override channels for the zones as shown on the SubContract Drawings.
c) Background music channels (where shown on the Sub-Contract Drawings).
Standards
All equipment, materials and workmanship shall comply with the appropriate Singapore or
British Standards or an acceptable equivalent international standard as well as all local
statutory obligations and regulations.
All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Singapore
Standards Code of Practice CP 25: 1982 - Emergency voice communication system in
buildings.
Power supply
The Sub-Contractor shall note that the main power supply provided to the sound
equipment rack for the use of the Public Address System shall be from a 230V single
phase source.
The Sub-Contractor shall make due allowance in providing all necessary power supply
units, voltage regulators, spike eliminators, step down transformers, rectifiers, relays, radio
suppressers, converters, etc., to ensure that all his equipment will perform completely
satisfactorily. All necessary power supply required for the operation of amplifiers, speakers,
sound equipment, devices, controls, etc., after the main power supply point, shall be
supplied and installed by the Sub-Contractor.
System description
A Sound and Public Address Installation having the following equipment shall be supplied
and installed throughout the building as shown on the Sub-Contract Drawings:-
Power amplifiers and mixing pre-amplifiers.
Page 128
PARKCITY

Random Access Message Announcement Cassette System for fire and emergency
messages.
Random Access Message Announcement Cassette System for lift and emergency
messages.
Cassette recorder player suitable for the above message cassettes.
Amplifier and speaker line supervisory units.
One microphone to be located at Fire Command Centre at Ground Floor.
FM Tuner
Background music cartridge players with recording facilities.
Two-channel voice recorder.
One manual zone selector panel.
Equipment rack located at the Fire Command Centre.
The system to be installed shall include speakers, matching transformers, isolating

transformers, relays, power supply units, concealed conduit wiring, etc., that will work in
complete satisfaction with the above equipment and guarantee proper output through the
speaker system. Speakers for lift cars supplied by the electrical Sub-Contractor and will be
installed by the Lift Contractor. The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install all hard wirings
from each lift motor room to terminate in a terminal box. All wiring to the lift car after the
terminal box will be provided by the Lift Contractor.
The message announcement cassette system will, in an emergency, automatically

broadcast pre-recorded messages, giving reasons for lift capture and instructions upon
arrival at homing floors, instructions for evacuation procedures on fire alarmed floors, or
throughout the complete building.
The microphones will be used to override and announce emergency and/ or fire messages.
Whenever a fire alarm is received, the background music will automatically be switched off
to permit the loudspeakers to broadcast the pre-recorded messages.
The lift messages and fire alarm messages will be broadcast simultaneously. Before any
announcement or message is broadcast, a soft tone shall be sent to alert people and draw
attention to the announcement.
Page 129
PARKCITY

Where shown on the Sub-Contract drawings, two cartridge/ cassette players (one for
standby) and an FM Broadcast Tuner shall be supplied and installed in the Fire Command
Centre to play background music in all lifts and public areas as shown.
A tape recorder shall be provided to simultaneously record, under fire alarm condition,
voice traffic over the public address system and the fireman's intercom system on separate
channels.
There shall be individual zone volume controls provided to control the volume level for the
areas as indicated on the Sub-Contract Drawings.
The entire system shall be backed up by a standby battery system for two-hours (120
minutes) minimum.
Equipment
Amplifier
Amplifiers shall be solid-state high-power amplifiers and operate on 230V power supply.
The power amplifiers shall each have a minimum power output of rating in R.M.S. as
shown. They shall be capable of producing their rated power output at less than 2%
distortion over the frequency range of 50 Hz to 20,000 Hz and be capable of producing full
rated sine wave power output on a continuous basis with no undue heating of any
component.
They shall have a frequency response of within + 2 dBA from 50 Hz to 20,000 Hz and a
noise level at least 85 dBA below rated output. The amplifier shall be provided with
sufficient inputs, for each microphone and player included in the system. The impedance of
the input circuit shall match with that of the microphone and players (otherwise an input
impedance matching transformer shall be provided). The total gain of the voltage amplifier
stages shall be sufficient to raise the output of the microphones and players to the level
required for the input of the power amplifier stages. If the gain is not sufficient, a suitable
pre-amplifier shall be provided.
The output of the amplifier shall be suitable to feed a "constant voltage" distribution line
system of 100V. The amplifier shall be provided with separate volume controls for the input
channels, separate high and low tone controls, supply on/ off switch and pilot light and
other necessary switches and controls. The amplifier shall be completed with a power
supply unit comprising all necessary transformers, rectifiers, filters, etc., suitable for the
rated electricity supply. The complete amplifier shall be housed in a sheet metal cabinet for
rack mounting and all controls and switches shall be fixed in the front panel of the cabinet.
The Sub-Contractor shall provide the amplifier with all flexible cards, sockets, plugs, etc. for
the system.
Page 130
PARKCITY

The amplifier shall also include an automatic and self-restoring protective circuit to protect
against damage from prolonged or extreme overloads such as a shorted output line. This
circuit shall be of the electrically controlled type which is not subject to instantaneous
overload. It shall automatically remove power from the amplifier when damage is
threatened, and automatically restore the amplifier to operation when the danger is past.
Amplifier supervisory unit
The amplifier supervisory unit shall be able to create an inaudible line signal which is fed to
the power amplifier's inputs and continuously monitored at the output by evaluation logic
circuitry. In the event of an amplifier failure due to a break in the line signal at the output,
the amplifier supervisory unit shall be able to switch in the standby amplifier as a substitute
for the defective amplifier. It shall also be provided with visual and audio indication of the
defective amplifier.
In order to prevent overloading of the standby amplifier due to the failure of a second
amplifier, the amplifier supervisory unit shall be equipped with interlocking protection circuit.
The technical performance shall meet with the following requirements:a) Supervisory frequency : 20 - 35 kHz
b) Supervisory signal level: 10 - 1000mv
c) Input signal level :
100V
d) Power Supply :
24Vdc
e) Type of Indication : LED and buzzer

Programme monitor panel
The programme monitor panel shall be capable of monitoring 10 amplifiers or programme
sources and it shall be equipped with the following:a) A large, easy to read VU meter
b) Controls:
i) Channel selector switch
ii) Monitor volume control
iii) Line voltage selector
Page 131
PARKCITY

c) Speaker: Full range 5" speaker

Speakers
All ceiling speakers shall be suitable for both voice and music broadcasting and shall be
recess mounted in the false ceiling. Where there is no false ceiling, surface-mounted type
shall be provided.
The ceiling speakers shall have viscous-damped cone and ceramic magnet and have a
frequency range of 50 Hz to 20,000 Hz at rated output. Flux density shall be at least 10,000
gauss.
The ceiling speakers shall have a output impedance of 8 ohms and a power output tapping
of 1 watts and 3 watts (max). The sound pressure level shall be at least 92 dBA at 1W 1
metre.
Each ceiling speaker shall be equipped with a line-matching transformer. Transformer shall
be provided for each speaker with power tap settings for 100V lines. Insertion loss of the
transformer shall not exceed 1 dBA.
Circular and recessed baffle grilles with torsion spring mounting shall be provided for each
loudspeaker. Construction shall be a minimum of 2mm steel with a white finish trim, matt
white baffle grilles and acoustic enclosure. A sample shall be submitted for acceptance by
the Engineer.
Box and horn speakers
Box and horn speakers shall come complete with matching transformer, connector and all
necessary mounting brackets. All metal parts shall be protected against rust and corrosion.
The finishing colour of the box speaker shall be approved by the Engineer.
The technical performance of the box and horn speakers shall meet with the following
specification:a) Sound Pressure Level :
i)
Box Speaker : Input 1W, 92 dB at 1m
il) Hom Speaker : Input 1W, 92 dB at 1m

b) Coverege angle : 120 - 180 degree
c) Frequency response :
Page 132
PARKCITY
i)

Box Speaker : 150 Hz - 13 kHz
ii) Horn Speaker : 350 Hz - 10 kHz

d) Power Output at max:
i)
Box Speaker
: 4.5 W
ii) Horn Speaker
: 15W
Microphones
Microphones shall be of the cardioid dynamic type with a frequency response of 50 Hz to
15,000 Hz and sens rating of 140 dB at low impedance. The diaphragm shall be shielded
from dust and magnetic particles.
Filters shall be used to minimize wind effect.
Microphones shall have sound canceling entrances for rejection of unwanted noise and
minimum feedback. Microphones shall be furnished with sufficient length of cable and
appropriate connectors.
A desk-mounted microphone console shall be provided with the system. The technical
performance of the microphone console shall meet with the following:a) Priority
Programmable
b) Indicators
LED indication for busy, chime and speech
c) Zone Switch
: Individual zone switches shall be latched type. All call & press to
talk switches shall be non-latch type
Background music cartridge/ cassette player
Where shown on the Sub-Contract Drawings, two solid state cartridge/ cassette tape deck
players with one working and one standby shall be provided at the Fire Command Centre
for generation of background music. The tape player shall incorporate a tape magazine
mechanism for loading pre-recorded music into the player. Each tape magazine shall be
capable of four hours of non-repetitive music at a minimum tape speed of 50mm/ sec.
The tape player shall include automatic tape reversing, separate treble, bass and volume
controls and a power amplifier with a minimum output power as specified on the drawings.
Wow & flutter shall not exceed 0.1 % maximum.
Message announcement cassette
system
Page 133
PARKCITY

A solid state random access message announcement cassette system shall be provided
for automatically broadcasting pre-recorded emergency messages to the building as shown
on the Sub-Contract Drawings. The unit shall be of solid state electronic design and
operate on a minimum speed of 50mm/ sec.
Minimum peak power Output shall be as specified on the drawings and wow and flutter
shall not exceed 0.2% maximum.
Cassettes for up to 50 messages shall be provided as specified with a playing time of up to
two minutes of each message. An automatic shut off conductive strip shall be included for
each unit. A low impedance dynamic microphone shall be provided for recording messages
on the recorder.
The unit shall have instant access to any cassette message at any time from the external
contact signal as provided by the Fire Indicator Board. Manual operation of any cassette
shall also be accomplished by the operator at the unit Indicator lights shall also be provided
on the front panel for visual run status of all cassettes at all times. All necessary power
supply units suitable for 230V shall be included in the Sub-Contract.
Emergency voice recorder

A solid-state cassette recorder having the ability to record voice traffic on one track from
the Public Address System and voice traffic from the Fireman's intercom System on a
second track shall be provided. Cassette recorder shall be automatically activated
whenever a fire alarm is raised in the building.
Cassettes shall have minimum recording time of 2 hours. The cassette recorder shall be
locked into the equipment rack and cassettes shall only be removable by authorised
persons. Removal of the cassette shall activate an alarm signal at the control console.
Zone control panels
Zone control panels for manual zone control shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor. The
number of zones required are shown on the Sub-Contract Drawings.
The Sub-Contractor shall wire the public address system on a zone per floor basis as
shown on the Sub-Contract Drawings. The entire system shall be installed in concealed
conduit.
Batteries
The batteries shall be of a heavy-duty industrial type designed for standby power service.
Nickel cadmium or sealed lead-acid batteries shall be provided. The ampere-hour rating
Page 134
PARKCITY

shall be sufficient to supply the direct current to the invertor for the emergency period of
sixty minutes minimum.
Equipment rack
All equipment such as power amplifiers, line amplifiers, tape deck, tuner, etc., shall be
mounted onto a proprietary made equipment rack in U19 module. All input units shall be of
an interchangeable modular type. All system and peripheral units shall be properly
matched with the equipment rack and provided compact neat installation.
All wiring within the rack shall be fixed securely without strain by means of approved nylon/
PVC cable ties. For the purpose of identification, all wires should be numbered and/ or
colour coded. The wiring shall be formed in a neat and systematic manner, with cable
supported dear of panels and without unnecessary crossovers.
All incoming and outgoing signal sources from the equipment racks to the microphone
station and speakers zone shall be inter-connected via approved type of plugs and
sockets.
Installation
The Sub-Contractor shall engage a specialist P.A. Sub-Contractor to carry out the
installation work.
The Sub-Contractor shall include for the purchase and delivery to site of all equipment their
storage, safe keeping pending unpacking, their complete assembly, erection, connection,
testing and handing over in a clean, working condition at the end of the Contract Period.
The Sub-Contractor shall adhere closely to the requirements in respect of wiring and
cabling standard described elsewhere in this Specification and shall note that concealed
conduit installation is required.
Speaker and control wire shall be 1mm2 tinned copper standard and twisted, polyethylene
insulated, aluminum polyester, stranded finned copper ground drain wire, chrome vinyl
jacket.
Wiring shall be fire-resistant cables in uPVC. conduit/ trunking.
Pigtail leads on speakers, etc., shall be connected to cables by means of connectors to
Singapore Standard with backing screws, or soldered and taped. Wire nuts are not
acceptable.
The speakers and control wires from the amplifiers shall be run in zones through relays and
contactors to control panels. From these panels, the wires shall distribute the signal to the
Page 135
PARKCITY

various speakers and/ or groups of speakers. Measures and care shall be taken to avoid
any signal pick up along the communication route and interference with other services.
Submissions
In addition to submission requirements as detailed elsewhere in this technical specification,
the Sub-Contractor shall submit a fully detailed schematic wiring diagram showing all
component units with type references, gain or loss, designed to operate to give the system
performance as specified.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit full technical and mechanical description of every piece of
equipment and cables used, including manufacturers technical literature.
The Sub-Contractor shall provide a description of the methods proposed to show that the
actual performance is in accordance with the specifications for technical performance
including necessary test methods, procedures and equipment that will be used.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit samples of the following items for acceptance by the
Engineer prior to installation:a) Amplifiers, filters, relays, etc.
b) Two 1 metre length samples of each type of cable to be used.
c) Loudspeakers, volume controls, etc.
Testing, commissioning and guarantee
On completing the installation, the Sub-Contractor shall engage a specialist proprietary
P.A. supplier/ contractor to test all speakers and demonstrate the operation of the system
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Sub-Contractor shall carry out an output level measurement at each and every
loudspeaker and shall ensure that the requirements as specified in the Code of Practice
are met. The exact method of measurement shall be proposed by the Sub-Contractor and
agreed and witnessed by the Engineer.
All measuring equipment shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor.
In the event of component units and/ or cable failure in such tests and/ or the system
proposed cannot meet the requirements specified herein due to the usage of inconsistent
component units or cables, the Sub-Contractor shall rectify the system or replace it with
proper component units or cables and re-submit to the Engineer for acceptance before the
rectification.
Page 136
PARKCITY
5.9

Telephone Distribution System

The telephone distribution system shall comply to Code of Practice for Info Communications
Facilities in Buildings, 2006 comprises cable trays, cable ladders and GI/UPVC conduits as
shown on the Specification Drawings.
Telephone cable trays shall be similar to those specified elsewhere in this Specification for
lighting and power system. The horizontal trays shall be supported from the floor slabs using
proprietary framing system similar to UNISTRUT to carry a minimum load of 200 kg per
linear metre run. The supporting hangers shall be spaced at intervals of not more than
1000mm apart and so designed that free access, unobstructed for the entire cable tray route,
is possible from one side of tray, for any cable tray. Cable ladders in the telephone riser
ducts and from the lead-in pipes to the MDF Room and to the telephone riser ducts shall be
constructed to Telecoms approval. Conduits shall be supplied and installed to those
specified elsewhere for lighting and power system. Pull boxes be provided where necessary
to facilitate wiring installation; further, nylon draw wires acceptable to Telecom shall be
provided for all telephone conduits between every two pull boxes. Telephone cable trays and
ladders shown on the Specification Drawings shall be used exclusively for the telephone
service. The telephone cable trays shall generally be installed at 300 mm below all other
services but at 150 mm above the false ceiling panels to Telecoms approval. Details of the
telephone tray, ladder and conduit layouts shall be submitted to Telecom and the Architect for
review before commencement of installation.
Telephone outlets where called for shall be single or twin of the flush mounted type suitable to
receive the plug-in telephone cable lead to the approval of the Telecom. The finishes of the
telephone outlet plates at various areas shall be as specified for lighting switches.
5.10 Installation
General
The Contractor shall provide all labour and materials to form the complete electrical
installations of this Contract.
All wiring shall be installed generally in accordance with the Drawings but full allowance shall
be made by the Contractor for the detailed development and on-site co-ordination of the
scheme and for the future removal and dismantling of sections of the Works.
Conduit Wiring System
All conduit systems shall be installed so as to enable wiring to be carried out on the "loop-in"
system.
All conduits shall be swabbed through so as to clean out all dirt, burrs and moisture.
All conduits shall be fixed with spacing saddles at intervals not exceeding 1.2m.
Conduit systems shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and watertight after
installation. They shall be arranged, wherever possible, to be self-draining to conduit outlet
points for equipment. The system when installed, and before wiring, shall be kept plugged
with wooden plugs. Immediately before wiring, all conduit systems shall be thoroughly
swabbed out until dry and clean.
All sets or bends in conduit runs shall be formed on site in bending machines. Inspection
bends and tees may be permitted at columns, where large bends shall be avoided.
Page 137
PARKCITY

All conduit entries to adaptable boxes, outlet boxes and switchgear shall be made with
coupling and hexagon male bush.
Runs between draw-in boxes shall not have more than two right angle bends or their
equivalent and the length of such runs shall be limited to 8m to permit easy draw-in of cables.
The Contractor shall make good any damage to the finish of all conduits (including threads
cut at site) by painting damaged areas with two coats of good quality aluminium primer paint.
The Contractor's attention is especially drawn to the necessity for keeping all conduit entirely
separate from other piping services and no circuit connections will be permitted between the
conduits and such pipes.
The Contractor shall provide flexible conduit systems where building expansion joints are
crossed. Flexible conduit may be used for this purpose.
Cable Trunking Installation
Conduit entry to trunking shall be by coupling and male bush. Knock-outs shall not be
provided, and trunking shall be drilled on site. Earth links shall be provided for joint of
trunkings.
In instances where the Contractor elects to use trunking to avoid a multiplicity of conduits
following the same run, cables shall be installed so that a space factor of 40% shall not be
exceeded.
Where trunking crosses expansion joints, a trunking system shall be used which will allow for
expansion and maintain earth continuity. The system used shall be accepted by the Project
Manager prior to manufacture.
Cable Trays
Where cable trays are employed to support cables running horizontally at high level, they
shall be perforated trays complete with return flange edge manufactured from not less than
2mm gauge mild steel which shall be hot dipped galvanized to a conduit Class 4 finish.
Before installation of the cables, cable tray supports shall be painted with 2 layers of
undercoat and finished with a coat of galvanised paint. Trays shall be supported from the ribs
of structural slab, beams etc., by galvanized and painted mild steel rods, at intervals of not
more than 1.2m and not more than 225mm from bends and intersections. 25 x 3mm tinned
earth link shall be provided for joint of cable tray.
Cables mounted on the trays shall laid after installation of the tray in and spaced in
accordance with the latest edition of the I.E.E. Regulations so as not to incur group factor
derating unless otherwise specified. Cables shall be grouped in circuits and individually
supported at intervals of not less than 3m lengths on horizontal runs and 1m lengths on
vertical runs, using a proprietary cable clamp support system.
Notwithstanding the minimum gauge of metal-work specified, gauges shall be of sufficient
strength to ensure that sagging between supports is not acceptable. If sagging is noticeable,
the Contractor shall at his own cost provide the necessary extra supports, stiffeners, tray, etc.,
to correct the tray sag to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
Where trays are used in corrosive atmosphere or exposed to the weather, the tray shall be as
specified above but shall be coated with epoxy resin. PVC coating is not acceptable.
Joint and Terminations of Armoured
Page 138
PARKCITY

Cable joint are employed to connect new and existing cables together, they shall be designed
to ensure complete mechanical protection, a high standard of strength, adhesion and
dielectric values.
Box for the termination and for jointing of cables shall be of plastic shell with compound filled
and of adequate size.
Where cold compound with plastic shell is used, the complete jointing kit, including plastic
shell, cable connector, insulating tape, earth wire, surrounding clamp, insulating compound
etc. shall be from the same proprietary manufacturer.
Earth continuity across joints of a circuit protective conductor having adequate cross-sectional
area and of same material as the phase conductors shall be installed and connected to
maintain the effectiveness of the earth continuity across every cable joint of the armoured
cable.
The installation method and procedure adopted shall be strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The completed cable joint shall be designed for use in cable tray.
PVC Cable Wiring
The maximum number of cables that may be accommodated in a given size of conduit is not
to exceed the number given in the 16th Edition of the I.E.E. Regulations.
Exposed ends of conductors of size 6mm and above, where not provided with cable sockets,
shall have their individual strands sweated solid before connection to apparatus terminals.
Connection to Motors and Equipment
Where connections to electric motors and equipment are by means of PVC cables in
conduits, the final connection shall be made with PVC covered Kopex conduit, with suitable
adaptors, and with separate earth continuity copper earth wire of not less than 2.50mm run
outside the flexible tube and solidly connected at each tube termination.
Testing
All electrical systems and installations shall be tested in accordance with the 16th Edition of
the I.E.E. Regulations, the Power Supply Company and the "Commissioning and Testing"
All the inspections and tests shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 8.3 of B.S. 5486 :
Part 1 : 1977, Clause 8.3 of B.S. 4762 : Part 1 : 1977.
Auxiliary Equipment
The Contractor shall provide all operating handles, jigs, hydraulic trolley etc. required for the
normal operation and inspection of all circuit breakers and switchgears of the L.V.
switchboards and to be suitably stored inside the main switchroom. Spare parts sufficient for
one-year use shall be provided.
One hydraulic truck for handling the circuit breakers shall be supplied in each main switch
room. The hydraulic truck shall be capable of handling the heaviest circuit breaker in this
Installation, and in no case be smaller than 250 kg. The lift fork shall be capable of the whole
travel from 100mm to 1500mm from the floor level.
Page 139
PARKCITY

Portable earthing equipment shall be supplied in a wooden case box in each main
switchrooms.
Spare Fuses and General Requirements in Switchrooms
The Contractor shall provide in each switchroom of this project one complete set of spare
fuses for each rating of fuse-switches or switchfuses installed on the switch board. Each set
of spare fuses shall be hung on a wooden board with brass hooks. The wooden boards shall
be smoothed on both front and edges, painted and labelled.
Manufacturer's recommended special tools and spare parts sufficient for one-year use after
expiry of Contractor's warranty period shall be provided.
Distribution wiring diagram and Instruction with Chinese and English character for operation
of load transfer shall be displayed at the switchroom.
The Contractor shall submit a spare part list to Engineer for approval.
Finishes
Generally, galvanized steel, copper, UPVC and ABS conduit, trunking, fittings and
accessories need not be painted.
All other plant and materials shall be painted.
Painting shall be as described in the "Insulation and Painting" Section of this Specification.
All supports, hangers, brackets, etc., shall be painted with one coat of primer before erection
and further painted after installation as specified.
All imported or factory assembled plant or equipment shall be painted in the factory in
accordance with the manufacturers' normal practice for the type of equipment and working
environment.
Any damage to factory applied finishes shall be made good on site in the manner
recommended by the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
In addition, plant and equipment may require to be given another finishing coat (or coats) as
may be specified elsewhere to match the Project Manager's colour coding for the plant room.
All conduit at public space exposed to view area shall be concealed type i.e. life lobbies, stair
cable, toilet, post office, typical office floor.
All conduit at exchange area, E&M plant rooms and car park area shall be surface mounted
conduit c/w painting to match with wall/ceiling's colour.
All trunking and cable tray exposed to view shall be painted to match with wall/ceiling's colour.
Identification
All panels, cubicles and other plant and equipment shall be provided with identification
markings and labels.
All motors, starters, switchgear and other equipment shall bear the manufacturer's nameplate
giving manufacturer's name, serial and model number and date of manufacture.
In addition, each motor shall have a specification plate showing details of the motor type,
rating, voltage, phases, frequency, speed, starting current, rated current and any other
Page 140
PARKCITY

information as may be required by the Project Manager. This plate shall also be securely
fixed to the unit casing in a prominent position.
Each equipment or functional unit of the L.V. switchboard shall be marked or labelled in a
durable and indelible manner in both English and Chinese for identification as specified.
Each metalclad switch, fuse switch, switchfuse, busbar chamber and distribution board shall
be labelled on the front cover indicating the circuit controlled by the unit with identification
number as shown on the appropriate Drawing.
Inside each distribution board door, a circuit record label, made from sandwich type plastic
material, shall be provided and fixed giving the total number of points served by each M.C.B.,
total load per way on the area served.
Construction of identification plates and labels shall be as specified in the "Miscellaneous
Provisions" Section of this Specification.
Prior to ordering any materials, the Contractor shall submit for approval samples of all cables,
wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, switches, hangers, cable trays and any other item as
may reasonably be requested by the Engineer.
his proposed commissioning and testing procedures and report for approval.
Specification.
of the 16th Edition of the I.E.E. and in compliance with the "Commissioning and Testing"
Selection
All equipment, materials, fittings and accessories used shall be suitable and shall not
deteriorate due to chemical or atmospheric action.
All equipment provided shall be selected of "tropicalized" design for use in conditions up to
36C ambient air temperature and 100% relative humidity.
All motors shall be compatible with the equipment to be driven, and shall be of the
commercially silent type.
Standards
All equipment, materials, workmanship and fittings shall comply with the appropriate B.S. or
C.P. as listed in the relevant paragraphs of this Section, or an approved equivalent
international standard.
All aspects of the Electrical Sections of the Works shall comply with all local statutory
obligations, the 16th Edition of the I.E.E. Regulations and the Power Supply Company's
supply rules.
Page 141
PARKCITY

6.0
Air-conditioning & Mechanical Ventilation Services
6.1
General
This Section specifies the supply, installation, setting to work and commissioning of the airconditiong and mechanical ventilation installation as shown on the Drawings and described in
this Specification or as may otherwise be instructed in accordance with the conditions of
Contract.
Manufacture
All pipework and fittings of the same material shall be supplied by a single manufacturer to
ensure uniformity of standards and composition.
All pipework delivered to site shall be new and shall be colour banded at the factory to identify
different grades, materials and manufacturers.
All valves, fittings and other accessories shall be the product of the manufacturers listed in the
appropriate Table or Clause of this Section, or of an acceptable equal.
Submissions
The information listed in this Clause must be provided for each system at the times stated.
Form of Tender.
Within two weeks of being notified of the Employer's intent to award the Contract, the
Contractor shall furnish the following information for approval:-
Manufacturer of all pipes and fittings; and

Specification and standard for all pipes and fittings.
Within two weeks of being awarded the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for acceptance complete working drawings for all pipework systems included in the Contract.
Working drawings shall include plans, sections, elevations, schematics, schedules and details
of all systems and shall show locations of all valves, strainers, pipe hangers, supports, thrust
blocks, equipment to which pipework connects, flanges, mechanical couplings, flexible or
expansion couplings, anchors, gauges, test points, pressure gauges, thermometers, etc.
Prior to ordering any valves, strainers, or other pipeline fitting or accessory, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer for acceptance, manufacturers' data for all valves, strainers, pipe
hangers, mechanical couplings, flexible or expansion couplings, gauges and for any other
equipment as may be requested by the Engineer.
The manufacturers' data shall include printed installation, operation and maintenance
instructions, performance data, complete parts lists, materials specifications, recommended
spare parts lists and any other information as may be requested by the Engineer.
Details of all pipe supports, thrust blocks and anchors shall be submitted for acceptance prior
to ordering materials.
Within one month of being awarded the Contract, the Contractor shall submit a draft copy of
his proposed commissioning and testing procedures and report for acceptance.
Page 142
PARKCITY

Specification.
of an approved testing authority and in compliance with the "Commissioning and Testing"
6.2
Air Filters
General
The filter shall be UL Class I listed and approved by the Local Authorities with respect to fire
precautions.
Maximum air velocity through the filter shall not exceed 2.5 m/s or the figure recommended by
the manufacturer whichever is the lower.
Filter banks shall be made up from the filter manufacturer's standard units, rigidly braced
within a galvanised sheet steel structure.
Filter boxes shall be provided, having airtight access panels for filter replacement complete
with corrosion-resistant steel filter frame and clamps, gasketed and sealed to prevent air bypass.
Filter gauges where shown on the Drawings or specified shall be of the dial type, graduated
from 0 to 250 Pa and permanently marked at the appropriate pressure with "FILTER
REPLACEMENT DUE".
Washable Panel Filter Type
Filter shall be permanent washable aluminium panel type 50mm thick unless otherwise
stated.
The filter shall have an average ASHRAE 52-76 weight arrestance of 70-80%.
Air resistance when clean shall not exceed 25Pa. Design final resistance shall be 125Pa.
Disposable Type Panel Filter
Filter shall be permanent cell sides with disposable media pad panel type 50mm thick.
Filter media shall be 50mm thick of continuous filament fibre glass.
The cell sides shall be made from a single piece 0.8mm galvanised steel U-channel. A heavy
duty galvanised steel grid and media retainer shall be attached to the frame.
The filter shall have an average ASHRAE 52-76 weight arrestance of 70-80%.
Air resistance when clean shall not exceed 40 Pa. Designed final resistance shall be 125 Pa.
The dust holding capacity of the filter shall not be less than 300g as per ASHRAE 52.76 Test
Method for a 600 x 600 x 50mm size tested to a final resistance of 125 Pa at 2.5 m/s face
velocity.
Disposable Type High Efficiency

Filter shall be disposable cartridge type of 300mm thick.
Page 143
PARKCITY

Filter media shall be made of glass fibres formed into a thin mat which is pleated and held
apart by corrugated aluminium separators. Filter cell sides shall be constructed of galvanised
steel.
The average efficiency according to ASHRAE 52-76 Dust Spot Test shall be 60-80%.
Air resistance when clean shall be less than 140 Pa. The filter shall be able to withstand a
total final pressure of 375 Pa.
The dust holding capacity of the filter shall not be less than 300g as per ASHRAE 52-76 Test
Method for a 600 x 600 x 300mm size filter tested to a final resistance of 300 Pa at 2.5 m/s
face velocity.
6.3
Air-Cooled Split DX Systems

Room Air Conditioners
Room air conditioners shall be the cool only type complete with multi speed fan control and
adjustable thermostat control. RACs shall be standard catalogue products of an approved
manufacturer.
Each unit shall include an air filter and outside air damper bypass and exhaust air damper
function.
Compressors shall be hermetic with copper tube aluminium fin evaporator and condenser.
Air-Cooled Condensing Units
Each condensing shall be specifically designed for connecting to direct expansion fan coil
units.
Air cooled condensing unit shall be supplied and installed generally as shown on the
drawings. The condensing units shall be complete with compressors, fans, condenser coils,
motors and control system.
The air cooled condensing unit shall provide the minimum cooling capacities as detailed in the
drawings / schedule.
The air cooled condensing unit shall be fitted with rotary compressors of the hermetically
sealed type. Compressors shall be driven by an electric motor designed for single phase, 50
cycle operation.
The condensing unit shall be fitted with condenser coils in the compressor compartment of
the unit. The condenser coils shall be of the coiled tube type with copper tubes of the
external finned type.
The condenser fans shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy coated with corrosion resistant
coating and shall be complete with non-corrodible blind screens. The fan motor shall be of
the direct drive totally enclosed fan cooled weather-proofed type.
The refrigerant circuits shall be completely factory assembled, tested, dehydrated and
charged.
The air cooled condensing unit cabinet shall be fabricated of heavy gauge galvanised steel
panels formed for close fit and structural rigidity and of weather-proof type. Framework shall
be of steel angle members all galvanised, securely bolted and braced. All panels, framework,
bolts, etc. shall be hot-dipped galvanise. Panels shall be designed for easy removal for
inspection, servicing and maintenance.
Page 144
PARKCITY

The condensing unit shall be complete with controls to provide proper sequence operation of
the fans, compressors, time delays between starting of each motor and safety controls
including cut-outs for high pressures.
Each condensing unit shall be installed on two layers of ribbed neoprene pads separated with
a sheet of steel, all similar to Mason type WMW or approved equivalent, and loaded to 2.5
Bar. The Contractor shall select and install the unit to meet the noise criteria and vibration
specified.
st
Condensing unit on 1 Storey shall also be provided with a drip tray, complete with drain to
nearest waste. Tray shall be finished as per the condensing unit.
Fan Coil Units
The fan coil units shall be of the wall, cassette or ducted type and shall be supplied and fitted
generally as shown on the accompanying drawings. Each fan coil unit shall be complete with
fans, motors, filters, direct expansion coils, controls and all accessories such as thermostats
and controllers.
Coils shall be of the extruded surface plate fin and staggered tube type and constructed of
seamless copper tubing and aluminium fins and be complete with manual air vent and drain
plug. Coil shall be suitable for the operating pressure and tested to 1.5 times the working
pressure.
Fans shall be of the double inlet, double width type with centrifugal forward curved blades of
aluminium construction. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced for true
operation. Fans shall be direct drive by two-bearing, three speed motor with nominal speed
not exceeding 1000 rpm.
Fractional horsepower motors shall be permanent split capacitor type or similar approved by
the engineer. Motors shall be equipped with sleeve bearings with oilers. Fans and motors
shall be mounted on galvanised steel fan deck with the assembly easily removable from the
basic unit.
3
Each fan coil unit shall be internally lined with not less than 6 mm thick, 32 kg/m density
fibre-glass with neoprene or similar facing. Where fan coil units are found to be unduly noisy,
these shall be replaced at the instruction of the engineer. Prior to placing of order for
manufacture, the Contractor shall submit sound power level ratings to the engineer for
approval.
Condensate drain pans shall be of heavy gauge stainless steel designed for quick
detachment from the base unit for servicing. Drain pans shall be insulated with minimum 5
mm thick rigid insulation to the engineer's approval. Float switch shall be provided at the
drain pan to stop unit's operation when water reaches a critically high level. The drain pans
shall connect to insulated condensate drain pipes to discharge to condensate drain pipe. All
the condensate pipes shall be insulated with minimum 25 mm thick Armaflex type insulation
or approved equivalent and connected into the nearest drain/floor trap/floor waste. All
condensate pipes shall be concealed.
All pipe routes shall be submitted to the
Architect/Engineer for approval. All floor traps which are connected with condensate drain
shall be insulated with 25mm thick Armaflex from the trap to the stack.
Air handling Units
The air handling units shall be of ducted type and shall be supplied and fitted generally as
shown on the accompanying drawings. Each air handling unit shall be complete with fans,
motors, filters, direct expansion coils, controls and all accessories such as thermostats and
controllers.
Page 145
PARKCITY

The unit framework shall be constructed of GI steel. Exterior panels shall be fabricated from
galvanized steel sheets, cleaned and coated with a baked polyester powder paint. All panels
in contact with the air stream shall be insulated with closed cell PE insulation.
Expansion devices shall be thermal expansion valves. Drain pans shall be fabricated GI,
insulated with PE and corossion resistant coated with a corrosion resistant coating.
Supply fans shall be double width double inlet forward curve centrifugal fans, statically and
dynamically balanced.
DOL Fan motor starters shall be provided as standard.
6.4
Variable Refrigerant Volume air conditioning unit (VRV) Systems

Each condensing unit shall be specifically designed for connecting to direct expansion fan coil
unit.
Air cooled condensing unit shall be supplied and installed generally as shown on the
drawings. The condensing units shall be complete with compressors, fans, condenser coils,
motors and control system.
The air cooled condensing unit shall provide the minimum cooling capacities as detailed in the
drawings/schedule.
The air cooled condensing unit shall be fitted with scroll compressors of the hermetically
sealed type.
Compressors shall be driven by an electric motor designed for single phase, 50 cycle
operation. Compressor speed to be controlled by inverter and controlling method shall be
suction/ discharge control with fuzzy control or PI control.
The condensing unit shall be fitted with condenser coils in the compressor compartment of
the unit. The condenser coils shall be of the coiled tube type with copper tubes of the
external finned type.
The condenser fans shall be fabricated from aluminium alloy coated with corrosion resistant
coating and shall be complete with non-corrodible blind screens. The fan motor shall be of
the direct drive totally enclosed fan cooled weather-proofed type.
The refrigerant circuits shall be completely factory assembled, tested, dehydrated and
charged.
The air cooled condensing unit cabinet shall be fabricated of heavy gauge galvanised steel
panels formed for close fit and structural rigidity and of weather-proof type. Framework shall
be of steel angle members all galvanised, securely bolted and braced. All panels, framework,
bolts, etc. shall be hot-dipped galvanised. Panels shall be designed for easy removal for
inspection, servicing and maintenance.
The condensing unit shall be complete with controls to provide proper sequence operation of
the fans, compressors, time delays between starting of each motor and safety controls
including cut-outs for high pressures.
Each condensing unit shall be installed on two layers of ribbed neoprene pads separated with
a sheet of steel, all similar to Mason type WMW or approved equivalent, and loaded to 2.5
Bar. The Contractor shall select and install the unit to meet the noise criteria and vibration
specified.
Page 146
PARKCITY

Each condensing unit shall also be provided with a drip tray, complete with drain to nearest
waste. Tray shall be finished as per the condensing unit.
Fan Coil Units
The fan coil units shall be of the wall or ducted type and shall be supplied and fitted generally
as shown on the accompanying drawings. Each fan coil unit shall be completed with fans,
motors, filters, direct expansion coils, controls and all accessories. Each fan coil unit shall be
provided with a receiver, wall mounted LCD remote controller with operation mode;
temperature setting, on/off timer, air flow setting and fan speed etc. controls.
Coils shall be of the extruded surface plate fin and staggered tube type and constructed of
seamless copper tubing and aluminium fins and be complete with manual air vent and drain
plug. Coil shall be suitable for the operating pressure and tested to 1.5 times the working
pressure.
Fans shall be of the double inlet, double width type with centrifugal forward curved blades of
aluminium construction. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced for true
operation. Fans shall be direct drive by two-bearing, three speed motor with nominal speed
not exceeding 1000 rpm.
Fractional horsepower motors shall be permanent split capacitor type or similar approved by
the engineer. Motors shall be equipped with sleeve bearings with oilers. Fans and motors
shall be mounted on galvanised steel fan deck with the assembly easily removable from the
basic unit.
3
Each fan coil unit shall be internally lined with not less than 6 mm thick, 32 kg/m density
fibre-glass with neoprene or similar facing. Where fan coil units are found to be unduly noisy,
these shall be replaced at the instruction of the engineer. Prior to placing of order for
manufacture, the Contractor shall submit sound power level ratings to the engineer for
approval.
Condensate drain pans shall be of heavy gauge stainless steel designed for quick
detachment from the base unit for servicing. Drain pans shall be insulated with minimum 5
mm thick rigid insulation to the engineer's approval. Float switch shall be provided at the
drain pan to stop unit's operation when water reaches a critically high level. The drain pans
shall connect to insulated condensate drain pipes to discharge to condensate drain pipe. All
the condensate pipes shall be insulated with minimum 25 mm thick Armaflex type insulation
or approved equivalent and connected into the nearest drain/floor trap/floor waste. All
condensate pipes shall be concealed.
All pipe routes shall be submitted to the
Architect/Engineer for approval. All floor traps which are connected with condensate drain
shall be insulated with 25mm thick Armaflex from the trap to the stack.
6.5
Dehumidifier
General
The unit utilizes a packaged refrigeration system in conjunction with active titanium silicagel
desiccant and enthalpy wheels. It captures energy from exhaust air and uses it to reduce the
mount of mechanical refrigeration required by pre-cooling and dehumidifying the outdoor air
prior to the DX coil, further enhancing efficient of the unit. It operates cost-effectively because
all of the energy required for the regeneration of the desiccant wheel is recycled from the
condenser waste heat. The system is integrally designed and controlled for superior
performance in even the highest humidity load conditions.
Page 147
PARKCITY

Base unit
The basic unit includes access panels, louvered air intakes and a base that allows for a
minimum of four lifting points. The unit is fully assembled, tested and ETL listed. The unit is
suitable for indoor or outdoor installation.
Refrigeration components
Each unit comes equipped with the latest in scroll compressor technology utilizes
environmentally friendly R-410A refrigerant. Each system comes standard with balanced port
thermal expansion valve, liquid line filter drier, pressure cut out switches, pressure sensors,
refrigeration gauge ports, overload protection and condenser capacity control for increase
energy efficiency.
Desiccant components
The desiccant wheel media shall be a monolithic, extended-surface contact medium,
fabricated entirely of inert, inorganic binders and glass fibers formed into narrow passages in
the direction of airflow. The wheel is non-toxic. The process and reactivation air streams shall
be separated by air seals and internal partitions so that the humid reactivation air does not
mix with the dry process air.
Cooling coil
Coil shall be sized to provide full capacity scheduled. Coil shall be arranged to condition the
full volume of process air. Refrigerant pressure drop to be between 1.5 psi and 5 psi, and air
face velocities be 450 cfm or less. Direct expansion coils are rated in accordance with ARI
standard 410 and are compatible with all other components of the same refrigeration circuit.
Drain pans
The drain pan is to be constructed of welded 304S and bolted in place. The cooling coil drain
pan shall be double-sloped to ensure zero standing water. Drain connection shall extend
through unit base.
Condensing section
Condensing section is complete with compressors, condenser heat exchanger, and all
controls and accessories required to regulate refrigerant pressure, flow rates and
temperature.
Compressors are scroll type. Service access shall be provided around the entire compressor
for maintenance. Each compressor shall have its own refrigeration circuit and expansion
valve. Tandem compressor are not acceptable.
Fans
Fans provide the specified air volume through the systems with adequate with static pressure
to overcome duct and distribution losses specified.
Fans shall be balanced such that the maximum displacement if any plane does not exceed
1.5 mils for fans operating at or below 2000rpm or 1.0 mils for fan operating above 2000rpm.
Supply and exhaust fan motors shall be the totally-enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC), highefficiency type with a minimum of class F insulation.
Page 148
PARKCITY

Filters
The unit shall include disposable filters with 25% to 30% minimum efficiency with 90% to 92%
arrestance minimum as rated by ASHRAE Test standard 52-76. The filters shall be removable
at the inlet of both supply and reactivation air streams.
Controls
The unit shall have microprocessor control. Unit with a microprocessor shall be capable of
communicating with a building management system (BMS) through Modbus, Lonworks or
BACnet Protocol. Control options include the ability to determine stages of heating and
dehumidification required to maintenance space condition when an enable command is
given via the BMS, or direct control via commands issued from BMS.
6.6
Pipework and Fittings

General
This Section specifies the pipework and fittings for the various systems which shall form part
of the Works as shown on the Drawings.
Unless specifically stated otherwise, the terms" pipework and fittings" or "pipes and fittings",
when used in a general context, shall mean all pipework, fittings, valves, gauges, strainers,
hangers, supports and all other components and accessories required for the complete
installation of the system as shown on the Drawings.
Selection
All pipework fittings, accessories, joints and joining media used shall be suitable for the
substance conveyed in the pipes and shall not deteriorate due to chemical or atmospheric
action.
All pipework, fittings and valves must be suitable for the system test pressure. Material
schedules are only indicative of type and pattern.
Standards
All pipework and fittings shall comply with the appropriate B.S. or A.P.I. Standard as listed in
the relevant Table of this Section, or an approved equivalent international standard. The
Contractor shall provide all necessary pipe anchors and supports to suit the system
performance.
All personnel engaged on welding operations must possess a certificate of competence
issued by an approved authority. These certificates must be produced for inspection by the
Engineer before any welding is undertaken.
Each weld shall be given a suitable mark in order that the operative concerned may be
identified. This will be rigidly enforced.
The Engineer reserves the right to order at random the cutting out of 2% of the welded joints
for inspection and destructive testing. Should any one of the above welds prove faulty in
materials or workmanship, further removal of welds may be ordered up to a total of 4% of the
welded joints. If the number of welds failing the tests within the above 4% is sufficient to
suggest that an operative is not consistent in his standard, the Engineer may order any
number of that operative's welds to be removed. The cutting out and repair of all such welds
for inspection shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
Oxy-acetylene and metal arc welding of steel pipework shall be Class 2 to B.S. 2640, B.S.
2971 or B.S. 4515.
Page 149
PARKCITY

Fusion welded joints in copper shall be to B.S. 1077 and bronze welding by gas shall comply
in every respect with B.S. 1724.
Gas welding of steel pipework of 65mm and above shall not be permitted unless prior
permission is obtained.
Welding shall not be permitted on galvanized pipework under any circumstances.
Generally, all ferrous piping systems shall comply with B.S. 806.
All screwed joints shall be made in compliance with B.S. 21 using jointing compounds
carefully selected to suit the type of service.
Equipment
Materials
Table A lists the material classes for the various piped services forming part of the Works.
These classes are referred to in the various Tables of standards and specifications used in
this Section. Alternatives listed in parenthesis in Table A may be required or accepted at the
discretion of the Engineer.
Table B lists the materials specifications for the various classes of pipework.
Joints and Jointing
Table C lists the joints and jointing materials to be used on straight runs of pipework for the
various classes of pipework. No hemp shall be used for jointing.
Table D lists the joints and jointing materials to be used for connections to items of equipment
and adjacent to valves, strainers and other pipeline accessories. In addition, sufficient joints
of this type shall be provided in all plant rooms to ensure that access to equipment for
maintenance, removal and replacement can be effected without dismantling large sections of
pipework or adjacent plant.
Table E lists the type of flanges and method of attachment for use where flanged joints or
connections are specified.
Where pipework is connected to items of equipment having flanges of a dissimilar metal to
the pipework, then isolating flanges of a proprietary brand shall be used with plastic bolt
inserts.
Where flanges and weld fittings are used on copper pipework the technique of brazing or
bronze welding shall be used, employing the best quality welding rods and flux. The welding
rods are to be of a type not subject to dezincification, i.e. "Siltroralloy" or equal. Brazing and
bronze welding is not to be employed for fabricating branch tees.
Fittings
Table F lists the type of fittings which shall be used with the various classes of pipework.
Long sweep bends shall be used in preference to round elbows wherever practicable.
Square elbows or lobster backed bends shall not be used.
Tees shall be of the easy sweep or twin elbow pattern except where square tees are required
for venting or draining, etc..
Bushes shall not be used and where a reduction in pipe size is required, reducing sockets or
tees shall be used. Eccentric reducing sockets shall be used wherever necessary to ensure
Page 150
PARKCITY

proper drainage or elimination of air pockets. Concentric reducers shall be used for vertical
risers.
Manufactured weld fittings shall be used where practicable and the Engineers permission
must be obtained where it is intended to fabricate in lieu of using weld fittings.
Welded branch joints are to be made with manufactured branch fittings accurately profiled to
fit the main, the opening of the main being correctly shaped to coincide with the branch, both
pieces having bevelled edges. All burrs, etc. are to be removed before welding is
commenced and the operator must ensure that the branch piece does not project into the
bore of the main but sits closely onto the bevelled surfaces.
Supports
Table E lists the maximum allowable spacings of support centres for the various classes of
pipework.
Pipe supports shall be provided as required for the stable and sufficient support of the
pipework.
Pipe supports shall allow free movement for expansion and contraction and shall be graded to
required levels for air elimination and drainage.
To ensure free movement, proprietary slide bearing pads shall be provided, either welded or
screwed to the support member.
Ferrous pipes shall have ferrous brackets and copper pipes shall have brass brackets.
All ferrous pipe brackets, supports, pipe hangers, hanger rods and mounting plate in pump
rooms and area exposed to weather are to be hot-dip galvanized. Stainless steel bolts and
nuts shall be used in pump rooms, exposed to weather areas chrome plated bolts and nuts
shall be used in all other areas. Ferrous pipes shall have ferrous brackets and copper pipes
shall have brass or gunmetal brackets. Galvanized steel pipes shall have galvanized steel
brackets.
Additional supports shall be provided adjacent to mixing valves, etc., and other large pipeline
mounted items to prevent undue strain on adjoining pipework. Additional supports shall also
be provided adjacent to pump connections, etc., to prevent undue strain on plant.
Horizontal piping shall be supported in accordance with the following schedule :Pipe Size
Rod Size
25mm and below
9mm
32 - 50mm
9mm
65 - 150mm
13mm
200mm and above
16mm
Where hangers cannot be supported from building steel framing, they may be supported from
concrete inserts. Inserts shall be constructed of malleable iron and shall have space for rods
of all sizes. All inserts for pipes, 80mm and larger in size, shall be installed with a reinforcing
rod 20mm in diameter, run through a slot in the insert specifically provided for this purpose.
Piping shall be anchored, where required, to localize expansion or to prevent undue strain
from hangers and shall be of heavy forged or welded construction of approved design.
Page 151
PARKCITY

Hangers for cold piping shall support the pipe without piercing the insulation. Insulation shield
shall be used to protect the insulation on cold pipes. Insulation protection saddles shall be
welded to insulated hot pipes at roller supports. Wherever fibre-glass pipe insulation is
installed, special precaution to protect the insulation against compression shall be taken,
wherever hangers and insulation shields are installed.
Piping shall be installed and hung in such manner as to preclude the interruption of service to
any other system in the case of maintenance requirements of one system.
Pipework supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints, valves and changes in
direction.
Vertically rising pipes shall be adequately supported at base of riser to withstand its total
weight. Branches shall not be used to support the riser.
Pipes shall be arranged so as to provide subsequent access to any pipe for maintenance or
removal purposes.
All mild steel and copper pipework 50mm nominal size and below normally exposed to view in
rooms and corridors and where fixed to brick or block work walls shall be supported by built-in
long shank schoolboard brackets shall be used where a long shank bracket would protrude
through the other side of the wall. Pipework fixed to precast concrete, lightweight partitions or
walls, timber or metalwork, shall be supported by screw fixing school-board brackets.
Brackets for mild steel pipework shall be mild steel or malleable iron. Brackets and fixing
screws shall be chromium plated or stainless steel where they are securing chromium plated
or polished stainless steel tube.
Brackets screwed to walls shall be secured by expanding plugs or other purpose designed
fixing devices; softwood plugs will not be permitted.
Pipework in boiler rooms, plant rooms, tank rooms, ducts, ceiling voids, roof voids, outside
and pipework 65mm and over, exposed in rooms and corridors shall be adequately guided
and supported on or suspended from rolled steel angle tees, channel or joints supplied by the
Contractor and suitable for building in or otherwise securing to the structure.
Hangers shall be to B.S. 3974 Part 1. Hangers suspending pipework which is subject to
movement shall be complete with swivel joints at pipe rings and spherical washers at the top
of the hanger rods, which shall have a reasonable screwed length for adjustment, the
adjusting screw shall be of the self-locking type or be complete with locking backnut.
Hangers suspending pipework not subject to movement shall have the swivel joint omitted.
Pipework subject to movement which is supported from below shall be fitted with rollers,
chairs and guides, while that which is not subject to movement and supported from below
may reset directly on one of the horizontal flats of the brackets, unless the pipe is copper
when a lead strip shall be securely wrapped round the pipe to interpose between the two
surfaces.
Anchors
Pipe anchors shall be provided where shown on the Drawings and shall be constructed from
structural steel channel sections secured to the building structure.
Anchor points shall be provided where indicated on the drawing to provide an immovable
fixing. The Contractor shall supply and fix in position, ready for building in, all cleats, brackets
and steelwork required for anchor points. Care shall be taken to ensure that no anchor point
is within 600mm of any welded joints. Anchors shall be of an adequate strength to resist the
maximum load, and their designs and positions shall be agreed with the Engineer before
installation commences.
Page 152
PARKCITY

On steel pipework the pipe shall be welded to the anchors via heavy steel straps. On copper
pipework the pipe shall be brazed to the anchors via heavy copper straps.
Guides and anchors shall meet with the written approval of the expansion joint manufacture
and shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before manufacture commences.
Flexible Couplings and Expansion Joints
Wherever necessary, due allowance shall be made for the expansion and contraction of
pipework by change in direction of pipework, or expansion loops, whether shown on the
Drawings or not.
At building expansion joints, and wherever else necessary, additional allowance shall be
made by the provision of stainless steel axial or articulated bellows type expansion
compensators complete with all necessary guides, etc., as recommended by the
manufacturer to give a working life of not less than twenty years.
Each compensator shall maintain at least the same cross-sectional area as adjoining
pipework for its entire length.
On larger diameter steel, ductile and grey iron pipes (150mm diameter and above) judicious
use of "dresser" couplings or other acceptable flexible couplings shall be made in connection
to all plant items.
Flexible couplings shall be fitted to pump suction and delivery connections and where
indicated on the Drawings or schematics.
Couplings shall be line size, made from a multi-ply nylon fabric carcass with wire reinforced
collars and liners designed to suit the fluid conveyed and the working and shock pressures
that will be experienced in the various system.
Manufacturers shall be alerted to the possibility of variations of service (e.g. on/off pump
operation shock pressures, etc.) to ensure correct selection of items for the particular
application.
It is the Contractor's responsibility for ensuring that the expansion joints or changes in
direction of the pipework are correctly aligned and function correctly. Support at such joints
shall be arranged to ensure that all expansion or contraction is taken up at the expansion joint
or change in direction of the pipework. Expansion joints shall be prestressed for the purpose
of reducing the expansion stress under working conditions, the extent of the cold draw shall
be as recommended by the manufacturer.
Each expansion device shall be fitted with a clearly inscribed plate giving the following
details:Manufacturer's Name
Date of Manufacture
Reference Number
Maximum Working Pressure
Direction of Flow
Maximum and Minimum Working Lengths

Air Vents
Page 153
PARKCITY

Key operated air vent cocks of an adequate size and accepted by the Engineer shall be
provided at all high points on water circulating pipework.
Where such high points are unaccessible, air bottles shall be provided with the vent pipe
turned over and carried down to a point 1200mm above floor level, terminating in a vent cock.
Alternatively, where indicated on the Drawings, the Contractor shall install at the top of all
risers as well as at high points automatic air vents.
Each vent shall incorporate a lockshield valve and the discharge pipe shall be run to the
nearest agreed drain point.
Drain Points
Adequately sized key operated drain cocks shall be provided at all low points on liquid
circulation.
Pipeline Strainers
Water strainers shall be installed in all pipelines upstream of all plant as indicated on the
Drawings.
For pipelines of nominal bores between 15mm and 50mm inclusive strainers shall be screwed
gunmetal or bronze body 'Y' type with stainless steel screen.
For pipelines of nominal bores from 65mm and above, strainers shall be flanged to B.S. 4504
to the appropriate Table for the material with 'Y' type cast iron body, stainless steel screen.
Valves
The Contractor shall include for all valves necessary for the proper completion, working,
isolation, regulation and control of the installations, and the same must be provided by the
Contractor as though they had been specifically named.
Isolating valves shall be provided for all items of plant and equipment to ensure that each item
can be removed, replaced or repaired without draining the pipework.
Isolating valves shall also be provided for all risers and droppers for the sectional isolation
and draining of the pipework.
All valves shall be of heavy quality suitable for the working hydraulic pressure stated and
installed with the valve stems truly vertical or horizontal.
Table A - Pipework Classes

Piped Service
Pipework
Classes
Condensing water
Condensate drainage, tank vents, overflows and drains
Refrigerant pipework
Page 154
PARKCITY

Water treatment chemicals
Table B - Pipework Specifications

Pipework
Nominal
Minimum Wall
Class
Bore (mm)
Thickness (mm)
15 - 150
Black steel to B.S. 1387, Table 3,

heavy grade.
200
4.9
Black carbon steel, electric resistance

welded (FRW 410) using 410 MPa
grade steel B.S. 3600 and 3601.
15 - 150
Table 4, BS 1387:
1985
Galvanized steel to B.S. 1387, Table

2, medium grade.
6 - 50
Copper pipe for pressure system to

BS2871, Part 2, Table 2 material
C106 internally degreased and
cleaned.
10 - 200
Table
3506
15 - 100
Rigid A.B.S. to BS
5391
Class D BS
Specification
Unplasticized PVC to B.S. 3506.
Table C - Joints in Straight Runs of Pipe

Pipework
Class
Nominal
Bore (mm)
10 - 50
Black malleable iron, bronze to iron spherical seat unions with

jointing compound to B.S. 5292, or welded joints.
65 - 250
Welded joints.
Joints and Materials
Alternatively dresser couplings or other mechanical joints shall

be used where shown on the Drawings or specified.
B
15 - 50
Galvanized malleable iron, bronze to iron spherical seat

unions with jointing material to B.S. 5292.
65 - 150
Galvanized malleable iron, bronze to iron spherical seat

unions with jointing material to B.S. 5292 or galvanized steel
screwed boss flanges to B.S. 4504 : Part 1.
6 - 50
Welding with silver base alloy having melting point greater
bass.
Page 155
PARKCITY

10 - 200
Solvent welded joints to B.S. 4346 : Part 1 using solvent

cement to B.S. 4346 : Part 3.
15 - 200
Solvent welded spigot and socket fittings to B.S. 5392 : Part 1.
Note: All joints shall be suitable for system test pressures.

Table D - Joints for Equipment Connections
Pipework
Class
Nominal
Bore
(mm)
10 - 50
Black malleable iron, bronze to iron spherical seat unions with

jointing compound to B.S. 5292 : 1976.
65 - 250
Black mild steel welding flanges to B.S. 4504 : Part 1.
Joints and Materials
Alternatively on pipework 100mm diameter and above dresser

couplings or other mechanical joints shall be used where
shown on the Drawings or specified.
B
15 - 150
As for straight pipe runs.
6 - 50
As for straight pipe runs.
10 - 200
Mechanical joints to B.S. 4346 : Part 2.
15 - 200
Flanged joints with solvent welded fittings to B.S. 864 : Part 2.
Note: All joints shall be suitable for system test pressures.
Table E - Flange Details

Pipework
Class
Nominal
Bore (mm)
15 - 50
Screwed on steel boss flanges with taper threads to B.S. 21.

Flanges to B.S. 4504 : Part 1, Type 4.
65 - 150
For oxy-acetylene welding: Type 5 slip-on steel boss welding

flanges. Class 2 welding to B.S. 2640. For metal arc welding:
Steel loose flanges for welded on lapped pipe ends. Class 2
welding to B.S. 2971. Type 5 or 3 welded, flanges to B.S.
4504.
200 - 250
Type 3 or 5 slip-on welding flanges. Metal arc welding to B.S.

4515. Flanges to B.S. 4504 : Part 1.
15 - 150
Screwed on galvanized steel boss flanges with taper threads

to B.S. 21, pipe expanded into flange. Flanges to B.S. 4504 :
Part 1, Type 4.
6 - 50
Flange to BS 4504 : Part 2 Type 22 copper slip-on flanges for

brazing to BS 1723 or welding to BS 1724.
Flange Type and Method of Attachment
Page 156
PARKCITY

10 - 200
Flanges equivalent to B.S. 4504 : Part 1, Type 5 or 3. Solvent

welded using solvent cement to B.S. 4346 : Part 3.
15 - 200
Flanges equivalent to B.S. 4504 : Part 1, Type 5 or 3. Solvent

welded to manufacturer's recommendation.
Note: All flanges to be suitable for system test pressure.

Table F - Pipe Fittings
Pipework
Class
Nominal
Bore (mm)
10 - 50
Black malleable iron screwed fittings to B.S. 143 and 1256 or

purpose made heavy weight welding fittings to B.S. 1965 :
Part 1.
65 - 250
Heavy weight welding fittings to B.S. 1965 : Part 1.
15 - 150
Galvanized malleable iron screwed fittings to B.S. 143 and

1256.
6 - 50
10 - 200
Unplasticized PVC injection moulded fittings to B.S. 4346 :

Part 1, solvents to B.S. 4346 : Part 3.
15 - 200
A.B.S. solvent welding fittings to B.S. 5392 : Part 1.
Fittings
Copper compression or capillary fittings to BS 864 : Part 2.
Note: All flanges to be suitable for system test pressure.

Table G - Maximum Support Spacings
Pipework
Class
Nominal
Bore (mm)
Support Centre (m)
10 - 15
20
25 - 32
40
50
65 - 80
100
125
150
200
250
2.0
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.4
3.7
4.1
4.4
4.8
5.1
5.8
15 - 150
15 - 20
25 - 32
42 - 50
1.4
1.7
2.4
At 20C
10 - 20
As for Class A pipework.
0.9
At 70C
0.5
Page 157
PARKCITY
E
6.7

25 - 32
1.1
0.7
40 - 80
1.4
0.9
100
1.9
1.0
150
2.1
1.1
200
2.4
1.2
15 - 200
As for Class D pipework.
Installation
General
The Contractor shall provide all labour and material to form complete pipework systems and
shall leave the installation adjusted to the designed flow rates.
All pipe runs shall be installed generally in accordance with the Drawings but full allowance
shall be made by the Contractor for the detailed development and on-site co-ordination of the
scheme and for the future removal and dismantling of sections of the Works.
All pipework shall be free from burrs, rust and scale and shall be thoroughly cleaned before
installation.
During the course of the installation, all open ends shall be plugged or capped to prevent
ingress of dirt and on completion each system shall be thoroughly flushed out with clean
water. Wooden bungs shall not be used for plugging pipework.
Where two or more pipe runs follow the same route, care shall be taken to ensure that all are
parallel to each other and to the building structure, except for the required allowance for
venting, etc.. Pipework which is to be sub-sequently insulated shall be so spaced to allow an
individual finish to each.
Where steel pipework is required to be welded it shall be carried out generally by the electric
arc process to B.S. 2633. Where steel pipework of 50mm dia. and below is to be welded, gas
welding by the oxy-acetylene process to B.S. 2640 may be used. Gas welding on pipework
65mm and above will not be permitted unless prior permission is obtained.
Where brazing or bronze welding is undertaken, such welding shall be carried out in
accordance with, and satisfy the testing procedures described in B.S. 1723 and B.S. 1724. In
all other respects, particulars relating to the welding of steel pipework shall apply equally to
copper.
The quality of welding in steel or copper shall be subjected to careful inspection and testing
by the Engineer and where so deemed necessary may be subjected to non-destructive and/or
destructive tests under the supervision of the Engineer.
Non-destructive testing shall consist of either radio-graphic examination to comply with B.S.
2600 and B.S. 2910 or ultrasonic inspection to comply with B.S. 3923. The Contractor shall
allow for 2% of all welds for testing by this method. This testing shall be carried out only by
approved specialists.
The Contractor shall allow in his tender for the cost of destructive tests which will entail cutting
out from the completed installation at any time, up to 1% of welded joint for both steel and
copper, at the entire discretion of the Engineer and in positions as directed by him. Should
any specimen welds so examined be designated unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall remove
Page 158
PARKCITY

such further work as instructed. All such work shall be replaced and made good at the
expense of the Contractor, to a standard acceptable to the Engineer. Where test welds are
removed from a pipeline, it shall be made good by welding in a length of similar bore and
class of pipe not less than 300mm long.
Falls
Pipework shall be installed with correct falls to ensure adequate venting and draining.
Joints
Pipework installed in trenches, ducts, voids and inaccessible places shall have welded joints
except where screwed or flanged joints are necessary for connecting to valves or where
required for easy dismantling, etc., or where a particular type of joint is specifically called for
on the Drawings.
No pipe joints shall be permitted within the thickness of walls or floors, etc..
Joints shall not be closer than 1.0m except where necessitated by fittings.
Welding of Ferrous Pipework
Butt welds shall be made using the "Single V" principle where the pipe ends shall be cut
square and bevelled with all internal and external burrs removed.
Pipes shall be properly aligned before welding is commenced and care shall be taken during
the operation that the weld does not penetrate unduly and restrict the pipe bore.
Where cut and weld branch fittings are required and approved by the Engineer, branch welds
shall be made using manufactured branch fittings accurately profiled to fit the main. The
openings in the main shall be correctly shaped to coincide with the branch and both pieces
shall have bevelled edges. All burrs shall be removed before welding is commenced and the
branch piece shall not project into the bore of the main.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate staging and protection from
weather to enable the welding operations to be properly performed.
No welding shall be carried out when the surfaces of the materials are wet; in rain or high
wind; or when the temperature of the parent metal is 5C or below.
All welded joints (except pipe welded end-to-end) shall be made by use of forged one-piece
welding caps, nozzles, elbows, branch outlets and tees. Cut samples shall be submitted for
approval if directed. All such fittings, etc., shall be of a type which maintains full wall
thicknesses at all points, sample radius and fillets and proper bevels or shoulders at ends.
Where flanges are welded to steel pipework, the joints shall be hammer tested.
Imperfect welds shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
Any
Welding of PVC or ABS/Copper Pipework

A.B.S. and unplasticized PVC pipework shall be solvent or hot air welded as recommended
by the manufacturers and as detailed elsewhere in this Specification.
Where solvent welding is used, particular attention must be paid to preparation. Abrasive
paper and spirit cleaner must be used.
When applying solvent, heat shall be avoided in order to prevent the cement drying before the
chemical bond between the two surfaces is completed. Mating surfaces shall be turned for
even spread of the solvent. Excessive cement shall be wiped off quickly.
Page 159
PARKCITY

On U.PVC pipework, hot air welded joints shall be made where standard fittings are
unavailable and where accepted by the Engineer.
Welding shall be carried out using a jet of hot air and PVC filler rod by a welder qualified in
plastic fabrication. Complete fusion shall be ensured by applying from three to six runs of
weld. Weld shall not be cleaned off. The Contractor must guarantee that any fabrication is
similar in strength to a manufacturer's item.
Refrigerant pipe shall be fusion weld joints to B.S. 1077.
Anchors
Anchors shall be positioned in association with pipework change in direction and propriety
expansion compensators, etc., such as to absorb the stresses due to pipework expansion and
internal pressures by transmission of such forces to the ground or structure at appropriate
points.
The Contractor should particularly note that in addition to serving the purpose of constraining
the pipeline, the anchors may be used in connection with testing of pipework, and at such
times, it will be necessary to have the extreme ends of the main being tested held with the
anchors to prevent the pipeline drawing apart due to the thrust pressures exerted at the two
ends of the pipe.
Flexible and Expansion Couplings
The couplings shall be arranged such that torsional, co-axial stress and lateral stress caused
by expansion and/or settlement shall not be transmitted to the flanged connections of the
plant.
During sectional testing, the Contractor shall ensure that the expansion joints are adequately
tied, anchored or removed to avoid damage to the bellows.
Pipe Sleeves
Where pipes pass through walls, floors, etc. (including floors in ducts), the Contractor shall
provide pipe sleeves.
Where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings rendered liquid-tight puddle flanges shall
be supplied and fixed by the Contractor.
Sleeves for cast iron and steel pipes shall be steel (where the pipe is galvanized, the sleeve
shall also be galvanized). For plastic pipes, the sleeves shall be plastic. For copper pipes,
the sleeves shall be copper.
Where sleeves are fitted through floors, they shall extend to at least 50mm clear of finished
floor.
Sleeves shall be of sufficient size to allow free movement of pipes and furthermore where
pipes are insulated, the sleeves are to be oversized to allow the insulation to be carried
through the sleeves.
Details of pipes through walls and floors to be accepted by the Engineer before installation.
Where exposed pipes pass through walls, ceilings and floors, hinged mild steel escutcheon
rings are to be used. All plates are to be galvanized and samples of such plates are to be
submitted to the Engineer for acceptance before fixing.
Page 160
PARKCITY

Pipe sleeves shall also be provided where piping penetrates external walls and roofs. The
space between pipe sleeves and the pipe or insulation shall then be completely caulked by
the Contractor, with a soft, non-setting waterproof mastic compound giving an airtight seal.
Penetrations through roofs shall also be provided with a weatherproof apron and up stand
curb or other provisions as may be specified elsewhere or shown on the Drawings.
Where pipes pass through fire walls and floor slabs, a metal fire stop is to be welded or bolted
around the pipe. This shall be in the form of a 6mm thick flange located in the centre of the
slab/wall thickness and welded/screwed to the pipe, the flange being of the same diameter as
the internal bore of the pipe sleeve.
Buried Pipes
All pipework buried in walls or slabs shall be wrapped with a protective tape such as Denso or
equal. Where pipes are insulated, the tape shall be applied over the insulation.
Testing
All pipework systems shall be tested in accordance with the "Commissioning and Testing"
Finishes
Generally, galvanized steel pipework in concealed locations, copper, UPVC and ABS
pipework need not be painted.
Pipework insulated and covered with aluminium foil or insulated pipework within false ceilings
and pipe shafts need not be painted.
All other pipework shall be painted.
All supports, hangers, brackets, etc., shall be painted with one coat of primer before erection
and further painted after installation as specified.
All equipment forming part of the pipework system or connected to the pipework will be
painted as specified.
Identification
All pipework, valves and fittings shall be provided with identification markings and labels as
specified in the "Insulation and Painting" Section of this Specification.
Construction of identification labels shall be as specified in the "Miscellaneous Provisions"
6.8
Ductwork and Fitting

Description
General
This Section specifies the ductwork and fittings for the various systems which form part of the
Works as shown on the Drawings.
Page 161
PARKCITY

Unless specifically stated otherwise, the term "ductwork and fittings" when used in a general
context shall mean all ductwork, fittings, dampers, supports, gauges and all other components
and accessories required for the complete installation of the system as shown on the
Drawings.
Manufacture
All ductwork and fittings delivered to site shall be new and shall be clearly and indelibly
stamped to identify different grades, materials and manufacturers.
All ductwork shall be manufactured as far as practicable to site dimensions taken by the
Contractor.
All flexible ductwork and accessories for uninsulated services shall be as Thermaflex U1;
Flex-tract 2001; GNK Simplicity Ali-Steel; or an acceptable equal. No asbestos sheets shall
be used to form flexible connection of ducting.
All flexible ductwork and accessories for insulated service shall be as Thermaflex M-KC; GNK
Simplicity Ali-Steel (pre-insulated); or an acceptable equal. No asbestos sheets shall be used
to for flexible connection of ducting.
All dampers, air grilles, diffusers and louvres shall be fully imported. Local made products will
not be accepted normally.
Patented access doors in ductwork, such as Hargreaves "Air-O-Seal" may be submitted for
acceptance.
Submissions
The information listed in this Clause may be provided for each system at the times stated.
Form of Tender.
Within two weeks of being notified of the Employer's intent to award the Contract, the
Contractor shall furnish the following information for each system, to the Engineer for
acceptance:-
Manufacturer of all ductwork and fittings; and

Specifications and standard for all ductwork and fittings.
Within two weeks, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for acceptance complete
working drawings for all ductwork systems included in the Contract.
Working drawings shall include plans, sections, elevations, schematics, schedules and
details of all systems and shall show locations and details of all dampers, splitters, hangers,
supports, supply, return, intake and exhaust air fittings, joints, flexible connections, test
points, insulation, linings, kitchen hoods (where applicable), cladding, etc..
Prior to ordering any materials, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for acceptance
manufacturers' data for all dampers, actuators, supply, return, intake and exhaust air fittings,
proprietary brand jointing systems or materials, and for any other equipment as may be
requested by the Engineer.
The manufacturers' data shall include performance data, printed installation, operation and
maintenance instructions, complete parts lists, materials specifications, recommended spare
parts lists and any other information as may be requested by the Engineer.
Page 162
PARKCITY

In the case of supply, return, intake and exhaust air fittings, the submission for acceptance
shall include one finished sample in an acceptable colour and finish of each type of air fitting
to be provided under the Contract. No fittings may be ordered until the Engineer has
accepted the sample in writing including the finish and colour. Samples shall include
mounting frames, fixings, etc., so that the entire fitting assembly may be accepted.
Details of all hangers and supports shall be submitted for acceptance prior to construction.
Flat oval ductwork may be offered to the Engineer for acceptance as an alternative to
rectangular section ductwork shown on the Drawings. Where such ductwork is offered, it
shall be sized to give the same pressure drop per unit length as the rectangular ductwork
shown and the intention to use flat oval ductwork shall be shown clearly on the shop drawing
submissions.
Details of materials and installation of all acoustic linings shall be submitted for acceptance
prior to fabrication.
his proposed commissioning and testing procedures and report for acceptance.
Specification
of an approved testing authority and in compliance with the "Commissioning and Testing"
Selection
All ductwork, fittings, accessories, joints and jointing materials shall be suitable for the service
and shall not deteriorate due to atmospheric action.
All duct sizes shown on the Drawings are clear internal sizes unless otherwise noted and due
allowance shall be made for the thicknesses of internal or external linings when dimensioning
ductwork and selecting fittings and accessories.
Standards
All ductwork and fittings shall comply with the appropriate British Standards, as listed in the
relevant Clause of this Section, or an approved equivalent international standard.
All ductwork, fittings and materials shall comply with the standards of the Ductwork Group of
the Heating and Ventilating Contractors' Association of the U.K. (HVCA).
In particular the materials, construction and installation of all sheet metal ductwork and fittings
shall be in accordance with the HVCA "Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork DW/144 :
1998".
Where any part of the installation shown on the Drawings is not covered by the HVCA
Specifications, then the standard of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association of the U.S.A. (SMACNA) shall apply for either high velocity or low
velocity systems as appropriate.
Where any part of the installation shown on the Drawings is not covered by either the HVCA
or SMACNA standards, then reference shall be made to the Engineer for acceptance of
materials and methods prior to installation.
Page 163
PARKCITY

Balancing, adjusting and testing of air distribution systems shall be in accordance with the
SMACNA "Standard for the Balancing and Adjustment of Air Distribution Systems" latest
edition.
In addition, the installation shall comply with the requirements of this Section of the
Specification.
Equipment
Materials
Generally, all ductwork shall be of hot dipped galvanized steel sheet to B.S. 2989: 1975,
Grade Z2, coating type 'C' as specified in DW/144.
Where ductwork construction is required using other metals or materials, reference shall be
made to other sections of this Specification and/or the tender drawings.
Pressure Classification
The definition of Low Velocity, Low Pressure Systems and High Velocity, High Pressure
Systems shall be as defined in DW/144 Clause 1.1 to 1.4.
Joints and Fittings
All cross joints, longitudinal joints, take-offs, bends, transitions and all other fittings shall be in
accordance with DW/144 for the appropriate pressure class.
Patented or proprietary joints with or without integral jointing may be submitted for acceptance
provided that full details are submitted prior to ordering.
Sheet Thickness
Thicknesses of sheet metal in ductwork systems shall be as recommended in DW/144 for the
appropriate pressure class.
Ductwork Jointing Sealants
All sealants, adhesives, tapes, etc., used for jointing and sealing on ductwork systems shall
comply with the requirements of DW/144.
Jointing for flanged cross joints shall be formed from a gasket of "Prestick" lead or other
accepted material to thickness not less than 4mm.
Sealant for longitudinal and slip joints shall be type EC/750C sealing compound by Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing Co., Ltd., or an acceptable equal compound.
Optionally, for cross joints on high velocity ductwork (and mandatory for all joints between
conventional sheet metal ductwork connecting to flexible ducting formed from metallic, plastic
or other material) accepted patent jointings may be used (e.g. Rock-Joint chemical reaction
tape, Thermofit/Raychem heat shrinkable sleeves or other jointing accepted by the Engineer.
The use of heat shrink bands (of F.S.D. acceptable type) shall only be allowed with the prior
acceptance of the Engineer.
Bands shall be a minimum of 75mm wide and manufactured by Thermofit or an acceptable
equal.
Flexible Joints
Page 164
PARKCITY

Materials and installation methods for all flexible connections between ductwork systems and
equipment shall comply with the requirements of DW/144. No asbestos sheets shall be used
to form flexible joints.
Flexible connections shall be provided at the suction and delivery connections of all fans and
air handling units and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or as may be required to
eliminate vibration.
The material used for flexible connections must withstand the specified conditions of
temperature and air pressure and must comply with the standards of airtightness. The
material must be fire resistant and must comply with appropriate FSD and other statutory
regulations.
Bendable and Flexible Ducts
Bendable or flexible ducts shall comply with the requirements of DW/144 and C.P. 413 : 1973.
Volume Dampers
The Contractor shall provide and install hand operated dampers where required for the proper
regulation of the ventilating and air conditioning systems whether shown on the Drawings or
not.
All volume dampers shall comply with DW/144 and shall be provided in separate purposemade flanged casings of rigid construction conforming to the same standards of air-tightness.
The damper spindles shall be provided with suitable seals when passing through the casing
and penetrations shall be limited by the use of internal linkage.
In high velocity ductwork, dampers shall be situated in areas of relatively low velocity, and
should also be of the streamline type to prevent undue disturbance of the air flow.
Where motorized or pneumatically operated dampers are shown on the Drawings, then the
actuator shall be as specified elsewhere in this Specification.
Acoustic Linings
All materials, including adhesives, for acoustic linings shall comply with DW/144 and shall be
provided where shown on the Drawings or where otherwise required to reduce duct-borne
noise and maintain room noise levels within specified limits.
The minimum thickness of lining shall be 25mm. For air duct exceeding 1m cross-sectional
area, the minimum thickness shall be 50mm. Sample of the linings shall be submitted for
approval before fabrication.
Grilles and Diffusers
All air supply, return and exhaust fittings shall be provided of the types and duties shown on
the Drawings.
All supply fittings shall have an opposed blade volume control device, the vanes of which
shall be spring-loaded or otherwise arranged so that they remain permanently in their set
position without vibration or noise. Where shown on the Drawings, return and exhaust air
fittings shall also have opposed blade volume dampers.
All grilles, registers and diffusers shall be capable of being removed easily from the ductwork
for access to dampers, etc., and constructed in accordance with the best practice and free
from sharp edges.
Page 165
PARKCITY

All supply air fittings shall have the facility for adjustment of the air flow direction either by
double deflection vanes.
Except where otherwise shown on the Drawings, all air fittings shall have concealed fixing
systems. Exposed screw fixings will not be accepted.
All supply air grilles and registers shall be of extruded aluminium with an anodized finish of
natural colour unless otherwise indicated.
All return air grilles shall be aluminium, finish colour to be agreed with the Employer.
All grilles, diffusers, etc., shall be erected square and level and accurately set out as to
spacing. All fittings shall be mounted on substantial frames and shall be provided with 7mm
thick soft rubber or felt joining ring inserted under the frame, or as the case may be, so as to
obviate air leaks and prevent the formation of condensation on the fittings.
For adjustment vanes, keys are to be provided, no projecting adjusting device being
permitted. Vanes shall be spring loaded or otherwise arranged so that they remain
permanently in their set position without vibration or noise.
Before any diffusers, etc., are ordered or manufacture of fittings commences, confirmation
must be obtained from the Engineer as to exact position and finish of fittings required.
Samples of every type grilles, diffusers, etc. shall be submitted to the Engineer and for
acceptance before orders are placed.
Plenum Boxes
Where shown on the Drawings, supply and return air diffusers/bar grilles shall be served from
supply and eturn air plenum boxes. These boxes may be locally fabricated provided that the
designs and materials are accepted prior to construction.
After acceptance of the designs and materials of the boxes, the Contractor shall erect a
sample box for acceptance. Thereafter, the accepted box shall be kept on site and all
subsequent boxes may be compared against this standard to ensure quality control. Any
boxes not complying with the standard of the approved box may be rejected.
The boxes shall generally be designed as indicated on the Drawings and shall have an
outside casing of 1.25mm galvanized iron sheet, an inside wall of 0.50mm perforated
aluminium sheet and an intermediate lining of 25mm thick semi-rigid acoustic fibreglass. The
boxes shall also be completely insulated externally with 25mm reglass blanket with an
acceptable foil vapour barrier.
The boxes shall be so designed as to provide an efficient, quiet and maintenance free air
distribution system.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the Engineer's acceptance for locally made
plenum boxes and the Engineer reserves the right to withhold such acceptance where the
Contractor fails to submit designs and samples of adequate quality or in sufficient time to
meet the programme.
In the event that locally made boxes are not accepted, then the boxes shall be imported from
a supplier such as Titus or an acceptable equal.
Internal Louvres
Supply and return internal louvres shall be provided of the types and duties shown on the
Drawings.
Page 166
PARKCITY

Except where otherwise shown on the Drawings, all air fittings shall have concealed fixing
systems. Exposed screw fixings will not be accepted.
All supply and return air internal louvres shall be of extruded aluminium with an anodized
finish of an accepted colour. Colours to be accepted by the Engineer prior to ordering.
Alternatively, where requested by the Engineer, internal louvres may be of mild steel with a
baked enamel finish of an accepted colour.
All metal parts associated with battery ventilation system are to be protected by at least two
coats of acid resistant paint on internal and external of the system.
External Louvres
Where external louvres are shown on the Drawings to be by this Contractor, then the louvres
shall comply with this Specification.
All louvres shall be of the weatherproof type, formed from extruded aluminium sections
contoured to prevent the ingress of water during typhoon conditions and shall have
detachable aluminium 13 x 13mm, 1.60mm diameter wire bird screen fitted on the rear face.
Louvres shall have an nodized finish of a colour accepted by the Engineer.
Where the total louvre area exceeds 4m, the louvre shall be made up of individual sections
mounted on a rigid steel supporting structure spanning the opening. The Contractor shall
provide the external frame and supporting steelwork.
The total free area of any louvre shall not be less than 50% of the face area indicated on the
Drawings and the pressure drop through any louvre shall not exceed 25 Pa. unless otherwise
specified.
All external louvres shall be protected internally with security bars. 12mm steel bars at
150mm centres shall be mounted in a steel frame with 6mm cross breaking on spans over
1000mm.
The Contractor shall include for galvanized mild steel blanking plates to all areas of external
louvred area not required for fresh air intakes/exhausts.
Duct Hanger and Support
All hanger rods brackets support and mounting plates shall be of mild steel.
All hangers and supports for air ducts are to be hot-dipped galvanized with stainless steel
bolts and nuts when used in exposed locations.
Hangers and supports for air ducts in concealed locations shall be hot dipped galvanised.
All horizontal ductwork shall be supported with galvanised steel angles. Hanger rods
brackets shall be of galvanised steel and shall have adequate strength. Supports shall not be
made with dissimilar metals.
Where angle stiffeners have been provided on the underside of the duct the hangers may
pass through pre-drilled openings in the ends of those angle stiffeners. Where this is not
possible, angles for support for the underside of the duct shall be furnished and installed.
Again hangers shall pass through pre-drilled holes in the angles. The size of the angles shall
be the same as that required for the stiffening angles for that particular duct section. All
hanger rods shall be of minimum 6mm diameter. Hanger rods shall be spaced as specified in
DW/144.
Page 167
PARKCITY

Vertical ducts shall be securely supported by continuous lengths of structural angles of a size
at least equivalent to that for stiffening. Angles fastened to opposite sides of ducts shall
extend across the openings and bear upon structure of slabs on both sides of the openings.
The Contractor shall provide equipotential bonding on air ducts pipeworks and other metallic
components.
Installation
General
The Contractor shall provide all labour and materials including control dampers, grilles,
diffusers, etc., to form complete air distribution and exhaust ductwork systems and shall leave
the installation adjusted to the designed air quantities.
All ductwork systems shall be installed generally in accordance with the Drawings but full
allowance shall be made by the Contractor for the detailed development and on-site coordination of the scheme and for the future removal and dismantling of sections of the Works.
All intake louvres shall be provided with wire mesh.
Construction
All ductwork shall be constructed and erected rigid and free from sway, drumming and
movement. Ductwork shall be true-to-size and accurately lined-up.
Lengths of ducts and other constructional details shall be selected to achieve maximum
economy of manufacture and erection subject to compliance with the construction standards
and access into the building.
Cross-breaking shall be permitted on low velocity ductwork only and in no case where rigid
external insulation will be applied.
Reasonable provision shall be made by the Contractor for dismantling of ductwork by means
of bolted, flanged joints and shall in all cases, be accepted by the Engineer prior to
fabrication.
Internal roughness, sharp edges or obstructions to air flow (other than dampers, splitters or
diff-users) will not be allowed.
External edges and corners formed from cleated joints shall be neatly dressed down and
joints made air tight.
Access doors and panels in ductwork shall be adequately braced and of the quick release
pattern. Hinged type access door is to be selected.
In locations where a high standard of cleanliness must be maintained and elsewhere if noted
on the Drawings, ductwork shall be erected with at least a 75mm clearance from walls,
ceilings and obstructions.
All grilles and registers shall be mounted on a substantial frame connected to the ductwork
and shall be provided with an acceptable gasket.
Where a large external louvre is made up of small units, care shall be taken where the
constituent units a butt, to present a smooth visually pleasing appearance externally.
Where ducts pass through nonfire rated partitions, the Contractor shall seal the space
between the duct and the builder's work with galvanized mild steel angle frame to completely
surround the duct on both sides of the partition. The angle frame shall be rigidly bolted to the
Page 168
PARKCITY

partition and riveted to the duct. Gaskets shall be used where necessary to allow for
irregularities in the partitions or ducts. On insulated ductwork isolation blocks shall be
provided between the duct and the angle frame to prevent condensation on the frame.
Sleeves shall be allowed on all externally insulated or fibreboard ducts to prevent distortion
during making good of masonry.
Construction of fire resisting cladding system including duct board, associated
hanging/supporting structure and jointing details shall be approved by the Building
Department.
Testing
Low velocity ductwork need not be tested unless specified elsewhere in this Specification or
especially called for by the Engineer, following inspection on the Site.
Balancing and commissioning of ductwork systems shall be carried out in accordance with the
"Commissioning and Testing" Section of this Specification.
Finishes
Generally, galvanized steel ductwork in concealed locations and aluminium ductwork need
not be painted. Insulated ductwork within false actings and duct shafts need not be painted.
All other ductwork shall be painted.
All supports, hangers, brackets, stiffeners, etc., shall be painted with one coat of primer
before erection and further painted after installation as specified.
All dampers and other equipment forming part of the ductwork system or connected to the
ductwork shall be painted as specified.
The interior of all air conditioning ducts shall be painted matt black in the vicinity of all grilles,
diffusers, etc.
Identification
All ductwork, dampers and fittings shall be provided with identification markings and labels as
specified in the "Insulation and Painting" Section of this Specification.
Cleaning and Blowing Out
All ducts shall be internally cleaned before running of fans. Suitable metal covers shall be
provided at all times during installation to prevent the ingress of foreign materials. As soon as
practicable and before final finishes are completed, the main fans shall be started to blow out
dust which may collect in the ductwork before connecting to terminal units. Care must be
taken that no discolouring of the ceiling takes place or other equipment disturbed due to
inadequate protection to keep out dust and dirt. Timing of this work shall be observed to
ensure that minimum inconvenience is caused to the works of others.
6.9
Insulation and Painting

General
Description
Page 169
PARKCITY

This Section specifies the thermal insulation, painting and other finishes of all plant and
materials shown on the Drawings and provided as part of Works.
Manufacture
All materials supplied of the same type shall be supplied by a single manufacturer to ensure
uniformity of standards and appearance.
All materials delivered to site shall be new, and where appropriate, colour coded and labelled
at the factory to identify different grades, sizes and types.
Submissions
The information listed in this Clause must be provided for the materials listed at the times
stated.
Form of Tender.
Before ordering any insulating materials, the Contractor shall state the coefficient of thermal
conductivity for each of the materials being supplied for the Works, and shall allow for all
costs in connection with carrying out tests on representative samples (of each material) taken
at Site and/or at makers' works as directed by the Engineer and tested in accordance with the
methods laid down in British Standards. In the event of the test results not being in the
Engineer 's opinion satisfactory, the Engineer shall have the right to order the removal and
replacement of all material represented by the unsatisfactory samples.
Before ordering any undercoat or finishing paint, the Contractor shall submit his proposed
colour schemes to the Engineer for acceptance.
Before ordering any painting materials, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
approval the type and manufacturer of all materials.
Selection
The Contractor shall select all insulating, finishing and painting materials from types suitable
for the surfaces to which they are applied and for the environmental conditions in each area.
No asbestos based insulation shall be used.
All expanded foam insulation products (phenolic, flexible elastomeric) offered by the
Contractor for the Contract works shall be manufactured without use of ozone depleting
gaseous products (CFC's). The Contractor will be required to produce proof at time of
equipment submissions that these insulation products are CFC free.
All the fibre glass insulation to be employed under this Contract shall be constructed of glass
wool having typical fibre diameter greater than 5um and typical fibre length greater than 3cm.
Standards
Insulation shall comply with provisions of B.S. 1334 and B.S. 5422 as appropriate.
Pipework insulation shall generally comply with British Standard Code of Practice C.P. 3005
or B.S. 5970.
Unless otherwise indicated, all thermal insulating materials used within any building shall,
when tested in accordance with B.S. 476 comply as follows:Part 5 Class P not easily ignitable.
Page 170
PARKCITY

Part 6 Fire propagation I=10.3 i=4.1.

Part 7 Surface spread of Flame Class 1.
Equipment
General
Insulation materials and finishes shall be inherently proof against rotting, mould and fungal
growth and attack by vermin be non-hygroscopic and in all respects be suitable for continuous
use throughout the range of operating temperatures and for the environment indicated.
Insulation of Supports
Cold water piping and ductwork shall be insulated from hangers and supports generally as
indicated in HVCA Specification DW/144:1998.
At the point of support, specially prepared blocks of hardwood or styrofoam material must be
positioned to ensure the integrity of the vapour barrier by bonding the supports to the
insulation.
Pipe supports should fit around the outside of the insulation. The phenolic foam insulation at
support points shall be heavy density load-bearing factory preformed closed cell CFC free
phenolic foam sections with density 80 kg/m for pipe sizes from 15mm to 125mm inclusive
and 120 kg/m for pipe sizes of 150mm above and made to the same thickness as the
adjacent pipe insulation.
Labelling and Identification
All piping, plant and equipment provided under the Contract is to be labelled in English as to
duty or services. All such labelling to correspond to schedules, diagrams, etc., as specified in
the individual Sections of this Specification.
Labels shall be as specified in the "Miscellaneous Provisions" Section of this Specification.
All pipework and ductwork (whether insulated or not) shall have identification discs/bands,
generally as B.S. 1710 : 1975, Appendix D, Optional Colour Code Indications for General
Building Services.
Colour banding shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 5m and wherever necessary at
bends, tees, etc., and where pipes pass from one room or zone to another. Where two or
more pipes run in parallel, then the colour banding for each pipe shall be at the same
locations.
Colours not covered by this Specification must be agreed with the Engineer before work
commences on site.
At intervals approved by the Engineer on straight pipes and adjacent to valves and tees,
coloured arrows are to be stencilled to the insulation or pipework to indicate direction of flow.
In addition, the pipe mains are to be painted using stencils to indicate the circuit or system.
Where the finish is unpainted, metal bands and discs are to be fitted for colour identification
specified above.
Ductwork systems shall be differentiated by coloured discs of 150mm diameter at intervals
accepted by the Engineer. Additionally, adjacent to the discs, the ducts are to be painted
using stencils to indicate the particular system.
Page 171
PARKCITY

The Contractor shall supply all necessary identifying items, paint, stencils, etc., to comply with
this Section. The whole to be agreed with the Engineer during the progress of the Works.
Extent of Painting
All plant, materials and equipment forming part of the Works are required to be painted as
specified in this Section, with the sole exception of items specifically excluded in this
Specification.
Items which do not require to be painted shall include:
-
Insulated ductwork with aluminium or hammerclad finish.
Copper pipework and fittings; (except where specifically stated).
Galvanized pipework, ductwork, conduit or cable trays where concealed within duct
shafts or false ceilings.
UPVC pipework, ductwork or conduit.
Materials with a factory applied anodized, baked enamel or painted finish, provided
that the colours are accepted prior to application.
Insulated pipework or ductwork concealed within duct shafts or false ceilings.
Acoustic silencers and enclosure made of galvanised steel exposed to weather.
The requirement for painting of all pipework and ductwork is in addition to the colour coding or
banding specified in this Section.
Factory Painting
All finishing to factory assembled plant or equipment shall be factory applied in accordance
with the manufacturers' normal practice and to a standard suitable for the duty and location of
the plant.
Where factory applied finishes are accepted, the Contractor must obtain from the plant
manufacturers touch-up paint kits and detailed instructions for making good after completion
any damage to finishes which may occur during transportation, storage, installation or
commissioning.
Site Painting
All plant and materials requiring to be painted on site shall generally be painted with one coat
of an acceptable primer, one coat of an acceptable undercoat and two coats of an approved
high gloss finishing coat.
Installation
General
The Contractor shall allow for all thermal insulation, fixings, finishings, paint and any other
materials or labour required for the complete insulation, finishing and painting of all plant and
materials installed under this Contract.
All insulation finishes and painting shall be supplied and applied by the skilled workmen of a
Specialist Contractor whose name shall be submitted for approval prior to entering the
Contract. Acceptance by the Engineer shall in no way absolve the Contractor of his
responsibility for compliance with this Specification.
Page 172
PARKCITY

All materials including the thermal insulation itself, together with adhesives, paint, bands,
sheeting, etc., shall be supplied with a reasonable margin for cutting, wastage and making
good damage and loss. All materials shall be stored in a suitable manner so as to protect
them from damage or deterioration before fixing.
No insulation shall be applied until pipes, plant and ductwork have been satisfactorily
inspected/tested as specified.
Unless dictated by practical reasons and agreed with the Engineer, each pipe/duct shall be
separately insulated with a minimum space of 50mm between finished services.
Application of Insulation
All insulation shall be applied so as to give a smooth, homogeneous and lineable surface of
uniform thickness. All rigid sections shall be concentric, and accurately matched for
thickness. Steps and undulations in the surfaces shall not be acceptable. Any sections or
slabs having damaged ends or edges shall be rejected.
All insulation shall fit tight to surfaces to be covered, and all slabs and sections shall be built
up close, butting edges being mitred, chamfered or shaped as necessary. Any minor
interstices left in insulation shall be filled and sealed with granules embedded in a suitable
and approved adhesive compound.
Insulation shall be applied to clean and dry surfaces, free of foreign material such as oil,
grease, rust, scale or dirt.
Any pipework surfaces to be insulated, shall, prior to insulating, be thoroughly scraped and
wire brushed as necessary to remove all rust, scale, etc.. Surfaces shall then be solvent
cleaned to remove all oil, grease and dirt prior to the application of a coat of primer.
Application of primer shall be as specified in the Painting Clause of this Specification.
Where thermal insulation is applied to rectangular ductwork, it shall be glued to the clean duct
surface with an approved adhesive and held firmly in place by means of spot welded pins or
plastic pins glued to the duct face.
Application of fibre glass insulation shall also conform to the conditions set out in "B.S.B.
Circular No. 37 of 1995".
Only clean and dry insulation shall be used. Insulation shall generally be applied in
accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations.
A complete sealed vapour barrier shall be provided for all insulation on cold surfaces. The
vapour barrier shall be sealed around all hangers or other projections through the insulation.
Continuous insulation shall be provided through all sleeves and insulation joints shall be
staggered with respect to joints on the associated pipework or ductwork systems.
On long runs of pipework (every 5m), an effective vapour seal shall be applied to the joint
faces to prevent the effects of damaged insulation from affecting the complete run.
For continuous adhesion of aluminium foil sealing tape, an approved coating such as Fosters
85 - 75 ADHESIVE shall first be applied to the bonding surface. All excess adhesive shall be
cleaned off.
Insulation for flanges, valves, pumps etc. shall be fitted in easily removable hammered 0.8mm
thick aluminium sheet split boxes held in place by clipping device to allow
maintenance/inspection without damaging the insulation.
Plant Insulation
Page 173
PARKCITY

Generally, all factory assembled plant shall be insulated in the factory in accordance with the
manufacturer's normal practice.
Insulation on fan casings and ductwork shall be neatly finished round access doors,
handholes and the like. Access doors to be separately insulated.
Where valves, flanges, strainers, etc., are specified to be insulated, insulation shall be in
conformity with the pipework in which they are incorporated, and to the same thickness, and
shall be provided with insulated split boxes, arranged for easy removal. The boxes shall
enclose valve handles and shall have lids for valve access.
The insulation on the pipes immediately adjacent to such flanges, etc., shall be neatly swaged
off to allow for easy removal of bolts. An insertion shall be provided to allow the insulated
boxes to be removed without damage to the pipe insulation.
Where plant, fittings or accessories require to be insulated, then they shall have the same
standard of finishing as the pipework or ductwork system of which they form a part.
Painting
Prior to painting, all metallic surfaces except galvanized surfaces shall be thoroughly scraped
and wire brushed as necessary to remove scale, rust and swarf. Surfaces shall then be
solvent cleaned to remove all oil, grease and dirt.
When the surfaces to be painted are clean and dry, one coat of an approved primer shall be
evenly applied over the entire area. After surfaces have been primed, the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer so that an inspection of the primed surfaces can be made prior to the
application of the finishing coats.
When the priming coat has been approved, one coat of an accepted flat undercoat shall be
applied. Before applying the finishing coat, the Contractor shall ensure that the undercoated
surface is rubbed flat and smooth. Finally, one coat of an accepted high gloss finishing coat
shall be applied when all dust has been removed.
Each successive coating shall be completely dry prior to the application of the next coat.
All surfaces shall be suitably protected during painting to prevent dust and other impurities
entering the paint or adhering to the painted surface. "Wet Paint" signs shall be prominently
displayed and protective barriers shall be provided where necessary.
All paints shall be prepared and applied in accordance with the manufacturers'
recommendations.
In necessary, all galvanized metal surfaces shall be properly etch-primed to ensure correct
adhesion of the paint to the surface. Materials for etch-priming shall be as recommended by
the paint manufacturers. Subsequent painting of galvanized surfaces shall comply with this
Specification.
6.10
Vibration Isolation
General
Description
This Section specifies the factory assembled vibration isolation equipment which shall form
part of the Works as shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall install all mechanical plant and services in accordance with the methods
of installation and precautions stated herein, and such additional precautions as may be
Page 174
PARKCITY

necessary to ensure that the operation of the plant does not result in vibration amplitudes
beyond the specified limits.
The Contractor shall examine all drawings and specifications including architectural and
structural before commencing any work on the project and shall immediately bring to the
Engineers attention any characteristics or properties of the building or any factors which in
his opinion would jeopardize or nullify the attainment of the specified requirements for
vibration control.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective action which may be necessary either
during construction or after completion of the Works to achieve all specified requirements in
terms of vibration control.
Manufacture
All vibration equipment shall be supplied by manufacturers experienced in the design and
construction of similar equipment and who have made equipment and materials for similar
duties for at least five years.
All materials and equipment for the vibration isolation of any system within this project shall
be wholly imported. However, locally assembled vibration isolators using imported materials
shall be acceptable, providing they fully meet the Engineer's requirements and are accepted
in writing prior to ordering.
Vibration isolation equipment shall be manufactured by Mason, Unison, Kinetic or approved
equal.
Submissions
The information listed in this Clause must be provided for each unit at the times stated.
Form of Tender.
Soon after being notified of the Employer's intent to award the Contract and prior to ordering
the equipment, the Contractor shall furnish the following information for each system to the
Engineer for acceptance.
-
manufacturer's shop drawings;

complete manufacturer's printed catalogues;
physical dimensions;
mounting and fixing details;
complete materials specification;
vibration isolation efficiency and static deflection under the rated loads; and
certified list of recommended spare parts.
Manufacturer's shop drawings for vibration isolators shall clearly indicate the construction and
assembly of all components.
Mounting and fixing details for the vibration isolators shall include details and dimensions of
all equipment mountings, weight distribution, fixing bolts and any special builder's work
requirements.
Selection
All vibration isolation equipment shall be suitable for the particular service.
All Vibration isolation equipment shall be selected to prevent all noticeable vibration
throughout the building.
Page 175
PARKCITY

All isolation devices shall be selected for uniform static deflection according to distribution of
weight.
The vibration isolation system shall be guaranteed to have the deflection necessary to give a
total transmissibility of not more than 5%.
Where the equipment incorporates rotating components the mountings shall be selected to
provide adequate isolation of vibration at the lowest operating speed.
However, the Contractor shall be responsible for selecting vibration isolators with adequate
efficiency and static deflection. The floor construction, floor space, the speed and motor
rating of the rotating machines, etc., shall be taken into consideration especially when the
machines are mounted on the roof or upper floors.
Equipment
Isolators Spring
The following summarizes the type and nature of the noise and vibration control techniques
and equipment to be used in the isolation of various mechanical equipment.
Unless specified otherwise, spring type isolator shall be unhoused, free-standing laterally
stable with levelling bolts rigidly bolted to inertia blocks/base frames. Mounts for outdoor use
shall be hot-dipped galvanized or epoxy painted.
In general, diameter shall be compatible with compressed height and shall not be less tan 0.8
of compressed height at rated load, and horizontal spring stiffness shall be approximately
equal to vertical stiffeners.
All springs including those in spring hangers shall be designed to have equal constants in
horizontal and vertical planes, to withstand solid compression without being over stressed.
Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of rated deflection, and
in this condition, shall not exceed elastic limit of spring.
All springs shall be mounted with adequate clearance from brackets and shall be clearly in
view for critical inspection.
Where restrained mounts are specified, a housing shall be used that included vertical limit
stops. A minimum clearance of 10mm shall be maintained around the restraining bolts and
between the housing and spring so as not to interfere with spring action. Limit stops shall be
out of contact during normal operations. Mounts used outdoors shall be hot dipped
galvanized.
All steel springs shall be installed in series with two layers of neoprene ribbed or waffle
pattern pads (min. 8mm thickness) as described below.
The spring shall be selected to support the calculated loads with the minimum spring
deflections as specified without being compressed solid, or bridged out, or exceeding the
manufacturer's maximum rated loads under any operating condition. In the selection of the
springs, this Contractor shall also take into account the weight distribution of the equipment
under normal operating conditions, weight of unsupported pipes/ducts, and any large dynamic
forces due to fluid movement, torque reaction and starting/stopping. The Contractor shall
show, on the shop drawings submitted, the make and model number of the isolators selected
and their individual calculated loads.
Rubber and Neoprene Mounting
Page 176
PARKCITY

Rubber-in-shear isolators shall be housed and provided with adequate facilities for bolting.
Rubber shall be hardness of 35 durometer with an area ratio of 0.5 and shall be selected to
deflected by a maximum of 20% of its thickness.
Neoprene mountings shall be capable of double deflection and shall have a minimum static
deflection of 9mm. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene covered to avoid corrosion and shall
have friction pads both top and bottom so that they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes
shall however be provided, where necessary, to compensate for overhang.
Rubber-steel-rubber isolating pads, where shown on the Drawings, shall consist of 6mm steel
plates cold bonded between 12mm rubber pads.
Inertia Blocks
Concrete inertia blocks shall be installed where shown on the Drawings and Schedules, or
where detailed in this Specification. For all concrete inertia blocks, the isolation manufacturer
shall supply structural steel frames, equipped with reinforcing rods, mounting templates,
supporting legs and steel spring isolators.
The mechanical equipment shall be bolted directly on to the integral concrete inertia blocks.
All concrete referred to in this Specification should have a density of at least 2,240 kg/m to
2,400 kg/m (140 lb/ft to 150 lb/ft).
In general, the length and width of the inertia block should be at least 50% greater than the
length and width of the supporting equipment, except where otherwise specified.
The weight of the inertia block, generally determined by thickness which is in turn dependent
on the motor size as follows:-
Motor Size
Thickness of Block
Up to 7.5 kW
150mm
11 kW to 23 kW
200mm
26 kW to 63 kW
250mm
Over 63 kW
300mm
In no case shall be weight of the inertia block be less than twice the operating weight of the
equipment mounted on it.
Full dimensions of concrete inertia blocks shall extend 150mm beyond the equipment base.
The base shall consist of a concrete slab cast into a welded steel base frame assembly.
Frames shall be welded steel channels, of minimum 150mm thickness or the same thickness
as the inertia block and shall be reinforced with welded-in 12mm steel reinforcing rods or
angles at 150mm centre each way. Anchor bolts shall be fixed into position, and housed in
steel bolt sleeves to allow minor bolt location adjustments, or alternatively, pockets shall be
cast into inertia block to permit the later insertion of anchor bolts. A suitable base former of
minimum 10mm plywood or equivalent shall be included for forming the slab. Steel channel
isolator brackets shall be welded directly to channel frames, and suitably located to
accommodate the height of the deflected springs and inertia block clearance with plinth.
There shall be adequate clearance (minimum 20mm) all round the springs to assure that
there is no contact between any spring and any part of the mounted assembly for any
possible alignment or position of the installed inertia block. The clearance between inertia
blocks and floor/plinth shall be at least 75mm.
Page 177
PARKCITY

The Contractor shall ensure that all pumps are mounted at least 30mm clear of the inertia
base/floor to allow the base plate to the shimmed true and level. The base shall then be
grouted into position using mortar (1:2 mixed) or an approved epoxy grout.
Bases shall be generally rectangular in shape, for all equipment. Pump bases for split case
pumps shall include supports for suction and discharge base elbows.
Hangers
Hangers shall consist of one of four types as detailed below. They shall have box type
housings designed to prevent falling of equipment.
Type 1 hangers shall contain a steel spring and an 8mm deflection neoprene element in
series. The neoprene element shall be moulded with a rod isolation bushing that passes
through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large
neutralizing the effect of the spring. Springs shall have a minimum travel to solid, equal to
150% of the rate deflection.
Type 2 hangers shall contain a steel spring located in a neoprene cup manufactured with a
grommet. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to properly distribute the load on the
neoprene and prevent its extrusion. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall
be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc before contacting the hole
and neutralizing the effect of the spring. Springs shall have a minimum travel to solid, equal
to 150% of the rated deflection. Hangers shall be provided with an eye bolt on the spring end
and provision to attach the housing to the flat iron duct straps.
Type 3 hangers shall contain an 8mm deflection neoprene element. The neoprene element
shall be mounted with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box.
contacting the hole and neutralizing the effect of the element.

Type 4 hangers shall consist of a rubber-in-shear insert only.
Flexible Connector
Ducted fan inlets and outlets shall be connected to the ductwork with flexible connectors.
Connectors shall be of sufficient length and flexibility to eliminate vibration transmission or the
short circuiting of the effectiveness of the vibration isolation. They shall be made of a material
having a sound reduction index equal to that of the ductwork and shall be non-flammable.
All pumps and piped equipment inlets and outlets shall be connected to the pipework with
flexible connectors. Connectors shall be of sufficient length and flexibility to eliminate
vibration transmission or the short circuiting of the effectiveness of the vibration isolation.
They shall be made of material having a sound reduction index equal to that of the ductwork
and shall be non-flammable material.
Pipework vibration compensators shall be manufactured from neoprene rubber; reinforced
with rayon and suitable for a maximum working pressure of 1,600 kPa at ambient
temperature. The units shall have either integral flanges or be supplied with the appropriate
backing flanges.
Neoprene Pads
Ribbed or waffle pattern neoprene pads are to be used where specified. They shall be
between 8mm and 9.50mm thick 40 durometer pads.
Page 178
PARKCITY

Pads areas will be selected so as to avoid resonance. The resonant frequency of the
assembly shall not lie between 2/3 and 4/3 of the forcing frequency. The pads shall normally
deflect by at least 3mm when installed. Pads should be loaded within the manufacturers
recommended loading range.
Where two or more layers of neoprene pads are used, individual layers shall be separated by
1mm of steel shim.
Equipment Mounting
The Contractor shall install all equipment in accordance with correct engineering practice so
that the equipment shall be operating in balance and aligned conditions and conform to
vibration severity criteria recommended by ISO 2372-1974, as indicated in the Table A. All
machines shall have a vibration severity criteria of grade B quality.
Page 179
PARKCITY

Table A - Vibration Severity Ranges and Examples

Example of Quality Judgement of Some
Class of Machines
Range of Vibration Severity

Range
rms Velocity v
mm/s at Range Limits
0.28
0.45
0.71
1.12
1.80
Class
I
Class
II
Class
III
Class
IV
0.28
0.45
A
A
0.71
1.12
1.80
2.80
2.80
4.50
4.50
7.10
7.10
11.20
11.20
18.00
18.00
28.00
28.00
45.00
45.00
A
B
B
C
B
C
C
D
D
71.00
Vibration Severity Ranges and Examples

(Cont'd)
Pumps (below 75 KW)
Class III
Pumps (above 75 KW)
Class IV
Fans (below 10 KW)
Class III
Fans (above 10 KW)
Class IV
Reciprocating Air
Compressor (below 20 KW)
Class IV
Reciprocating Air
Compressor (above 20 KW)
Class V
Rotary Air Compressor
Class IV
Reciprocating Refrigerant
Compressor (below 20 KW)
Class IV
Reciprocating Refrigerant
Compressor (above 20 KW)
Class V
Page 180
PARKCITY

Motors (below 15 KW)
Class I
Motors (above 15 KW)
Class II
Vibration Isolator Selection

Selection of vibration isolator shall vary and follow the criticality of adjacent spaces, and the
running speed of the equipment. The selection guide is given in Table B.
Table B - Isolator Types
A
Spring isolators complete with double layer of 12mm thick neoprene

friction pads. Pads to be separated with 1/6mm steel shims.
Restraint spring isolators complete with double layer of 12mm thick

neoprene friction pads. Pads to be separated with 1.6mm steel shims.
Spring and neoprene in series hanger as per specification details.
Double deflection pads.
Pipework
All pipework hangers from rotating mechanical equipment within plantrooms shall be isolated
using springs in series with neoprene type pads.
All pipe penetrations through wall, floors and ceiling shall be isolated from direct contact with
the structure, with a sleeve filled with fibreglass/rockwool and caulked with a non-setting noncombustible resilient compound on both sides of the penetration.
Ductwork
All ductwork shall be rigidly constructed and braced to prevent drumming due to air flow.
All internal lining to ducts shall be as set out in the appropriate section of this Specification.
Where the material is faced in metal, it shall be 0.6mm galvanized steel perforated sheet of
minimum 30% open area.
All air duct hangers from rotating machinery within plantrooms shall be isolated using
neoprene pad isolators.
For rotating machinery installed outside the plantroom, the first three hangers from the
equipment shall be isolated using neoprene pad type isolators.
Installation
General
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the following principal precautions which shall be taken
in order to ensure that the minimum noise and vibration emanates from the plant installed
under this Contract.
All rotating machinery shall be accurately balanced, statically and dynamically. Centrifugal
fans and pumps shall be mounted on vibration absorbing mountings as detailed in this
Specification.
All connections to rotating machinery or assemblies containing rotating machinery shall be
rendered flexible, such as flexible connections in ductwork fans and air handling units.
Page 181
PARKCITY

All duct interiors, registers and grilles shall be free from raw edges of metal and sharp screw
ends projecting into the air stream.
No fan shall have a speed which is greater than specified.
All equipment, piping, etc., shall be mounted on/or suspended from accepted foundations and
supports, as detailed in this Specification, or as shown on the Drawings.
All floor-mounted equipment shall be erected on 100mm high (minimum) concrete pads over
the complete floor area of the equipment unless specified to the contrary.
Mounting sizes shall be determined by the mounting manufacturer and the mountings shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Mounting systems exposed to corrosive environments shall be protected against corrosion.
Where vibration isolators are used for outdoor equipment, they shall be corrosion resistant
and all the fixing bolts and nuts shall be cadmium plated or protected with other corrosion
resistant finishes.
All mountings shall be accurately adjusted to ensure proper levelling.
Fans
Unless otherwise stated, fan and silencer assemblies shall be supported as whole
assemblies. The flexible duct connection shall be made at the point where the ductwork is
connected to the silencer and not at the fan silencer interface.
Centrifugal fans and motors shall be mounted on integral steel fan and motor bases as shown
on the Drawings.
Mountings shall be spring in series with neoprene with the efficiency at 98%.
Unless otherwise stated, axial fan and silencer assemblies shall be supplied as whole
assemblies, by rubber-in-shear mountings. The flexible duct connection shall be made at the
point where the ductwork is connected to the building structure and not at the fan silencer
interface.
Ceiling hung axial fans shall be mounted upon a steel spring and an 8mm deflection
neoprene element in series.
Piping
Piping connected to mechanical equipment shall be isolated from the building structure
throughout its run.
In the plantroom, the first three hangers on the water lines from all pumps, chilling equipment
shall be supported on Type 1 hangers, with a static deflection equal to that of the associated
equipment.
Remainder of the hanger throughout each system shall be Type 2. Where piping passes
through equipment room walls, floor or ceilings, acoustical wall seals shall be employed. The
pipe shall be adequately supported on either side of these connections to keep the wall from
carrying the piping weight.
Flexible connections shall be installed in piping where shown on the Drawings and as detailed
in this Specification. They shall be installed parallel and horizontally to the shaft of the
operating equipment wherever possible. Where connections are made to pumps, they shall
be full line size.
Page 182
PARKCITY

Flexible connections shall be of the metal reinforced hose type with flanged ends, suitable for
the service maximum operating temperature and pressure conditions. All flexible connections
shall be provided with isolated tension members and other fittings as necessary to prevent
excessive elongation and springing of pipes during assembly.
Flexible connections shall be installed so that their axes are parallel to the axis of rotation of
the equipment to which they are connected. Connecting pipes shall be anchored adjacent to
all flexible connections.
Efficiency of spring hangers for piping shall be 95%.
Ducts
Flexible connections shall be furnished and installed between fan casing and ductwork. All
low and high pressure ducts shall be supported on Type 2 hangers for a distance of 9m from
the fan.
Levelling and Adjustment
All mountings shall be accurately adjusted to ensure proper levelling.
Finishes
Where vibration isolators are used for outdoor equipment, they shall be corrosion resistant
and all the fixing bolts and nuts shall be cadmium plated or protected with other corrosion
resistant finishes.
Identification
All vibration isolators shall bear the manufacturer's nameplate giving manufacturer's name,
serial and model number and date of manufacturer.
Testing
On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall carry out vibration measurement on all
moving equipment and submit their results to the Engineer.
Should the tests show that noise or vibration is in excess of that specified conditions, or that
balancing of equipment is incorrect, or that vibration transmission through mountings,
hangers, etc., is excessive, the Contractor shall correct the installation at his own cost.
Further tests shall then be carried out at the Contractor's cost to show that the noise and
vibration levels had been reduced to the limit specified.
Sound level reading shall be taken at times when the building is unoccupied or when activities
in the surrounding areas and background noise level in areas tested are at a minimum and
relatively free from sudden changes. Reading shall be taken with no other equipment
operating and with all plant, capable of transmitting sound to the space tested in operation.
All apparatus used for vibration measurements shall be provided by the Contractor and
6.11
Acoustic Control
General
Description
Page 183
PARKCITY

This Section specifies the factory assembled sound attenuators, acoustic lining, acoustic
enclosure, acoustic louvre etc. including adequate support structure and finish which shall
form part of the Works as shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall install all mechanical plant and services in accordance with the methods
of installation and precautions stated herein, and such additional precautions as may be
necessary to ensure that the operation of the plant does not result in noise levels beyond the
specified limits.
The Contractor shall examine all drawings and specifications including architectural and
structural before commencing any work on the project and shall immediately bring to the
Engineers attention any characteristics or properties of the building or any factors which in
his opinion would jeopardize or nullify the attainment of the design objectives.
The Contractor shall guarantee that the complete plant and installation when operated within
the design criteria shall acoustically perform to the noise criteria ratings specified in this
Section.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective action which may be necessary either
during construction or after completion of the Works to achieve all design objectives.
Manufacture
All sound attenuation equipment and materials shall be supplied by manufacturers
experienced in the design and construction of similar equipment and who have made
equipment and materials for similar duties for at least five years.
All materials and equipment for the acoustical treatment of any systems within this project
shall be wholly imported. However, locally assembled sound attenuator using imported
materials may be acceptable providing they fully meet the Contractor's requirements.
Submissions
The information listed in this Clause must be provided for each attenuator at the times stated.
Form of Tender.
Soon after being notified of the Employer's intent to award the Contract and prior to ordering
the equipment, the Contractor shall furnish the following information for each attenuation
system to the Engineer for acceptance.
-
manufacturer's shop drawings;

complete manufacturer's printed catalogues;
physical dimensions and operating weights;
ductwork connection details;
mounting and fixing details;
complete materials specification;
acoustic calculations; and
acoustic performance data over the entire noise spectrum.
Manufacturer's shop drawings for sound attenuators shall clearly indicate the construction
and assembly of all components.
Mounting and fixing details for sound attenuators shall include details and dimensions of all
ductwork and equipment connections, vibration isolation, fixing bolts, and any special
builder's work requirements.
Page 184
PARKCITY

Mounting and fixing details for duct and acoustic enclosure shall clearly indicate methods of
fixing, support channels, type of adhesives used, protective coatings, etc.
System performance data shall include dynamic insertion loss (DIL) data for each sound
attenuator operating under design conditions and the absorption coefficients and reduction
indices for all linings and insulation.
Selection
The Contractor shall select all sound attenuators, linings and insulation suitable for the
scheduled duties of the air systems of which they form a part.
Where sound attenuators are selected for outdoor operation, then these shall be completely
weatherproofed and treated against corrosion.
Where sound attenuators are made up from numbers of modules, then wherever possible
throughout the project, modules shall be of equal size an shall be interchangeable.
All sound attenuators shall be selected from the standard range of a single manufacturer. All
plant room and duct linings shall be selected from the standard range of a single
manufacturer though not necessarily the same manufacturer as that for the attenuators.
All sound attenuators/panel/louvre and linings shall be selected by the Contractor to reduce
the noise levels from the Contractor's equipment to maintain the ambient levels and comply
with the labour department noise control requirements.
Design Objectives
The specified noise level limits apply to every position from 1m to 2m from the floor, not closer
than 1.5m from any air outlet, or item of equipment.
Vibration levels criteria shall be subjectively virtually imperceptible with respect to feelable
vibration, for the majority of people, and shall at the same time, not allow reradiated structible
noise levels to exceed approximately NC35 to minimize contribution to airborne noise in the
audible region:
Minus 60 dB re 1G
Minus 55 dB re 1G
2 Hz - 10 Hz
10 Hz - 31.5 Hz
The Contractor shall apply and install comprehensive vibration and acoustic treatment
including silence, duct lining, plant room wall lining, vibration isolators, floating floor etc. to
attain the specified noise design goals.
Where plantrooms are required to be acoustically treated, this is dealt with in the appropriate
section of this Specification.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all penetrations in walls, floors and
ceilings provided for pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., are isolated and sealed around the
penetrations. In all cases, masonry and other structure surrounding the plant shall not be in
direct contact with the equipment.
Equipment
Sound Attenuators, Silencers and Acoustic Louvre
Sound attenuators, silencer and acoustic louvre shall have outer casings of not less than
0.80mm galvanized steel and interior partitions or splitters shall be of not less than 0.60mm
perforated steel galvanized after forming or other finish affording complete protection from
erosion by the air stream.
Page 185
PARKCITY

Construction methods shall generally be in accordance with HVCA Standard DW/144 for high
pressure systems or an accepted equal standard.
Sound attenuators, silencer and acoustic louvre shall be suitable for a working pressure of 1
kPa and unless specifically noted on the equipment schedules, the air flow pressure drop
across each sound attenuator shall not exceed 75 Pa.
Acoustic infill shall be of inorganic glass or mineral fibre which shall be packed behind the
partitions in such a manner as to provide spring and to avoid settling. Infill material shall be
inert, vermin proof, non-hygroscopic, non-flammable and shall not impart any odour to the air
stream.
Where necessary to prevent noise breakout or breaking through the sound attenuators, a
cladding of Durasteel type 3DF2 with 6mm thickness shall be provided.
Duct Linings
Where internal acoustic lining of any air duct is required, then this shall be in the form of rigid
section fibreglass or approved mineral wool material. Lining shall only be used with the
agreement of the Engineer.
The thickness of the lining shall generally be sufficient to provide absorption coefficients as
follows:- (minimum 25mm)
Hertz
Absorption Coefficients
63
.05
125
.10
250
.35
500
.60
1000
.70
2000
.75
4000
.80
8000
.75
The acoustic lining shall be glued to the inside of the duct and held firmly in place by Foster's
glue and shall have metal clips at not more than 300mm centres with supports at 1m
maximum centres and held in position by 75mm edge crimped 24 gauge galvanized corner
angles. Edges shall also be covered with 75mm edge crimped 24 gauge galvanised corner
angles. The insulation shall be completely covered with perforated Sisalation 450 foil or
similar and approved material having a perforation area of at least 20%.
Alternatively, a manufacturer's proprietary brand fixings may be offered subject to the
acceptance of the Engineer.
Duct Cladding
Where ductwork requires to be externally clad to prevent the break-in or break-out of air
borne noise, then the entire duct sections shall be fabricated from "Durasteel".
Promat ductwork shall be fabricated from appropriate thickness of Pragmatic board with
bolted, gasketed flanged connections. All flanges and sealing strips shall be supplied by the
Promat manufacturer and all gaskets shall be of a dense, inert, non-hygroscopic material
which will effectively prevent the transfer of air borne noise.
Page 186
PARKCITY

Acoustic Louvres
The Contractor shall provide acoustic weatherproof louvres where shown on the Drawings or
specified in the Specification.
Weatherproof louvres shall comprise of an anodised aluminium external casing which is a
minimum of 1.6mm thick with pre-drilled holes for fixing to the structure.
The louvre baffles shall be of aerofoil configuration, the external face being minimum
anodised aluminum sheet and the internal face perforated steel sheet galvanised after
perforation. An inert mineral fibre shall be packed between the inner and outer faces and
shall be weather protected by being hermetically sealed in a polyester membrane as for
ductwork attenuators.
The external finish of the louvres shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
A secondary attenuation section of equal depth to the louvre and of galvanized sheet steel
construction shall be fixed to the rear to the louvre by means of a galvanized jointing strip and
separately supported from the soffit. Construction shall be similar to that of ductwork
attenuators.
The louvres shall be installed within the structural opening provided by the builder and fixed
with cadmium plate or stainless steel bolts anchored into the structure. The gap between
louvre and structure shall be packed and finished with a non-setting weatherproof seal.
A galvanized wire mesh guard shall be provided behind each louvre.
The complete installation shall provide the following minimum transmission loss.
Mid-Frequency Octave Band
Transmission
Loss (dB)
63
125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
14
22
27
33
33
30
27
Acoustic Wall/Ceiling Lining

The acoustic lining shall consist of sound-absorbing and insulating material held in place by a
metal facing which is supported by "Z" G.I. furring.
Absorptive material shall be of 50mm thick minimum and 48 kg/m density fibreglass. Fill shall
be incombustible, insert, mildew resistant and verminproof.
Metal facing shall be of 0.5mm galvanized perforated sheet metal.
2.4mm diameter openings spaced on 4.8mm staggered centres.
Perforation shall be
"Z" furring shall be constructed of 1.0mm galvanized metal of size 25mm x 50mm x 25mm or
25mm x 100mm x 25mm depending on the thickness of the insulating material. Installation
shall be horizontally on wall and in one direction on ceiling, at a spacing of no greater than
600mm. Fastener shall be spacing at no loner than 1200mm interval.
Installation
General
Page 187
PARKCITY

All materials including acoustic insulation, adhesives, wire and mesh, sheeting, covering, etc.,
shall be supplied with a reasonable margin for cutting, wastage, etc., and for making good
damage or loss during the entire construction, commissioning and defects liability period.
All materials shall be stored in a suitable and secure manner so as to protect them from
damage or deterioration prior to fixing. Any damages arising from the Contractor's failure to
provide such storage shall be entirely to the Contractor's account.
All insulation, linings, finishes, etc., shall be supplied by skilled workmen and all surfaces to
which acoustic insulation is to be applied shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to any application.
All insulation shall be applied so as to give a smooth, homogeneous and lineable surface. All
rigid sections shall be accurately matched for thickness. Steps and undulations in the
surfaces shall not be accepted. Any sections or slabs having damaged ends or edges will be
rejected.
All insulation shall fit tight to the surfaces to be covered and all slabs and sections shall be
built up close, butting edges being mitred, chamfered or shaped as necessary to eliminate
fibre erosion.
Sound Attenuators, Silencer and Acoustic Louvre
All sound attenuators, silencer and acoustic louvre shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Sound attenuators, silencer and acoustic louvre shall be fitted without restricting the air flow
and where required sheet metal transitions, supports, framework and bases shall be provided.
Acoustic Enclosure
All acoustic enclosure
recommendations.
shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
Acoustic louvres shall be fitted without restricting the air flow and where required sheet metal
transitions, supports, framework and bases shall be provided and installed with the
manufacturer's recommendation.
Finishes
Finishes to factory assembled sound attenuators shall generally be factory applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Any damaged to finishes which may have occurred during transit, storage, installation or
otherwise shall be made good in the manner recommended by the manufacturer and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Generally, galvanized steel cladding or casings need not be painted unless galvanized has
not been carried out after manufacture and cut or damaged metal edges are subject to
corrosion. In this case, painting shall be required.
All other surfaces, including Promat, which do not have factory applied finishes shall be
painted.
Identification
Page 188
PARKCITY

All sound attenuators/acoustic enclosure shall be provided with an identification plate showing
the code number for each unit as indicated on the system schematics. This plate shall be
securely fixed to the casings in a prominent position.
All sound attenuators/acoustic enclosure shall bear the manufacturer's nameplate, giving
manufacturer's name, serial and model number and date of manufacture.
Testing
On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall carry out sound measurement on all
moving equipment and submit their results to the Engineer.
Should the tests show that noise is in excess of that specified levels, the Contractor shall
correct the installation at his own cost. Further tests shall then be carried out at the
Contractor's cost to show that the noise levels had been reduced to the limit specified.
Sound level reading shall be taken at times when the building is unoccupied or when activities
in the surrounding areas and background noise level in areas tested are at a minimum and
relatively free from sudden changes. Reading shall be taken with no other equipment
operating and with all plant, capable of transmitting sound to the space tested in operation.
All apparatus used for sound measurements shall be provided by the Contractor and
Noise levels shall be measured with a sound level meter fitted with an octave band analyzer
and conforming to International Organization for Standardization IEC-179 and IEC-225.
Overall sound levels shall be read on 'A' scale of the meter and octave band sound levels on
an octave band analyzer connected to the meter with its 'C' scale network in use.
6.12
Electrical Work
The standard of electrical wiring work shall comply with PowerGrid Ltd / Power Supply Ltd
and Singapore Standard CP 5 : Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings. The Contractor
shall refer to the Electrical Specification (Section 7) for the standard of electrical wiring.
Electrical supply for these Pumps/Equipment mentioned in Scope of Work and the associated
control shall be obtained from isolators/distribution board (provided by the Electrical
Contractor) inside the relevant Pump/Equipment Room as shown on the drawings.
The Contractor shall supply and install all electrical wiring from the electrical supply
termination points to his pump/equipment, including controls panel, final sub-circuit wiring and
accessories.
The Contractor should coordinate with the Electrical Contractor for exact location of the
isolators/distribution board.
All pump/equipment control panel shall be complete with all detailed and necessary
components and accessories including motor starters, busbar, relays, contactors, meters,
switches, fuses, indicators, alarms, timers, push buttons, etc. and connection to power supply
point.
If in the opinion of the Architect, the standard of electrical wiring in the installation does not
comply with the specified standard, the cost of subsequent rectification shall be fully borne by
the Contractor. If such sub-standard wiring work should affect the timing of the electrical
inspection/testing work by the power supply company, the Architect may instruct that such
rectification work be carried out by another Contractor and such electrical variations shall be
fully borne by the Contractor.
Page 189
PARKCITY

Ambiguities and inadequacies in the electrical supply or demarcation shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor who shall bear the full cost of rectifications to such situations.
Page 190
PARKCITY
7.0
Plumbing & Sanitary
7.1
General

This section sets out the system requirements and standards of workmanship, equipment and
materials of the Plumbing &Sanitary and Gas Installation for this project.
Contractors Q.P. to make all necessary applications and to submit plans or drawings,
endorsed form and certificates to relevant Authority (PUB, City Gas and NEA-CBPU).
Contractors Q.P. to make all necessary application and to submit plans or drawings on
sewerage sump pump system, endorsed form and certificates to PUB (Sewerage
Department).
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for obtaining the Authorities approval of his works
prior to the handing over of the whole sanitary system to the Owner.
The Contractor shall allow arranging with Public Utilities Board (PUB) Water Department for
an incoming water supply including all related charges. A route for the incoming main shall be
established together with a mutually convenient position for the incoming water meter by
liaison between the Contractor and PUB.
Contractors Q.P. to make all necessary application and to submit plans or drawings on
domestic booster pump & tank system, endorsed form and certificates to PUB (Water
Department).
The Contractor shall make all necessary application and arrangements for his work to be
inspected by the PUB Water Department.
The Contractor shall allow arranging with City Gas for an incoming gas supply including all
related charges. A route for the incoming gas main shall be established together with a
mutually convenient position for the incoming gas meter by liaison between the Contractor
and City Gas.
7.2
Underground Drainage System

Installation
Excavation
All excavation shall be carried out as may be necessary for the construction of the works.
Excavation for pipe trenches shall not be less than 600 mm wider than the diameter of the
pipes and the ground under beds shall be carefully graded. Proper necessary shoring,
planking, strutting, or sheet piling strutting shall be constructed and maintained to ensure that
the trench will not collapse.
When excavating trenches in existing carriageways, the paving blocks that have already been
laid or constructed shall be removed by the Contractor and stacked aside and kept separate
from the general trench excavated material for re-use in reinstatement. All existing and/or
constructed ground surfaces disturbed shall be reinstated.
Surplus excavation soil shall be removed from the site.
All excavation shall be kept free from water at all times by pumping or temporary drainage. In
the event of the excavations being made deeper than necessary they shall be filled to the
proper level with lean concrete.
Page 191
PARKCITY

The Contractor shall be completely responsible for the safety of all excavations, trenches,
pits, etc. from collapse and for the safety of any surrounding structures which may become
endangered by the works and he shall ensure that all safety measures necessary shall apply
to any works during any excavations.
The Architect shall have the right to order excavation and construction work to be carried out
in such lengths and in such sections of the works as will, in his opinion, minimise the danger
of such open excavations affecting the stability of any nearby structures or ground. There
shall be no claim for any extra payment on this account.
Trenches shall be left open for the inspection of the Architect and the Local Authority's
inspector and shall not be covered up until the drains have been properly tested and
approved by the Architect or ENV.
Backfilling
All concrete shall be thoroughly set before refilling is commenced. In refilling the excavations,
only selected hard dry material free from lumps exceeding 75 mm in size and from stones
shall be used in the initial refilling and shall be carefully placed next to the permanent work
and well packed and well rammed in layers of 150 mm. The remainder of the excavations
shall be filled in with the best and most suitable portions of the excavated material, in layers of
not more than 300 mm deep each layer shall be thoroughly rammed before the next layer is
placed. Surplus soil shall be piled on top of the filling to the extent of possible subsidence.
All refilled trenches shall be maintained to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Pipeline Setting Out
Excavation for trenches shall be to straight lines and gradients required for the pipes and
beds as specified. The trench bottom shall be of sufficient width to allow adequate working
space for pipe layers and jointers but beyond these requirements, the width must be kept to a
minimum.
Before any work commences, the pipe trench shall be set out.
Concreting Works
Cement shall be of the approved type and comply with BS No. 12. It shall be fresh when
delivered. Cement of different brands shall not be mixed with one another. Sand or fine
aggregate shall be cleaned, graded natural sand. Sand with coagulated lumps and having a
portion of silt exceeding 10% shall be rejected. Course aggregate shall be clean, crushed
stone and shall be free from dust, clay or other deterious materials.
Water shall be that obtained from the supply mains and not from excavation or drains.
Reinforcement used shall be hard drawn steel wire BRC fabric mesh complying with BS 1221
and BS 785 for mild steel rods. BRC mesh and steel bars shall be free from dust or mill
scale.
Concrete beds shall be 150 mm thick and shall have at least 150 mm width at each side of
the external diameter of the pipe barrels when laid. Unless otherwise specified, the concrete
shall be 1:2:4. For pipe to be haunched, the concrete shall be carried up for the full width of
the bed to the level of the horizontal diameter of the pipe and shall be splayed from this level
and carried upwards to meet the pipe barrel tangentially.
All drain lines passing under buildings and driveways are to be surrounded with concrete
which shall be carried up from the bed in a square section with a minimum of 150 mm
thickness over the barrel of the pipes. Traps and gullies shall be properly bedded on and
surround with concrete.
Page 192
PARKCITY

Pipe Gradient
Pipe gradient for all sanitary drain lines and waste pipes shall be as shown on the drawings or
otherwise indicated below:
Pipe Diameter
Recommended Gradient
100 mm
1 in 20 to 1 in 60
150mm
1in 30 to 1 in 90
200/225 mm
1 in 30 to 1 in 90
300 mm and above
1 in 40 to 1 in 250
Pipe Laying
The pipe shall be laid singly with the whole length of the barrel of each pipe on a solid
concrete bed. No pipes shall be joined together before having been laid.
Flexible jointed pipes shall be laid completely embedded in granular material to a thickness of
at least 100 mm all round unless soil conditions and loaders indicate otherwise. Granular
material for bedding shall be of such ranging from 3 mm to 12 mm or of a free running coarse
sand.
Socket shall face up the gradient. The spigot of each pipe shall be well driven home into the
socket of the pipe previously laid and the joint completed as specified and the bore of the pipe
cleared of any obstruction before the next pipe is laid. Care shall be taken that there is no
irregularity in the invert of the joints.
The level of each pipe shall be tested by a straight edge laid in the invert of the pipe
previously laid and in the nearest level peg. If the bottom of the trench has been taken too
low, it shall be made up with concrete or cement mortar or other approved granular material.
Where it is required to shorten any pipe it shall be cut off square and cleanly, and cast iron
and ductile iron pipes or HDPVC shall be cut only with approved pipe-cutting machines. In
the event of any pipe being fractured from any cause whatsoever after having been to all
appearances properly laid, the Contractor in every instance shall replace such defective pipe
to the satisfaction of the Architect.
Where laid in hard core or fill cast iron and ductile iron pipes or HDPVC subjected to a
superimposed load shall be supported from natural ground level throughout their lengths by
walls and hunching. Where laid in hard core or fill and not subjected to a superimposed load,
or where laid above ground, cast iron and ductile iron pipes shall be supported on piers
behind the socket of the pipe and at intervals of not more than 2700 mm.
The soil conditions shall be investigated before laying of pipework. In soft or yielding ground,
piles and a bed or reinforced concrete and embedment of pipework in concrete to a thickness
of at least 150 mm all round shall be provided as necessary.
Pipes of 300 mm/225 mm diameter where shown laid through or under walls, shall be
protected by means of sleeves in such a manner that the weight of the wall shall not bear on
the pipes.
Tumbling Bays and Backdrops

Page 193
PARKCITY

Where required or specified, tumbling bays or backdrops are to be constructed in accordance

with the details of the ENV standard drawings.
When branch drain pipe is connected directly into an inspection chamber more than 1.5 m
deep, then a tumbling bay or backdrop shall be provided.
Special reversed spigot and socket junctions or backdrop junctions shall be used in the
junction between two lines of pipes.
The tumbling bay pipes shall be laid on a reinforced concrete foundation of concrete as
specified and completely encased in concrete. Backdrop pipes shall be completely encased
in 150 mm concrete surround.
Inspection Chambers
The maximum distance between inspection chambers shall be as shown on the drawing and
shall not exceed 50 metres. Inspection chambers shall be of concrete construction. It shall
have minimum internal dimensions of 900 mm in length and 700 mm in width. The size shall
be increased accordingly depending on the number of branch drains to be connected and the
depth of such inspection chambers. Additional Inspection chamber must be provided if the
internal dimensions exceeded 1350mm (length & width).
Only in case where the inspection chamber cannot be constructed in concrete due to site
conditions, it shall be constructed in bricks and be 225 mm thick constructed on cement
mortar beds. Vertical joints shall be completely filled with mortar as the bricks are laid. Joints
shall be flushed cut as the work proceeds.
Inspection chambers shall be rendered internally and externally with cement and sand (1:3) in
two coats to a total thickness of 16 mm, trowelled smooth. On firm ground, the inspection
chamber shall be constructed on a reinforced concrete base at least 150 mm thick and such
base shall extend at least 150 mm beyond the external walls of the inspection chambers.
On soft or yielding ground, the inspection chamber shall be constructed on piles and a base
of reinforced concrete.
The depth of the main channels shall not be less than the diameter of the outgoing pipe.
Main channel inverts for pipes up to and including 225 mm diameter shall be vitrified clay
channels. Main channel inverts for pipes over 225 mm diameter shall be formed in concrete
trowelled smooth.
Branch bends up to and including 150 mm diameter shall be vitrified clay to 3/4 section
curved in the direction of flow and set to deliver over the main channel invert. Branch bends
over 150 mm diameter shall be curved in the direction of flow and shall be formed in concrete
trowelled smooth.
Spaces between branch bends shall be completely filled with concrete and the faces above
the main and branch channel inverts shall be trowelled smooth. Benching shall be formed in
concrete trowelled smooth and shall open towards the main channel at a slope of 1 in 6.
Pipes passing through inspection chamber walls shall be solidly built in and the walls made
watertight throughout.
Precast concrete sections shall be used where the inspection chamber exceeds 2.5 m deep
and is located in soil. Precast inspection chamber ring shall be of proprietary make, 1050 mm
internal diameter and to be installed to details as shown on the drawings.
In general, inspection chambers shall be provided with covers similar to Gatic, and roofed
over with a reinforced concrete slab not less than 150 mm thick and provided with an opening
Page 194
PARKCITY

fitted with an air-tight frame and cover. In areas where architectural floor finishes are
required, , the cover shall incorporate a frame and recess to accommodate the specified l
finishes. Minimum recess shall be 50 mm.
Covers and frames shall be of the types approved by the local Sewerage Department. They
shall be fixed in the positions shown. All frames shall be solidly bedded on cement mortar so
that the covers when in position are fair and even with the adjacent surfaces. Heavy duty
cast iron frames and covers shall be used in every driveway and car park or in area subject to
heavy loading. Medium duty covers shall be used in all other external inspection chamber,
sump, etc.
Recessed pattern covers shall be provided and filled and surfaced with materials to match
surrounds.
One set of lifting keys for each type of manhole cover shall be provided.
Iron steps shall conform to BS 1247. Round bar corner pattern steps shall be used in brick
inspection chambers and shall be built in at 300 mm vertical interval as shown. Iron steps
shall be used in precast concrete sections and unless otherwise directed they shall be
provided and fixed in the concrete inspection chamber components by the Component
Manufacturer before delivery, in accordance with BS 556.
Concrete Sumps
Unless otherwise shown on drawings, concrete sumps shall have minimum internal
dimension of 900 mm in length and 700 mm in width.
Concrete sumps shall be rendered internally and externally smooth with cement and sand
(1:3) minimum 50 mm thick. Concrete screed shall be rendered smooth towards the outlet at
the base of the concrete sump and it shall be constructed on a reinforced concrete base at
least 150 mm thick and such base shall extend at least 150 mm beyond the external walls of
the concrete sump.
Where located in soil, concrete sumps shall be built of 115 mm thick engineering brick
rendered internally and externally smooth with cement mortar. Pipes where built into walls
shall be 25 mm above the base of the sump at inlet point and always flush with the base of
the sump at outlet point. It shall be solidly built in and the walls made watertight throughout.
Concrete sump frames and covers shall be the same as for the Inspection Chamber.
Hydrostatic Test for underground Drain-Lines and Inspection chambers

a)
All sanitary drain-line of 600mm and below in diameter, before being surrounded and
covered, shall be tested by filling with water.
b)
Every inspection chamber shall be subjected to the same water test.
c)
The pressure shall be measured from the highest point of the pipe under test and
shall be 1.5 meter head of water. Pipelines should not be acceptable until they have
withstood the required pressure for 30 minutes without a loss in excess of 1.5 litres fro
100 meters for each 300mm in diameter.
d)
The acceptable rate of water loss for 30 minutes for the following standard pipe
diameters are as follow:
Diameter of pipe
100mm
Acceptable rate of water loss

0.005 litres/metre run
Page 195
PARKCITY
150mm
200mm
300mm
7.3


Internal Sanitary System

General
A complete sanitary and drainage piping system shall be supplied and installed in accordance
with the drawings, the latest requirements of the Sewerage Department, Ministry of
Environment and the requirements described herein.
All materials such as pipes and fittings, floor traps, jointing materials and components used in
the work for sanitary plumbing installation shall be of the type, size, brand, quality and
workmanship approved by the Sewerage Department.
The Licensed Plumber shall be solely responsible for the satisfaction and approval of the
Sewerage Department until acceptance or handing over of the whole drainage system.
Stainless steel (SS 304) drain trays shall be provided to the underside of all sanitary, soil,
waste and vent pipes which are directly above kitchen, dining and any food preparation areas.
Survey and submit as-constructed invert levels, gradient of pipeline, levels at the top of
manholes/inspection chambers and horizontal distances between the manholes/inspection
chambers.
Piping Installation
Pipe Support
All pipework shall be fixed at least 50 mm away from the finished surface of the supporting
structure. All fixing, hangers, holder bats, brackets, etc., shall be of galvanised steel. Vertical
pipes shall be parallel to walls or column lines and shall be straight and plumb. Horizontal
pipes shall be graded in the direction of flow as required. Fixings shall be cast in the building
structure. If this is not practicable they shall be secured to the structure by means of power
driven bolts. Cement grouting or wood fixings shall not be permitted.
Soil waste or vent pipes shall be clamped or fixed at 1.8 m centres split ring or clevis type
hangers and clamps. Where applicable, clamps shall be tight against the pipe collar. Where
it is necessary to avoid sound transmission, a PVC insert shall be provided between the fixing
and the pipe.
Unplasticised PVC pipes not chased into floors or walls shall be fixed with clamps at not
more than 1.8 m centres for vertical runs and 1.2 m centres for horizontal runs; or any other
spacing recommended by the pipe supplier.
The bend at the foot of the discharge stack connecting to the branch drain line shall be a duck
foot bend of large radius and shall be encased in 150 mm thick concrete.
Vent Pipe and Stack
When more than one trap is connected to a discharge pipe or stack, each trap shall be
provided with a vent pipe of not less than 50 mm in diameter.
Each vent pipe shall be constructed upwards individually or be connected to a main vent
stack. The top end of the vent pipe or main vent stack shall either terminate as high as the
Page 196
PARKCITY

discharge stack or connect to the discharge stack at a point not less than 150 mm above the
top of the highest soil sanitary appliance or floor trap.
The lower end of each vent stack shall be connected to the discharge stack at a point not less
than 225 mm and not more than 750 mm below the entry of the lowest connection to the
discharge stack.
The low end of all vertical lines of vent pipes shall be connected full size at not less than 45
degree angle to the horizontal. All offsets shall be at a grade of not less than 45 degree angle
to the horizontal.
Waste pipes need not be vented except where the pipe length exceeds 2 m inclined length
and/or 5.5 m in vertical length provided that there is only one fixture connected to the waste
pipe. Where there is more than one fixture or where the water seal is reduced, a vent pipe
shall be supplied to the fixture or traps.
Termination of Discharge, Stack and Vent Stacks
The top end of each discharge or vent stack shall project not less than 450 mm above the
eaves of a sloping roof or 150 mm above a flat roof without a parapet, or in the case of a flat
roof with a parapet to the height of parapet above the roof. If the roof is used for any purpose
other than as a covering to the building, the discharge or vent stack shall be extended at least
2.5 m above the roof level. Proper lead over-flashing has been completed.
The top end of a discharge or vent stack above the roof shall be at least 3 m away from any
window or opening of adjoining buildings in the horizontal direction.
The top end of a discharge or vent stack above the roof shall be fitted with galvanised wire
dome gratings on to the spigot top-most end of the pipes.
Pipes that protrude through walls, floors or roofs shall be made water-tight And details of such
shall be approved by the Architect.
Cleaning Eyes and Inspection Openings
Inspection and cleaning eyes shall be provided on all soil, waste or soil and waste pipes so as
to provide access for the proper inspection and cleaning of the entire length of the pipe. In all
cases where the vertical stack of soil or soil and waste pipe extends 1.2 m or more above the
ground level, an inspection opening of minimum 450mm by 450mm fitted with a cover shall be
provided near the foot of the stack.
Pipe Gradient
Pipe gradient for all horizontal sanitary plumbing pipings shall be as shown on the drawings or
otherwise as indicated below:
Pipe Diameter
Gradient
32 mm to 80 mm
1:40
100 mm
1:60
150 mm
1:80
200 mm
250 mm and above
1:90
1:120
All vent pipes shall have a minimum gradient of 1:100.

Page 197
PARKCITY

Pipe Size
Pipe sizes for all horizontal sanitary and waste piping shall be as shown on drawings or
otherwise as indicated below:
Connection
Pipe Size
Floor drain to floor drain
75 mm (WC Compartment)
75 mm (Shower)
75 mm (WC Compartment)
75 mm (Shower)
Min100 mm (10 m maximum)
150 mm (30 m maximum)
150 mm (over 30 m)
Floor drain to floor trap

Floor trap to discharge pipe
Traps
All inlets into a discharge pipe or discharge stack shall be properly trapped to prevent the
entry of foul air from the drainage system into the building. Traps for soil sanitary appliances
and floor traps shall have a water seal of not less than 50 mm. Traps with outlets of less than
75 mm diameter shall have a water seal of no less than 75 mm.
All traps shall be accessible and so designed as to facilitate cleaning.
Floor traps shall be cast iron of internal dimensions 150 mm x 75 mm outgoing pipes
complete with an MOE approved 150 mm circular stainless steel grating with hinged cover
and hopper inlet connection. The traps shall be installed at a level to enable to the drainage
system with 75 mm diameter outlet complete with inspection eye. Any riser to a floor trap
shall be of the same size as the opening of the trap and the height of a riser to any floor trap
shall not exceed 600 mm from the top of the grating to the bottom of the trap.
All gulley traps shall be of internal dimensions 150 mm x 100 mm outgoing pipes and shall be
of heavy duty cast iron free from sand holes and cracks and complete with cast iron
removable grating.
Grating and Cover for Floor Trap and Floor Waste
The grating and cover shall be constructed of stainless steel or bronze or to ID/Architects
specification.
The grating and cover shall be of an approved design so as to enable them to be bolted down
to the frame or otherwise secured to deter the unwarranted opening of the grating or cover
and hence the discharge of garbage or other solid waste into the sewerage system.
The grating or cover shall be installed and located such that they blend in with the
surrounding ground levels, do not pose a hazard in causing trip and easily accessible for
maintenance, etc.
Soil & waste pipe cross through room.
In case soil and waste pipe cross through bedroom, living room , dining room, guest room and
family room, sound insulation is required to provide to reduce noise from the sanitary
appliances.
The noise level shall be approved by architect and test results shall be approved by engineer.
Page 198
PARKCITY
7.4

Installation of Sanitary Appliances

General
This section specifies the installation of sanitary appliances (refer to attached sanitary
schedule).
This Contractor shall take delivery from designated stores within the site, unpack, check,
repack, store, install, make all connections to all sanitary appliances including water closets,
urinals, flush valves/auto sensing flush valves, waste, sanitary appliances, plumbing fittings
and the like including test and commission of the complete sanitary system.
After installation, the Contractor shall take every necessary precautions to protect the sanitary
appliances to prevent it from damage until it is handed over to the Employer. The sanitary
appliances are supplied under a separate supply contract.
All necessary connectors, adaptors, support and the like required for the proper installation of
the sanitary appliance shall be provided by this Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide all waste sanitary appliances, constant flow regulators as
required by the PUB (Water Department).
The installation of sanitary appliances and accessories shall be in accordance with the
requirement and/or approval of:
a
b
c
d
Sewerage Department;
Environmental Health Department;
PUB -Water Reclamation (Network) Department; and
Recommended installation procedures of the appliance manufacturer.
For auto-sensing flush valve, the installation of the sensor unit shall be carried out by a PUB
licensed electrician who shall ensure compliance with the relevant regulations and Code of
Practice.
Installation of Appliances
Water Closet
Joints between spigot cast iron pipe and fixture outlet shall be made with yarn and
cement/sand mortar not stronger than 1:2 and not weaker than 1:3. Joints between
unplasticised PVC pipes and fixture shall be made with approved rubber seal ring joints. The
water closets shall be firmly bedded in cement mortar. Every pedestal water closet pan shall
be secured to the floor using stainless steel or non ferrous bolts/nuts.
The joining of the outlet of the water closet pan to the branch drain-line or discharge pipe shall
be made by an approved type pan collar.
Wall hung water closet pan shall be fixed with stainless steel bolts and nuts or other approved
means to an independent support frame. The support frame shall be either fully or partially
fixed within the wall. Fixing details must be submitted to the Architect for review prior to
installation.
Every water closets shall be operated by flush valve or auto sensing flush valve.
Urinals
Bowl urinals shall be firmly fixed to walls by means of brackets which are built or screwed into
the wall. A group of bowl urinals connected in series shall be connected directly to a branch
Page 199
PARKCITY

drain line or stack by means of a trap 75 mm in diameter above ground level and 100 mm in
diameter at ground level.
Slab urinals shall be firmly bedded in cement mortar. The channel to urinals shall have a fall
of not less than 1 in 100 towards the discharge outlet. Each urinal shall connect directly to a
branch drain line or stack by means of a trap 100 mm in diameter at ground floor level and 75
mm in diameter above ground floor level. The outlet to urinals shall be fitted with a chrome
plated gunmetal or brass dome-shaped removable grating.
Every urinal shall be operated by an auto-sensing flush valve.
Flushing Cisterns
Flushing cisterns shall be firmly fixed to the wall by means of either bolts and nuts or
brackets. The flush pipe connecting a flushing cistern to a water closet shall be fixed as
straight as possible and shall not be less than 32 mm in diameter if the bottom of the cistern is
fixed 1.5 mm or more above the top of the water closet. The flush pipe shall not be less than
38 mm in diameter if the bottom of the cistern is fixed less than 1.5 mm above the top of the
water closet. Flush pipes from the cistern to a squat pan shall be securely fixed to the wall.
The Contractor shall apply a 12 mm chromium plated stop cock for each flushing cistern.
Bidets
Every pedestal bidet shall be secured to the floor using stainless steel or non-ferrous fixing
screws. Provision shall be made in the floor to receive the fixing screws.
Wall hung bidet pan shall be fixed with stainless steel bolts and nuts or other approved means
to an underground support frame such that no strain is transmitted to the bidet pan
connection or any other part of the plumbing system.
The support frame, depending on the design, shall be either fully or partially fixed within the
structure of the building.
Every bidet shall be provided with a spray nozzle fixed above the spill over level of the bidet
pan.
Every bidet shall be provided with a fitting trap of at least 40 mm in diameter. The connection
by means of a bidet trap of at least 75 mm in diameter shall be made directly to an individual
branch drain line to an inspection chamber on the 1st Storey level or to a discharge pipe on
the upper story level.
Water for flushing of the bidet shall not be supplied directly from the water main unless
through an approved vacuum breaker and check valve or other approved means for
preventing back flow or back siphonage and controlled by an approved stop-valve.
Auto Sensing Flush Valves
Each sensor unit shall only operate one flushing unit for a sanitary appliances. The sensor
unit when installed should not be affected by the operation of adjacent sensor unit.
The sensor unit's stable sensing areas shall be adjusted for an activating distance that is as
follows:
a
600 mm for a urinal; and
900 mm for a water closet.
Page 200
PARKCITY

The sensor unit and wiring connections shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendation including electrical wiring work commencing at the isolator which is provided
by others.
The Contractor shall execute all necessary wiring connection works.
Waste Sanitary Appliances
Every waste sanitary appliance which is suspended shall be fixed to the wall by means of
brackets which are built or screwed into the wall. Every floor mounted waste sanitary
appliance shall be provided with pedestal, foot and leg. Any sink and wash basin may be
mounted on a cabinet or mounted on wall. Refer to architectural drawings for detail.
All fixing screws shall be corrosion resistant.
All joints between any waste sanitary appliance and the abutting wall shall be water-tight.
Every waste sanitary appliance shall be provided with a waste filling trap for connection to the
waste pipe. The waste pipe shall connect to the floor trap above the water seal of the trap.
The waste pipe for waste sanitary appliance fixed on first storey level outside the building may
be connected directly to a gully trap above the water seal of the trap.
Where a group of 3 or more wash basins are connected in series, loop venting is required.
However, the loop venting shall be terminated separately to the atmosphere. The minimum
diameter of loop venting pipe shall be 25 mm. The minimum internal diameter of waste pipe
for each type of waste sanitary appliance and the maximum number of waste sanitary
appliances allowed a common waste pipe for waste sanitary appliances connected in series
shall be as follows:
Minimum Internal Diameter of Waste Pipe

For each type of Waste Sanitary Appliance
Type of Appliance
Wash Basin
Minimum Internal
Diameter
Of Waste Pipe in mm
32
Sink (Single or double bowl)

Laboratory
40
40
Long bath/Shower Tray
50
Foot Bath
50
Wash Tub
50
Wash Trough/Custom-Made Sink

Drinking Fountain
50
50
Minimum Number of Waste Sanitary Appliance Allowed on each

Diameter of Common Waste Pipe for Waste Sanitary Appliances Connected in
Series
Type of Waste
Sanitary Appliances
Connected in Series
Maximum No. of Waste Sanitary

Appliances Allowed on Common
Waste Pipe
Page 201
PARKCITY

Minimum Internal Diameter of Common

Waste Pipe in mm
Wash Basin
Sink (Single or double bowl)
Laboratory Sink
Drinking Fountain
Wash Trough/Custom-Made Sink
Wash Tub
50
3
6
6
12
6
2
75
10
2
2
40
2
6
Plumbing Fittings
Fix all plumbing fittings such as water faucets, shower fittings, mixing valves, etc., in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and connect to piping system. The Contractor
shall supply all fixing materials such as screws, rawl plugs, unions, collars, compression
fittings, etc., as required.
7.5
Cold Water and Hot Water Supply

General
This section of the specification covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning
and maintenance of the cold water supply system and shall generally consist of the following:
a)
Complete water reticulation system for the building inclusive of all pipework,
fittings, pumps and tanks, final connections to all fitting, etc.
b)
Packaged domestic booster systems complete with VSD driver, control panel.
c)
Potable Water Storage Tank and all necessary accessories.
The Water Service Installation shall be executed in accordance with the Public Utilities Board
(Water Supply) Regulations of the Public Utilities Act as well as the Code of Practice for Water
Services, CP 48 latest edition.
Only PUB approved fittings, appliances and pipes shall be used for the water service installation.
On delivery of each batch of water fittings and pipes to the Site, the Contractor shall hand over to
the ENGINEER a copy of each document showing its origin, proof of manufacturer and approval
from PUB for its use.
A licensed water service plumber shall be employed to carry out the installation. The particulars
and job reference of the licensed plumber shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. The
ENGINEER reserve the right to appointment his own licensed plumber if the Contractors
licensed plumber is found to be unsuitable for the necessary installation work.
A complete cold water supply system shall be supplied and installed in accordance with the
drawings, CP 48, the latest requirements of the local water supply rules and the requirements
described hereunder.
The Contractor shall make all necessary application and arrangements for his work to be
inspected by the PUB Water Department.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for obtaining the Authorities approval of his works
prior to the handing over of the whole water reticulation system to the Owner.
Water Service Connection
Page 202
PARKCITY

The Licensed Plumber shall apply for and make all necessary arrangements/ inspections with
the PUB Water Department for the installation of bulk meter.
Piping Materials
All piping materials shall be of type/brands found in the list of approved fittings and
pipes for water service installation.
Refer to Section 3 for Schedule of Pipework materials for water supply piping.
All exposed hook-up lengths to fixtures shall be heavily nickel plated or bright
chromium plated and be completed with matching plated brass screws.
Piping Joints
Pipe joints for the various pipe shall be as follows:
(i)
Ductile Iron Piping
Flanged joints or rubber ring
(ii)
Steel Piping
Screwed or flanged joints.
(iii)
Copper Piping
Brazed or silver soldered or flanged joints.

However for pipe less than 50 mm diameter,
screwed compression joints shall be used.
(iv)
PPR piping
DIN 16962 (for pipe joint Assemblies and

Fittings for PPR pressure pipes)
Pipe Supports
(a)
Pipe work and fittings shall be supported by hangers or brackets so as to permit free
expansion and contraction. Risers shall be supported at each floor with galvanized
steel clamps. Where necessary to permit free movement for common group they
shall be supported from a common hanger bar fabricated from galvanized steel
sections.
(b)
Care shall be taken to isolate copper pipes from steel brackets with timber sleeving or
other approved materials.
(c)
Underground water mains shall be supported on continuous concrete benching and

thrust blocks.
(d)
Pipe hangers shall be provided at the following maximum spacings:

Pipe Dia
(mm)
Hanger Rod Dia

(mm)
Copper Pipe
Max Spacing
(m)
Steel Pipe
Spacing
(m)
PPR Pipe
Spacing
(m)
Up to 25
1.1
32 to 50
10
2.5
2.7
1.4
80 to 100
12
2.5
2.7
1.9
125 to 150
16
3.6
2.1
200 to 300
19
3.6
5.3
2.4
Page 203
PARKCITY

Testing of Pipe installation

Before any pipework is concealed, it shall be tested for leak to twice its normal working
pressure or 600 kpa, whichever is higher. Should leakages be found, the Contractor shall
immediately remove and replace the defective pipes and the section of pipe to be re-tested as
above.
The Contractor shall notify the Architect three days in advance of any test so that the
Architect can witness the tests if he so wishes.
Sterilisation of Installation
After the installation has been tested and approved, but before putting into use, it shall be
sterilized by Licensed Plumber, according to recommendations of CP 48.
Upon completion of sterilization, water samples shall be taken for bacteriological and
chemical testing by authorised laboratories to substantiate the successful completion of
sterilization process.
Chasing of Pipework
Cold water distribution pipes to fixtures and equipment exposed to view in the bathrooms,
kitchens, and sanitary compartments shall be chased into walls or floors or placed in wall
cavities. The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting all notches, chases, and recesses in
walls and floors and only a diamond cutter shall be used. The maximum size of conduit or
pipe permitted to be concealed in floor slabs shall be 32 mm diameter unless otherwise
approved by the Architect.
Where pipes pass through beams or structural walls, subject to the approval of the Structural
Consulting Engineer, the Contractor shall ensure that sizes and locations of openings
required are formed in when the relevant beams or walls are cast.
Cleaning Out of Pipework
All pipes shall be cleaned out thoroughly after installation and before hydrostatic tests are
carried out. Piping shall be disconnected from tanks, control valves and equipment before
being washed out. The washing out shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Architect
and shall continue until all foreign matter is removed.
Valves
All valves shall be suitable for the working pressure involved but not less than 1 MPa. Valves
up to 50 mm diameter shall have bronze bodies and trim with screwed connections. Valves
greater than 50 mm diameter and above shall have cast iron or cast steel bodies, bronze trim
with flanged connections. All valves shall be approved and stamped by the Water
Department, Public Utilities Board.
(i)
Stop Valves
Stop valves shall be gate valves with non-rising stems, renewable seats and cast iron
or plastic handwheel.
(ii)
Stop Cocks
Stop cocks shall be chromium plated with renewable rubber disc seats to British
Standard. A stop cock shall be provided to each water outlet point like basin, water
cistern, bath tub and sinks.
(iii)
Strainers
Page 204
PARKCITY

Strainers shall be Y-type with removable stainless steel basket.

(iv)
Sluice Valve
Sluice valve shall be of heavy water works type complying with BS 3464 and be of
the rising spindle type.
(v)
Check Valve
Check valve up to 50 mm shall comply with BS 1953 Class 125 or BS 5154 (M).
Check valve above 50 mm shall comply with BS 4090 Class 125 or BS 5153 (M).
Schedule of Valves
The Contractor shall supply and install all valves to all fixtures as specified below:
(a)
WC Pan
25 mm ball valve, similar to Ballofix, with suitable 25 mm union piece for connection
to flush valve or 12 mm ball valve and 12 mm union piece for connection to cistern.
(b)
Urinal
19 mm ball valve as above to flush valve or 12 mm ball valve to cistern.
(c)
Basin/sink
Ball valve of size to suit distribution pipe for multi-basin arrangement and 12 mm ball
valve for single-basin arrangement.
(d)
Kitchen
Ball valve of size to suit each branch pipe.
Wares & Fittings

(a)
WC Pan
25 mm approved check valve to BS 5154:1974 and 32 mm approved stop valve to
SS 75:1978.
(b)
Urinal
25 mm approved stop valve SS 75:1978.
(c)
Basin/Sink
Ball valve of size to suit distribution pipe multi-basin arrangement and 12 mm ball
valve for single-basin arrangement.
Taps
(a)
All taps for the garden, planters and in each plant rooms shall be of the brass type.
(b)
Unless otherwise mentioned, all taps for the sinks in kitchens, utilities rooms shall be
of chrome plated type.
Electric Water Heater

Page 205
PARKCITY

(b)
Storage type of electric water heater complete with storage tank, 3 kW heating
element, insulation, automatic temperature control, over temperature protector etc.
shall be provided.
(c)
The storage tank shall be fabricated from Stainless Steelrust free suitable for its
usage and conditions. The tank surface shall be coated internally with a layer of
porcelain to give a tough, smooth, glasslike lining. The tank shall be designed to
withstand a minimum working pressure of 10 bars, and with warranty of 10-year leak
proof. Any leakage found shall be of one to one replacement within 10-years warranty
period.
(d)
Sufficient thickness of CFC free Polyurethane Foam shall be provided to maintain

temperature of stored water to conserve energy.
(e)
Automatic temperature control shall consist of an adjustable type temperature setting

which automatically keeps the water temperature at preset level.
(f)
The over temperature protector shall automatically cut off the power supply in the
event that desire preset temperature is exceeded.
Hot Water Piping Installation

(a)
All hot water pipework, except where chased in walls, shall be insulated with 25 mm
thick fibre glass sectional pipe insulation.
(b)
The insulation material shall have a density of 80 kg/m 3 and a maximum thermal
conductivity of 0.03 W/m degree K at 20 degree C mean temperature.
(c)
The insulation material shall be sheathed with aluminium foil. In locations exposed
to weather, the insulation materials shall be covered with aluminium sheathing.
(d)
If PPR pipe is in used, no insulation required but the pipe should be fit to be used for
Hot water supply.
Testing of Pipelines
All cold and hot water supply pipework shall be subjected to a hydrostatically test pressure of
12 bar or 1 times the maximum working pressure, whichever is greater. The test period
shall be two (2) hours during which no leakage is allowed.
Pumps and Motors
Contractor shall supply and install water pump sets of capacities and types as shown in the
drawings and in accordance with the following specification.
For each pumping installation the system shall be complete and include all necessary brackets,
supports, flexible joints, valves, pipe fittings, starter and controls, pressure gauges, float switches,
level controls, etc. for the proper functioning and control of the system.
All pumps shall be approved manufacture of the centrifugal, single stage volute type.
Each pump shall be capable of delivering not less than the quantity of water indicated on
drawings and against the design head.
o
All pumps shall be capable of handling water in the range of 3 to 50 continuous operation.
The pumps shall be complete non-overloading for any point on its head flow characteristic curve.
Page 206
PARKCITY

The pump selection shall be such that the impeller diameter fitted for the design duty is not
greater than 90% of the maximum impeller diameter which can be fitted and the duty point
efficiency shall be within 5% of the maximum efficiency.
The System Head required shall be determined by the Contractor based on the pipe sizes as
shown in the drawing and the numbers of types of fittings to be supplied and installed. It shall be
the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure the pump head selected is adequate for the
efficient function of the system. Detailed calculations of pump heads shall be submitted to the
ENGINEER for approval prior to the purchase of the pumps.
The pump speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm. In the event that the recourse has to be made to
pumping equipment operating on speed above 1500 rpm, approval of the ENGINEER shall be
sought before hand.
The pump casing and back-plate shall be constructed of cast iron and fitted with bronze impeller,
stainless steel shaft and approved type mechanical seals.
Casing construction shall be of horizontal split design; however, if of a vertical split construction,
pump's suction and back covers shall be removable, allowing for complete removal of the
rotating element without disturbing the suction and delivering piping of the pump.
The pumps shall be coupled directly to an approved Class 'B' insulation, drip proof, TEFC motor,
suitable for 400 volt, 3- phase, 50 Hz power supply.
Each pump shall be bolted to a steel base and 100mm thick reinforced concrete inertia block.
Spring and ribbed neoprene vibration isolation mounting shall support the inertia block onto a
100 mm thick concrete plinth. The springs shall have a maximum deflection of 25 mm.
Pump flow-head characteristic curves shall be submitted for approval before ordering.
For each pump installation, the following fittings are required as a minimum:
a)
Gate valves at suction and at discharge
b)
Check valve at discharge.
c)
Flexible connections at suction and discharge
d)
Eccentric tapered reducer at suction
e)
Concentric tapered reducer at discharge
f)
Strainer at suction
g)
100 mm diameter pressure gauges complete with stop cock, at suction and discharge.
h)
100 mm diameter flow meters complete with stop cock, at discharge.
Pneumatic Booster System

General
a)
The Contractor shall supply and install package booster unit for the cold water supply, of
capacity and requirements as shown in the drawings.
Page 207
PARKCITY

b)
The package booster unit shall be complete with a pressure gas filled tank, pressure
gauge, suction and discharge piping assembly, complete with test pipes to nearest drain
with necessary valves pressure switches, check valves, isolating valves, flow switch,
strainers, pumps, control panel and mounting channels. The booster unit shall be
designed for parallel/alternate operation.
c)
Any low water level in the water tank shall stop the pump operation. The control wring
shall be provided to indicate the failure of the booster unit and activate the alarm at Local
Motor Control Panel (LMCP)
d)
Pressure Gauges where required shall have a range and calibration suitable for the duty
required with normal operating pressure at the mid-point of the range of the gauge with
percentage error of not more than 1% of mid range. All tappings for pressure gauges
shall be provided with a gauge cock and syphon tubes.
Pressure Tank
a)
Pressure tank shall be constructed of heavy steel and pressure tested to 150 p.s.i. The
surfaces of the steel shall be coated with approved material to ensure 100% corrosion
resistance.
b)
The tank shall be provided with heavy duty butyl diaphragm to SS 375.
c)
An air valve shall be provided for the introduction of compressed air.
d)
The tank shall provide an effective draw-of capacity within cut-in and cut-off pressure as
indicated in drawing.
Pressure Switch
a)
Pressure switch shall be heavy duty with stepless adjustable cut-in/out pressure
adjustments. The pressure range shall be selected to suit the system design (10 p.s.i. 100 p.s.i.).
Compliance with PUB's Regulation

All materials provided and used by the Contractor shall comply with PUB's regulations
and requirements, and approved by PSB. Certificate of approval by PSB for material
shall be submitted to the ENGINEER during submission of tender.
Booster Pump Operation

The control circuit shall enable automatic and manual operations of the group.
a)
Automatic Operation
i)
When the pressure of the system drop to pre-determined specified

value (P1), the duty pump shall be activated and shall de-activate when
the pressure reach another predetermined specified level.
ii)
If the pressure of the system continue to drop to pressure (P2), then

when the duty pump is activated, the standby pump shall be activated.
Both duty and standby pumps shall be de-activated when the require
pressure is attained. Start and stop indicating lights shall be provided
for each pump.
iii)
Should the duty pump fail, the standby pump shall be activated.
Page 208
PARKCITY

iv)
Auto change-over relay shall be installed to alternate the operation of

the pumps.
v)
The trip light shall be activated when the overload trip of the pump is
activated.
vi)
Warning alarm bell and indicating red light shall be activated when the
following occurs :Overload trip of pump.
Failure operation of duty pump.
The bell shall be cancelled when acknowledged. However, the
indicating red light shall continue until the fault is corrected.
b)
Manual Operation
i)
Either one or both pumps shall be capable of being started and stopped
by their respective push buttons.
ii)
The control panel and circuit proposal shall be submitted by the

Contractor to the ENGINEER for approval before construction.
GRP Panel Water Storage Tanks

General
a)
The Contractor shall supply, deliver and install water storage tanks, to SS 245 with the
capacities and dimensions as indicated in the drawings, complete with appropriate size
of R.S.J. support frame.
b)
Where applicable, each tank shall be installed above floor slab and located in the
positions shown in the drawings and shall be mounted on R.S.J.
c)
The materials for the construction of panels shall be based on an unsaturated polyester
resin. The resin selected shall be of suitable grade to meet the requirements in BS
3532:1962 or JIS K6919. The glass fibre used shall be non-alkali type conforming to
J.I.S. R3411-3417 or BS 3396 and BS 3749. The tanks shall be designed to have
sufficient strength to withstand the expected loads.
d)
The tanks shall have structure not to grow algae and also to be grey in colour with
Maunsell's value N-70. The allowable ratio of light transmittance to inside the tank
should be less than 0.001% (1/100,000).
e)
The tanks shall be provided with at least one manhole of not less than 600 m inside
diameter having an easily opened cover with a lock to prevent rain water from entering
the tanks. The manhole hatch shall be made of GRP or other synthetic resins and its
hinge shall be of stainless steel.
f)
The bolts and nuts used shall be stainless steel and the diameter of a bolt shall not be
less than 12 mm.
g)
The interior supports for panels shall be completely resistant to the quality of water
stored. They shall be made of GRP. The exterior supports shall be made of hot-dipped
galvanised mild steel.
Page 209
PARKCITY

h)
The materials used for sealing shall be synthetic rubber sealants which shall be
excellent in water-tightness and chemically resistant to the quality of water stored. It shall
also be able to withstand to the temperature variation during service. Supplier shall
submit test reports conducted by PSB to proof that the sealants are non-toxic.
i)
The tanks of 1.5 metres depth or more shall be provided with a UPVC internal ladder.
j)
Each tank compartment shall be provided with valve inlet, outlet and drain connections;
float valve, overflow connections, water level control electrodes, compartment by-pass
and water level indicators.
k)
Cat ladders shall be fitted onto the water tanks and made of marine aluminium alloy.
Water Tank Guarantee

The manufacturer and Contractor shall submit a written guarantee for defects due to materials
used or workmenship for the GRP paneled water tank for a period of 5 years by submitting
Certificate of Guarantees for the tank.
7.6
Schedules of Materials and Equipment for Sanitary Plumbing, Hot and Cold Water
System
Underground Drainage & Vent Systems
Pipes
Heavy duty, cement-lined ductile iron pipe to BS EN

545 (Class K9) or HD UPVC to SS272 to at driveway and car porch.
Pipes
Heavy duty, cement-lined ductile iron pipe to BS EN

545 (Class K9) or Vitrified Clay pipe to BS 65/BS
540 or HDPE (for sewage) for external sewage
system.
Internal Sanitary Drainage Systems
Pipes
-UPVC to SS213 (soil, combined soil and waste,

waste and vent, above ground).
UPVC to SS 272 (soil, waste pipes below ground) for
turfed areas.
VCP to BS 65/BS 540 for sewer connection.
Check Valves
-Swing check valve, cast iron body.
Gate Valves
-Cast iron body.
Floor Trap Grating in toilets/

Kitchen
-Stainless steel.
Inspection Camber Cover
-Cast iron and/or complete with frame and recess to

accommodate architectural finishes.
Cold and Hot Water Reticulation Systems
Page 210
PARKCITY
Pipes

-HDPE pipe to ISO 4427:1996 (E) (80mm dia. and

above).
Copper tubing to BS EN 1057 (above ground water
supply pipes).
Copper tubing to BS EN 1057 (under ground water
supply pipes below 80mm dia.).
PPR to DIN 8077 : 2007 and DIN 8078 : 2007
(above and underground water supply pipes for
residential units).
Insulation
7.7
-Fibreglass 25mm thick.
Electrical Work
The standard of electrical wiring work shall comply with PowerGrid Ltd / Power Supply Ltd
and Singapore Standard CP 5 : Wiring of Electrical Equipment of Buildings. The Contractor
shall refer to the Electrical Specification (Section 7) for the standard of electrical wiring.
Electrical supply for these Pumps/Equipment mentioned in Scope of Work and the associated
control shall be obtained from isolators/distribution board (provided by the Electrical
Contractor) inside the relevant Pump/Equipment Room as shown on the drawings.
The Contractor shall supply and install all electrical wiring from the electrical supply
termination points to his pump/equipment, including controls panel, final sub-circuit wiring and
accessories.
The Contractor should coordinate with the Electrical Contractor for exact location of the
isolators/distribution board.
All pump/equipment control panel shall be complete with all detailed and necessary
components and accessories including motor starters, busbar, relays, contactors, meters,
switches, fuses, indicators, alarms, timers, push buttons, etc. and connection to power supply
point.
If in the opinion of the Architect, the standard of electrical wiring in the installation does not
comply with the specified standard, the cost of subsequent rectification shall be fully borne by
the Contractor. If such sub-standard wiring work should affect the timing of the electrical
inspection/testing work by the power supply company, the Architect may instruct that such
rectification work be carried out by another Contractor and such electrical variations shall be
fully borne by the Contractor.
Ambiguities and inadequacies in the electrical supply or demarcation shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor who shall bear the full cost of rectifications to such situations.
Page 211
PARKCITY
8.0
Fire Protection Services
8.1
Automatic Fire Sprinkler System
8.1.1
Scope Of Work

This Section of the Specification covers the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
maintenance of an approved automatic wet-pipe fire sprinkler system comprising:
8.1.2
a)
Hydraulically designed & pre-calculated automatic wet pipe system
b)
Tee-off from Authority Bulk Meter valve chamber, run fire water supply line pipe to the
sprinkler storage tank as shown on Drawings
b)
Supply and install of all cast-in sprinkler pipes in R.C tank piping, sprinkler pumps,
jockey pumps complete with all main piping, valves, fittings, control panel, cables and
etc.
c)
Supply and install of Sprinkler supply main to control valves, breeching inlet to
sprinkler control, sprinkler control valves complete with the necessary gongs, taper
switches, signages, wirings and etc.
c)
d)
Supply and install distribution pipes from sprinkler control valves to sprinkler range
pipes and sprinkler heads including all necessary fittings, connections, supports,
piping and accessories.
Zoning / flow switches indicated on drawings
e)
Shop drawings, Testing and Commissioning, Certification and etc.
Rules and Regulations

The installation shall comply with the latest edition of Fire Precaution in Building and Vietnam
Standard 7336:2003 Fire Protection Automatic Sprinkler system design and installation
requirement.
8.1.3
System Description
The building will be served by sprinkler system except for the electrical switch room,
transformer room and electrical shafts which are protected by smoke detectors.
The sprinkler systems are designed to comply with the latest edition of Vietnam Standard
7336:2003 Fire Protection Automatic Sprinkler system design and installation requirement
The water supply to the automatic fire sprinkler tanks is from the local authority main. The
sprinkler control valves are as shown in the Drawings.
8.1.4
Water Supply
The water supply to the automatic sprinkler system is by means of two automatic sprinkler
pumps drawing from a sprinkler water storage tank, which is automatically replenished by the
water from the town main. The tank, located at the tank farm area, shall have an effective
capacity according to the design classification.
The sprinkler water tank shall be provided with an approved type high and low level alarm
system. This alarm system shall be installed at the sprinkler pumps' control panel located
Page 212
PARKCITY

within the sprinkler pump room. High and low level audible/ visual alarm indications, and
audible alarm muting/ reset buttons shall be provided at the panel. The level alarms and
pump operation status shall be connected to the fire alarm panel.
8.1.5
Pumps
a)
Automatic Sprinkler Pumps

The Contractor shall supply and install two nos.FM/UL listed & local approved
sprinkler pumps. Either both electric pump, (if generator is available for backup of
essential fire fighting equipment) or one number with electrical driven and one
number with diesel driven c/w 800l diesel fuel tank, if Generator is not available)
The pumps shall have adequate capacities to meet the pressure and flow
requirements of the system. All pumps shall be fully automatic in operation and shall
start when the fire sprinkler system pressure drops below the set pressure. The pump
motor shall be with Class E insulation having a continual rated HP to comply with the
BHP requirements of the pumps and locally approved. The motors shall be of max.
2900 rpm. Engineer and suitable for 400 volt, 3 phase 50 cycle power supply.
The pumps and motors shall be mounted on common base plates and connected by
direct-drive flexible couplings. Leakage from the pump glands shall be drained to the
nearest floor waste. The pumps and motors shall be capable of operating in parallel,
and each pump shall have capacity to satisfy the pressure and flow requirements of
the respective fire sprinkler installation. Either of the two pumps can be a standby
pump to the other pump which will then be a duty pump.
When the duty pump fails, the standby pump shall cut in automatically. The
performance characteristics of the pumps shall be such that the pressure varies
progressively with the rate of demand, so that while being capable of providing the
rate of flow and pressure required at the highest and most remote parts of the
protected area, the output shall be so controlled that there is not excessive rate of
discharge at the lowest level close to the control valve. That is, the pumps shall have
performance characteristics complying with the requirements of TCVN 7336
The pumps shall be factory tested before leaving factory to verify their performance
and shall carry performance curves and certificates certifying their compliance with
the relevant Rules.
b)
Jockey Pumps
The jockey pump sets shall comply with all bye-laws, regulation and requirements of
the local Authorities and the Building Control Authority as well as TCVN 7336
concerning the sprinkler installation.
The jockey pump sets shall be capable of delivering a pump head of approximately
0.7 bar higher than the pressure in the sprinkler trunk mains when the sprinkler pump
is churning. The jockey pump shall be carefully selected so as to operate on the
steep flow characteristic curve and such that when delivering at the required flow
rate, the pump head shall be around the pressure of the sprinkler truck mains when
the pump is churning.
8.1.6
Valves
All valves shall be UL listed/ FM approved type where applicable. All valves shall be located
in easily accessible positions for operation and repairs, and at a distance of no greater than
1.8 m above the finished floor level.
Page 213
PARKCITY

All valves shall be of the "right hand turn" type. Direction arrows shall be clearly marked on
the handwheels showing the direction of turn to close the valves.
a)
Sprinkler Control Valves

All valves and fittings shall be FM approved and UL listed. Each set of installation
control valve shall comprise the following :
i)
Main Stop Valve
ii)
Alarm Control Valve
iii)
Water Motor Alarm & Gong c/w Strainer And Gate Valve
iv)
FM Approved And UL Listed Proving Pipe
v)
Drain Valve and testing apparatus
vi)
Pressure Gauges
The main stop valve shall be secured open by means of a padlocked chain or strap.
A water flow switch of the FM approved and UL listed type shall be installed at each
alarm valve for initiation of an audio and visual alarm signal at the Main Fire Indicator
Board. Flow switches shall have time delay settings to prevent unnecessary false
alarms. Spare voltage free contacts (N/O & N/C) shall be provided on the flow
switches for connection to the FIB.
Tampered switches (micro-switch) shall be provided for all the control valve and
remotely monitored by the FIB.
The pipework for the water motor alarm and gong shall be of minimum 20mm
diameter throughout and be arranged for draining through a non-ferrous fitting with a
minimum orifice of 3 mm diameter.
Pressure gauges shall be provided immediately above and below each alarm valve
and main stop valve respectively. Pressure gauges shall be of not less than 100 mm
diameter and shall conform to B.S. 1780. Pressure gauges shall be of the heavy duty
and weatherproof type.
An approved type notice shall be provided on the outside of an external wall as near
to the various main stop valve locations as possible bearing the following words in
raised letters or other approved type of letters :
SPRINKLER
STOP VALVES
The above words shall be in letters of at least 35 mm height. They shall be painted
white on black background.
b)
Gate Valve
Isolating gate valves shall be of cast iron, flanged ends, single piece casting with
valve seats and valve faces accurately machined. The gate valves shall be of the
Outside Screw and Yoke (OS & Y) type.
Page 214
PARKCITY
c)

Float Ball Valve

Inlet supply pipe to sprinkler transfer tank shall be fitted with a float valve. All float
valve shall comply with BS 1212 Parts 2 and 3 and be used with a float complying
with BS 1968 or BS 2456.
d)
Check Valve
Check valves shall be of the swing check type, of horizontal pattern with flanged ends
and a limit stop cast on it to prevent it from sticking in the opened position. The face
angle of the swing check shall be as near as practicable to the vertical when in the
closed position so that only a small pressure is required for it to swing open.
e)
Globe Valve
Globe valves up to 50 mm diameter shall be of bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem,
inside screw and handwheel type, with backseating capacity.
Globe valves over 50 mm diameter shall be of iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, OS
& Y and handwheel type, with plug-type disc, flanged ends and renewable seat and
disc.
f)
Pressure Reducing Valves

Pressure reducing valves shall be piston operated ratio valves to maintain constant
downstream and upstream pressure ratio in varying flow rate. Each valve shall have
pressure tapping fitted with gauge hooks for attachment of pressure gauges. Valve
bodies shall be cast iron with bronze trimming.
Valves of 40mm bore and under shall be of the bronze body, stainless steel and
thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer and threaded ends
type.
Valves of 50 mm bore and above shall be of the cast iron body, bronze fitted
elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc and flanged ends type.
8.1.7
Pipes, Fitting & Misc. Accessories

a)
Pipeworks And Fittings

All pipes which have direct connection to PUB incoming water supply shall be of
ductile iron cement lined to BS 4772 Class K9.
All sprinkler pipeworks shall be of black steel pipes confirming to class B of BS 1387.
Pipes of 50 mm diameter and smaller shall be jointed with screwed joints, and pipes
larger than 50 mm diameter may be jointed by welding. Flanged or cut groove fittings
shall be used for valves and fittings where installation or removal is required.
All pipeworks shall be thoroughly wire brushed and given one coat of primer paint
prior to installation. Two coats of an approved enamel paint shall be applied after the
piping installation.
All pipes shall be installed with the correct gradient so that the entire piping system is
self draining.
Page 215
PARKCITY

Where pipes pass through floors or walls which are required to be fire rated, the
opening in the construction around the pipe shall not exceed 25 mm average
clearance and shall be fire stopped by packing with non-combustible material to
prevent the passage of flame or smoke.
This requirement may be disregarded where pipes pass through floors of the building
which require the protection of vertical openings by enclosing openings with approved
non-combustible wall having fire resistance rating in accordance with the Building
Regulations.
b)
Pipe Supports
All pipes and fittings shall be securely supported by steel hangers and brackets in
accordance with FM and NFPA Standard 13 requirements and in a manner that
expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes will not be hindered.
Anchor brackets shall be provided where necessary.
Pipe hangers and brackets shall be properly isolated, where necessary, to eliminate
vibration transmissions. Pipe hangers shall not be installed more than 600 mm from
each change of direction where possible.
Vertical runs of pipes shall be supported by clamps or collars suitably supported from
angles or channels which in turn shall be resting on special spring supports fixed to
the floor slab.
Pipes shall be supported at intervals not exceeding the following :
Table 7(b)
Pipe Diameter
(mm)
Up to 25
32 to 50
65 to 100
Above 100
c)
Vertical Run (m)
Horizontal Run (m)
2.5
3.0
4.5
4.5
2.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
Sprinkler Tanks
The sprinkler water tanks shall be constructed either in Reinforced Concrete (R.C) or
Pressed steel reinforced panels with the required capacity as shown on the Drawings.
The tanks shall be compartmented into two separate sections connected by a
balance pipe and valve.
Each tank shall be equipped with ladders mounted on the inside and outside of the
tank, sight glass level indicator, as well as manhole access cover.
Water level inside the sprinkler tank shall be maintained by means of float valves to
control the inflow of water. High and low level float switches shall be provided for the
sprinkler tank to control the operation of the sprinkler transfer pumps for maintaining
the water level inside the sprinkle tank. Appropriate transducers shall be provided at
the sprinkler tanks for the monitoring of water levels, overflow alarms, etc, by the Fire
Alarm Panel and BAS.
An approved vortex inhibitor shall be provided for all out going pipe connected to
pump suction.
Page 216
PARKCITY
d)

Fire Brigade Breeching Inlet

A four-way 65 mm instantaneous male coupling complete with back pressure valves
breeching inlet shall be provided at the position shown on the Drawing to enable the
fire brigade to pump water into the installation by the use of their own equipment. The
breeching inlet shall be connected to the sprinkler main.
The entire breeching inlet shall be housed in a box to B.S. 5041 : Part 5 and labelled
"SPRINKLER BREECHING INLET". The breeching inlet shall be FM approved type.
e)
Sprinkler Heads
Sprinkler heads shall be of the conventional pattern type to produce a spherical type
of discharge with a proportion of the water being thrown upwards to the ceiling.
Sprinklers shall be of the FM approved and UL listed type. They shall be of glass bulb
type filled with liquid and designed to operate at 141 degrees Celsius and tested to
withstand water pressure of 23.5 bars.
The sprinkler heads shall be constructed of brass and finished chromium plated.
Sprinkler orifice heads shall be of minimum 15 mm diameter. Appropriate escutcheon
plates shall be provided for all exposed sprinkler heads and shall be submitted for
ENGINEER's approval accordingly.
Where sprinklers are likely to be accidentally damaged, protective wire guards or
cages of the approved type shall be provided.
The Contractor shall supply to the Employer a stock of spare sprinkler heads after
completion of the installation. The stock of spare sprinkler heads shall be in
accordance with TCVN 7336
f)
Anti-Vibration Couplings/Flexible Joints

Piping connections to all pumps and all equipment shall be by means of wire, or
reinforced fabrics mounded with high pressure convoluted rubber connections unless
otherwise shown on Drawing. The fittings shall have integral rubber flanges and be
bolted onto the pipe lines using flanges for 50mm diameter and lager; for smaller than
50mm diameter, connections shall be by means of high pressure hose clips and
sealed with rubber plastic. Approved cables shall be provided for fittings of 50mm
diameter and larger to limit expansion.
g)
Expansion Joints
When the pipeworks are passing through two different structures with different
foundations, expansion joints shall be installed at the junction points.
h)
Sediment Joints
When the underground pipeworks are running through the building from the outside
ground, sediment joint shall be installed to allow the relative sediment of the structure.
i)
Vibration Isolators
Spring-type vibration isolators shall be used for those inertia blocks and pumps.
Spring efficiency shall not less than 95%.
Page 217
PARKCITY
j)

Flow Switches
Flow switches installed in the sprinkler mains, as indicated on the Drawings, shall be
of the FM approved and UL listed type. Flow switches shall be interfaced with the fire
alarm system and to activate the sprinkler pump upon detection of water flow. All
necessary wiring and control shall be included
All parts of the flow switch which may come into contact with water shall be of
non-ferrous construction and physically separated from the ferrous pipe to prevent
electrolytic action.
Time delay device shall be provided for each flow switch to avoid any false alarm due
to fluctuation of water pressure.
k)
Flow Meters
Flow meters shall be of the FM approved and UL listed type.
Flow meters shall consist of the annular element flow measuring station and a
portable meter set complete with master chart for direct conversion of meter readings
to gpm.
The annular element shall be of stainless steel and rated to 275 psi at 400 degrees F.
Accuracy of flow measuring shall not exceed +/- 2.0 %.
Flow meters shall be complete with carrying case, two twelve foot hoses, equalizer
manifold, check seal and installation and operating instruction.
l)
Pressure Switches
Pressure switches shall be of the FM approved and UL listed type.
Pressure switches shall be of the bourdon-tube operating type and shall have
adjustable set points with an integral time delay device. Ranges shall be graduated in
metric and shall not exceed the anticipated maximum operating pressure by more
than 50%.
m)
Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges shall conform to AS 180 - " Bourdon tube pressure and vacuum
gauges ". The maximum scale value of the gauge shall be about 150% of the
anticipated maximum operating pressure.
Provision shall be installed to enable each pressure gauge to be easily removed
without interruption to the installation. A stainless steel pulsation snubber shall be
used in conjunction with the pressure gauge. In addition to pressure gauge locations,
gun metal test valve of 10 mm or 15 mm size shall be fitted on suction and delivery
pipes or testing pumps.
n)
Level Sensors
Level sensor shall be of suspended electrode and shall be of 'No Float' type. It shall
be made of stainless steel pipes grade 316, electrode ends shall be sealed. It shall be
arranged to interlock with the pump systems. When required, intermediated insulated
support brackets shall be installed to prevent the electrodes swaying.
o)
Water Level Indicators
Page 218
PARKCITY

Water level indicator shall be of the capillary glass tube in stainless steel casing to
show the depth and quantity of water in the respective water tanks. The entire water
level indicator shall be of standard proprietary make designed to give reliable service,
and to the approval of the ENGINEER.
p)
Orifice Plates
Orifice plates shall be complete with matching flanges properly spaced, drilled and
gasketed and complete with flange bolts. Tapping points shall be provided both
upstream and downstream of the orifice plates and shall be made in strict accordance
with BS 1042 Part 1 - 1964 and associated amendments.
q)
Strainers
Strainers of approved Y type shall be installed up-stream of all pumps. Strainer shall
be of pipe sizes with screwed bronze body for 50 mm and under and flanged steel
body for 65mm and over suitable for the service pressure encountered. All strainers
shall be complete with drain cocks and shall have removable bronze screens which
shall have a nett free area of not less than four times that of the pipe.
r)
Vortex Inhibitors
Vortex inhibitors shall be provided for attachment to pump suction pipes installed in
fire services water storage tank as to eliminate any vortex within the pump suction
pipe ensuring the pump is fully primed at all times during operation.
s)
Inertia Blocks
Inertia blocks shall be installed for each pump. The pump shall be bolted directly to
the integral concrete inertia block. All concrete referred to in this specification shall
have a density of at least 2240-2400 kg/cu.metre. The length and the width of the
inertia block shall be at least 200mm greater than the length and the width of the
supported pumps. The weight of the inertia block shall be at least 1.5 times of the
operating weight of the pump supported. The inertia block shall consist of a concrete
slab cast into a welded steel base-frame with reinforced bar assembly.
Frames shall be welded steel channels of minimum 150 mm thickness or the same
thickness as the inertia block and shall be reinforced with welded in 12 mm steel
reinforcing rods or angles at 150mm centres each way. Anchor bolts shall be fixed
into position, and housed in steel bolt sleeves to allow minor bolt location adjustments
or alternatively pockets shall be cast into the inertia block to permit the later insertion
of anchor bolts. There shall be adequate clearance (minimum 20 mm) All rounds to
ensure that is no contact between any possible alignment or position of the installed
inertia block. The clearance between inertia block and steel base shall be in the
range of 50 to 100 mm.
The Contractor shall supply and install all welded structural steel and reinforcement
required for the inertia blocks. All installation work concerning these items are
included in this contract.
Spring-type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing
and in series with two layers of ribbed or waffled pattern Neoprene pads between the
base plate and the base frame.
The Contractor shall show on shop drawings submitted, the make and model, number
of the isolators to be used and their individual calculated loads.
8.1.8
Testing & Commissioning
Page 219
PARKCITY

Upon completion of the piping installation, the pipeline shall be hydrostatically tested to 14.5
bars or 1.5 times its working pressure, whichever is higher, for 2 hours without any pressure
loss or visible leakage detected during the test period.
The sprinkler system shall be tested in accordance with the requirement of TCVN 7336 and
where required, test sprinkler heads shall be fitted.
Before pumps are run on site, the control systems shall be fully tested to ensure correct
operation.
Test shall be carried out to simulate actual fire conditions and power failures to ensure correct
operation of all components of the system.
8.1.9
Submittal Data
Submittal drawings shall be reviewed and incorporate requirements of local authorities.
Drawings shall be certified correct prior to submission to Construction Manager.
Submit system layout drawings, component Shop Drawings, specifications, hydraulic design
calculations for Construction Manager review prior to commencing installation.
Upon completion of the installation, recalculate systems and submit hydraulic design data
based on as-built installation.
Obtain all approvals before proceeding with work.
8.2
Wet Riser and Dry Riser Installation
8.2.1
Scope Of Works
The Works covered by this Section of the Specification comprise the supply, installation,
testing, commissioning and maintenance of fire hydrant and dry riser system complete with
fire breeching inlet, landing valve, pipeworks, valves and fittings. The entire installation shall
conform to the latest regulation of Building Code of Vietnam and SS CP 29 for Wet Riser
and Dry Riser Systems
8.2.2
System Description
The building will be served by wet riser and/or dry risers shown in the tender drawings, and
with respect to local authorities requirement as shown in Architects approved plans.
8.2.3
Fire Breeching Inlet

A two-way 65 mm instantaneous male coupling complete with back pressure valves
breeching inlet shall be provided at the positions shown on the Drawing to enable the fire
brigade to pump water into the rising main by the use of their own equipment. The breeching
inlet shall be connected to the dry rising main.
The entire breeching inlet shall be housed in a box to B.S. 5041 : Part 5 and labelled "DRY
RISER INLET" or WET RISER INLET The breeching inlets shall be FM approved type.
8.2.4
Landing Valves
Landing valves shall be provided at each landing to the wet/dry rising mains at a height of 1
metre above the respective floor level. Each valve shall be a gun-metal valve complete with
all fittings and accessories in accordance with CP 29.
Page 220
PARKCITY

The landing valve shall be of an instantaneous female coupling type suitable for connecting to
the local fire fighting department standard hose, the valve shall be closed by turning the
handwheel in a clockwise direction and the direction of opening shall be permanently marked
on the operating wheel by an embossed arrow and the word 'open'.
Every landing valve shall be kept shut with padlock and leather strap. The padlock used shall
be a master-key type.
8.2.5
Earthing
All Rising mains shall be electrically earthed. Those joints which do not provide electrical
continuity shall be bonded.
8.2.6
Pipework & Fitting

The dry riser pipes shall be of galvanised mildsteel pipe to BS 1387 heavy gauge. All pipes
shall be jointed by means of flanged or screwed connections.
Flanges shall be of mild steel to BS 10. All flanged joints shall be flush and aligned, and shall
be made with corrugated jointing rings, coated on both sides with the recommended jointing
compound. All bolts shall be hexagonal- headed steel in accordance with the provision of BS
916 with washers and nuts.
Automatic air release valve shall be provided at the highest point in each dry riser main to
permit air in the pipe to discharge to atmosphere.
All pipework shall be thoroughly wire brushed and given one coat of primer paint prior to
installation. Two coats of an approved enamel paint shall be applied after the piping
installation.
Where pipes pass through floors or walls which are required to be fire rated, the openings in
the construction around the pipes shall not exceed 25 mm average clearance and shall be fire
stopped by packing with non-combustible material to prevent the passage of flame or smoke.
This requirement may be disregarded where pipes pass through floors of the building which
require the protection of vertical openings by enclosing openings with approved noncombustible wall having fire resistance rating in accordance with the Building Regulations.
8.2.7.
Testing
Upon completion of the piping installation, the pipework shall be hydrostatically tested to 21
bars measured at the inlet for 30 minutes without any pressure loss or visible leakage
detected during the test period.
8.3
Automatic Fire Alarm and Detection System

This section specifies the design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the
automatic addressable fire alarm and detection system.
The automatic addressable fire alarm and detection system shall be of micro-processor based
type complete with addressing and data processing capabilities.
8.3.1
Scope Of Works
The Works covered by this Section of Specification comprises the supply, installation, testing,
commissioning and maintenance of a complete smoke/heat detectors, manual call points,
alarm bells, Sub-Alarm Panel (SAP), mimic panels, batteries and chargers, relay and all
Page 221
PARKCITY

necessary wiring as detailed as per specification and as shown on the drawings. The Works
Contractor shall submit for acceptance the details of a monthly maintenance and servicing
schedule for a period of one year prior to the completion of the installation.
The Works Contractor shall be fully responsible for the entire installation to meet with these
requirements and shall also be responsible for all necessary applications and arrangement
with the Authorities concerned for a direct telephone line (Leased-line or wireless system)
connection from the Main Alarm Panel to the appointed monitoring company. All cost
connected there with including installation and hiring of the Telecom's line and the digital
communicator shall be deemed to have been included in the tender price.
8.3.2
System Provision
The system shall be of approved design and high performance and the equipment shall be of
well known make and comply with the Regulation of Vietnam Fire Precautions for Building, by
Local Fire Department in general and conform with the current edition of Vietnam TCVN
5738 for The Installation And Servicing Of Electrical Fire Alarm System and shall comply with
all regulations and requirements of the local Fire Safety & Shelter Department.
All equipment shall be of internationally approved type and certified by recognised testing
laboratories such as the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of USA. The system shall be UL
listed to NFPA 72 and shall bear the UL label.
The system software packages shall be of standardised type and custom made system
software shall not be acceptable. The system shall utilise distributed processing techniques,
be totally solid state, microprocessor based and use digital transmission techniques.
The installation shall include all necessary software, push buttons, indicating lamps and
electronic hardware for a complete operable system according to this specification. No
malfunctions or false alarms shall occur in a detector due to electrical noise such as high
frequency pulses or electromagnetic influences emitted from other equipment.
The complete addressable fire alarm system shall provide and gives visual and audible
indication of alarm conditions and appropriate control and monitor functions in the
Fire Command Centre or other designated location upon activation of the following
items :
8.3.3
a.
Addressable break glass unit and alarm bell.
b.
addressable smoke detectors and heat detectors.
c.
Flow switch alarm signals, pressure switches alarm signals, etc., from Wet
Sprinkler System, Pre-Action Sprinkler (Dry) system, Hosereel System, Wet
Riser System and interfacing with other trades (e.g. Fans, AHUs etc).
d.
Other signals from the Hosereel system, Wet Riser and Wet/Pre-Action (dry)
sprinkler system, eg tank High/Low alarm, pump running status, power
failure, alarm etc.
System Description
Page 222
PARKCITY

The automatic fire detection and alarm system in the building are addressable type and
connected to the Main Alarm Panel (MAP) and respective Sub-Alarm Panel (SAP). The
system of operation shall be such that an alarm is initiated by breaking a glass in any of the
manual call points, or activation of any of the smoke/heat detectors, or activation of the flow
switches or activation of the sprinkler pumps. This action shall be arranged to energise the
associated zone lamp in the MAP, SAP and Mimic panel.
8.3.4
Specification Compliance
Contractor shall submit specification of all equipment, general layout and construction of the
indicating panel and equipment cubicle and other information of the system for assessment of
their tenders.
All equipment to be supplied shall comply with the requirements of the Vietnam Standard
TCVN 5738 and other relevant authorities. If any item found to be not complying to
specification and Authorities requirements after installation, the contractor shall replace them
at his own cost.
8.3.5
Control Panel & Accessories

a)
Main Alarm Panel
General
A micro-processor based Main Alarm Panel (MAP) complete with the following peripherals
shall be provided inside Fire Command Centre / Main Security or other designated area as
indicated on the specification drawing. They shall consist of, but not limited to, the following
for a complete working system :
(i)
A Control Processing Unit (CPU) of at least 32 bit device and supplied with
4GB of main memory. SATA or e-SATA hard disk of 250GB formatted
capacity shall be provided for system back-up purposes but shall not be used
for system on-line operation.
The system shall be capable to transmit pier to pier communication
technology (i.e. all panels has it owns CPU and is capable to transmit
messages globally round the secure network).
(ii)
All control functions shall be done via the LCD system display by means of
keypad. All message display and control functions shall be in plain English.
(iii)
Master mimic panel with LED indicator.
(iv)
Decam Interface Unit.
(v)
Necessary I/O analog/digital interface terminal
(vi)
Power supply unit with maintenance - free standby batteries (e.g. Ni-cd,
Lithium, lead-acidic)
The system network shall be so designed that all the Sub-alarm panels, floor mimic panels
and master mimic panel can work independently with full fire alarm and detection function and
Page 223
PARKCITY

operation in evaluation, annunciation and control even though the communication link/loop
between the Sub-alarm panels and the MAP is interrupted or disconnected and/or in the event
of CPU failure.
The CPU shall also accept and process data signal generated by the following system via an
appropriate interface with the related SAP.
(i)
Hosereel System/ Wet Riser System
(ii)
Automatic Sprinkler System
(iii)
Plant monitoring (i.e. Fire Pumps and fire tank water levels etc.)
(iv)
Other fire extinguishing systems.
(v)
Interfacing with other trades. (e.g smoke extraction / vents system, dampers,
AHUs, fans, BMS etc.)
The Main Alarm Panel shall be of modular design and shall consist of standardized hardware
and software packages. Adequate spare socket space for housing of module cards shall not
be less than 10% of the entire development capacity. Future changes and additions shall not
affect the normal working condition of the existing system.
Class `A' wiring loop in separate conduit system shall be provided for the following such that
in the event of the open circuit in the loop, all data communication shall remain fully
operational:
(i)
between SAPs, Repeater Panel and the Main Alarm Panel.
(ii)
fire detection/alarm loops between SAP and field devices/ sensors.
The panel shall be of electrically supervised type with end-of-loop resistors of high degree of
reliability and shall comply with the latest edition of Vietnam Standard TCVN 5738 The board
shall be of the analogue addressable type.
The fire indicator board shall be complete with zone indication, fault indication and operation
indication. The system shall be electrically supervised against Bell line, ground faults and
failure in the charger or power supply. Any faults shall cause a fault light and the buzzer shall
sound immediately.
The operation shall be arranged so that during any activation of manual call points or smoke
detectors, the audible alarm can be silenced whereas the visual signal continues until the
alarm has been cancelled or the fault eliminated. Provision for re-set shall be incorporated.
Relays/ contractors to energised the fire alarm signal cables to automatically cut-off the power
supply to the electromagnetic hold-open devices and trigger the emergency operation of lifts
shall be included. The relays/ contactors for trigger the emergency operation of lifts shall be
provided in the terminal blocks at lift motor room.
Page 224
PARKCITY

Each circuit of the alarm line shall be provided with visual indication light, a normal and isolate
switch. When the switch is thrown on the "ISOLATE" it shall also be indicated visually by a
red light.
The boards shall be factory manufactured enclosed in a well finished self-contained dust roof
metal cubicle fitted with a hinged glazed door provided with steel pipe combination lock and
catch to the approval of the ENGINEER All indicators shall be illuminated by two light sources
so that the failure of one will not render the indicators inoperative.
All filament lamps shall have flashing illumination as identification of a trouble area of fire
alarm. Alarm panel shall be incorporated with circuit protection facilities such as current
limiting, diode reverse polarity protection, overloading protection, etc.
A zoning charts depicting the respective floor plan with fire zones properly demarcated in
approximately 1 : 400 scale with colour-coded zoning in white background shall also be
incorporated in the Fire Indicator Board. The chart shall be mounted on silk screen.
Temporary zone charts/floor directories shall be provided if necessary, during TOP
inspection(s).
b)
Master Mimic Panel
A master mimic panel shall be standalone type (i.e. If the Main Alarm Panel fails, the master
mimic panel shall be capable to function independently and provide LED Indication as
specified below). The Master mimic panel shall be provided in the Fire Command Centre with
its own mimic driver and battery/charger.
The master mimic panel complete with duplicate LED Indicator and shall be made of colour
perspex showing the entire Building elevation (comprises schematics of Sprinkler system,
Hosereel system & Dry/Wet riser system, fire alarm system, including status of town gas
detection system, smoke vents / extraction system, etc.). Each floor or each fire zone shall
have duplicated LED indicators to represent fire alarm and fault status.
The master mimic panel shall remain fully operational in the event of the failure of the CPU
(MAP).
The master mimic panel shall give the audible and visual alarm for:
(i)
Failure of AC power supply.
(ii)
Failure of battery charger.
(iii)
Operation of the standby generators (ON/OFF).

(iv)
High and low water levels alarm status for each compartment of each
water tank.
(v)
Activation and fault status of flow switches.

(iv)
Shut main stop valves for the Sprinkler Control Alarm Valves
(including operation status of the sprinkler alarm valves).
Page 225
PARKCITY

The status of Air Supply to Pre-Action Sprinkler (Dry) pipe system and status
operation of the electrical air compressor, (if any).
(vii)
Shut subsidiary stop valves (electrical monitored) of sprinkler system; and

electrical monitored isolation stop valve of wet riser and Hosereel System.
(viii)
All Fire pumps status (pump run/fail to start/trip)
(ix)
A common LED Indication of Fire Alarm Status for each floor or fire
component.
(x)
A common LED Indication for fault status for each floor or fire compartment
and other fire extinguishing system, etc.
(xi)
Field device trouble/fault and the following switches for :
Automatic system test or walk test

System lamp test
Acknowledge
Silence
System re-set
The above status shall be repeated by text at the LCD Display (SAPs, MAP), operator
terminals, Printer including the fire alarm system in detail printout and display.
b)
Addressable Manual Call Points
Addressable manual call points shall be located and fixed at 1.4 metres above the finished
floor level as shown on the Drawing.
The manual call point shall contain electronics that communicate its status to the SAP over
the two wires cables. The manual call points shall be of cadmium plated steel and painted
signal "red" to BS 3810. The unit shall be of attractive and neat appearance and be of suitable
size and type for flush mounting on internal walls. The unit shall be suitably labelled to the
approval of the ENGINEER
The call point shall be equipped with a self-holding device to maintain the alarm condition until
reset by an authorised person. Provision shall be made at each call point for separate status
monitoring from the Employer's Monitoring System.
d)
Addressable Detector Bases
All addressable smoke and heat detector heads shall be of pluggable type to their bases. The
base shall contain electronics that communicate the detector status (normal, alarm or trouble)
to the SAP over two-wire communication cables. The same two wires shall also provide
power to the base and the detector. Different detector heads shall be interchangeable without
the need for reprogramming. Upon removal of the head, a trouble signal shall be transmitted
to the MAP.
e)
Smoke Detectors
Page 226
PARKCITY

Smoke detectors shall be of the ionisation type and installed at positions as shown on the
drawings. They shall be of a type approved by Local Fire Safety Bureau/department and
suitable for connection to the Fire Alarm System installation. They shall be of the recessed or
surface mounted type to suit the locations where they are to be installed.
The installation of smoke detectors shall include all necessary wirings, end of line resistance,
etc., to complete the installation.
All detectors shall be mounted such that the sensing element is not less than 25mm and not
more than 600 mm below the ceiling or floor slab. The detectors shall have response
sensitivity that can be field adjustable to some predetermined levels and the smoke entry
window size shall be capable of providing 360 Deg smoke entry for optimum response. It shall
be possible to test the sensitivity of a detector in the field. A wire mesh shall prevent access of
insects into the measuring chamber.
The detector shall have built-in protection against transient interference and totally RF
shielded, able to differentiate between actual fire signal and non-fire momentary/ noise signal.
The ionisation detector shall be the dual chamber design consisting of a measuring chamber
and a reference chamber connected to a solid state hermetically sealed electronic circuit. The
detector shall be listed to UL standard compatible with the proposed Fire Alarm System.
f)
Heat Detectors
Heat detectors shall be of a combination of fixed and rate-of-rise temperature type, suitable
for connection to the Fire Alarm System and shall be approved by Fire Safety
Bureau/department
They shall be of the recessed or surface mounted type to suit the locations where they are to
be installed. Combined rate-of-rise and fixed temperature heat detectors shall consist of two
independent thermistors, connected into a bridge circuit.
All electronic circuits must be solid state devices and hermetically sealed to prevent them
from being disturbed by dust, dirt or humidity. The detectors shall have no moving parts or
components subject to wear.
The response/activation of a detector shall be clearly visible from the outside by a red light
emitting diode (LED) of sufficient brightness. The installation shall include all necessary
wirings, end of line resistances, addressable module, etc.
All detectors shall be mounted such that the sensing element is not less than 25mm and not
more than 600mm below the ceiling or floor slab.
g)
Alarm Bells
All alarm bells shall be supplied and installed at a height to be determined at site.
The alarm bell shall be of continuous sounding type manufactured of 150mm diameter, unless
otherwise stated, pressed steel of pressure die-casting with enamelled red finishing.
Its base shall be aluminium cast and completely enclosed the vibrator mechanism, it shall be
waterproof and shall be suitable for outdoor mounting.
The Works Contractor shall ensure the requirements of the alarm bell system as described
below :
i)
In the event of an alarm activation of the zone circuits of a floor, the bells of the
particular floor shall sound automatically and immediately.
Page 227
PARKCITY

ii)
However, on receiving the alarm signal at the FIB, the alarm bells of all the other
floors shall be delayed in sounding at the preset time delay. The time delay shall be
easily and continuously adjustable at the MAP from 0 to 3 minutes.
iii)
There shall not be any time delay for the registration of alarm signal and the
activation of the alarm signalling functions of the MAP.
h)
Sub-Alarm Panel
A Sub-Alarm Panel shall be located at each Block/storey as shown on the Drawings. These
SAP's shall be constructed similar to the Main Alarm Panel and shall be of the stand-alone
type. In the event of the malfunctioning of the Fire Indicator Board or power failure, the
respective individual Sub-Indicator Board shall be fully functional. All boards shall be
analogue addressable type.
Each SAP shall be a distributed panel which can be fully stand-alone function with power
supply, charger/batteries, even disconnected from the MAP and other zones/floors SAP.
However, each floor shall has an indicating panel (Floor mimic with alarm and Fault LED
Indication for each alarm zone) as per Fire Safety Bureau/department requirement. Detail
design and drawings shall be submitted during the tender submission.
The mimic panel (Floor mimic c/w LED Indication) shall be made of colour perpex showing
the floor orientation. An audible alarm (buzzer) shall be provided.
Size of terminal shall be 300 mm diagonal display with adjustable tilt, 24 line, 80 character,
colour screen. Terminal shall automatic screen blanking after timed inactivity.
Keyboard shall be of the low profile, detachable type. It shall have standard typewriter layout
plus a 10 key numeric keypad, dedicated function keys. An audible alarm horn shall
incorporated.
The SAP shall have its own micro-processor, software, and memory capabilities and provide
indication for alarm and trouble/fault condition in each loop. All software (i.e. programmes
and data system configuration shall be held in non-volatile read only memories. The signal
display at each SAP shall be by means of LCD with minimum display capacity of 60
characters which are user definable. All alarm signal display shall include zone location and
point location in plain English text. The SAP shall also include strip printer and control
function by means of keypad. The SAP(S) shall be also capable of pier to pier communication
technology (ie. All panels shall be capable to transmit message globally round the secure
network).
For each circuit loop, each detector shall be self-verification indicated by the panel for reconfirmation before send out the fire alarm signal.
Test, acknowledge, alarm silence, re-set switches, local programming, switches or keypad
and buzzer shall be provided in each SAP whilst the mimic panel (Floor mimic) may allow
without the programming switches or keyboard facility.
The SAP shall be dust proof type and constructed from 1.6mm thick mild steel sheet. It shall
be of structurally rigid construction. All joints shall be neatly welded and finished flush. All
bars edges shall be turned over or lipped. The panel front shall be fitted with a lock under a
master key system.
System Software Performance
Page 228
PARKCITY

When an alarm is transmitted from a SAP to the Main Alarm Panel, the following sequential
function/commands shall be issued:
a.
If fire occurs, the particular fire zone or floor shall follow the
function/command as described in Standalone Sub-Alarm Panel (SAP)
paragraph.
b.
The master mimic panel of the Main Alarm Panel (MAP) shall show the fire
alarm floor or zone by lighting up the LED simultaneously. A beacon light
shall flash and remain flashing throughout the alarm condition.
c.
The printer shall print out the detail of the alarm, including the time, place and
what type of field device in operation.
d.
The Super VGA colour graphic LCD monitor shall show the fire zone or floor
plan, and the location of the fire alarm symbol shall be in flashing in red
colour. The operator shall also enable to choose the adjacent fire zone's floor
plans or the overall site plan by using a simple key-in action of keyboard or
click of the mouse.
e.
At the same time the Super VGA colour graphic LCD monitor shall also
display the instruction by text to guide the operator how to use the key-board
or mouse to obtain more fire alarm detail and further appropriate action (such
as, inform the maintenance team or security guard).
f.
The Main Alarm Panel shall :(i)Transmit a fire alarm signal to Public address system and trickler
the broadcasting of instruction to occupants after one minute of
continuous bell ringing.
(ii)Transmit a fire signal to the Fireman Intercom System to activate

the recording of all conversation make during the fire condition.
(iii)Transmit all signal/data to BMS control console (including pumps

status, tank water high/low level etc.).
(iv)Transmit all fire alarm signals and field devices status from SubAlarm Panels to Main Alarm Panel for monitoring purpose.
(v)Activation of Pre-Action Sprinkler System. (if any)
g.
Prior to resetting of the alarm messages, the system shall allow the operator
to define the cause of alarm and store in the system history file. The
following minimum operator or selectable causes of alarm shall be provided :
(i)
Deceptive alarm
(ii)
Malfunction alarm
Page 229
PARKCITY

(iii)
Operator error
(iv)
False response
(v)
Nuisance alarm
(vi)
Not definable
When the SAP received a confirmed fire alarm signal, the following sequential
function/commands shall be issued:
a.
Sound all the alarm bells in the building.
b.
Transmit the fire signal to the MAP.
c.
Transmit a fire signal to shut off the AHU and the fresh air intake fans of the
fire zone/floor.
d.
Transmit a fire signal to switch on the respective smoke free lobby fans,
staircase pressurisation fans, and smoke extraction system.
f.
Transmit a common fire alarm signal to BMS panel if any at the same floor.
g.
Transmit the fire signal to activate the Pre-Action Sprinkler System and total
gas flooding system (if any).
h.
To release the security door, fire shutter, automatic sliding doors, etc.
i.
Homing of lifts.
Within the system loop, control modules and monitoring modules shall be provided for the
hosereel and sprinkler flow switches and other contact-type input devices (such as AHU, fans
etc.). The SAP or MAP shall supervise the wiring between the control module and the device
being monitored.
j)
Printers
Printer shall be of the wide carriage type, with output of twelve characters per inch and 132
characters per line of paper, capable of using fan-fold paper. Printer shall have a minimum
operating speed of 120 characters per second.
8.3.6
Power Supply
a)
DC Power Supply Unit
Each Sub-Alarm Panels, Main Alarm Panel and Master Mimic Panel shall have its own
essential power supply and back-up batteries/chargers.
The supply mains shall be terminated on a switch inside the SAP, Main Alarm Panel and
Master Mimic Panel; and with one incoming double pole control fuse of adequate capacity to
meet the estimated maximum load.
Page 230
PARKCITY

In addition to the main AC supply, a stand-by battery shall be provided. The AC power
battery supply healthy indicating bulbs shall be provided on the SAP, Main Alarm Panel and
Master Mimic Panel.
The battery shall be of 24 volts heavy duty, nickel cadmium battery. It shall be of sufficient
capacity to maintain the system in continuous operation of not less than 24 hour. In addition,
it shall be capable of supplying the full & sufficient emergency evacuation alarm load for at
least two hour. It shall be completed with trickle and booster charger, and charging current
selector.
The battery shall be housed in a separate cubicle. A dummy load tester shall be provided for
testing the batteries.
Means shall be provided to prevent the battery from discharging through the charging
equipment in the event of its breakdown arising from a failure at the supply. Fault signal of
audible & visible alarm must be given in either event.
A minimum 3kV automatic voltage stabilizer shall be provided for the protection of the
microprocessing unit.
The system shall be designed for operation on 24 volts direct current. The power supply D.C.
battery system shall be Ni-Cd cells type and shall be complete with accessories for
continuous trickled-charge from A.C. mains with facilities for recharging the battery sufficiently
in 8 hr.
The capacity of the battery shall be such that it is capable of maintaining the system in normal
working condition for at least 24 hours and at the end of this period it shall be supplying
maximum alarm load for 10 minutes.
The battery charger shall be of the constant voltage type and capable of maintaining the
battery in an adequately charged condition while supplying the standing load of the alarm
system. A separate voltage regulating facility is recommended to ensure negligible tolerance
in the voltage supply to the system's load. It shall incorporate dual charging rates, one for
quick boosting and the other for trickle-charge. The unit shall be completed with output
voltmeters, charging ampere meter, D.C. fuses, switch fuses, relays, mains on lights, etc.
Means shall be provided to prevent the secondary batteries from discharging through the
charger in the event of a breakdown arising from a failure at the supply. It is desirable that a
fault signal shall be given in either case. In addition, there shall be a green panel light to
indicate normal power condition and a yellow panel light to indicate emergency power
operation. The control panel, battery charger and batteries shall be enclosed in an
appropriately ventilated compartment.
b)
Wiring
Wiring of the fire alarm system shall be exclusive to the Fire Alarm Installation and shall be
segregated and distinct from power and light circuits, and any other circuits. The wiring shall
be in accordance with the latest edition of Vietnam Standard TCVN 5738 .
Each group of detectors shall be separately wired and indicated on section-indicating-board.
The Works Contractor shall be responsible for all electrical works involved including supply
and installation of electrical accessories such as isolators, switches, plugs and sockets,
switch fuses, etc. to ensure safe operation and maintenance of the systems. All wiring shall
be run in accordance with the relevant rules and regulations.
2
The conductor of the cable shall have suitable cross-section not smaller than 1.5mm . As far
as possible loop wiring shall be used to avoid joining. All conduits shall be effectively earthed
throughout the building. A single phase 230 volts, 50 Hz A.C. emergency power supply will be
wired by others to a point adjacent to the Fire Indicator Board.
Page 231
PARKCITY

All pipes, conduits, hangers, supports, trunkings and all other work covered in this
Specification shall be cleaned down and given one priming coat and two finishing coats of
approved colour enamel paint as instructed by the ENGINEER.
c)
Cable Trunkings
Cable trunkings shall be manufactured from good quality epoxy coated mild steel sheet of not
less than 1.25mm thickness (18 SWG).
Trunkings shall be adequately supported by suitable brackets fabricated from mild steel flat
bar at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5 metres. Effective bonding to earth by copper links or
other approved means of all trunkings installed shall be ensured.
Sizes of trunkings shall be selected such that the number of wires to be installed shall not
exceed a space factor of 45%. Where wires follow the same route, they shall be bound
together in groups by means of retaining clips. For vertical runs, wires shall be supported by
supporting pins with insulating sleeves in addition to the retaining clips.
The Works Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed layout of the conduits and
trunkings. A detailed layout scheme is required for submission to the ENGINEER for approval
before any installation work is carried out.
8.3.7

The quality of materials and finishes and the performance of all components, devices and
equipment shall be adequate to meet the test requirement specified below and elsewhere and
to ensure satisfactory operation of the system :
a)
Vibration Test
Components shall be tested to ensure freedom from false operations or failure
through mechanical shock or vibration likely to be experienced in normal service.
b)
Insulation Test
The insulation between each current carrying part and all other current carrying parts
connected to any one circuit, together with all metal enclosures and metal parts of any
component shall withstand the application for one minutes a test voltage of 1000 volts
r.m.s. of approximately sine wave form at a frequency of 50 Hz. Immediately after this
test, the insulation resistance measured at 5000 volts d.c. shall not be less than 20
mega-ohms.
c)
Operation Test
The entire system shall be tested to ensure that it operates satisfactorily at the normal
voltage and at 90% of the normal voltage. Faults shall be simulated for the purpose of
testing the fault monitoring functions of the control unit.
All weights and pressure of refillable agent shall be checked and suitably recorded. All
costs for carrying out the necessary tests on the system shall be borne by the Works
Contractor, and all equipment necessary for the particular test shall be provided by
the Works Contractor.
8.5.
Fire Extinguishers
8.5.1.
General
Page 232
PARKCITY
8.5.2.
8.5.3.
This section of the Specification covers the supply, delivery and installation of the
various types of fire extinguishers for this project.
1.2
The location, type and capacities of all fire extinguishers are as indicated in the
Architectural Drawings.
1.3
All mounting brackets shall be of approved type suitable for the location where they
installed. The performance of all extinguishers shall be to the approved of the applicable
local authorities.
1.4
All Fire Extinguisher except for M & E plant rooms shall be provided with a steel cabinet
complete with a lock and key in a front glass panel enclosure. The cabinet shall be
manufactured from minimum (16 SWG) 1.6 mm gauge galvanised iron steel sheet using
folded sections. It shall be spray painted with a coat of anti-rust primer and two coats of
enamel paint of colour to Architect's approval.
Construction
2.1
The construction of each extinguishers must be such that it can be handled easily and is
simple to operate by any untrained personnel for extinguishing isolated.
2.2
Each extinguisher is to consist a sealed pressure charge with solid drawn alloy steel
body, a head assembly and discharge nozzle and safety devices to prevent accidental
discharge.
2.3
The external of each extinguisher shall be painted 'red' in accordance with BS 381C.
2.4
The necessary operating, maintenance and reloading instruction and date of last service
shall be clearly displayed permanently on the body.
CO2 Extinguishers
CO2 Extinguishers shall be manufactured to comply with BS 3326.
Dry Chemical Extinguisher

4.1
8.5.5.

1.1
3.1
8.5.4.
Dry powder chemical extinguishers shall be manufactured to comply with BS 3465.
BCF Extinguishers
5.1
BCF extinguishers shall be of approved type by Local Authorities.
8.6
Fire Hosereel System
8.6.1
Scope of Work
This Section of the Specification covers the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and
maintenance of an approved hydraulic hosereel riser system comprising :
i)
Tee-off from plumbing system with double check and double gate valves as shown on
Drawings.
ii)
Complete with all piping main, valves, fittings, cables, controls and necessary
accessories.
iii)
Supply and installation distribution pipes from plumbing system to all the hose-reels,
including all necessary fittings, connections, pressure reducing valves and
accessories.
Page 233
PARKCITY
iv)
8.6.2

Painting, tagging, shop drawings, As-built drawings, Testing and Commissioning and
etc.
System Description
The entire building shall be served by the hydraulic hose-reel system with certain nos. of
hose-reels at different locations as shown on drawings.
8.6.3
Water Supply
The water supply to the hose-reel system is by plumbing system. The pipe material shall be
heavy duty galvanized pipe.
8.6.4
Pumps
a)
Fire Hosereel Pumps

The Works Contractor shall supply and install UL listed Fire Hosereel Pumps in full
compliance to local authority requirement. The hosereel pumps shall be combined
with sprinkler pumps as allowed in TCVN 7336.
The pumps shall have adequate capacities to meet the pressure and flow
requirements of the system. All pumps shall be fully automatic in operation and shall
start when the pressure switch is actuated.
The pumps and motors shall be capable of operating in parallel, and each pump shall
have capacity to satisfy the pressure and flow requirements of the respective fire
sprinkler installation. Either of the two pumps can be a standby pump to the other
pump which will then be a duty pump. When the duty pump fails, the standby pump
shall cut in automatically.
8.6.5
Valves
All valves shall be UL listed/ FM approved type where applicable. All valves shall be located
in easily accessible positions for operation and repairs, and at a distance of no greater than
1.8 m above the finished floor level.
All valves shall be of the "right hand turn" type. Direction arrows shall be clearly marked on
the handwheels showing the direction of turn to close the valves.
a)
Gate Valve
Isolating gate valves shall be of cast iron, flanged ends, single piece casting with
valve seats and valve faces accurately machined. The gate valves shall be of the
Outside Screw and Yoke (OS & Y) type.
b)
Check Valve
Check valves shall be of the swing check type, of horizontal pattern with flanged ends
and a limit stop cast on it to prevent it from sticking in the opened position. The face
angle of the swing check shall be as near as practicable to the vertical when in the
closed position so that only a small pressure is required for it to swing open.
c)
Globe Valve
Page 234
PARKCITY

Globe valves up to 50 mm diameter shall be of bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem,
inside screw and handwheel type, with backseating capacity. Globe valves over 50
mm diameter shall be of iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, OS & Y and handwheel
type, with plug-type disc, flanged ends and renewable seat and disc.
8.6.6
Pipes, Fitting & Misc. Accessories
a)
Pipeworks And Fittings

All pipeworks shall be of galvanised steel pipes in accordance to BS1387
Pipes of 80 mm diameter and smaller shall be jointed with screwed joints, and pipes
larger than 80 mm diameter may be jointed by welding. Flanged or cut groove fittings
shall be used for valves and fittings where installation or removal is required.
All pipeworks shall be thoroughly wire brushed and given one coat of primer paint
prior to installation. Two coats of an approved enamel paint shall be applied after the
piping installation. All pipes shall be installed with the correct gradient so that the
entire piping system is self draining.
Where pipes pass through floors or walls which are required to be fire rated, the
opening in the construction around the pipe shall not exceed 25 mm average
clearance and shall be fire stopped by packing with non-combustible material to
prevent the passage of flame or smoke.
b)
Pipe Supports
All pipes and fittings shall be securely supported by steel hangers and brackets in a
manner that expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes will not
be hindered.
Anchor brackets shall be provided where necessary.
Pipe hangers and brackets shall be properly isolated, where necessary, to eliminate
vibration transmissions. Pipe hangers shall not be installed more than 600 mm from
each change of direction where possible.
Vertical runs of pipes shall be supported by clamps or collars suitably supported from
angles or channels which in turn shall be resting on special spring supports fixed to
the floor slab.
Pipes shall be supported at intervals not exceeding the following :
Table 7.(b)
Pipe Diameter
(mm)
Up to 25
32 to 50
65 to 100
Above 100
c)
Vertical Run (m)

2.5
3.0
4.5
4.5
Horizontal Run
(m)
2.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
Anti-Vibration Couplings/Flexible Joints

Piping connections to all pumps and all equipment shall be by means of wire, or
reinforced fabrics mounded with high pressure convoluted rubber connections unless
Page 235
PARKCITY

otherwise shown on Drawing. The fittings shall have integral rubber flanges and be
bolted onto the pipe lines using flanges for 50mm diameter and larger; for smaller
than 50mm diameter, connections shall be by means of high pressure hose clips and
sealed with rubber plastic. Approved cables shall be provided for fittings of 50mm
diameter and larger to limit expansion.
d)
Expansion Joints
When the pipeworks are passing through two different structures with different
foundations, expansion joints shall be installed at the junction points.
e)
Sediment Joints
When the underground pipeworks are running through the building from the outside
ground, sediment joint shall be installed to allow the relative sediment of the structure.
f)
Vibration Isolators
Spring-type vibration isolators shall be used for those inertia blocks and pumps.
Spring efficiency shall not less than 95%.
g)
Pressure Switches
Pressure switches shall be of the FM approved and UL listed type. Pressure switches
shall be of the bourdon-tube operating type and shall have adjustable set points with
an integral time delay device. Ranges shall be graduated in metric and shall not
exceed the anticipated maximum operating pressure by more than 50%.
h)
Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges shall conform to AS 180 - " Bourdon tube pressure and vacuum
gauges ". The maximum scale value of the gauge shall be about 150% of the
anticipated maximum operating pressure.
Provision shall be installed to enable each pressure gauge to be easily removed
without interruption to the installation. A stainless steel pulsation snubber shall be
used in conjunction with the pressure gauge.
In addition to pressure gauge locations, gun metal test valve of 10 mm or 15 mm size
shall be fitted on suction and delivery pipes or testing pumps.
i)
Strainers
Strainers of approved Y type shall be installed up-stream of all pumps. Strainer shall
be of pipe sizes with screwed bronze body for 50 mm and under and flanged steel
body for 65mm and over suitable for the service pressure encountered. All strainers
shall be complete with drain cocks and shall have removable bronze screens which
shall have a nett free area of not less than four times that of the pipe.
8.6.7

Upon completion of the piping installation, the pipeline shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5
times its working pressure, whichever is higher, for 2 hours without any pressure loss or
visible leakage detected during the test period.
Fire Hosereels shall also be tested on the 6 metre water throw.
8.7
Fire Hydrant Installation
Page 236
PARKCITY
8.7.1.

Scope Of Works
The Works covered by this Section of the Specification comprise the supply, installation,
testing, commissioning and maintenance of fire hydrant system complete with pipeworks,
valves and fittings. The entire installation shall conform to the latest regulation of Building
Code of Vietnam and SS CP 29 for Fire Hydrant Systems and Hose Reels.
8.7.2.
System Description
The building will be served by hydrants shown in the tender drawings.
8.7.3.
External Fire Hydrant Line

For external fire hydrant lines, the pipe shall be of ductile iron K9 to BS 4772 in accordance to
PUB regulation. The whole of the pipework sections shall be supported by bakau piles. Soil
result reports shall be referred to determine the piling method required.
Where necessary, piles shall be joined together to form lengths than those naturally available.
Such joints shall be designed to firmly secure the two sections and to bring the pile ends into
close contact for driving.
On completion of driving, all pile heads shall be sawn off to the required levels. Excavation
shall be trimmed from around the piles and the piles heads shall be freed from clay and other
soils. Bakau pile must be sound, straight, of uniform size with fresh, uninjured bark. These
shall be supplied in lengths of 2 m x 4 m, 7 m or 10 m as required, the lengths being
measured after the heads have been squared and the ends pointed. They must not be less
than 75 mm diameter at the thinner end and be of an approved species of timber for use as
piles in ground below the water table.
Bakau pile shall be driven straight in the correct position and to the full length of the piles or to
the lengths required by the Engineers. Incorrectly driven piles shall be duplicated at the
contractors expense.
a)
Underground Pipe Laying
All underground pipeline shall be laid in earth trenches of minimum 750 mm depth. The subcontractors shall be responsible for excavation, back-filling and making good the trenches. It
shall be assumed the contractors have inspected the site, the proposed routes of
underground pipelines and nature of the soil and have allowed for all necessary works in
connection therewith. Excavation of trenches shall be to straight lines required for the pipes
and beds as specified. The trenches should be wide enough to allow careful alignment of the
pipe and adequate working space for the layers and jointers.
The bedding for the pipe shall be thoroughly compacted. The pipes shall be laid evenly on
the barrel at the required level. There should be no hollows, voids or foreign material under
the pipe. Where pipe jointing holes are left in the bedding, particular care must be taken to
ensure complete and proper filling of the holes after pipe testing. Where pipes are to be laid
on rock formation, the excavation shall be taken to 150 mm below bed level and bed will then
be made up to its true line and level by refilling with 150 mm of consolidated material from the
excavation, well rammed and watered if necessary and as directed by the Engineer.
Where pipes are laid under roads, driveways or vehicle parking areas, continuous concrete
bed foundation using 1:2:4 concrete shall be provided. The concrete shall be well rammed or
vibrated and worked under and around the pipes to provide minimum 150 mm cover all round
the pipes. Similar concrete bedding and encasing shall be provided for each and every
change in direction of pipeline and at the joints; such encasement shall be of minimum 900
mm length before and 900 mm length after the change in direction. In any case, the
contractor shall provide for all necessary anchors to resist forces due to pumps, fiction,
Page 237
PARKCITY

change in direction, etc. All pipe joints shall be left exposed for inspection during the pressure
tests.
The trenches shall only be bottomed up immediately in advance of pipe lying but not pipes
shall be laid until a distance of at least 10 metres along the trench has been prepared and
bottomed up to receive the pipes. The trenches and joint holes shall be kept free from water
until the pipes are laid jointed and surrounded by concrete where required. No water from the
trenches will be allowed to enter the new pipes and no back-filling of trenches will be allowed
until the joints of the pipes have been tested, inspected and approved.
8.7.4.
Testing
Upon completion of the piping installation, the pipework shall be hydrostatically tested to 21
bars measured at the inlet for 30 minutes without any pressure loss or visible leakage
detected during the test period.
8.7
Service and Maintenance
8.7.1.
General
8.7.2.
This section of Specification covers the work involved in the regular maintenance
and/or breakdown service of equipment and pipework etc., installed under other
sections of this Specification.
The work shall be carried out in accordance with the schedule stated in this section
during the defects and liability period.
Schedule of Maintenance and Servicing

1
Inspection of equipment and pipework shall be carried out as stated below. All works
required under LPC, NFPA, shall also be performed. All the tests and inspections shall
be adequately recorded and kept in the maintenance office. Repair of fire protection/
detection system shall be accomplished immediately without delay/regards of when a
malfunction occurs to return the system to service in the shortest possible time.
(a)
Sprinkler
1.
2.
3.
Pumps
(i)
Lubricate pump and motor bearing.
(ii)
Adjust pump glands.
(iii)
Check all holding down bolts.
(iv)
Check all couplings and tighten as necessary.
Pipework and and Water Tank

(i)
Pipe system has to be inspected to ensure that they are in

operable condition and that adequate pressure is being
maintained.
(ii)
Tank shall be check and rectify for leakage
Operation of Pumps and Flow Test
Page 238
PARKCITY

(i)
Operation of pumps and flow test shall be carried out to

ensure a discharge of pump is achieved. Check operation of
flow switch. Check leakage (seals and glands) of control
value and rectify as necessary.
Hose Reel System
(a)
Check, service and rectify any defects in the water

supply system, including water tank, pipework, valves,
fittings, hose reels, etc.
(b)
Check, service and rectify any defects in the water

pumping system, including pumps, motor starters and
switchboards, control, etc.
(c)
Check, service and rectify any defects in the pressure

switches, gauges, etc.
(d)
Check the control interlocking system
Emergency Voice Communication System
(ii)
(a)
Check, service and rectify any defects in the Voice

Communication Panel, including all controls, visual
indicators, alarm sounding device, amplifiers, tone
generators, etc.
(b)
Check, service and rectify any defects in the

Recording System including all controls, etc.
(c)
Check, service, test and rectify any defects in the

Battery and Charger as per local authority
requirement.
(d)
Check, service, test and rectify any defects in the

speakers, telephone handsets, controls, relays, etc.
Fire Extinguishers
Check and service all fire extinguishers so that they are in
serviceable condition.
(iiiii)
Automatic Fire Alarm System

(a)
Simulate fire conditions by actual simulation of

detector groups using the detector tester and resetting
the installation to normal and confirming with the fire
services that the alarm signal is transmitted to the fire
station. Similarly, actuate manual breakglass pullstation for correct functional test to set off an alarm.
(b)
Check battery voltage and charging current in

accordance with manufacturer's instruction and
handbook.
(c)
Check batteries including terminals for cleanliness

and correct level of electrolyte in each cell to ensure
that they are in good serviceable condition.
Page 239
PARKCITY

(iv)
(d)
Conduct lamp test at the control unit to ensure all

indicating lights are operating correctly and replace if
faulty.
(e)
Check operation of all alarm sounders.
(f)
Check power supply failure facility by disconnecting

the mains and battery supply.
(g)
Check initiating facilities to operate control function

such as pressurization fans, homing of lifts, AHU etc.,
to ensure proper operation in the vent of fire situation.
(h)
Arrange for random test to check the operation of

approximately 20% of the fire detectors at site. The
selection of detectors shall be made in such a way
that all detectors in the installation are checked at
least once a year.
(i)
Visual inspection of electronic components/modules

to ensure clean and operative condition at all times.
(j)
Check the tightness of all screwed connections in the

panel.
(k)
Carry out any other tests and checks as required by

the Code of Practice or recommendations by the
manufacturer.
(l)
On completion of tests, check and ensure all blocking

buttons are returned to their normal operating
position.
(m)
Service report to be submitted at the end of service.
(n)
Notify the local fire brigade of the completion of the

testing.
(o)
To provide labour for replace/repair the faulty parts

found during the servicing.
(p)
Check the light indicators and repeater panels for

correct indication of alarm.
Electrical
Inspect all electrical equipment and test operation of control
and all alarm elements monthly.
(a)
Check all motor contacts and clean or replace as

necessary.
(b)
Check all protective devices such as one single

phasing protection and adjust or replace as
necessary.
(c)
Check all alarm systems and adjust/replace as

necessary.
Page 240
PARKCITY

(d)
Check condition of battery and battery charger unit in

good operational order.
(e)
Check all indicator and warning lights for proper

functioning by simulation of fault and fire conditions.
(f)
Check shut-down of electrical power supply for airconditioning units and any other associated
equipment during a simulated detection of fire.
(g)
Check and visually inspect condition of all electrical

components in the control panel, including resistors,
capacitors cable and wire connections. Check proper
functioning of supervisory circuits including fault
display indication for fault in the external circuit.
(h)
Check operation and effectiveness of power supply

failure facility by disconnecting the main supply from
the battery charger. Check the effectiveness and
sufficiency of the battery stand-by supply to perform
its intended function.
"Check" shall include for all visual inspection, recording of all necessary measurements
and fixed instrument readings and testing to ensure that the system is in efficient and
serviceable condition.
"Service" shall include for all adjustments, re-calibration, greasing, painting, cleaning,
changing of lubricant or coolant and testing to ensure that the system is maintained in
efficient and serviceable condition.
"Rectify" shall include for dismantling, replacement, re-installation, adjustments, testing,

painting, etc. to ensure that the system is put back into efficient and serviceable
condition.
The following regular maintenance and servicing internal shall be carried out:
(i)
Sprinkler System
Once a month
(ii)
Hose Reel System
Once a month
(iiiii)
Fire Alarm System
Once a month
(iiv)
Electrical
Once a month
(v)
Fire Extinguishers
Once a month
(vi)
Wet Test for Dry Risers shall be carried out annually
(vii)
Emergency Voice
Communication System
(viiiviii) Emergency Voice

Inter-communication System
6
Weekly/monthly
Weekly/monthly
The service provided in this contract shall include also for our response to 24 hour
emergency breakdown calls. The breakdown of equipment and installation shall be
Page 241
PARKCITY

deemed to have occurred when such euqipment or installation will not perform the
designed function.
7
The service provided in this contract shall include for attendance and provision of all
labour, equipment and instruments as required during normal testing of the Fire
Protection Installation as called for by the Authorities.
All tests, observations, readings, rectification works shall be fully recorded. A log book
shall be provided in the Building Maintenance Office and all reports and recordings
shall be entered into the book and to be signed and acknowledged by the Building
Maintenance Engineer.
All consumable material required for the carrying out of this Maintenance and Service
Contract, e.g. grease, lubricant, solvent, etc. shall be deemed to be included in the cost
quoted.
9.0
Swimming Pool Services
9.1.
General Scope of Work
9.1.1
The work to be performed under this contract consists of the supply, delivery, installation,
painting, testing and commissioning of the complete reticulation system and including but not
limited to the followings :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Filtration System
Pipework Installation
Pump & heat pump Installation
Chemical Dosing Installation
Underwater Luminaries & Associated Electrical Installation
Accessories & pool cleaning equipment
All necessary applications & arrangement with the relevant authorities for System
approval & obtaining of License for operation
9. 2.
Rules and Regulations
9.2.1
The whole of the works covered by this specification shall be carried out strictly in compliance
with the requirements, Code of Practice, Regulations & Bye-Laws of the following :
a)
b)
c)
d)
Sewerage Department, Ministry of the Environment

PUB Water Department
PowerGrid Electricity Department
All other Authorities having jurisdiction over the installation of equipment and the
carrying out of this Contract works in the locality.
Page 242
PARKCITY

9.2.2
The contractor shall apply for and obtain all necessary certificates and approval for the work
done from the relevant authorities and shall lodge same with the Architect before final
payment can be made.
9.3.
Specification
9.3.1
This Specification is intended to set out in general outline the minimum requirements and
standards of installation for the various units of equipment and works it covers. Provision set
out, or claim made in the successful tender which are in excess of, or improved upon the
basic requirements of the Specification shall unless otherwise determined by the Architect
become part of the requirements of the Specification whether or not they are subsequently
incorporated in addenda to the Specification.
9.3.2
The Architect shall be the sole judge of what constitutes an improvement upon or exceeds the
requirements of the Specifications.
9.3.3
The Specification shall be read in conjunction with the drawings (as per schedule of drawings)
and are intended to be mutually explanatory and complementary to one another. All works
and specification called for by one, i.e. specification or drawings even if not by the other shall
be fully executed and complied with into.
9.4.
Material and Workmanship
9.4.1
Unless expressly stated to the contrary, all materials and equipment supplied by the
Contractor shall comply with the applicable Singapore Standards (S.S.) or British Standards
(B.S.) Specifications.
9.4.2
Where a standard is referred to, that standard shall be the latest published edition thereof,
unless otherwise stated.
9.4.3
All materials and equipments supplied shall be new and of the best type for each particular
purpose and of the first quality as regard design, manufacture and performance.
9.4.4
The equipment and materials shall be suitably designed and constructed for safe, proper and
continuous operation under all conditions described or implied in this Specification without
undue heat, strain, vibration, corrosion or other operating difficulties.
9.4.5
Unless otherwise specified, the equipment and material within the scope of this Specification
shall be of a standard proven design. Design incorporating components which may be
considered prototype in nature will not be accepted.
9.4.6
Equipment and equipment components shall be designed and supported to permit free
expansion and contraction without causing excessive strains, distortion or leakage.
9.4.7
Parts subject to wear, corrosion or other deterioration, or requiring adjustment, inspection or

repair shall be accessible and capable of reasonably convenient removal, replacement and
repair. All such parts shall be suitable material for keeping maintenance to a minimum.
9.4.8
The equipment shall be designed to permit interchange ability or parts and ease of access
during inspection, maintenance and repair.
9.4.9
Vibration, noise, mechanical and thermal stresses and susceptibility to corrosion and erosion
shall not be greater than with similar plant of first class design and workmanship operating
under similar conditions.
Page 243
PARKCITY

9.4.10 All works shall be carried out in accordance with the best engineering practice by experienced
tradesmen of appropriate grades to the approval of the Architect.
9.4.11 Where disagreement occur between the drawings and the specifications or within either
document itself, then item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantities, or higher cost
shall be deemed to be included in this Contract.
9.5.
Shop Drawings
9.5.1
Immediately upon the award of the Contract shop drawings shall be prepared and submit to
the Architect for approval all plant and equipment and installation layout drawings.
9.5.2
These drawings shall cover complete details for the following :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Operation loading of all items of plant, equipment and accessories.

Dimensions of all plant, equipment and accessories.
Equipment room layout, showing all clearances for operating and servicing.
Control equipment and systems, wiring and control diagrams and power requirements.
Vibration Isolation Equipment.
Hangers and supports.
Foundations.
Chases, drains, openings in walls, floors, roof slbs and beams.
Piping, ducting and electrical cable runs.
All other items as is reasonably required by the Architect.
9.5.3
These layout drawings shall be based generally on the Architect's drawings, modified only as
required to suit the specified materials and equipment to be provided, to fit in with the latest
available information on building construction details and the requirements of other services
and equipment and also to incorporate any improvements proposed by the Contract.
9.5.4
The drawings shall be drawn by fully qualified draughtsmen with experience in Swimming
Pool Installation Works. The drawings shall be done in ink, and shall be neat and clearly
legible.
9.5.5
The drawings shall be drawn in the same scale as the tender drawings. Details shall be
drawn on larger scales. Where applicable, symbols the same as those shown in the tender
drawings shall be used and all other symbols shall conform with the acceptable local drafting
practice.
9.5.6
Legends for all symbols shall be shown.
9.5.7
Three (3) copies of each shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. Drawings with
inadequate details and not conforming to the requirements as stated above will not be
considered.
9.5.8
It is the onus of the Contractor to ensure that his drawings conform to the requirements of the
Specification and that they are approved by the Architect early.
9.5.9
Inspection of shop and working drawings is not to be considered as a guarantee of

measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are inspected and approved by the
Architect, such approval does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility nor
from the necessity of furnishing material or performing work required by the drawings and
specifications which shall in the event of a dispute, take precedence over shop drawings.
9.6.
As-Built Drawing & Operation Maintenance Manual
Page 244
PARKCITY

9.6.1
Prior to the completion of the works, and not later than the date of Completion Certificate, the
Contractor shall submit to the satisfaction of the Architect three (3) copies of Comprehensive
Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data Sheets published by the equipment
manufacturers, bound into sets together with the same number of bond sets of 'As-Installed'
drawings.
9.6.2
Failure on the part of the Contractor to submit the above to the reasonable satisfaction of the
Architect, shall thereby forfeit the Contractor's right to further payment and the issue of the
Completion Certification will also be withheld until he has so complied accordingly.
9.6.3
These instruction manuals shall be typed on good quality paper and neatly bound into a
manual having rigid covers. A draft shall be approved before final submission.
9.6.4
The manuals shall contain and be set out as follows :

a)
Description of System
This section shall simply but clearly describe the operation of the system and
equipment.
b)
Operational Procedure
This section shall fully described start and stop sequence and testing procedures for
all sections of the plant, including emergency procedures and breakdown troubleshooting.
c)
Equipment Supplies
This section shall comprise a full list of names, addresses and telephone numbers
(including after-office hours numbers) of all Contractors and Supplies of equipmentincorporated in the installation.
d)
Maintenance & Breakdown Service

This section shall comprise a list of the names and telephone numbers of the
Company's Maintenance and Servicing Section personnel for normal maintenance
and breakdown request.
e)
Equipment Details
This section must include all details of equipment used e.g. pulley sizes, shaft
diameters, belts sizes, motor frame numbers, etc.
f)
Maintenance Requirements
Include manufacturer's technical literature on all components of the installation,
particularly as applying to operation and maintenance.
g)
As-Built Drawings
Include all shop drawings and final layout drawings.
h)
Spare Parts List

Include manufacturer's list of all spare parts for replacement.
i)
Manufacturer's Handbooks
Page 245
PARKCITY

Include Manufacturer's technical literature on all components of the installation,

particularly as applying to operation and maintenance.
9.7.
Provision of Works by Others
9.7.1
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to advise, check and confirm that the works listed
above are provided to his requirements during the course of building construction. Failure on
the part of the Contractor to ensure that any or all of these services are provided will result in
the Contractor having to carry out the respective works at his own expense.
9.7.2
The Contractor shall liaise closely with the Main Contractor for such provisions and
communicate all his requirements well in advance and conforming to the Main Contractor's
construction programme.
9.7.3
The setting out and installation of all pipelines and associated works shall follow closely the
approved drawings except where on site variations are approved by the Architect.
9.7.4
The Contractor will at all times be fully responsible for the correct positioning and installation
of all work and equipment installed by him in accordance with the specification and in
consultation and co-operation with all other trades.
9.7.5
The Contractor shall, prior to the pouring of concrete, furnish for the approval of the Architect
drawings showing the details and locations of all coreholes to be cast into beams, floor slabs,
walls etc.. No coreholes shall cut through any structural member without the approval of the
Architect.
9.7.6
The coreholes shall be fixed and their accuracy ascertained prior to commencement of
concreting. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for their proper fixing and the
accuracy of their locations. Any errors arising shall be rectified at Contractor's expense.
9.8.
Jointing of Pipes
9.8.1
The method of jointing for the various pipes used shall be as described hereinafter in the
appropriate sections of the Specification.
9.8.2
Where differential movement my occur between two sections of a system, or where excessive
expansion and contraction may take place, flexible connections shall be used, irrespective of
whether they are shown in the drawings or not.
9.8.3
Flexible connections shall be of stainless steel bellow type or moulded rubber type to suit the
duty and temperature requirement of the fluid conveyed in the pipe. They shall be complete
with restraining tie-rods and shall be of approved make.
9.8.4
Adequate number of flanged or union connections shall be proved, especially in plant rooms,
service ducts and adjacent to fixtures so as to facilitate removal of the pipe and equipment for
inspection or repair.
9.8.5
Where pipes cannot be jointed by standard fittings they shall be jointed using "VICTAULIC"
coupling systems or approved equivalent.
9.9.
Fixing of Pipes
9.9.1
All piping installed under this Contract shall be sufficiently supported with hangers, supports,
beam clamps, clips, inserts and mounting devices suitable for the type of paperwork.
Provision for expansion of piping shall be allowed when locating pipe hangers.
Page 246
PARKCITY

9.9.2
In general hangers shall be of individual type with provision for vertical adjustment.
9.9.3
Where structure members are pre-stressed, hangers of the type such as Channel Iron or
Unistrut shall be installed in the structure members before the pouring of concrete.
9.9.4
If this is not practicable due to site condition, the Channel or Unistrut shall be secured to the
structure by means of anchor bolts or power driven bolts at locations where the prestressed
tendons are not affected.
9.9.5
All piping from pumping equipment shall be effectively isolated from vibration. Spring isolator
type of supports shall be installed within 5 metres from the pumping equipment and neoprene
isolation pad insert shall be provided between the fixing clamp or holderbar and the pipe for
the remaining pipeline.
9.9.6
The type of vibration isolators to be used shall be submitted together with the shop drawings
of the pumping equipment to the Architect for approval.
9.9.7
Where pipes pass through wells or floors asbestos cement or pipe sleeves shall be provided.
9.9.8
These shall be extended through the full finished thickness of the well or floor and be secured
against movement.
9.9.9
Gaps between the pipe sleeve and the pipe shall be filled up with high density fibreglass and
caulked with bituminous compound and finish flush to the face of the pipe sleeve.
9.9.10 All fixings, hangers, holder-bats, brackets, etc. shall be of mild steel. Where the fixings,
hangers, holder-bats, brackets, etc. are installed outdoor, or exposed to the weather or in wet
areas; they shall be hot dipped galvanised to BS 729 or equivalent.
9.9.11 They (whether galvanised or not) shall be painted with an anti-rust primer and given the same
finish as the piping.
9.9.12 A PVC insert must be provided for between PVC pipe and the pipe clip and copper pipe and
the pipe clip.
9.9.13 The spacing of fixings or brackets shall not exceed the following :
Typing of Piping
Copper
* Cast Iron or Galvanised

PVC Lined Pipe
UPVC
Size of Pipe (Internal Interval for horizontal Interval for vertical

dia. mm)
(run in metre)
(run in metre)
15
20
25
32
40
50
75
100
150 or over
50
75
100
150 or over
19 - 25
50 - 75
100 - 125
150 or over
1.2
1.8
1.8
2.4
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.0
3.6
1.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.9
1.2
1.5
1.8
1.8
2.4
2.4
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.6
3.6
4.2
1.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.8
2.1
2.4
3.0
Page 247
PARKCITY

* At least one fixing must be provided for each unit length.

9.9.14 All fixing shall be carefully aligned and spaced. In the case of horizontal drainlines, the fixings
shall be so constructed as to enable proper adjustment in the height of the pipeline to be
effected.
9.9.15 Typical details of piping supports required are as shown in the drawings. These shall be
complied with unless otherwise approved by the Architect.
9.9.16 All bolts, nuts, screws and fastenings for the Swimming Pool Installation shall be of stainless
steel type.
9.10
Testing of services
9.10.1 The Contractor shall allow in this tender price for the cost of all acceptance tests required as
hereinafter specified or as required by the authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
9.10.2 All pipework which are to be encased or concealed shall be tested and approved before they
are finally enclosed.
9.10.3 The Contractor shall give the Architect seven (7) days notice of his readiness to carry out
acceptance tests and shall submit for his approval a complete and detailed schedule of his
tests to be carried out.
9.10.4 Before the commencement of acceptance tests, the Contractor shall have brought the
installation to a state of practical completion and shall have completed all of his preliminary
testing and adjusted the equipment to its proper running order.
9.10.5 During the testing period no modification, adjustments or other work on the installation shall
be carried out without the permission of the Architect. Should there be any contravention of
this requirement, the results of all tests completed may be rejected and a re-test ordered.
9.10.6 No acceptance test shall be carried out except in the presence of the Architect or their
representatives appointed for the purpose.
9.10.7 Should the installation fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the specification
and/or authorities, the Architect may reject the whole or any part of it.
9.10.8 The testing period shall form part of the control period and no extension of time will be
granted by reasons of any extension of the testing period to permit rectification, modification,
adjustment of retesting of the installation except where testing has been delayed or retesting
has been necessitated by circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor.
9.11.
Authorities Clearance for TOP and CSC
9.11.1 On completion of the whole of the installation works, the Contractor shall obtain from the
relevant authorities a certificate stating that the works have been carried out to its approval
and shall lodge the certificate with the Architect for his obtaining of Temporary Occupation
License (TOL).
9.11.2 Pool Licensing Application & Obtaining Authority Clearance
The Contractor is also responsible for the application, arrangement and carrying out of all
tests and inspections required by the relevant authorities for his installation works for
obtaining the pool operation license and Certificate of Statutory Completion (CSC).
Page 248
PARKCITY

9.11.3 The Contractor is to note that his tender price shall deem to include for this requirement.
9.12.
Pool Equipment
9.12.1 This section of the Specification covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing and
commissioning of the Swimming Pool Filtration Plant and the associated piping system and
accessories or parts.
9.12.2 All works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of relevant Government
Authorities and Statutory Bodies, the following Specification with regard to design,
construction, testing and performance.
9.12.3 The Contractor shall deemed to have carried out relevant detailed calculations of the filtration
and chemical treatment system to ensure that the capacity of the equipment selected and
offered is sufficient for the installation. No extra cost will be entertained should the capacity
required exceeds the specified capacity.
9.12.4 The Contractor shall pay all fees and obtain approvals from all relevant authorities.
9.12.5 The purification/filtration plant offered shall be of an approved make, consisting of all
necessary items of equipment to provide an efficient system in both operation and
maintenance. The filters, circulation water pump, disinfectant and chemical feeders, flow
indicators, gauges, pipework system and all related accessories and parts of the water
purification/filtration. System shall be kept in good working condition so as to maintain the
water in a clear and disinfected condition, with no variation in the rates of filtration and
backwash. Generally the performance of the system shall comply with the following
requirements :
(a)
The colour of the water as determined in Hazen Unit shall not exceed 5.
(b)
The pool shall be continuously disinfected by a chemical which imparts a residual

effect of not less than as indicated below :
Chlorine
Other Halogens
.........
.........
1.00 ppm
At a level approved by the Environment Public
Health Division, ENV
(c)
Hydrogen concentration shall be maintained within P.H. 7.2 to 7.4.
(d)
Rate of filtration shall not exceed the following values :

2
Diatomaceous Earth Filter - 100 litres/m /min.
(e)
If copper sulphate is used as an algacidal agent, the concentration of copper sulphate

determined as copper shall not exceed 0.2 mg/litre.
(f)
The bacteriological quality of the water shall be :
(g)
(i)
No samples of water shall contain any coliform organisms in 100 millilitres of

the sample.
(ii)
A sample of the water shall not contain more than 200 bacteria per millilitres
0
as determined by the 24 hour plate count at 37 C or by the membrane filter
method.
Other health and safety requirements as imposed by relevant authorities and

statutory bodies.
Page 249
PARKCITY
9.13.

Datomaceous Earth (DE) Filter Plant
9.13.1 The DE filter plant specified under this section shall be of the pressure diatomaceous earth
type. The filter plant shall be a product of a company regularly engaged in manufacture of
water filtration equipment with a minimum of ten years experience in manufacturing filtration
equipment for public swimming pools.
9.13.2 The filter plant shall consist of a filtering unit, face piping, cast bronze unitrol valve, injection
moulded hydraulic distribution system and element grid gauges, and air relief valve all of
which shall be manufactured and assembled on a structural pedestal.
9.13.3 The filter plant shall be designed with valves to permit easy and expeditious reverse flow
backwashing.
2
9.13.4 The filter shall operate at 1 gpm/ft of filtering area.

9.13.5 The filter tank shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel or of moulded heavy duty
polymer.
9.13.6 All piping shall be through the side of the filter unit in order that the lid may be freely removed
without any piping disassembly.
9.13.7 The filter tank shall be designed for a 200 pound minimum bursting pressure and tested at 75
psi in accordance with the (NSF) National Sanitation Foundation requirements.
9.13.8 The element assay shall consist of injection moulded filter element grids, collection manifold,
supported manifold, tie rods and effluent piping all or which shall be of non-corrosive
structural materials.
9.13.9 The element grids shall consist of an injection moulded high impact styrene core with a plain
weave polypropylene filter fabric septum. The fabric shall have a porosity of 40 CFM per
sq.ft.. The fabric shall be double heat stitched on the outer perimeter to provide a taut
covering.
9.13.10 All piping required for the operation of the filter plant shall be included. Piping shall consist of
cast bronze unitrol valve connected by S.S. band clamps. The operation of the filter and
backwash cycle may be accomplished by the simple manipulation of the valve handle. The
unitrol filter control valve shall be fully ported with positive sealing 0-rings on the piston discs.
The unitrol valve shall be connected to the tank with band clamps for easy removal. The filter
shall be connected to the pump by means of a stainless steel pump connector, ordered
separately.
9.14.
Piping , Valves And Fittings
9.14.1 All work, whether shown on the drawing or specified shall be installed in an approved manner
to meet structural and architectural conditions and to provide adequate space and access for
maintenance and servicing.
9.14.2 All pipework must be constructed that the effects of contraction and expansion will not
damage any other work or the pipework itself.
9.14.3 Special care shall be taken in the arrangement of piping to ensure a neat and workmanlike
appearance, true alignment and grade.
9.14.4 All pipes and fittings shall be in stainless steel, new of approved manufacture and shall be
thoroughly cleaned before erection and flushed out removing all scale, burrs, fins and
obstructions prior to start-up.
Page 250
PARKCITY

9.14.5 The arrangement of valves and fittings shall be such that the number of joints is a minimum.
9.14.6 Horizontal runs of piping shall, where practicable, be graded down in the direction of flow and
drained at low points. All pipework, either surface or underground, shall be of properly
supported in accordance with recommended practice.
9.14.7 Exposed runs of piping shall be supported so that a clear space of not less than 150mm is left
between the pipe and the nearest wall or ceiling surface.
9.14.8 Bends in all piping shall have a radius not less than five times the diameter. If this radius
cannot be obtained, alternative bends of approved type shall be used.
9.14.9 Only factory manufactured fittings shall be used. Locally welded, of formed fittings shall not
be used. In particular heating to form sockets will not be allowed. In the filter plant room,
pipes of 50mm and larger shall be flanged joint.
9.14.10 Adequate number and proper types of valves shall be provided as necessary and shall not be
limited to those shown on the drawings and diagrammatic arrangements for the satisfactory
operation and maintenance of the systems.
9.14.11 Valves shall be placed in accessible positions for ease of operation and maintenance. The
size of valve shall be of the same diameter as the pipe to which it is connected between each
valve and adjacent piping or equipment shall be with flanges to permit removal of the valve.
9.14.12 All valves shall be manufactured to B.S. 1010, 1212, 1218, 1923, 2591, 4090 or equivalent
approved according to the service required. Specimen samples shall be submitted for
approval before use. Valves selected shall be of medium pressure range type for a working
pressure of 150 psi.
9.14.13 Gates valves or butterfly valves shall be used throughout except where throttling is required,
when ball valves or globe valves shall be installed. Ball valves or lubricated plug cocks may
be used where water system valves are to be adjusted to fixed setting in order to achieve
system balances.
9.14.14 Ball valves and lubricated plug cocks shall be incorporated with indicating dials to facilitate
balances.
9.14.15 All globe and gate valves 2" and smaller shall be of the screwed bronze body type, 2-1/2"
through 3" flanged bronze body type and over 3" flanged cast-iron body type all of which shall
be provided with internal spindle.
9.14.16 All check valves, horizontal or vertical, 2" and smaller shall be screwed bronze type, 2-1/2"
and above flanged cast iron body type, unless otherwise shown on drawings. Vaiver and
check valves to overflow pipe shall be installed as per latest MOE requirement and easily
accessible for servicing/dismantling later.
9.14.17 Pressure relief valves shall be the spring loaded type with bronze trim and shall be installed
where necessary.
9.14.18 Automatic air vents shall be installed at the top of each loop in all pipework. Vents shall be
valved at hand height and discharges shall be fitted with copper tundishes and pipework of
appropriate size to the nearest drain pipe or floor drain.
9.14.19 Air vents of approved type shall be installed at the top of all filters and pump casings.
9.14.20 Pot type strainers shall be installed down-stream of all water pump units as shown in
drawings.
Page 251
PARKCITY

9.14.21 All strainers shall have removable bronze screens and shall be arranged with isolating valves
so that the strainer may be cleaned without draining the system. Mesh sizes shall be to
recommendation of valve manufacturer and to suit the equipment installed. Strainers shall be
of pipe size with bronze bodies rated for 150 psi hydraulic service and equipped with easily
removed cover for access to the sediment basket which shall have a net free mesh area of at
least four times that of the pipe. All the outlets in scum drain shall be fitted with noncorrosible hairlink strainer basket.
9.14.22 All fittings shall be cast or forged steel conforming to pressure service rendered and of best
quality manufacture.
9.14.23 Piping connection to all pumps shall be by means of wire or fabric reinforced moulded high
pressure convoluted rubber connectors. The fitting shall have integral rubber flanges and be
bolted onto the pipeline using flanges for 50mm diameter and larger; for smaller than 50mm
diameter connections shall be by means of high pressure hose clips.
9.15.
Pressure Test
9.15.1 On the completion of the pipework, hydrostatic pressure test shall be applied and held for
twenty-four hours. The piping test pressure to be applied shall be 150 psig. In the event of
any drop of pressure during the test periods, the leaks shall be found, made good and the line
retested. Pressure shall not show a drop of more than 2% in twenty-four hours.
9.16.
Eyeball Inlet-fittings
9.16.1 Variable orifice 'Eyeball' inlet fittings shall consist of an ABS body, ball adaptor, ball retainer,
directional ball type nozzle and variable orifice inserts.
9.16.2 The body shall have an 1-1/2" inches external thread to connect to a standard PVC coupling.
9.16.3 The directional ball shall be secured to the ball adaptor body with a ball retainer and have an
adjustment of 450C off centre line in any direction.
9.16.4 The directional ball shall have a 25mm diameter orifice.
9.17.
Pressure Gauge/ Vacuum Gauges
9.17.1 Pressure gauge shall be 100mm in diameter (0-60 psi) reading (with readings in metric and
imperial units) and bottom connection. Gauge shall consist of a Bourdon tube element and
linkage to indicator.
9.17.2 Vacuum gauges shall be similar to Pressure gauges, (0.30 inches) vacuum reading.
9.18.
Flow Meter
9.18.1 The Flow Meter shall consist of a Pitot type tube, a tapered transparent Rotameter tube, an
indicator rider, calibrated scale far direct reading in both litres per minute and gallons per
minute, and a bronze air release valve.
9.18.2 The maximum reading shall be 50% more than the required flow rates.
9.18.3 The pitot tube shall be of proper length width threaded connection for installation in the pipes.
9.18.4 The metering tube shall be tapered and shall contain a brass guide rod on which is mounted a
bronze indicator rider for accurate flow readings.
Page 252
PARKCITY

9.18.5 The flow meter shall be installed at the recommended distances from bends, valves, tapers,
tees, etc..
9.19.
Hydrostatic Relief Valve
9.19.1 The hydrostatic relief valve shall consist of a cast bronze body and valve plate complete with
valve seat gasket, brass top cover plate and a 500mm UPVC water collection tube.
9.19.2 The water collection tube shall be approximately 400mm long with 10mm seepage holes and
shall be screwed to the valve body. The hydrostatic relief valve shall be designed to seal with
minimum pressure and shall have a non-plugging self-cleaning raised valve seat.
9.20.
Electrical Works
9.20.1 The following electrical works shall form part of the contract :
(a)
Power Supply
The power supply shall be of 400V/230V 3-phase 4 wire and earth 50Hz system.
Feeder cables shall be of PVC insulated cables or as-shown in the drawings.
Switchgear shall be of moulded case circuit breakers, adequately rated to take full
load and fault currents. Earth leakage circuit breaker shall also be provided.
(b)
Switchboard
Switchboard shall be of total enclosed, wall mounted cubicle type. It shall be
constructed of 16 gauge sheet supported by angle steel. All joints shall be neatly
welded and finished flush. The construction shall be vermin proof. Instruments and
meters shall be provided as shown. Switchgear used shall be of moulded case circuit
breakers of approved manufacturer.
All metal works shall be rust-proofed and primed and finished with two coats of gloss
enamel paint of approved colour. Switchboard shall be fabricated by approved
manufacturer.
(c)
Wiring
All wiring shall be carried out in PVC/PVC cables in heavy gauge galvanized conduit
and/or trunking for surface services and PVC conduit in underground service. All
metal shall be finished with two coats of gloss enamel paints.
All equipment exposed to weather shall be or weather-proof type.
(d)
Underwater Lighting Luminaries

Underwater lighting luminaries shall be of approved make and suitable for operation
on 1-Phase 12V supply through a double would isolating transformer with centre tap.
Earth leakage circuit breaker shall be provided to trip the circuit in the event of a earth
leakage condition. Installation of underwater lighting fittings shall be in accordance
with normal recommended method which emphasis on maximum safety precaution.
The fittings shall comply with the followings :
(i)
Features
Page 253
PARKCITY

The light shall be designed to operate only when fully submerged. It shall
consist of a copper light housing assembly with an integral low water 'safety
sensor' probe, heat resistant, glass lens, porcelain lamp base and light bulb.
(ii)
Housing
Light housing shall be formed copper with a bronze electrical cable sealing
gland and a threaded brass adaptor for attaching the low water 'safety
sensor' probe. The clear lens shall consist of heat resistant glass designed to
0
0
focus the light beam in a 30 horizontal arc, with a 15 downward deflection.
Less shall be secured to the housing by means of a chromed plated, cast
bronze facing ring. Lens shall be notched to receive ten clamping bolts so as
to provide uniform holding pressure against the lens between the face ring
and the light housing. A seal shall be effected by means of a moulded onepiece wrap around lens neoprene gasket.
(d)
Underwater Lighting Luminaries (Cont'd)

(iii)
Switching Circuit
A solid state switching circuit shall be attached to a porcelain, medium base
socket, both of which shall be secured inside the light housing and shall be
provided with two power terminals and ground wire connection. After
assembly, the lamp base, solid state switching circuit and cord terminals shall
be encapsulated to water-proof all connections.
(iv)
Light Niche
A light niche shall be formed stainless steel with a 13mm (1/2"), 20mm (3/4")
or 25mm (1") I.P.S. bronze or stainless steel conduit connection and shall be
provided with a cast bronze mounting ring. The mounting ring shall have a
locking lug to match the bottom of the light Face ring 2nd at the top surface
shall be provided with a tapped boss to receive a vandal proofing securing
screw. All electrical supply cable and wirings either surface or concealed
shall be enclosed in conduit as specified. Bulb shall be of medium base
energy saving tube 500W/300W 12V flood light and shall be of approved
made and UL listed. It shall be designed for use with snap-in colour kit
lenses.
(e)
Electric Motors
(i)
Fractional horsepower Motors shall be 230/1PH, squirrel-cage, Class E

insulation, except where otherwise indicated or specified. If 3-phase motors
are used, they shall be 400V 50Hz.
(ii)
From 1HP through 2HP Motors, they shall be 230V single phase, squirrelcage Class E insulation except where otherwise indicated or specified. If 3phase motors are used, they shall be 400V 50Hz.
(iii)
From 3HP through 10HP, they shall be 400V/3-phase, 1450 rpm, Class E
insulation, squirrel-cage, with automatic star-delta start, ball or roller
bearings.
(iv)
Above 10HP motors shall be of 400V/3-phase, squirrel-case, Class E

insulation roller bearings, reduced voltage start limiting the starting current to
150%. F.L..
Page 254
PARKCITY
9.21.

Maintenance Equipment
9.21.1 A set of water testing equipment shall be provided to determine the residual chlorine and pH
value of the treated water. The equipment shall comprise of a calorimetric comparator with
the necessary glass test tubes, colour discs, and the necessary indicator solution. The
equipment shall be contained in a robust portable case suitable for carrying out field tests.
Indicator solutions shall be supplied by Contractor for testing of at least six months.
9.21.2 The Contractor shall supply a suction sweeper comprising :
(a)
Electrical Motor and Centrifugal Pump mounted on an all-steel trolley with rubber
types, pull handle and automatic brakes. The pump shall be self-priming or provided
with hand priming attachment. The motor shall be for 230 volts single phase
operation and 200 feet length of electric cord shall be supplied pump capacity, motor
type and horse-power shall be stated.
(b)
Armoured Suction Hose in convenient lengths for fitting together with swift-action
brass couplings giving a total length of 20 metres and two white plastic floats per
section of hose. Delivery hose shall be similar and of total length of 20 metres.
(c)
Suction Sweeper with housing of corrosion-proof metal alloy mounted on rubber tyres
with Nylon brush and replaceable skirt of rubber squeegee and 30 metres length of
12mm diameter nylon tow rope securely fastened to the housing one on either side.
The squeegee shll be capable of automatically adjusting itself to clean in the direction
the sweeper is towed.
(d)
16 ft. telescope handle.
1 set of Algae brush and 1 set of wall/floor brush shall be provided.

9.21.3 The Contractor shall include in this tender a priced list of tools and recommended spares
which shall be required within three-years of operation, for all items of equipment supplied by
him.
9.22.
Balancing , Testing & Commissioning
9.22.1 The Contractor shall provide a complete set of testing equipment.

9.22.2 The whole of the instruments, equipment and labour required for conducting these tests and
demonstrations shall be provided by the Contractor and the cost thereof included in the
tender amount. At all times the test instruments and equipment shall remain the property of
the purchaser.
9.22.3 After completion of the works, the Contractor shall, as and when directed by the Architect
arrange to demonstrate to him that the installation is adjusted and regulated correctly to fulfill
the function for which it has been designed. The Contractor shall adjust, balance and
regulate until the required conditions are obtained before calling upon the M&E Engineer to
witness the performance.
9.22.4 When the preparatory test have been concluded successfully and the Contractor has notified
the Architect that the installation is ready to work, each section of the installation will be
required to operate either continuously or intermittently as may be required without failure of
any kind for a period of one calendar week before the 'Certificate of Practical Completion' will
be issued.
9.22.5 Should any failure occur due to, or arising from faulty fitting, materials or workmanship but
otherwise sufficient to prevent the commercial use of the installation, the reliability test period
Page 255
PARKCITY

of one calendar week shall be recommended after the Contractor has remedied the cause of
failure the satisfaction of the Architect.
9.22.6 The onus of proving that any failure is due to any other cause shall rest with the Contractor.
9.22.7 All water pipework shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 p.s.i and this test pressure
maintained for 24 hours. During this test all welded joints shall be hammered.
9.22.8 All pumps shall be checked for flow rates, pressure and R.P.M. and reading furnished to the
Architect.
9.23.
Painting
9.23.1 The work to be painted shall include all equipment, piping, fittings, valves, hangers, conduits,
framework, switchboard, machinery, water tank, etc. and all work exposed to view. All paints,
enamel, etc. shall be approved brand of best quality and shall be delivered to the site in the
maker's containers with the seal, etc., unbroken and are clearly marked with the maker's
name or trademark and a description of the contents and colour.
9.23.2 The paints used in the works must be suitable for use in tropical climates, with an addition of
an anti-fungus nature.
9.23.3 All material for multiple coat work e.g. primers, undercoatings and finishing coats, shall be
obtained from the same manufacturer and shall be those recommended by the manufacturer
as suitable for application together and for the type and duty of surfaces concerned.
9.23.4 No painting on exterior work to be done during wet weather, or upon surfaces that are not
thoroughly clean and dry.
9.23.5 During the execution of Painter's work the Contractor is held responsible for taking all
precautions necessary for the health and safety of his workmen.
9.23.6 The Contractor shall provide all tarpaulings, sheets and covering to protect floors, walls, etc..
9.23.7 The paint shall be kept stirred during use and when more than one coat is specified,
subsequent coats shall not be applied until preceding coats have thoroughly hardened.
9.23.8 All works before painting shall be thoroughly cleaned down to remove all dirt, grease, scale
rust, powdery residues by wire brushing, scrapping or other means. Surface shall be washed
with solvent to remove oil/grease and with water to remove powdery residues. After any
cleaning treatment, sufficient time shall be allowed for the surface to dry.
9.23.9 All painting shall be carried out within seven (7) days of delivery and erection on site. This
requirement shall be strictly complied with.
9.23.10 Primer for metal surfaces shall be red lead or chromate metal primer or other approved
equivalent. If the primer has thoroughly dried, apply one undercoat to appropriate shade,
allow at least 24 hours drying time under normal weather conditions before application of
each subsequent finishing coat. Finishing coat shall be high gloss paint. All galvanised steel
surfaces shall be printed with zinc chromate before application of the finishing coats.
9.23.11 All exposed piping shall be painted as described under 'Metal Surface'. The colour of the
finishing coat shall be selected to match the background wall or as otherwise directed by the
Architect.
9.23.12 Where cast iron pipes run above false ceiling or buried below ground or subsoil, they shall be
applied with two coats of bituminous paint to approval.
Page 256
PARKCITY

9.23.13 The direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow stencilled in black/white paint on the pipe.
The length of the arrow shall be :
For pipes 50mm internal diameter and under the arrow shall be 75mm.
For pipes exceeding over 50mm internal diameter and over the arrow shall be 150mm.
All piplines shall be identified to BS 1710.
9.23.14 Colour scheme of all painting works shall be as directed by the Architect.
9.24.
Servicing & Maintenance
9.24.1 This section of the Specification sets out the minimum requirements for the works to be
carried out, the supply of material, tools equipment, labour, etc. for the efficient
maintenance/cleaning and servicing of the Swimming Pool and Pool Equipments Installation
during the 12 months Maintenance and Defects Liability Period.
9.24.2 All works shall be performed by workmen experienced and skilled in the service, maintenance
and repair of the swimming pool, pool equipments installation and shall be executed in
accordance with the best quality and new.
9.24.3 All materials supplied shall be of the best quality and new.
9.24.4 All service, maintenance and repair work shall be carried out by workmen in the direct
employment of the Contractor. The workmen shall be supervised by a skilled, experienced
and competent foreman.
9.24.5 The Contractor shall provide maintenance and servicing during normal working hours and 24
hours emergency breakdown service.
9.24.6 The breakdown of equipment and installation shall be deemed to have occurred when such
equipment or installation will not perform the designed function or performance.
9.24.7 No equipment, except standby equipment, shall be taken out of service for maintenance
during peak load period, unless due to breakdown or other emergency or scheduled annual
overhaul.
9.24.8 All machinery and equipment comprising the complete filtration system and ancillary
equipment under this contract shall be serviced and maintained strictly in accordance with the
servicing and maintenance schedule as set out below.
9.24.9 The Contractor shall advise the Owner of any defects in any part of the complete filtration
plant and ancillary equipment observed during the routine inspection and service, and shall
repair such defects if so required by the Employer.
9.24.10 The Contractor shall also provide emergency repair services during normal working hours and
also during overtime hours if required to do so by the Employer
Page 257
PARKCITY
10.0
Schedule of Unit Rate
10.1
Preambles

10.1.1 Introduction
This Schedule of Unit Rates is intended to be used for the pricing of variation up or down in
the quantity of works added or deleted and shall remain valid during the Contract period until
completion of the Contract. It is to be read in conjunction with the other documents forming
the contract.
The clauses in the General Preambles shall apply to all sections in the Schedule of Unit
Rates.
All rates include allowances for complying with the Preambles.
10.1.2 Measurements and Quantities
Work shall be measured net as fixed in position except where otherwise stated.
Dimensions used in calculating quantities shall be taken to the nearest 10mm this rule shall
not apply to any dimensions stated in descriptions.
Quantities measured in tonnes and quantities less than half of a unit shall be given to two
places of decimals. Other quantities shall be given to the nearest whole unit (i.e. 0.5 and over
shall be regarded as 1).
Unless otherwise stated, where minimum deductions for voids are dealt with in this document
they shall refer only to openings of which are within the boundaries of measured areas.
10.1.3 Descriptions and Rates
Page 258
PARKCITY

Dimensions stated in descriptions are generally in the sequence of length, width and height.
Headings to groups of items shall be read as part of the descriptions of the items to which the
headings apply.
The descriptions and rates in this document are applicable to work on or in a new or existing
building including working outside the building but within the cartilage of the site.
Horizontal surface and vertical surface in the item description in this document refer to sloping
surface not exceeding 15 from the horizontal and exceeding 15 from the horizontal
respectively.
Unless otherwise stated, the rates in this document are applicable to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
work to all positions;

all quantities including short lengths, narrow widths and girths; and
Regular or irregular shapes and sizes.
labour and all costs in connection therewith;
materials and goods including waste, laps, joints, and all costs in connection therewith;
supplying, transporting, delivering, unloading, storing and hoisting materials and return of
packing;
g. straight, raked or circular cutting;
h. fabricating, assembling, fitting, fixing and bedding materials and goods in position;
i. preparing surfaces to receive work;
j. protecting materials and work;
k. machinery, equipment and all costs in connection therewith;
l. cleaning up on completion and making good all work disturbed; and
m. Establishment charges, overhead charges, preliminaries and profit.
In the event that special scaffolding, machinery and equipment are required just to execute
the variation work, these shall be paid separately
10.1.4 Brand Names
Where brand names are given in the descriptions, they are solely intended for fixing the rates
of the items. The products and materials to be used in the contract shall be governed by the
specifications, drawings, and other documents forming that contract
10.1.5 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used:
M
:
linear metre
m
:
square metre
m
:
cubic metre
cm
:
square centimetre
mm
:
millimetre
mm
:
square millimetre
km
:
kilometre
kg
:
kilogram
t
:
tonne
SS
:
the latest 'Singapore Standard' for a particular item, issued
by the Singapore Institute of Standards and Industrial Research (SISIR)
BS
:
the latest 'British Standard' issued by the British Standards
Institution (BSI)
CP
:
the latest 'Code of Practice' issued by the SISIR or Council of
Codes of Practice of the BSI
Pr
:
pair
Page 259
PARKCITY

ne
:
not exceeding
No
:
number
:
The use of hyphen between two dimensions in this document
shall mean a range of dimensions exceeding the first dimensions stated but not exceeding the
second.
Unit rates in this schedule shall be subject to agreement by the engineer as to their
reasonability and shall be deemed to include delivery to site, unloading, storing, hoisting,
labour, setting, fitting and fixing in position, cutting and wastage, establishment charges and
profit.
The rates entered hereinafter shall be used for any variation either addition or deletion in the
quantities of work carried out and shall be applicable throughout the duration of the contract
and any extension of period thereof.
A.
Electrical Services
Provide the following, including all labour, materials, plants, tools, profit, testing,
commissioning, maintenance and everything else necessary for a complete working
installation in compliance to the accompanying drawings, as described in the contract
document, the requirements and regulations of the relevant Authorities and to theirs and the
Engineers full satisfaction.
The unit prices quoted below shall be used for any variation up or down in the quantity of
materials added or deleted, and shall remain valid for the whole contract period of the
practical completion of the installation.
Item
Description
Unit
Rate
Lighting Points
1.
To wire a lighting point using 1.5mm PVC cable complete

with a switch
(a)
In concealed heavy duty GI conduit
No.
VN
(b)
In surface heavy duty GI conduit
No.
VN
(c)
In concealed heavy duty PVC conduit
No.
VN
(d)
In surface heavy duty PVC conduit
No.
VN
2.
To wire a lighting point using 1.5mm PVC cable without a

switch, looped from existing point (within 10 metre from
point to point)
(a)
No.
VN
Page 260
PARKCITY

Item
Description
Unit
Rate
(b)
No.
VN
(c)
No.
VN
(d)
No.
VN
3.
To wire a lighting point using 1.5mm PVC cable complete

with 2-way switch (within 15 metre from point to point)
(a)
No.
VN
(b)
No.
VN
(c)
No.
VN
(d)
No.
VN
Company Stamp/Authorised Signature/Date _____________________________________________

Item
Description
4.
To wire an outdoor lighting point from a transition/junction

box using PVC/SWA/PVC armoured cables of the
following sizes run underground of excavation, cable
cover, markers, reinstatement, termination etc. excluding
cable transition/junction box
(a)
1 x 2.5 sq.mm/3C
No.
VN
(b)
1 x 4 sq.mm/3C
No.
VN
(c)
1 x 6 sq.mm/3C
No.
VN
(d)
1 x 10 sq.mm/3C
No.
VN
Item
Description
Unit
Unit
Rate (Radial)
Rate
Rate (Ring)
Switch Socket Outlet

Small Power Single Phase
5.
To wire a switch socket outlet point from DB

complete with 13 amp 3 pin flush switch socket
outlet plate
(a)
In concealed conduit
No.
VN
VN
(b)
In surface conduit
No.
VN
VN
Page 261
PARKCITY
Item

Description
Unit
Rate (Radial)
Rate (Ring)
(c)
Extension of power point for item 8(a)
No.
VN
VN
(c)
Extension of power point for item 8(b)
No.
VN
VN
6.
To wire a twin switch socket outlet point

complete with 13 amp 3 pin flush switch socket
outlet plate (within 25 metre basis length)
(a)
No.
VN
VN
(b)
In surface conduit
No.
VN
VN
(c)
Extension of power point for item 9(a)
No.
VN
VN
(c)
Extension of power point for item 9(b)
No.
VN
VN
7.
To wire a socket outlet point (from distribution

board) complete with 15 amp 3 pin flush switch
socket outlet plate
(a)
No.
VN
N.A.
(b)
In surface conduit
No.
VN
N.A.

Item
Description
8.
To wire a 20 Amps DP Isolator Point using 4mm

PVC cable complete with accessories (within 15
metre from point to point) in heavy duty PVC
conduit
(a)
No.
VN
N.A.
(b)
In surface conduit
No.
VN
N.A.
92.
To wire a 30 Amps DP Isolator Point using 4mm

PVC cable complete with accessories (within 15
metre from point to point) in heavy duty GI
conduit
(a)
No.
VN
N.A.
(b)
In surface conduit
No.
VN
N.A.
10.
To wire a 30 Amps Three phase Isolator Point

using 10mm PVC cable complete with
accessories (within 30 metre from point to point)
in heavy duty PVC conduit/Tray/Trunking
(a)
No.
VN
N.A.
(b)
In surface conduit
No.
VN
N.A.
Unit
Rate (Radial)
Rate (Ring)
Page 262
PARKCITY
Item
(c)

Description
Unit
In tray/trunking
Item
No.
Description
Unit
Rate (Radial)
Rate (Ring)
VN
N.A.
Rate (25kA)
Rate (36kA)
11.
Supply & install Triple pole MCCB (TPN)
(a)
30A
No.
VN
VN
(b)
60A
No.
VN
VN
(c)
80A
No.
VN
VN
(d)
100A
No.
VN
VN
(e)
125A
No.
VN
VN
(f)
150A
No.
VN
VN
(g)
200A
No.
VN
VN
12.
Supply & install Four pole MCCB
(a)
30A
No.
VN
VN
(b)
60A
No.
VN
VN
(c)
80A
No.
VN
VN
(d)
100A
No.
VN
VN
(e)
125A
No.
VN
VN
(f)
150A
No.
VN
VN
(g)
200A
No.
VN
VN

Item
Description
Unit
Rate
(SPN)
Rate
(DP)
Rate
(TPN)
13.
Supply & install MCB (10kA)
(a)
10A
No.
VN
VN
VN
(b)
15A
No.
VN
VN
VN
(c)
20A
No.
VN
VN
VN
(d)
30A
No.
VN
VN
VN
(e)
40A
No.
VN
VN
VN
(f)
60A
No.
VN
VN
VN
(g)
100A
No.
VN
VN
VN
Item
Description
Unit
Rate
(30mA)
Rate
(100mA)
Rate
(300mA)
14.
Supply & install Residual Current

Circuit Breaker (RCCB)
(a)
40A DP
No.
VN
VN
VN
(b)
60A DP
No.
VN
VN
VN
(c)
100A DP
No.
VN
VN
VN
Page 263
PARKCITY

(d)
40A 4P
No.
VN
VN
VN
(e)
60A 4P
No.
VN
VN
VN
(f)
100A 4P
No.
VN
VN
VN
Item
Description
Unit
Rate
(Indoor)
Rate
(Outdoor)
15.
Supply & install Metal Clad Isolator
(a)
15A DP
No.
VN
VN
(b)
20A DP
No.
VN
VN
(c)
30A DP
No.
VN
VN
(d)
15A TPN
No.
VN
VN
(e)
20A TPN
No.
VN
VN
(f)
30A TPN
No.
VN
VN
(g)
60A TPN
No.
VN
VN
(h)
100A TPN
No.
VN
VN
(i)
200A TPN
No.
VN
VN

Item
Description
Unit
Rate
(Indoor)
Rate
(Outdoor)
16.
Supply & install Moulded Plastic Isolator
(a)
15A DP
No.
VN
VN
(b)
20A DP
No.
VN
VN
(c)
30A DP
No.
VN
VN
(d)
15A TPN
No.
VN
VN
(e)
20A TPN
No.
VN
VN
(f)
30A TPN
No.
VN
VN
(g)
60A TPN
No.
VN
VN
(h)
100A TPN
No.
VN
VN
(i)
200A TPN
No.
VN
VN
19.
Supply & install DP isolating switch and pilot light
(a)
20A
No.
VN
VN
(b)
30A
No.
VN
VN
(c)
60A
No.
VN
VN
Item
Description
Unit
Rate
Page 264
PARKCITY

17.
Supply & install the following protection relay:
(a)
Earth Leakage Relay with ZCT
No.
VN
(b)
Earth Fault Relay c/w 300/5A CT
No.
VN
(e)
Over current Relay c/w 300/5A CT
No.
VN

Item
Description
Unit
Rate
(2x1C)
Rate
(4x1C)
Rate
(1x2C)
Rate
(1x4C)
Submains Cabling
18.
To supply and install the following

PVC copper cables with insulated
green earth cables complete with
trunking and conduit.
(a)
1.5mm
VN
VN
NA
NA
(b)
2.5mm
VN
VN
NA
NA
(c)
4mm
VN
VN
NA
NA
(d)
6mm
VN
VN
NA
NA
(e)
10mm
VN
VN
NA
NA
(f)
16mm
VN
VN
NA
NA
(g)
25mm
VN
VN
NA
NA
(h)
35mm
VN
VN
NA
NA
19.
To supply and install the following

XLPE/PVC copper cable with
insulated
green
earth
cables
complete with trunking or cable tray.
(a)
6mm
VN
VN
VN
VN
(b)
10mm
VN
VN
VN
VN
Page 265
PARKCITY

(c)
16mm
VN
VN
VN
VN
(d)
25mm
VN
VN
VN
VN
(e)
35mm
VN
VN
VN
VN
(f)
50mm
VN
VN
VN
VN
(g)
70mm
VN
VN
NA
VN
(h)
95mm
VN
VN
NA
VN
Item
20.
Description
Unit
Rate
Electrical/Telephone/Data Cable Trays

To supply and install the following size Telephone
and Data cable trays c/w supporting brackets and
all accessories:
(a)
100mm
VN
(b)
150mm
VN
(c)
200mm
VN
(d)
300mm
VN
(e)
450mm
VN
(f)
600mm
VN

Item
21.
Description
Unit
Rate
Electrical/Telephone/ Data Cable Trunking

To supply and install the following size sheet steel
trunkings c/w supporting brackets and all
accessories:
(a)
25 mm x 50 mm
VN
(b)
50 mm x 50 mm
VN
(c)
50 mm x 75 mm
VN
(d)
50 mm x 100 mm
VN
(e)
75 mm x 100 mm
VN
Item
Description
Unit
Galvanised Iron
HD uPVC
Conduits
22.
Supply and install the following surface

mounted conduits complete with conduit
boxes, cross boxes, saddles, clips, tees,
elbows, long bends, joints & accessories,
etc.
(a)
20mm diameter
VN
VN
(b)
25mm diameter
VN
VN
Page 266
PARKCITY

(c)
32mm diameter
VN
VN
(d)
38mm diameter
VN
VN
(e)
50mm diameter
VN
VN
(f)
100mm diameter
VN
VN
23.
Supply and install the following concealed

conduits complete with conduit boxes,
cross boxes, saddles, clips, tees, elbows,
long bends, joints & accessories, hacking,
chasing and making good etc.
(a)
20mm diameter
VN
VN
(b)
25mm diameter
VN
VN
(c)
32mm diameter
VN
VN
(d)
38mm diameter
VN
VN
(e)
50mm diameter
VN
VN
(f)
100mm diameter
VN
VN

Item
24.
Description
Brand & Model

Offered
Rate
Supply
Install
Miscellaneous Items
Provide unit cost for the following:
(a)
TV/FM outlet
Clipsal
VN
VN
(b)
13A Twin SSO
Clipsal
VN
VN
(c)
13A SSO Single
Clipsal
VN
VN
1 gang 1 way Switch
Clipsal
VN
VN
2 gang 1 way switch
Clipsal
VN
VN
1 gang 2 way switch
Clipsal
VN
VN
(g)
2 gang 2 way switch
Clipsal
VN
VN
(h)
Rotary dimmer
Clipsal
VN
VN
(i)
Room temperature control unit
Clipsal
VN
VN
(j)
Shaver Socket
Clipsal
VN
VN
(k)
Telephone outlet (Single Outlet)
Clipsal
VN
VN
(l)
Telephone outlet (Double outlet)
Clipsal
VN
VN
(m)
20A double pole switch c/w neon light
Clipsal
VN
VN
(n)
Blank face plate
Clipsal
VN
VN
(o)
Blind push button
Clipsal
VN
VN
(d)
(e)
(f)
Page 267
PARKCITY

(p)
13A fused connection unit
Clipsal
VN
VN
(q)
15A SSO
Clipsal
VN
VN
(r)
15A SSO Weather/Water Proof
Clipsal
VN
VN
(s)
13A SSO Weather/Water Proof
Clipsal
VN
VN
(t)
15A DP Isolator (IP56 Hoseproof)
Clipsal
VN
VN
(u)
Clipsal
VN
VN
(v)
Clipsal
VN
VN
(w)
20A TPN Isolator (IP56 Hoseproof)
Clipsal
VN
VN
(x)
Clipsal
VN
VN
(y)
Clipsal
VN
VN
(z)
Clipsal
VN
VN
(aa)
5A fused connection unit floor

mounted
Clipsal
VN
VN

Item
Description
Unit
Rate
Supply
25.
Install
Various system cabling c/w conduit or

trunking
(a)
Cat 5E cables
(b)
20 Pairs Underground Telephone

Armoured cables
(c)
10 Pairs Underground Telephone

Armoured cables
(d)
RG 11 cables
(e)
VN
VN
VN
VN
VN
VN
VN
VN
RG 6 cables
VN
VN
(f)
18AWG cables
VN
VN
(g)
RS485
VN
VN
Page 268
PARKCITY

Page 269
PARKCITY
B.

ACMV Services
commissioning, and maintenance necessary for a complete working installation in compliance
to the accompanying drawings, as described in the sub contract document, the requirements
and regulations of the relevant Authorities and to the Engineers full satisfaction.
materials added or deleted, and shall remain valid for the whole sub contract period of the
1.0
PIPING (INSTALLED AMOUNT PER METER IN DOLLAR)
1.1
UPVC Pipe
Pipework installed above ground per metre including bracket, fittings, bends, elbows,
etc.
Size (mm)
Rates
Without Insulation
1.2
With Insulation
a.
20
VN
VN
25
VN
VN
32
VN
VN
40
VN
VN
50
VN
VN
65
VN
VN
75
VN
VN
100
VN
VN
150
VN
VN
Copper Pipe
Pipework installed above ground per metre including bracket, fittings, bends, elbows,
etc.
Size (mm)
Rates
Without Insulation
With Insulation
a.
20
VN
VN
25
VN
VN
32
VN
VN
40
VN
VN
50
VN
VN
65
VN
VN
75
VN
VN
100
VN
VN
150
VN
VN
Page 270
PARKCITY
1.3

Refrigerant Pipe (R410A)

Supply all materials, labour, transport and install new pipework including insulations,
brackets, fittings, bends, elbows, etc.
Item
Description
Unit
Rate
a.
Up to 6mm
VN
Up to 13mm
VN
Up to 20mm
VN
Up to 25mm
VN
Up to 32mm
VN
Up to 40mm
VN
Up to 50mm
VN
2.0
Ductwork
2.1
Round Duct (installed cost per m) complete with support, brackets, fitting,
bends, elbows, etc.
Item
2.2
Round Duct
(mm diameter)
External
Insulated
Plain
a.
Up to 150
VN
VN
Up to 200
VN
VN
Up to 250
VN
VN
Up to 300
VN
VN
Rectangular Duct (installed cost per m) complete with support, brackets,

fitting, bends, elbows, etc.
Item
Longest
Side (mm)
a.
Up thru 300
301 - 450
451 - 700
701 - 1050
1051 - 1350
1351 - 1500
1501 - 1800
1801 - 2000
Plain
(VN)
Acoustic
Insulated
(VN)
Internal
Insulated
(VN)
External
Insulated
(VN)
Page 271
PARKCITY
2.3

Flexible Duct/Metre Run (complete with insulation) complete with support,

brackets, fitting, bends, elbows, etc.
Item
Description
Unit Rates
a.
150 mm dia
VN
200 mm dia.
VN
250 mm dia.
VN
300 mm dia.
VN
350 mm dia.
VN
3.0
Diffusers/Grilles/Dampers
3.1
Supply Air Diffusers of (600 x 600 face size) Extruded Aluminium and
Coated with Oven Baked Enamel Paint c/w Volume Damper for the
following neck size.
Item
3.2
Description
a.
350 x 350
VN
400 x 400
VN
450 x 450
VN
500 x 500
VN
Sidewalk/Exhaust Air Register c/w Volume Damper of Extruded

Aluminium and Coated with Oven Baked Enamel Paint
Item
3.3
Unit Rates
Description
Unit Rates
a.
300 x 200
VN
450 x 300
VN
500 x 200
VN
500 x 350
VN
600 x 400
VN
600 x 450
VN
700 x 350
VN
800 x 400
VN
Ceiling Exhaust and Return Air Grille c/w Volume Damper of Extruded
Aluminium and Coated with Oven Baked Enamel Paint
Item
Description
Unit Rates
a.
300 x 300
VN
450 x 450
VN
600 x 600
VN
1200 x 600
VN
Page 272
PARKCITY
3.4

Linear Slot Diffuser per metre run c/w insulated air plenum box, bends,
butterfly volume damper, elbow, etc.
Item
3.5
Description
50mm width 2-slot
VN
75mm width 3-slot
VN
100mm width 4-slot
VN
125mm width 5-slot
VN
150mm width 6-slot
VN
Linear bar type diffuser per metre run c/w insulated air plenum box,
bends, butterfly volume damper, elbow, etc.
Item
3.6
Unit Rates
Description
Unit Rates
50 mm width
VN
75 mm width
VN
100mm width
VN
125mm width
VN
150mm width
VN
200mm width
VN
300mm width
VN
Any other diffuser / grilles e.g. light troffer diffuser c/w air plenum
Item
Description
Unit Rates
800x150mm width air grille c/w insulated

plenum box
plenum box
plenum box
plenum box
VN
1200x100mm width air grille c/w blackout plate
VN
VN
VN
1
2
3
4
VN
VN
Page 273
PARKCITY
4.0

Fire Damper (inclusive of Access Panel)

Unit Rate (VN)
Item
5.0
6.0
Damper Size
2 Hrs Vertical
4 Hrs Vertical
150 x 150
VN
VN
200 x 150
VN
VN
250 x 150
VN
VN
300 x 300
VN
VN
350 x 350
VN
VN
400 x 200
VN
VN
400 x 400
VN
VN
450 x 300
VN
VN
500 x 300
VN
VN
10
500 x 350
VN
VN
11
500 x 400
VN
VN
Supply and Installation of the complete VRV System including all necessary
accessories
Item
Description
Unit Rates
Wall Mounted type of 2.8 kW cooling
VN
VN
VN
VN
Ducted type of 2.8 kW cooling
VN
VN
VN
VN
VN
10
Ducted type of 11.2kW cooling
VN
Supply and Installation of a complete Acoustic insulation for the following

equipment
Item
Description
Unit Rates
Ducted type FCU (7.1 kW cooling)
VN
VN
VN
VN
Page 274
PARKCITY
C.

Sanitary and Plumbing Installation

Underground Services, Sanitary, Water and Gas
1.0
SANITARY
1.1
Pipework
Pipework installed per metre including brackets, fittings, bends, elbow, tees, concrete
haunching, bedding, etc. (Excavation works and trenches to be measured separately).
Nominal
Diameter
(mm)
Main Drainline
Branch Drainline
Heavy Duty UPVC or Vitrified clay

pipe to BS 65/BS 540
Ductile Iron Pipe to BS EN 598

Class K9 cement lined
Heavy ductile iron pipe to

BS EN 598 or HDPE for sewage
Heavy Duty UPVC to

SS 272
75
100
150
200
225
250
75
100
150
200
225
250
Page 275
PARKCITY
1.2

Excavation Works
Excavation works including back-fill and carting away surplus soil per
metre run for underground pipes. (Pipeworks to be measured separately).
(a)
Not deeper than 600mm
per m run
VN___________
(b)
Deeper than 600mm less than

1000mm
per m run
VN___________
(c)
Deeper than 1000mm less

than 1250mm
per m run
VN___________
(d)

than 1500mm
per m run
VN___________
(e)

than 1800mm
per m run
VN___________
(f)

than 2000mm
per m run
VN___________
(g)

than 2500mm
per m run
VN___________
(h)

than 3000mm
per m run
VN___________
(i)

than 3500mm
per m run
VN___________
(j)

than 4000mm
per m run
VN___________
(k)

than 4500mm
per m run
VN___________
(l)

than 5000mm
per m run
VN___________
(m)

than 5500mm
per m run
VN___________
(n)

than 6000mm
per m run
VN___________
Page 276
PARKCITY

1.3
Inspection Chamber, Sump Cover and Frame
(a)
Inspection chamber complete with step irons to ENV (MINISTRY OF

ENVIRONMENT) requirement.
Depth to Invert
(b)
Up to 1.0m deep
VN_____________
Up to 1.5m deep
VN_____________
Up to 2.0m deep
VN_____________
Up to 2.5m deep
VN_____________
Sump of internal dimensions 900mm x 700mm complete with step

irons as required.
Depth to Invert
(c)
(d)
Up to 1.0m deep
VN_____________
Up to 1.5m deep
VN_____________
Up to 2.0m deep
VN_____________
Up to 2.5m deep
VN_____________
More than 2.5m deep
VN_____________
Inspection chamber cover and frame

(i)
Light duty
VN_____________
(ii)
Medium duty
VN_____________
(iii)
Heavy duty
VN_____________
(iv)
RC Slab cover
VN_____________
Sump cover and frame

(i)
Light duty
VN_____________
(ii)
Medium duty
VN_____________
(iii)
Heavy duty
VN_____________
(iv)
RC Slab cover
VN_____________
(v)
Chequered plate
VN_____________
Page 277
PARKCITY
(e)

Inspection chamber constructed in precast

concrete sections of 1050mm diameter for depth
invert of more than 2.5m but not exceeding 6.0m.
Depth to Invert
1.4
Up to 3.5m deep
VN_____________
Up to 4.5m deep
VN_____________
Up to 5.5m deep
VN_____________
Up to 6.0m deep
VN_____________
Sanitary Fittings
Sanitary fittings installed per No. including concrete surround etc.
Cast iron Floor trap complete with grating
VN_____________
UPVC floor trap complete with UPVC grating
VN_____________
Gully trap complete with C.I. grating
VN_____________
Gully trap with aluminium strain bucket

(ENV/SEW/76/113)
VN_____________
Garage gully to ENV/SEW/76/83
VN_____________
Floor drain / Floor waste with grating
VN_____________
Urinal trap
VN_____________
WATER
2.1
Underground main water supply pipe installed per metre including brackets,
fittings, bends, elbow, tees, concrete haunching, bedding, etc. (Excavation works
and trenches to be measured separately).
2.1.1
Pipework
Average Depth
(m)
Cement Lined
Ductile Iron Pipe
150mm dia
(VN)
Cement Lined
Ductile Iron Pipe
100mm dia
(VN)
HDPE pipe
HDPE pipe
150mm dia
(VN)
100mm dia
(VN)
Up to 1.0m deep
Up to 1.5m deep
Up to 2.0m deep

Page 278
PARKCITY
Average Depth
(m)

Cement Lined
Ductile Iron Pipe
150mm dia
(VN)
Cement Lined
Ductile Iron Pipe
100mm dia
(VN)
HDPE pipe
HDPE pipe
150mm dia
(VN)
100mm dia
(VN)
Up to 2.5m deep
Up to 3.0m deep
Up to 3.5m deep
Up to 4.0m deep
2.1.2
PPR pipe complying with DIN 8077 : 2007, DIN 8078 : 2008 including compression
joints to DIN 16962, in short length bent as required, ne 1000mm long
Description
Unit
15mm diameter
20mm diameter
25mm diameter
32mm diameter
40mm diameter
50mm diameter
65mm diameter
75mm diameter
Rates (VN)
BAKAU PILE (SUPPLY AND INSTALLATION) FOR UNDERGROUND

SERVICES
(a)
Mobilisation of pile driver
VN_____________
(b)
per metre of 80mm diameter pile
VN_____________
(c)
VN_____________
(d)
VN_____________
Page 279
PARKCITY

Fire Protection Services

S/N
Description
Unit
Rate (VN)
Pipe work and fittings

1.
Pipework installed per metre including brackets, fittings,

bends, elbows, paintwork, etc.
a.
Ductile iron cement lined pipe to BS EN 545 Class K9 Nominal

Diameter (mm)
65
80
100/108
150/159
200
Galvanised steel pipe to BS 1387 (heavy grade) Nominal Diameter

(mm)
20
25
30
40
50
65
80
100/108
150/159
200
Company Stamp/Authorised Signature/Date _______________________________________________
Page 280
PARKCITY
S/N
c

Description
Unit
Rate (VN)
Galvanised steel pipe to BS 1387 (medium grade) Nominal

Diameter (mm)
20
25
30
40
50
65
80
100/108
150/159
200
Galvanised steel pipe to BS 3600/3601 (heavy grade) Nominal

Diameter (mm)
25
30
40
50
65
80
100/108
150/159
2.
Valves up to working pressure of 2500 kPa (including

associated accessories) supply and install, per piece.
Bronze gate valve Nominal Diameter (mm)

20
No
25
No
30
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
Page 281
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
Unit
100
No
150
No
200
No
Rate (VN)
Cast iron gate valve Nominal Diameter (mm)

20
No
25
No
30
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
200
No
Butterfly valve Nominal Diameter (mm)

20
No
25
No
30
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
Bronze check valve Nominal Diameter (mm)

20
No
25
No
30
No
40
No
50
No

Page 282
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
Unit
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
200
No
Rate (VN)
Cast iron check valve Nominal Diameter (mm)

20
No
25
No
30
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
200
No
Expansion joint Nominal Diameter (mm)

20
No
25
No
30
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
200
No
Valves up to working pressure of 1600 kPa (including

associated accessories) supply and install, per piece.
Strainer Nominal Diameter (mm)

20
No
25
No
30
No
40
No

Page 283
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
Unit
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
Rate (VN)
Solenoid control valve Nominal Diameter (mm)

20
No
25
No
30
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
200
No
Subsidiary stop valve (monitored butterfly valve) Nominal Diameter

(mm)
20
No
25
No
30
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
200
No
Pressure reducing valve Nominal Diameter (mm)

20
No
25
No
30
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
Page 284
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
Unit
100
No
150
No
200
No
Rate (VN)
Flexible connector Nominal Diameter (mm)

20
No
25
No
30
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
200
No
Sprinkler installation Control Valve set including alarm valve,

main stop valve, alarm gong, water proving test, drain valve,
gauges, switches, trimmings, etc.
dia 150mm
No
dia 100mm
No
dia 80mm
No
Pre-Action Installation Control Valve including alarm, main

stop valve, alarm gong, water proving test, drain valve,
gauges, switches, trimmings c/w air compressor, panels, all
accessories, etc.
dia 150mm
No
dia 100mm
No
dia 80mm
No
Breeching Inlet with cabinet.

2 way
No
4 way
No
Breeching Inlet without cabinet.

2 way
No
4 way
No
Dry/Wet Riser Landing Valve

Dry Riser Landing Valve (flanged type) c/w strapped and padlock
No
Dry Riser Landing Valve (screwed type) c/w strapped and padlock
No
Wet Riser Pressure Valve (screwed type) c/w strapped
No

Page 285
PARKCITY
S/N
7

Description
Unit
Hosereel
Hosereel set (including rubber hose, nozzle, gate valve, etc.)
without cabinet.
Hosereel set (including rubber hose, nozzle, gate valve, etc.) with
weatherproof cabinet for outdoor use.
Hosreel set (including rubber hose, nozzle, gate valve, etc.) with
cabinet.
Sprinkler head including Dia 25mm/32mm/40mm pipework and
fittings, sprinkler guard, etc.
No
No
No
Chrome plated (conventional type)
No
Semi-recessed type
No
Fully concealed/recessed type (Flush type)
No
Side wall type
No
Wax/coated sprinkler
No
Extended throw side wall sprinkler
No
Relocation of sprinkler head including Pipework and Fittings.
10
Miscellaneous items
No
Pressure sensor
No
Pressure gauge
No
Auto air relief valve
No
Ball float valve
No
65mm dia
No
80mm dia
No
100mm dia
No
150mm dia
No
200mm dia
No
Rate (VN)
Level switch (probe type)

2 probes
No
4 probes
No
Water level indicator c/w stop cock
No
Flow switch
No
Direct read flow meter
No
Strapped and padlock (Master key lock type)
No
Foam Inlet
No
Foam Outlet
No
Page 286
PARKCITY
S/N
l

Description
Unit
Foot valve strainer
No
dia 200mm
No
dia 150mm
No
dia 65mm
No
Vortex Inhibitor
No
dia 200mm
No
dia 150mm
No
dia 65mm
No
Pressed steel water tank per panel c/w all necessary accessories
1000mm x 1000mm
No
1500mm x 1500mm
No
500mm x 1000mm
No
Sprinkler head
No
Chrome plated (conventional type)
No
Semi-recessed type
No
Fully concealed/recessed type (Flush type)
No
Conventional type for kitchen (79 C)
No
Dry pendent sprinkler for cold room/Pre-Action Sprinkler System
No
Sidewall sprinkler
No
Extended throw side wall sprinkler
No
Protective guard
No
2-hour fire rating enclosure for pipe
11
Rate (VN)
50mm Dia/65mm Dia (per metre run)
80mm Dia (per metre run)
Each
Each
Portable Fire Extinguisher c/w brackets (per piece)

1kg ABC powder type
Each
2.5kg ABC powder type
Each
4kg ABC powder type
Each
6kg ABC powder type
Each
9kg ABC powder type
Each
1kg BC powder type
Each
9kg BC powder type
Each

Page 287
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
Unit
2.2kg Carbon dioxide type
Each
4.5kg Carbon dioxide type
Each
9 liters water type
Each
9 liters water type
Each
Rate (VN)
Fire Detection and Alarm System (Analog Addressable type)

1
The following items shall include supply and install all

necessary conduit cable and accessories including testing
and commissioning, etc.:
Smoke Detector
Each
Ionization type
Each
Optical type
Each
Heat Detector
Each
Rate (US$) of Rise
Each
Fixed Temperature
Each
Optical/Heat Detector
Each
Break Glass Unit
Each
Break Glass Unit (Weatherproof type)
Each
Alarm Bell
Each
Alarm Bell (250mm dia weatherproof type)
Each
Floor mimic board (including LED indication etc.)
Each
Colour Zone Chart (perspex)
Each
Interface Unit
Each
Siren or Yodalarm
Each
Addressable Line Isolator
Each
Remote Indicator Light
Each
Micro-processor based standalone SAP (including standby battery,

strip printer & LCD display etc.)
2 loops
Each
4 loops
Each
8 loops
Each
Per Loop Module c/w all necessary accessories
Each
Page 288
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
Unit
Supply and install Electrical PVC cables complete with

supporting (conduits, trunking, etc.) accessories per metre
run.
Fire Resistant - Size (Nos. x mm )
2 x 1.5
2 x 2.5
2 x 4.0
4 x 4.0
4 x 6.0
2 x 10.0
4 x 10.0
2 x 16.0
4 x 16.0
2 x 25.0
4 x 25.0
4 x 35.0
b
m
2
PVC Single Core - Size (Nos. x mm )

2 x 1.5
2 x 2.5
2 x 4.0
4 x 4.0
4 x 6.0
2 x 10.0
4 x 10.0
2 x 16.0
4 x 16.0
2 x 25.0
4 x 25.0
4 x 35.0
c
Rate (VN)
m
2
PVC/PVC Single Core - Size (Nos. x mm )

2 x 1.5
2 x 2.5
2 x 4.0
4 x 4.0
4 x 6.0

Page 289
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
Unit
2 x 10.0
4 x 10.0
2 x 16.0
4 x 16.0
2 x 25.0
4 x 25.0
4 x 35.0
Rate (VN)
Supply and install electrical conduit and trunking (without

cable) c/w all boxes, brackets, brass bushes, saddles,
adaptors and other accessories per metre run.
Conduit
Galvanised-rigid (Heavy Duty) - Diameter (mm)

20
25
32
38
Galvanised-rigid (Heavy Duty) - Diameter (mm)

20
25
32
38
Trunking-Metal
a
Galvanised-Rigid - Size (mm x mm)

25 x 50
50 x 50
75 x 50
75 x 75
100 x 50
100 x 75
100 x 100
150 x 75
150 x 100
150 x 150
200 x 100
Page 290
PARKCITY

Plumbing, Sanitary and Swimming Pool

S/N
Description
(I)
DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
1.
Pipework installed per metre including brackets, fittings,

bends, elbow, paintwork, etc.
a.
Copper Pipe to BS EN 1057 Light Gauge - Nominal Diameter (mm)

-( ) denotes copper pipe size
b.
c.
Unit
15
20 (22)
25 (28)
32 (35)
40 (42)
50 (54)
65 (67)
Copper Pipe to BS EN 1057 Light Gauge c/w PVC coating
15
20 (22)
25 (28)
32 (35)
40 (42)
50 (54)
Rate (VN)
Copper Pipe to BS EN 1057 Heavy Gauge - Nominal Diameter

(mm)
15
20 (22)
25 (28)
Company Stamp/Authorised Signature/Date ____________________________________________
Page 291
PARKCITY
S/N
d.
e.
f.
g.

Description
Unit
32 (35)
40 (42)
50 (54)
65 (67)
Rate (VN)
Copper Pipe to BS EN 1057 Light Gauge c/w air gap insulation Nominal Diameter (mm)
15
20 (22)
25 (28)
uPVC to SS141 - Nominal Diameter (mm)

15
20
25
32
40
50
80
100

150
200
250
300
Ductile Iron Cement Lined to BS EN 545 Class K9 - Nominal

Diameter (mm)
80
100
150
200
250
300
Page 292
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
Unit
Rate (VN)
Underground water, hydrant, pipe installed per metre run

including fittings, excavation, backfilling, re-instatement of
ground surfaces, etc.
Copper Pipe to BS EN 1507 Heavy Gauge - Nominal Diameter
(mm)
b.
c.
20 (22)
25 (28)
32 (35)
40 (42)
50 (54)
65 (67)
Ductile Iron Cement-Lined Pipe up to 2.0 m Deep

80
100
150
200
250
Ductile Iron Cement-Lined Pipe exceeding 2.0 m Deep

80
100
150
200
250
Valves (including associated accessories), per piece.
a.
Gate Valve - Nominal Diameter (mm)

15
No
20
No
25
No
32
No
40
No
50
No
65
No

Page 293
PARKCITY
S/N
a.
b.
c.
d.

Description
Unit
80
No
100
No
Rate (VN)
Gate Valve - Nominal Diameter (mm)

150
No
200
No
250
No
Check Valve - Nominal Diameter (mm)

15
No
20
No
25
No
32
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
200
No
250
No
Y-Pattern Strainer - Nominal Diameter (mm)

15
No
20
No
25
No
32
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
Solenoid Valve - Nominal Diameter (mm)

15
No
20
No
25
No
Page 294
PARKCITY
S/N
e.
f.
g.

Description
Unit
32
No
40
No
50
No
Rate (VN)
Butterfly Valve - Nominal Diameter (mm)

50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
200
No
250
No
Globe Valve - Nominal Diameter (mm)

15
No
20
No
25
No
32
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
150
No
200
No
250
No
Pressure Reducing Valve - Nominal Diameter (mm)

15
No
20
No
25
No
32
No
40
No
50
No
65
No
80
No
100
No
Page 295
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
150
4.
Unit
Rate (VN)
No
Electric storage hot water heater (3kW) c/w valves, fittings,

overflow pipe, pressure relief valve, electrical work, bracket
support and accessories (S$ per no.).
Supply - Capacity (litres)
15
Each
25
Each
50
Each
70
Each
100
Each
Installation - Capacity (litres)

15
Each
25
Each
35/38
Each
50/56
Each
68/70
Each
100/108
Each
5.
Miscellaneous Items (per no.).
a.
Auto air relief valve
Each
b.
Constant flow regulator
Each
c.
Chrome plated tap/Hose bib
Each
d.
Instantaneous electric water heater c/w valves, fittings, electrical

work and bracket support etc.
(i)
Supply
Each
(ii)
Installation
Each
e.
Double pillar hydrant c/w sluice valve, etc.
Each
f.
Hosereel c/w accessories
Each
g.
Hosereel c/w accessories and enclosure
Each
(II)
SANITARY SYSTEM
1.
Pipeworks installed per metre including brackets, fittings,

bends, elbows, paintwork, etc.
a.

32
40
Page 296
PARKCITY
S/N
b.
c.

Description
50
80
100
150
Rate (VN)
Cast Iron Hubless Pipe and Fittings to BS 6087 or CISPI - Nominal

Diameter (mm)
50
75
100
150
200
Ductile Iron Cement Lined to BS EN 598 Class K9 - Nominal

Diameter (mm)
80
100
150
200
250
300
Underground sanitary drainline (ductile iron cement linedpipe) installed per metre run including fittings, excavation,
haunching, bedding and backfilling, re-instatement of ground
surfaces, etc.
a.
80mm Diameter - Average Depth (m)
b.
Unit
Up to 1.5m Deep
Up to 2.5m Deep
Up to 3.5m Deep
Up to 4.5m Deep
Up to 5.5m Deep
Up to 6.5m Deep

Up to 1.5m Deep
Up to 2.5m Deep
Up to 3.5m Deep
Up to 4.5m Deep
Page 297
PARKCITY
S/N
c.
d.
e.

Description
Unit
Up to 5.5m Deep
Up to 6.5m Deep
Rate (VN)

Up to 1.5m Deep
Up to 2.5m Deep
Up to 3.5m Deep
Up to 4.5m Deep
Up to 5.5m Deep
Up to 6.5m Deep

Up to 1.5m Deep
Up to 2.5m Deep
Up to 3.5m Deep
Up to 4.5m Deep
Up to 5.5m Deep
Up to 6.5m Deep

Up to 1.5m Deep
Up to 2.5m Deep
Up to 3.5m Deep
Up to 4.5m Deep
Up to 5.5m Deep
Up to 6.5m Deep
Sewer connection pipe (vitrified clay) installed per metre run

including excavation, haunching, bedding, backfilling, bakau
piling, re-instatement of ground surfaces, etc.
a.

Up to 1.5m Deep
Up to 2.5m Deep
Up to 3.5 m Deep
Up to 4.5m Deep
Up to 5.5m Deep
Up to 5.5m Deep
Up to 6.5m Deep
Page 298
PARKCITY
S/N
b.

Description
Up to 1.5m Deep
Up to 2.5m Deep
Up to 3.5 m Deep
Up to 4.5m Deep
Up to 5.5m Deep
Up to 6.5m Deep
a.
Inspection Chamber (900 x 700) - Depth to Invert (m)
c.
d.
f.
Rate (VN)
Inspection chamber complete with frame and cover, concrete

benching, channels, including excavation, backfilling, reinstatement of ground surface etc.
(S$ per no.).
b.
Unit
Up to 2.0m Deep
Each
Up to 2.5m Deep
Each
Inspection Chamber c/w Tumbling Bay (900 x 700) - Depth to Invert

(m)
Up to 1.0m Deep
Each
Up to 1.5m Deep
Each
Up to 2.0m Deep
Each
Up to 2.5m Deep
Each
Inspection Chamber c/w Backdrop (900 x 700) - Depth to Invert (m)

Up to 2.0m Deep
Each
Up to 2.5m Deep
Each
Inspection Chamber (Non-Standard Size) - Depth to Invert (m)

Up to 1.0m Deep
Each
Up to 1.5m Deep
Each
Up to 2.0m Deep
Each
Up to 2.5m Deep
Each
Inspection Chamber c/w Backdrop (Non-Standard Size) - Depth to

Invert (m)
Up to 2.0m Deep
Each
Up to 2.5m Deep
Each
Page 299
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
Inspection chamber (standard manhole) internal diameter of

1050mm precast chamber ring type c/w frame and covers,
concrete benchings, channels, including excavation,
backfilling, reinstatement of ground surface, etc. (S$ per no.).
a.
Inspection Chamber - Depth to Invert (m)
b.
Up to 3.5m Deep
Each
Up to 4.5m Deep
Each
Up to 5.5m Deep
Each
Up to 6.5m Deep
Each
Up to 3.5m Deep
Each
Up to 4.5m Deep
Each
Up to 5.5m Deep
Each
Up to 6.5m Deep
Each
a.
Concrete Waste Sump (900 x 700) - Depth to Invert (m)
c.
Rate (VN)
Inspection Chamber c/w Backdrop - Depth to Invert (m)
Concrete sump complete with frame and cover, concrete

benching, channels including excavation, backfilling, reinstatement of ground surface or with the following
accessories (S$ per no.).
b.
Unit
Up to 1.0m Deep
Each
Up to 1.5m Deep
Each
Up to 2.0m Deep
Each
Up to 2.5m Deep
Each
Concrete Waste Sump (600 x 600) - Depth to Invert (m)

Up to 1.0m Deep
Each
Up to 1.5m Deep
Each
Up to 2.0m Deep
Each
Up to 2.5m Deep
Each
Concrete Sump c/w Cast Iron Gully Trap /Petrol Interceptor - Depth
to Invert (m)
Up to 1.0m Deep
Each
Up to 1.5m Deep
Each
Up to 2.0m Deep
Each
Up to 2.5m Deep
Each
Cast Iron / Sump frame and Cover (S$ per no.).
Page 300
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
Heavy duty cast iron frame & cover
Each
Medium duty cast iron frame & cover
Each
Cast iron recessed type frame & cover
Each
8A.
Conventional Grease trap including screen chamber and

frames & covers complete with excavation, concrete surround,
bedding, backfilling, re-instatement of ground surfaces, etc.
(S$ per no.).
i.
1m dia - Depth to Invert (m)
ii.
Unit
Up to 1.5m Deep
Each
Up to 2.0m Deep
Each
Up to 2.5m Deep
Each
2m dia - Depth to Invert (m)

Up to 1.5m Deep
Each
Up to 2.0m Deep
Each
Up to 2.5m Deep
Each
8B.
Portable Eco-grease Interceptor
Sanitary Fittings - Supply and Install (S$ per no.).
a.
Heavy duty C.I. grating
Each
b.
Stainless steel grating
Each
d.
Stainless steel (un-perfoRate (US$)d) cover
Each
e.
Floor drain c/w s/s grating
Each
f.
Urinal trap c/w stainless steel cover
Each
g.
Floor trap c/w anti-mosquito device and s/s grating
Each
10.
Installation of sanitary/plumbing fixtures appliances including

associated accessories pan collars & connections etc. (S$ per
no.)
a.
Manual Flush Valve
b.
Rate (VN)
Pedestal water closet c/w flush valve
Each
Bowl urinal c/w flush valve
Each
Oriental / (Squatting) water closet c/w flush valve
Each
Auto Sensor Flush Valve

Pedestal water closet c/w auto sensing flush valve
Each
Bowl urinal c/w auto sensing flush valve
Each
Oriental / (Squatting) water closet c/w

auto sensing flush valve
Each
Page 301
PARKCITY
S/N
c.
d.

Description
Rate (VN)
Flushing Cistern
Pedestal water closet c/w flush cistern
Each
Oriental water closet c/w flush cistern
Each
Accessories
Basin / Sink c/w auto sensing
Each
Basin / Service Sink / Mop Sink
Each
Shower head and mixer
Each
Mini ball valve with spring loaded nozzle
Each
Tap
Each
Long bath
Each
11.
Insulation to pipework (S$ per metre).
a.
Waste Pipe - Nominal Diameter (mm)
12.
Unit
80
100
150
200
Bakau Piling (80mm diameter) including BS mesh, concrete

base and approved sand etc (per meter run of pipe)
Depth of bakau pile
13.
2m Deep
3m Deep
4m Deep
5m Deep
6m Deep
Bakau Piling (80mm diameter) including BS mesh, concrete

and sand base etc for inspection chamber and sump (per No.)
Depth of bakau pile
2m Deep
3m Deep
4m Deep
5m Deep
6m Deep
Page 302
PARKCITY
S/N

Description
Unit
14
Stainless steel tray for soil / waste pipe (S$ per metre).
a.
0.3m width
b.
0.6m width
c.
1.0m width
15.
Concrete benching with main / branch channels for inspections

chamber / sump (S$ per no.).
No.
16.
Silt Sump (1800 x 700) complete with excavation, bedding,

backfilling and re-instatement of ground surface (S$ per no.).
No.
17.
Grease Oil Interceptor (S$ per no.).
No.
18.
Valves (including associated accessories), per piece.
Rate (VN)
Cast Iron Gate Valve - Nominal Diameter (mm)

80
No.
100
No.
150
No.
200
No.
250
No.
Cast Iron Flap Valve - Nominal Diameter (mm)

80
No.
100
No.
150
No.
200
No.
250
No.
Page 303
PARKCITY

Above Ground Services

1
SANITARY
1.1
Pipework
Unit
A
Description
Rates S(VN)
Unit
UPVC Pipes
Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride soil, waste,
ventilating and anti- syphonage pipe
complying with SS 213 including solvent
cement joints, bracket, fittings, bends,
elbows, etc.
32mm diameter
40mm diameter
50mm diameter
80mm diameter
100mm diameter
150mm diameter
100mm diameter vent cowl
No
150mm diameter vent cowl
No
WATER
2.1
Pipework
Unit
a
Description
Unit
Rates S(VN)
Ductile Iron Pipes

Cement lined ductile iron pipe to BS EN 545
including spigot and socket joints, bracket,
fittings, bends, elbows, etc.
80mm diameter
100mm diameter
150mm diameter
PPR pipe complying with PPR pipe complying

with DIN 8077 : 2007, DIN 8078 : 2008
including compression joints to DIN 16962in
short length bents as required.
15mm diameter
20mm diameter
25mm diameter
32mm diameter

Page 304
PARKCITY
Unit

Description
Unit
40mm diameter
50mm diameter
65mm diameter
75mm diameter
Rates S(VN)
UPVC Pipes
Unplasticised
polyvinyl
chloride
pipe
complying with SS 141 including solvent
cement joints, bracket, fittings, bends, elbows,
etc.
32mm diameter
40mm diameter
50mm diameter
80mm diameter
100mm diameter
150mm diameter
Page 305
PARKCITY

Appliance/ Fitting
1
SANITARY
Unit
a
Description
Unit
Rates S(VN)
Taps
Chromium plated tap
Pillar tap
No
Lever type pillar tap
No
Wall mounted bib tap
No
Wall mounted tap with goose-neck swivel

spout
No
Self-closing delayed action tap
No
Bibcocks/Stopcocks
Brass screwdown bibcock or stopcock
complying with SS 75 including crutch handle
and accessories
15mm diameter
No
20mm diameter
No
25mm diameter
No
32mm diameter
No
40mm diameter
No
50mm diameter
No
65mm diameter
No
Gate Valves
Brass gate valve complying with BS 5154
including wheel handle
65mm diameter
No
80mm diameter
No
Sluice Valves
Cast iron sluice valve complying with BS 5163
80mm diameter
No
100mm diameter
No
150mm diameter
No
Balloon Gratings
Galvanised iron wire balloon grating fixed on
top of any pipe including painting
100mm diameter
No
150mm diameter
No
Company Stamp and Authorised Signature ______________________________________________
Page 306
PARKCITY

Unit
Description
Installation only of water closet complying with

SS 205 with P or S trap and all necessary
fittings
Unit
Pedestal wash down closed coupled type

complete with cistern, floor mounted
No
Pedestal siphonic closed coupled type complete

with cistern, floor mounted
No
Rates
S(VN)
Installation only of white vitreous china water

closet, wall mounted, complying with SS 205 with
P or S trap and all necessary fittings (flush
valve measured separately)
Pedestal wash down flush valve type
No
Pedestal siphonic flush valve type
No
Squatting wash down flush valve type
No
Installation only of urinal complete with wall

flange, hanger and bolts
Size 330 x 290 x 525mm high including screen
No
Size 320 x 340 x 540mm high
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Installation only of lavatory basin complete with

hanger, chromium plated waste fittings, bottle
trap, plug and chain etc.
Over-counter type, size 540 x 490mm wide
No
Over counter type, size 560 x 405mm wide
No
Wall hung shell type, size 560 x 460mm wide
No
Wall hung shell type, size 590 x 475mm wide
No
Wall hung shell slab, size 500 x 400mm wide
No
Wall hung shell slab, size 510 x 415mm wide
No
Page 307
PARKCITY
Unit
j

Description
Rates
S(VN)
Installation only of:

Shower
No
Hansgrohe 350mm dia Raindance Royale Air

overhead Shower
No
Dorn Bracht Rainshower

Bath/Long bath
Bidet
Towel ring
Towel rail
Soap holder
Toilet roll holder
k
Unit
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Installation only of service sink complete with

hanger, chromium plated waste fittings, bottle
trap, plug and chain
Size 750 x 460 x 165mm deep
No
No
No
No
No
No
0.7mm thick 22 SWG Diethelm stainless steel

sink and drainer complying with SS 40 including
38mm diameter waste fittings, bottle trap, plug
and chain
single bowl, single drainer, overall size 900 x 500

x 165mm deep (lay-on-type)
No
double bowl, double drainer, overall size 1800 x

500 x 165mm (lay-on-type)
No
Cast Iron Floor Traps

Coated cast iron P, S or Q floor trap with
75mm idameter outgo, 150mm diameter raising
piece and PVC hinged grating and frame, inlet,
outlet and jointed in caulked lead.
setting trap in suspended floor including all
necessary formwork
No
setting trap in floor and packing around with

concrete (grade 15) including all necessary
excavation, disposal and formwork
No
Page 308
PARKCITY
Unit
m

Description
Unit
Rates
S(VN)
UPVC Floor Traps

UPVC floor trap and hopper with 75mm or
100mm outgo and 150 x 150 x 2mm thick
stainless steel (SS 213) hinged grating
setting trap in suspended floor including all
necessary formwork
No
setting trap in floor and packing around with

concrete (grade 15) including all necessary
excavation, disposal and formwork.
No
Constant flow regulators (8l/min)
No
Constant flow regulators (12l/min)
No
Horizontal mount Electric hot water storage

heater (3 kW)
76/80 litres storage capacities
No
No
No
No
No
Vertical mount Electric hot water storage heater

(3 kW)
q
Anti-vacuum valve set for Electric hot water

storage tank
No
No
No
No
No
Per set.
Company Stamp/Authorised Signature
________________________________
Name & Designation
________________________________
Date
Page 309
PARKCITY

11.0
Schedules of Technical Data
11.1
Electrical Servies
Tenderers shall complete all the Schedule of Technical Data carefully and accurately on each
item of material offered. Catalogues and technical literature shall also be submitted together
with any illustrations of drawings necessary to fully describe the offer.
The approval or otherwise of the technical data given shall in no way be deemed to relieve
the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.
Specified Or
Approved Equivalent
Protection Relays & Meters
(a)
Over-current:
Make
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Type
Model No.
Earth Fault:
Make
Type
Model No.
Current Transformer:
For protection Relay:
Relay VA
Class and Accuracy
Model
Earth Leakage
Make
Type
Model No.
Ammeter:
Make
Type/Model
With maximum
Demand Indicator
Size/Deflection
Country of
Manufacture
Voltmeter:
Make
Offered
Schneider/Siemens/
Mitsubishi
Schneider/
Mitsubishi
DTL
Siemens/
EMIC
(Vietnam)/
Munhean (Singapore)
5P10
Schneider/
Mitsubishi
Siemens/
EMIC
(Vietnam)/
Munhean (Singapore
(f)
EMIC
(Vietnam)/
Munhean (Singapore
Type/Model
Size/Deflection
Country of
Manufacture

Page 310
PARKCITY

Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
(g)
MCB/ELCBs/RCCBs
Make
Type/Model
Country of
Manufacture
Standard Conformed
Siemens,
Schneider, ABB,
Mitsubishi
Malaysia,
Germany, Korea,
PRC
Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
Electrical Accessories
(a)
Lighting Switch
Make
(b)
13A/15A Switch Socket Outlet

Make
(c)
Type/Model
Material
Country of
Manufacture
Isolator
Make
Type/Model
Material
Country of
Manufacture
Telephone Outlet/Data Outlet

Make
(d)
Type/Model
Material
Country of
Manufacture
Type/Model
Country of
Manufacture
Offered
Offered
Siemens, Hager
,Clipsal,
Gira,
LeGrand
Malaysia,
Germany, Korea,
PRC
Siemens, Hager,
Clipsal,
Gira,
LeGrand
Malaysia,
Germany, Korea,
PRC
Siemens, Hager,
Clipsal,
Gira,
LeGrand
Malaysia,
Germany, Korea,
PRC
Siemens, Hager,
Clipsal,
Gira,
LeGrand
IP 56
Malaysia,
Germany, Korea,
Page 311
PARKCITY

PRC
(e)
Indicating Lamp
Make
Type/Model
Country of
Manufacture
Schneider
Vietnam,
Malaysia
Company Stamp/Authorised Signature/Date _______________________________________

Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
(f)
G.I. Conduit and Box
Make
Type/Model
Material
Country of
Manufacture
Standard Conformed
Conduit (PVC)/ Flexible pipe Thang
Long
Make
Type/Model
Country of
Manufacture
Cable Tray
Make
-
(g)
(h)
(i)
Type/Thickness
Material
Country of
Manufacture
Cable Ladder
(j)
Make
Type/Thickness
Material
Country of
Manufacture
Trunking
Panasonic/
Van Loi
Offered
Cat
Vietnam/
Thailand
Sino, Clipsal
Vietnam,
Malaysia
Sunlights,
SangTao,Cat
Van Loi
Vietnam
Sunlights,
SangTao,Cat
Van Loi
Vietnam
Sunlights,
SangTao,Cat
Van Loi
Make
Type/Thickness
Material
Page 312
PARKCITY
(k)

Country of
Manufacture
600V/1000V Cables
-
Vietnam
LS-Vina,
Taisin
Taya,
PVC
PVC/PVC
PVC/SWA/PVC
XLPE
FR Cable

Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
(l)
Cables
Make
(m)
Type/Model
Impedance
Country of
Manufacture
Timers
Make
-
Type/Model
Country of
Manufacture
LS-Vina,
Taisin
Offered
Taya,
Vietnam, Taiwan
Siemens,
Johnson
Thailand,
Vietnam
Page 313
PARKCITY

Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
Switchboards & Sub-switchboards
(a)
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Local Agent
Model /Type No.
Testing Authority/Certificate
Degree of Protection
Standard
(b)
Dimensions of Consumer Switch

Board
MCCBs
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Local Agent
Model /Type No.
Short Time Current rating
-
Offered
Sunlights,
SangTao, 3C
Related IEC, EN
AS, BS
Sunlights,
SangTao, 3C
Siemens,
Schneider, ABB,
Mitsubishi
refer to
drawings
tender
1 Sec
3 Secs
Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
Lightning Protection system
(a)
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Local Agent
Model /Type No.
Standard
Offered
Cat Van Loi
Refer
tender
drawings
and
USA, Japan, AS
standard
Page 314
PARKCITY

Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
HV panel
(a)
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Local Agent
Model /Type No.
Standard
Siemens,
Schneider, ABB
IEC60694,62271200,62271100,62271102,60071 -2
Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
HV Terminal Kit
(a)
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Local Agent
Model /Type No.
Standard
Offered
ABB, Thibidi, VN
TCVN
6306:
2006, IEC 600761:2002
Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
CCTV System
(a)
Manufacturer
Offered
3M, Elastimold
Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
Oil Transformer
(a)
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Local Agent
Model /Type No.
Standard
Offered
Offered
Bosch,
Honey
well, Panasonic
Country of Origin
Local Agent
Model /Type No.
Standard
Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
Wireless door contact
(a)
Manufacturer
Offered
Honeywell
Page 315
PARKCITY

Country of Origin
Local Agent
Model /Type No.
Standard

Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
Lan cable, Tel cable, CCTV Cable, TV Cable
(a)
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Local Agent
Model /Type No.
Standard
Belden,
Krone
Draka,
IEC, EN, BS
Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
Lighting fixture
(a)
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Local Agent
Model /Type No.
Standard
Manufacturer
Country of Origin
Local Agent
Model /Type No.
Standard
Offered
Philip, Thorn, OS
Ram
TCVN
71141:2006, SS263
Specified Or
Approved
Equivalent
Door bell
(a)
Offered
Offered
Legrand, Clipsal
IEC, EN, BS

Page 316
PARKCITY
11.2

Air-conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation Services

Tenderers shall complete all the Schedule of Technical Data as accurate as possible on each
item of material offered. Catalogues and technical literature shall be submitted together with
any illustrations of drawings necessary to fully describe the offer.
The approval or otherwise of the technical data given shall in no way be deemed to relieve
the Sub Contractor of any of his obligations under the Sub Contract.
Country of
origin
manufacturer
Description
Offered
Brand/Model
VRV System
Daikin or Approved
equivalent
Thailand
Wall Mounted FCUs
Daikin or Approved
equivalent
Thailand
Dehumidifier
Munters or Approved
equivalent
USA
Acoustic Insulation
(to specifiy type of proposed material,
thickness)
Sheet Metal Ductwork
Phuong Nam
Refrigerant Pipe
Superlon
Malaysia
Insulation
Armaflex
or
Approved equivalent
PRC
Thermostat
Same branch
air-con branch.
Exhaust Fan
Wington/
Panasonic
Condensate Drain Pipe
Tien Phong, De Nhat
Return Egg create grille
Trox, Reetech
Malaysia, Vietnam
Linear Bar Grille
Trox, Reetech
Malaysia, Vietnam
with
Kruger/
PRC
Page 317
PARKCITY


11.3
Sanitary, Plumbing
DESCRIPTIONS
1
1.1
SPECIFIED
OFFERED
PIPES AND FITTINGS

Hot and Cold Water System
Duty
Cement
a. Heavy
Mortar-line Ductile Iron
Pipe (Underground Water
Pipe)
Standard Conformed
BS EN 545 k9
Fittings/Joints
Flanged
joints
to
BS4505 or mechanical
coupling
Brand
Kurimoto, Kubota or
approved equivalent
Material
Ductile Iron
Mortar-lined
Country of Manufacturer
Japan, UK
Cement
PPR Pipe (Above ground

cold
and
hot
water
distribution pipe)
b.
Standard Conformed
DIN 8077 : 2007

DIN 8078 : 2008
Fittings/Joints
fittings to DIN 16962,

DIN 16928
Brand
Tin Phong, George

Fisher, Sino or
approved equivalent
Material
PPR
Thailand, Vietnam
Page 318
PARKCITY

DESCRIPTIONS
c.
SPECIFIED
OFFERED
PPR Pipe (Underground

hot and cold water
distribution pipe)
Standard Conformed
DIN 8077 : 2007

DIN 8078 : 2008
Fittings/Joints
fittings to DIN 16962, DIN

16928
Brand
Tin Phong, George

Fisher, Sino or approved
equivalent
1.2
Material
PPR
Thailand, Vietnam
Sanitary Drainage and Vent

a.
b.
Ductile Iron Pipe

(Underground Sanitary Soil
Waste Pipe)
Standard Conformed
BS EN 598 k9
Fittings/Joints
BS EN 598 k12, k14
Brand
Kubota,
Kurimoto
approved equivalent
Material
Ductile Iron
Japan, UK
or
UPVC Pipe
(Above ground sanitary soil
waste and vent pipe)
Standard Conformed
SS 213
Fittings/Joints
SS 213
Brand
Tien Phong, De Nhat, SP

or approved equivalent
Material
UPVC
Vietnam
Page 319
PARKCITY

DESCRIPTIONS
c.
SPECIFIED
OFFERED
UPVC Pipe (Underground

sanitary soil waste pipe)
Standard Conformed
SS 272
Fittings/Joints
SS 272
Brand
Tien Phong, De Nhat,

SP,
Hongplast
or
approved equivalent
Material
UPVC
Singapore, Viet Nam
d.
Vitrified Clay Pipe (last
inspection chamber to manhole
sewer connection)
2.
2.1
Standard Conformed
BS 295 or SS 270
Fittings/Joints
Spigot and socket joint

with rubber ring
Brand
Vitclay,
Naylor
or
approved equivalent
Material
Vitrified Clay
Vietnam,Singapore,
Australia
FLOOR TRAP, GULLY TRAP,

FLOOR WASTE
Gully Trap
Brand
2.2
Grating and Cover
Snow,
Apple
or
approved equivalent
Stainless Steel (Square)
Material
Stainless Steel
Singapore
Floor Trap
Brand
Grating and Cover
Snow, Apple, Spind or

approved equivalent
Stainless Steel (Square)
Material
Stainless Steel
Singapore, Malaysia
Page 320
PARKCITY

DESCRIPTIONS
2.3
Brand
3
3.1
3.2
SPECIFIED
OFFERED
Floor Waste
Grating and Cover
Snow, Apple or approved

equivalent
Circular
Material
Stainless Steel
Singapore
VALVES
Gate Valve (below 80mm )
Standard Conformed
BS5154
Brand
KITZ, P, PEGLER
approved equivalent
Grating and Cover
Similar to Fig. E&H (Kitz),

Art 175 NDA, Art 175B, Art
175BS, 175GLB (P) or
1070/125,
DR63
(PEGLER)
Material
Brass
US, Japan, Thailand
or
Gate Valve (80mm & above)

Standard Conformed
BS5154
Type/model
Similar to Fig 125 FCWI

(Kitz) or 415A (Toyo)
Material
Cast Iron
US, Japan, Thailand
Page 321
PARKCITY

DESCRIPTIONS
3.3
3.4
BS 5153
Brand
P, Socla
equivalent
Type/model
Material
Similar to Fig 188 (Type

402 (Socla)
DZR Brass
US, Japan
approved
Showa, Socla or approved

equal
Similar to Fig 10 (Showa),
Type 402 (Socla)
Material
Cast Iron
Stop Clock
APZ, Armitage, Shanks or

approved equivalent
SS 75:
PT 2/BS 1010:PT2, BS
3457
Standard Conform
3.7
or
Check Valve (80mm and above)
Type/Model
3.6
OFFERED
Standard Conformed
Brand
3.5
SPECIFIED
Check Valve (below 80mm)
Type/Model
Similar to
727/TF/SIN(APZ), Midget
528/6, 528/5 (APZ)
Material
DZR Brass

Brand
Flow-Save,
Unitrol
approved equivalent
or
Type/Model
In-line type similar to

FS12,8 (Flow-Save) 600
FC-600518 (Unitrol)
Material
Gumetal or DZT Brass
Floating Valve
Brand
Watts
Type/Model
Material
Page 322
PARKCITY

DESCRIPTIONS
4
ELECTRICAL STORAGE
WATER HEATER
4.1
Horizontal mount Electric hot

water storage heater (3 kW)
SPECIFIED
OFFERED
100 litres storage capacities

Manufacturer/Model
Ariston or approved
Country or Origin
Italy
equivalent
Type (Vertical/Horizontal)
Water Tank Material
Heating Element capacity (kw)
Size of Water Heater

(L x B x H) (mm)
WATER TANK
5.1
FRP water tank

Manufacturer/Brand
H2L or approved
equivalent
Country of Origin
Malaysia
Type
Total Weight of tank filled
w
a
t
e
r
(
k
g
)
Size of supporting steel beams
Physical size (L x W x H)
-1000 litres (TH house type)
-1500 litres (SD house type)
Page 323
PARKCITY


DESCRIPTIONS
6
6.1
SPECIFIED
OFFERED
DOMESTIC WATER PUMP

Domestic water Transfer Pump
Manufacturer/Model
Grunfos or approved
equivalent
Country of Origin
Type
Vertical
1. Transfer pump: 20 m3/h,

H=35 m located at carpark
2. Booster pump: 6.6 m3/h,
H=15m located at rooftop tank
floor of Gym
floor of Indoor pool
floor of Multipurpose hall
floor of Multipurpose hall
Size of Impeller (mm)
Pump Efficiency (%)
Material Construction:Casing
Stainless steel 304
Impeller
Stainless steel 304
Shaft
Stainless steel 316
Base
Stainless steel 304
Size of Suction (mm)

Size of Discharge (mm)
Pump Weight (kg)
Motor Power (kW)
Electrical Supply(V/f/HZ)
Starting/Full Load Current (A)
Speed (rpm)
Page 324
PARKCITY

IP rating for motor
Company Stamp/Authorised Signature/Date ___________________________________________

DESCRIPTIONS
Capacity (m3/h)
Total Head (m)
SPECIFIED
OFFERED
As indicated above
As indicated above
Size of Impeller (mm)

Pump Efficiency (%)
Material Construction:Casing
Stainless steel 304
Impeller
Stainless steel 304
Shaft
Stainless steel 316
Base
Stainless steel 304
Size of Suction (mm)

Size of Discharge (mm)
Pump Weight (kg)
Motor Power (kW)
Electrical Supply(V/f/HZ)
Starting/Full Load Current (A)
Speed (rpm)
IP rating for motor
7
PRESSURE VESSEL
Manufacturer/Brand
Country of Origin
Included with booster

pump package
DAB
Italy
Type
Model
Effective Volume (l)
Overall Volume (l)
Overall Size
Material Construction :-
Page 325
PARKCITY


DESCRIPTIONS
SPECIFIED
OFFERED
Shell
Diaphragm
Coating
Weight of Empty Tank (kg)
Weight of Tank With Water (kg)

Page 326
PARKCITY
11.4

Fire Protection
Tenderers shall complete all the Schedule of Technical Data as accurate as possible on each
item of material offered. Catalogues and technical literature shall be submitted together with
any illustrations of drawings necessary to fully describe the offer.
The approval or otherwise of the technical data given shall in no way be deemed to relieve the
Contractor of any of his obligations under the Sub Contract.
Item
Description
Automatic Sprinkler & hose reel

System
Main Fire Pump
Peerless/Armstrong/ITT
Pump Control Panel
SMB/Sunlight/Interpower
Sprinkler Control Valve
TYCO/Central/Viking
Deluge Control Valve
TYCO/Central/Viking
Flow Switch
TYCO/Central/Viking
Sprinkler Head
TYCO/Central/Viking
Breeching Inlet
FALCON/AE/Combat
Galvanized Pipe & Fittings
Bon/Maruichi
Black Steel Pipe & Fittings
Benkan/SSH
Approved Mechanical Coupling

2
Specified (or Approved

Equivalent)
Offered
Victaulic/Gruvlok
Automatic Addressable Fire

Alarm & Detection System
Main Fire Alarm Panel
NOTIFIER/Grinnel/Ziton
Sub-Alarm Panel
Smoke Detector
Heat Detector
Manual Call Point and Bell
Galvanised Iron Conduit
Aurora/Smatr
Galvanised Iron junction box
Aurora/Smatr
Steel Trunking
U-Li/Lipko
Company Stamp/Authorised Signature/Date __________________________________________
Page 327
PARKCITY
Item
3

Description
Specified (or Approved

Equivalent)
Offered
Firemen Intercom System

Master Console
Remote Hand Set
EVC/GameWell/Vanguard
s
EVC/GameWell/Vanguard
s
Fire Resistant Cable
Keystone/Tai Sin
Fire Extinguishers
FALCON/AE/Combat
Hydrant Pillar
FALCON/AE/Combat
Hydrant pipes & fittings
Kubota/Kurimoto/Stanton

Page 328
PARKCITY
11.5

Plumbing, Sanitary & Swimming Pool

Particulars given in this Schedule will be binding upon the Contractor, and may not be varied
except on the written instruction of the Architect. The approval or otherwise of these particulars
given shall in no way be deemed to relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the
Contract.
The words 'As Specified" or "To Suit" of "Equal and Approved" will not be accepted as a
sufficient description of any item.
11.5.1 PLUMBING INSTALLATION
Item
1
Description
Offered
Cold & Hot Water System

Domestic
Pump
water
boost/transfer
Pump Control Panel

Pressure Vessel
Pressure Reducing Valve
Pressure Gauge
Solenoid Valve
2
Specified (or
Approved
Equivalent)
Grundfos /DP
Grundfos /DP
Amtrol/Well Mate
AD Desbordes/ Watts
Birch (Switzerland)
Toyo/ Tozen
Pipe & Fittings *

Cement Lined Ductile Iron Pipe &
Fittings
Copper Pipe
PPR pipe
Kubota/Kurimoto/Stant
on
Crane/Kembla
Kelen
Globe Valve
Toyo/ Tozen
Stop Valve
Toyo/ Tozen
Check Valve
Toyo/ Tozen
Stop Valve
Toyo/ Tozen
Float Operated Valve

Water level sensor (floatless)
KKK
Omron
Electric Storage heater
Joven/Rheem
Thermal Insulation
CSR/Armflex
Yokota/Hermetic/Neop
erl
Company Stamp/Authorised Signature/Date _________________________________________
Page 329
PARKCITY
Item
11.5.2.

Specified (or
Approved
Equivalent)
Description
SANITARY INSTALLATION
Ejector Pump and S/S Tank
Grundfos
Sump pump
Grundfos
Grease Treatment Plant
Pipe & Fittings *
Thermaco/Kessel/Lipat
or
Cement Lined Ductile Iron Pipe &

Fittings
uPVC Pipe & Fittings (SS 213)
11.5.3.
Offered
Hubless Cast-iron Pipes &

Fittings
Inspection
Chamber
Cover
(Heavy Duty)
Inspection
Chamber
Cover
(Medium Duty)
ST/Electrosteel
Vicplas/BBB
ST/ABB/Norika
Norika/ST
Norika/ST
SWIMMING POOL INSTALLATION
Swimming Pool Pump
DE filter
Underwater light
Swimming pool pipes & fitting
Inlet & drain-off grating
Heat pump
Grundfos
American Titan
Hayward
Vicplas/Hongplas
Hayward
PAS/ Pentair
_______________________________
________________________________
Name & Designation
________________________________
Date
Page 330
PARKCITY
12.0

Schedule of Sub-Contractor
The tenderer shall submit the particulars of their direct sub-contractors as follows:
Ref.
Services
Electrical
2.
ACMV
3.
Plumbing, Sanitary
Sub-Contractor/Licensed Plumber
_______________________________
________________________________
Name & Designation
________________________________
Date
Page 331
PARKCITY

Page 332

Specification For Park City-clubhouse-Rev 0

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Specification For Park City-clubhouse-Rev 0

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PROPOSED PARKCITY HANOI CLUBHOUSE AT LE TRONG TAN

STREET, HANOI, VIETNAM

Mechanical & Electrical Installation

THAM & WONG M&E (VIETNAM) CO., LTD

Fax: +84 43755 8903

Clubhouse Facilities ParkCity at Le Trong Tan Ha Noi, Viet Nam

PROJECT TEAM ......................................................................................................................... 3

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 4

SCOPE OF WORK ....................................................................................................................22

ELECTRICAL SERVICES .........................................................................................................29

AIR-CONDITIONING & MECHANICAL VENTILATION SERVICES .....................................142

PLUMBING & SANITARY.......................................................................................................191

FIRE PROTECTION SERVICES .............................................................................................212

SWIMMING POOL SERVICES ...............................................................................................242

SCHEDULE OF UNIT RATE ...................................................................................................258

SCHEDULES OF TECHNICAL DATA....................................................................................310

SCHEDULE OF SUB-CONTRACTOR ...................................................................................331

Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)

Clubhouse Facilities ParkCity at Le Trong Tan Ha Noi, Viet Nam

Vietnam International Township Development

Archicentre (Vietnam) Co.,Ltd.

Structural & Civil engineer

Tham & Wong VN Co.,Ltd.

M&E Consulting Engineer

Tham & Wong M&E (Vietnam) Co.,Ltd.

Site Concepts International (Vietnam) Company Limited

Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)

Clubhouse Facilities ParkCity at Le Trong Tan Ha Noi, Viet Nam

Site of the Contract Works

Singapore Code of Practices;

Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)

Clubhouse Facilities ParkCity at Le Trong Tan Ha Noi, Viet Nam

Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)

Clubhouse Facilities ParkCity at Le Trong Tan Ha Noi, Viet Nam

Co-ordination Between Trades

Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)

Clubhouse Facilities ParkCity at Le Trong Tan Ha Noi, Viet Nam

Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)

Clubhouse Facilities ParkCity at Le Trong Tan Ha Noi, Viet Nam

Sizes of Plant and Equipment

Makes and Types of Equipment

Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)

Clubhouse Facilities ParkCity at Le Trong Tan Ha Noi, Viet Nam

Builders Work Drawings

Maintenance and Operation Manual

Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)

Clubhouse Facilities ParkCity at Le Trong Tan Ha Noi, Viet Nam

The manuals shall contain and be set out as follows :

System Summary & General Description & Operating Instruction

Maintenance Schedules & Maintenance Instructions

Guarantee, Liabilities, Warranties

Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)

Clubhouse Facilities ParkCity at Le Trong Tan Ha Noi, Viet Nam

As-built drawings may be folded and accommodated in the Operating and

As-built drawings should include a diagrammatic layout of the complete installation

The as-built drawings shall comprise the following:A)

Air-Conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation Installation

Technical data/equipment schedule and brand of all A/C equipment and MV

Sanitary and Drainage Installation

Tham & Wong M&E (Viet Nam)

connection and gradient, all invert & top levels

Water Supply Installation